10/20/14

GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM

LOGIQ E9
SERVICE MANUAL

Part Number: 5535208-100

Revision: Rev. 2
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

Important conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5

Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15

Label locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20

Dangerous procedure warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24

Customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 26

1
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 2
Site preparations
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1

General console requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1

Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7

2 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 3
LOGIQ E9 Setup
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

Setup reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

Packing materials - recycling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12

Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13

Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32

Connectivity overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37

Connectivity Setup and Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38

Setup paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 79

3
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 4
Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1

General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2

Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31

Application Turnover Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47

Power supply test and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47

3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48

SWAVE (Shear Wave “Shear Elasto“) Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48

Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49

4 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

LOGIQ E9 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3

Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16

Main Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21

Air Flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22

Casters and Brakes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22

Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23

Power Loss description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33

Cables for LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33

Probes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33

Product manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34

5
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 6
Service Adjustments
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1

LCD Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1

DC Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 8

Operator Panel movement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 9

Direction Lock and Brake adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 16

Adjust time-out for DICOM servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 16

6 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

Service Safety Considerations. ..................................... 7-1

Gathering Troubleshooting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18

Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19

7
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 8
Replacement procedures
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1

Warnings and important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 2

Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 6

Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 7

Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 29

Replacing Top Console Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 87

Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 175

Casters and Brakes replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 192

BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 198

Main Power Supply parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 244

Peripherals replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 269

V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement . . . . . .8 - 298

8 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 9
Renewal Parts
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1

Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1

List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2

Parts list groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3

LOGIQ E9 Models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5

Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9

Top Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17

XYZ Mechanism parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38

Main Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 42

Casters (Wheels) parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 46

Card Rack parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 48

Back End Processor (BEP) parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 64

Main Power Supply parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 72

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 76

Mains Power Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 82

Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 84

Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 102

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 106

Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment . . . . . . 9 - 111

Hardware Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 112

9
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 10
Care & Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 1

Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 2

Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 2

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 3

Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 9

Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 9

When There’s Too Much Leakage Current.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 27

10 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Important Precautions

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
WARNING • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
(EN) MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

• SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
AVERTISSEMENT • NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
(FR)
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
WARNUNG • VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
(DE) KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

11
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

• SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
AVISO • NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
(ES) CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM

INGLÊS.
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
ATENÇÃO
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
(PT-Br) • NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA ESTÁ DISPONÍVEL APENAS EM INGLÊS.

• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
AVISO
• NÃO TENTE EFECTUAR REPARAÇÕES NO EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER
(PT-pt) CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO PREVIAMENTE ESTE MANUAL.
• A INOBSERVÂNCIA DESTE AVISO PODE RESULTAR EM FERIMENTOS NO
TÉCNICO DE ASSISTÊNCIA, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE EM CONSEQUÊNCIA
DE CHOQUE ELÉCTRICO, PERIGOS DE ORIGEM MECÂNICA, BEM COMO DE
OUTROS TIPOS.

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
AVVERTENZA • SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
(IT) AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
• NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

12 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

• KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
HOIATUS • ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA
(ET)
TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.
• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE
VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.

TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

• JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN
ENGLANNINKIELISTÄ MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KÄÄNNÖKSEN
HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.
VAROITUS • ÄLÄ YRITÄ KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT
(FI)
JA YMMÄRTÄNYT TÄMÄN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.
• MIKÄLI TÄTÄ VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA
PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON KÄYTTÄJÄN TAI POTILAAN
VAHINGOITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN
VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.

ȉȅ Ȇǹȇȅȃ ǼīȋǼǿȇǿǻǿȅ ȈǼȇǺǿȈ ǻǿǹȉǿĬǼȉǹǿ Ȉȉǹ ǹīīȁǿȀǹ Ȃȅȃȅ.

• Ǽǹȃ ȉȅ ǹȉȅȂȅ ȆǹȇȅȋǾȈ ȈǼȇǺǿȈ ǼȃȅȈ ȆǼȁǹȉǾ ǹȆǹǿȉǼǿ ȉȅ Ȇǹȇȅȃ
ǼīȋǼǿȇǿǻǿȅ ȈǼ īȁȍȈȈǹ ǼȀȉȅȈ ȉȍȃ ǹīīȁǿȀȍȃ, ǹȆȅȉǼȁǼǿ ǼȊĬȊȃǾ ȉȅȊ
ȆǼȁǹȉǾ ȃǹ ȆǹȇǼȋǼǿ ȊȆǾȇǼȈǿǼȈ ȂǼȉǹĭȇǹȈǾȈ.
ȆȇȅǼǿǻȅȆȅǿǾȈǾ • ȂǾȃ ǼȆǿȋǼǿȇǾȈǼȉǼ ȉǾȃ ǼȀȉǼȁǼȈǾ ǼȇīǹȈǿȍȃ ȈǼȇǺǿȈ Ȉȉȅȃ ǼȄȅȆȁǿȈȂȅ
(EL) ǼȀȉȅȈ Ǽǹȃ ǼȋǼȉǼ ȈȊȂǺȅȊȁǼȊȉǼǿ Ȁǹǿ ǼȋǼȉǼ ȀǹȉǹȃȅǾȈǼǿ ȉȅ Ȇǹȇȅȃ
ǼīȋǼǿȇǿǻǿȅ ȈǼȇǺǿȈ.
• Ǽǹȃ ǻǼ ȁǹǺǼȉǼ ȊȆȅȌǾ ȉǾȃ ȆȇȅǼǿǻȅȆȅǿǾȈǾ ǹȊȉǾ, ǼȃǻǼȋǼȉǹǿ ȃǹ
ȆȇȅȀȁǾĬǼǿ ȉȇǹȊȂǹȉǿȈȂȅȈ Ȉȉȅ ǹȉȅȂȅ ȆǹȇȅȋǾȈ ȈǼȇǺǿȈ, Ȉȉȅ ȋǼǿȇǿȈȉǾ dz
Ȉȉȅȃ ǹȈĬǼȃǾ ǹȆȅ ǾȁǼȀȉȇȅȆȁǾȄǿǹ, ȂǾȋǹȃǿȀȅȊȈ dz ǹȁȁȅȊȈ ȀǿȃǻȊȃȅȊȈ.

EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHETė EL.

• HA A VEVė SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉRė NYELVRE TART IGÉNYT,
AKKOR A VEVė FELELėSSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS ELKÉSZÍTTETÉSE.
• NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍG A
FIGYELMEZTETÉS
(HU)
KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍRTAKAT NEM ÉRTELMEZTÉK.
• EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A SZOLGÁLTATÓ,
MĥKÖDTETė VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB
VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT EREDMÉNYEZHETI.

13
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.

• EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN
ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU.
VIÐVÖRUN • REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG
(IS) SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK.
• EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM
ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS,
VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU.

TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.

• V PěÍPADċ, ŽE POSKYTOVATEL SLUŽEB ZÁKAZNÍKģM POTěEBUJE NÁVOD
V JINÉM JAZYCE, JE ZAJIŠTċNÍ PěEKLADU DO ODPOVÍDAJÍCÍHO JAZYKA
ÚKOLEM ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NEPROVÁDċJTE ÚDRŽBU TOHOTO ZAěÍZENÍ, ANIŽ BYSTE SI PěEýETLI
VÝSTRAHA TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.
(CS)
• V PěÍPADċ NEDODRŽOVÁNÍ TÉTO VÝSTRAHY MģŽE DOJÍT ÚRAZU
ELEKTRICKÁM PROUDEM PRACOVNÍKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUŽEB,
OBSLUŽNÉHO PERSONÁLU NEBO PACIENTģ VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP
PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKÉHO POŠKOZENÍ NEBO
JINÉMU RIZIKU.

DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.

• HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.
ADVARSEL • FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
(DA) DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET.
• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE
PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR
TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.

DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.

• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE
KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
• PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
WAARSCHUWING
ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
(NL)
• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.

14 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

ŠƮ APKALPES ROKASGRƖMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGƹU VALODƖ.

• JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZƜJAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORMƖCIJA CITƖ
VALODƖ, NEVIS ANGƹU, KLIENTA PIENƖKUMS IR NODROŠINƖT TULKOŠANU.
BRƮDINƖJUMS • NEVEICIET APRƮKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRƖMATAS
(LV) IZLASƮŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS.
• ŠƮ BRƮDINƖJUMA NEIEVƜROŠANA VAR RADƮT ELEKTRISKƖS STRƖVAS
TRIECIENA, MEHƖNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISƮTU TRAUMU APKALPES
SNIEDZƜJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.

ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA IŠLEISTAS TIK ANGLǏ KALBA.

• JEI KLIENTO PASLAUGǏ TEIKƠJUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA – NE ANGLǏ,
VERTIMU PASIRNjPINTI TURI KLIENTAS.
ƲSPƠJIMAS • NEMƠGINKITE ATLIKTI ƲRANGOS TECHNINƠS PRIEŽINjROS DARBǏ, NEBENT
(LT) VADOVAUTUMƠTƠS ŠIUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR JƲ SUPRASTUMƠTE
• NEPAISANT ŠIO PERSPƠJIMO, PASLAUGǏ TEIKƠJAS, OPERATORIUS AR
PACIENTAS GALI BNjTI SUŽEISTAS DƠL ELEKTROS SMNjGIO, MECHANINIǏ AR
KITǏ PAVOJǏ.

DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.

• HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
ADVARSEL • IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
(NO) SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.
• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.

NINIEJSZY PODRĉCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĉPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JĉZYKU

ANGIELSKIM.
• JEĝLI FIRMA ĝWIADCZĄCA KLIENTOWI USáUGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA
UDOSTĉPNIENIA PODRĉCZNIKA W JĉZYKU INNYM NIĩ ANGIELSKI,
OBOWIĄZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO TáUMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA
KLIENCIE.
OSTRZEĩENIE
• NIE PRÓBOWAû SERWISOWAû NINIEJSZEGO SPRZĉTU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO
(PL)
ZAPOZNANIA SIĉ Z PODRĉCZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM.
• NIEZASTOSOWANIE SIĉ DO TEGO OSTRZEĩENIA MOĪE GROZIû
OBRAĩENIAMI CIAáA SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU
PORAĩENIA PRĄDEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU
ZAGROĩEē.

15
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZĂ.

• DACĂ UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENğI NECESITĂ O ALTĂ LIMBĂ
DECÂT CEA ENGLEZĂ, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI SĂ FURNIZEZE O
TRADUCERE.
ATENğIE • NU ÎNCERCAğI SĂ REPARAğI ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT ULTERIOR
(RO)
CONSULTĂRII ùI ÎNğELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE.
• IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA RĂNIREA
DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA
PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALTĂ NATURĂ.

ȾȺɇɇɈȿ ɊɍɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɈ ɉɈ ɈȻɋɅɍɀɂȼȺɇɂɘ ɉɊȿȾɈɋɌȺȼɅəȿɌɋə ɌɈɅɖɄɈ

ɇȺ ȺɇȽɅɂɃɋɄɈɆ əɁɕɄȿ.
• ȿɋɅɂ ɋȿɊȼɂɋɇɈɆɍ ɉȿɊɋɈɇȺɅɍ ɄɅɂȿɇɌȺ ɇȿɈȻɏɈȾɂɆɈ ɊɍɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɈ
ɇȿ ɇȺ ȺɇȽɅɂɃɋɄɈɆ əɁɕɄȿ, ɄɅɂȿɇɌɍ ɋɅȿȾɍȿɌ ɋȺɆɈɋɌɈəɌȿɅɖɇɈ
ɈȻȿɋɉȿɑɂɌɖ ɉȿɊȿȼɈȾ.
ɈɋɌɈɊɈɀɇɈ! • ɉȿɊȿȾ ɈȻɋɅɍɀɂȼȺɇɂȿɆ ɈȻɈɊɍȾɈȼȺɇɂə ɈȻəɁȺɌȿɅɖɇɈ ɈȻɊȺɌɂɌȿɋɖ
(RU)
Ʉ ȾȺɇɇɈɆɍ ɊɍɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɍ ɂ ɉɈɃɆɂɌȿ ɂɁɅɈɀȿɇɇɕȿ ȼ ɇȿɆ ɋȼȿȾȿɇɂə.
• ɇȿɋɈȻɅɘȾȿɇɂȿ ɍɄȺɁȺɇɇɕɏ ɌɊȿȻɈȼȺɇɂɃ ɆɈɀȿɌ ɉɊɂȼȿɋɌɂ Ʉ ɌɈɆɍ,
ɑɌɈ ɋɉȿɐɂȺɅɂɋɌ ɉɈ ɌȿɏɈȻɋɅɍɀɂȼȺɇɂɘ, ɈɉȿɊȺɌɈɊ ɂɅɂ ɉȺɐɂȿɇɌ
ɉɈɅɍɑȺɌ ɍȾȺɊ ɁɅȿɄɌɊɂɑȿɋɄɂɆ ɌɈɄɈɆ, ɆȿɏȺɇɂɑȿɋɄɍɘ ɌɊȺȼɆɍ ɂɅɂ
ȾɊɍȽɈȿ ɉɈȼɊȿɀȾȿɇɂȿ.

ɌɈȼȺ ɋȿɊȼɂɁɇɈ ɊɔɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɈ ȿ ɇȺɅɂɑɇɈ ɋȺɆɈ ɇȺ ȺɇȽɅɂɃɋɄɂ ȿɁɂɄ.

• ȺɄɈ ȾɈɋɌȺȼɑɂɄɔɌ ɇȺ ɋȿɊȼɂɁɇɂ ɍɋɅɍȽɂ ɇȺ ɄɅɂȿɇɌ ɋȿ ɇɍɀȾȺȿ ɈɌ
ȿɁɂɄ, ɊȺɁɅɂɑȿɇ ɈɌ ȺɇȽɅɂɃɋɄɂ, ɁȺȾɔɅɀȿɇɂȿ ɇȺ ɄɅɂȿɇɌȺ ȿ ȾȺ
ɉɊȿȾɈɋɌȺȼɂ ɉɊȿȼɈȾȺɑȿɋɄȺ ɍɋɅɍȽȺ.
• ɇȿ ɋȿ ɈɉɂɌȼȺɃɌȿ ȾȺ ɂɁȼɔɊɒȼȺɌȿ ɋȿɊȼɂɁɇɈ ɈȻɋɅɍɀȼȺɇȿ ɇȺ ɌɈȼȺ
ɉɊȿȾɍɉɊȿɀȾȿɇɂȿ ɈȻɈɊɍȾȼȺɇȿ, Ɉɋȼȿɇ ȼɋɅɍɑȺɃ, ɑȿ ɋȿɊȼɂɁɇɈɌɈ ɊɔɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɈ ȿ
(BG) ɉɊɈɑȿɌȿɇɈ ɂ ɋȿ ɊȺɁȻɂɊȺ.
• ɇȿɋɉȺɁȼȺɇȿɌɈ ɇȺ ɌɈȼȺ ɉɊȿȾɍɉɊȿɀȾȿɇɂȿ ɆɈɀȿ ȾȺ ȾɈȼȿȾȿ ȾɈ
ɇȺɊȺɇəȼȺɇȿ ɇȺ ȾɈɋɌȺȼɑɂɄȺ ɇȺ ɋȿɊȼɂɁɇɂ ɍɋɅɍȽɂ, ɇȺ ɈɉȿɊȺɌɈɊȺ
ɂɅɂ ɉȺɐɂȿɇɌȺ ȼɋɅȿȾɋɌȼɂȿɇȺ ɌɈɄɈȼ ɍȾȺɊ, ɆȿɏȺɇɂɑɇɂ ɂɅɂ ȾɊɍȽɂ
ɊɂɋɄɈȼȿ.

OVAJ PRIRUýNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM

JEZIKU.
• AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI,
ODGOVORNOST JE NA KLIJENTU DA PRUŽI USLUGE PREVOĈENJA.
UPOZORENJE
• NEMOJTE POKUŠAVATI DA SERVISIRATE OPREMU AKO NISTE PROýITALI I
(SR)
RAZUMELI PRIRUýNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE.
• AKO NE POŠTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOŽE DOûI DO POVREĈIVANJA
SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA UZROKOVANOG ELEKTRIýNIM
UDAROM, MEHANIýKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA.

16 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

TA SERVISNI PRIROýNIK JE NA VOLJO SAMO V ANGLEŠýINI.

• ýE PONUDNIK SERVISNIH STORITEV ZA STRANKO POTREBUJE NAVODILA V
DRUGEM JEZIKU, JE ZA PREVOD ODGOVORNA STRANKA SAMA.
• NE POSKUŠAJTE SERVISIRATI OPREME, NE DA BI PREJ PREBRALI IN
OPOZORILO
RAZUMELI SERVISNI PRIROýNIK.
(SL)
• ýE TEGA OPOZORILA NE UPOŠTEVATE, OBSTAJA NEVARNOST
ELEKTRIýNEGA UDARA, MEHANSKIH ALI DRUGIH NEVARNOSTI IN
POSLEDIýNIH POŠKODB PONUDNIKA SERVISNIH STORITEV, UPORABNIKA
OPREME ALI PACIENTA.

OVAJ SERVISNI PRIRUýNIK DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM JEZIKU.

• AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTIJEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI,
ODGOVORNOST KLIJENTA JE PRUŽITI USLUGE PREVOĈENJA.
UPOZORENJE • NEMOJTE POKUŠAVATI SERVISIRATI OPREMU AKO NISTE PROýITALI I
(HR) RAZUMJELI SERVISNI PRIRUýNIK.
• AKO NE POŠTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOŽE DOûI DO OZLJEDE
SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA PROUZROýENE STRUJNIM
UDAROM, MEHANIýKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA.

TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRUýKA JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIýTINE.

• AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEď SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO
ANGLIýTINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATEďSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE
ZODPOVEDNOSġOU ZÁKAZNÍKA.
UPOZORNENIE • NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA VYKONÁVAġ SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI
(SK) NEPREýÍTATE SERVISNÚ PRÍRUýKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ.
• ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTIġ DO ZRANENIA
POSKYTOVATEďA SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJÚCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA
ELEKTRICKÝM PRÚDOM, PRÍPADNE DO MECHANICKÉHO ALEBO INÉHO
NEBEZPEýENSTVA.

DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.

• OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA
ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.
VARNING
• FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST
(SV)
OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I
SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.

17
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

BU SERVøS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA øNGøLøZCE OLARAK SAöLANMIùTIR.

• EöER MÜùTERø TEKNøSYENø KILAVUZUN øNGøLøZCE DIùINDAKø BøR DøLDE
OLMASINI øSTERSE, KILAVUZU TERCÜME ETTøRMEK MÜùTERøNøN
SORUMLULUöUNDADIR.
DøKKAT • SERVøS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKøPMANLARA MÜDAHALE
(TR)
ETMEYøNøZ.
• BU UYARININ GÖZ ARDI EDøLMESø, ELEKTRøK ÇARPMASI YA DA MEKANøK
VEYA DøöER TÜRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNøSYENøN, OPERATÖRÜN
YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇABøLøR.

(JA)

Traditional
Chinese

18 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

(ZH-CN)

(KO)

19
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable
electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part
number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.

Mail the information to:

Service Documentation
9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2156)
Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.

GE Healthcare employees should use TrackWise to report service documentation issues. These issues
will then be in the internal problem reporting tool and communicated to the writer.

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see: Section 1-4 "Safety considerations" on page 1-
15. of the latest version of LOGIQ E9 Service Manual.

20 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

LEGAL NOTES

The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE Healthcare.

GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.

PROPRIETARY TO GE HEALTHCARE
Permission to use this Advanced Service Software and related documentation (herein called the
Material) by persons other than GE Healthcare employees is provided only under an Advanced Service
Package License relating specifically to this Proprietary Material. This is a different agreement from the
one under which operating and basic service software is licensed. A license to use operating or basic
service software does not extend to or cover this software or related documentation.

If you are a GE Healthcare employee or a customer who has entered into such a license agreement
with GE Healthcare to use this proprietary software, you are authorized to use this Material according
to the conditions stated in your license agreement.

However, you do not have the permission of GE Healthcare to alter, decompose or reverse-assemble
the software, and unless you are a GE employee, you may not copy the Material. The Material is
protected by Copyright and Trade Secret laws; the violation of which can result in civil damages and
criminal prosecution.

If you are not party to such a license agreement or a GE Healthcare Employee, you must exit this
Material now.

TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.

COPYRIGHTS
All Material Copyright© 2014 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved.

21
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Revision History

Date
Revision YYYY/MM/DD Reason for change
Rev. 1 2014/07/21 R5 Release

Rev. 2 2014/10/13 Remove duplicate TOC from Chapter 1. ECR 2124250.

List of Effected Pages (LOEP)

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Title Page Rev. 2 4-1 to 4-54 Rev. 2 10-1 to 10-28 Rev. 2

Warnings Rev. 2 5-1 to 5-34 Rev. 2 Back Cover N/A

TOC Rev. 2 6-1 to 6-16 Rev. 2

1-1 to 1-28 Rev. 2 7-1 to 7-98 Rev. 2

2-1 to 2-12 Rev. 2 8-1 to 8-316 Rev. 2

3-1 to 3-80 Rev. 2 9-1 to 9-116 Rev. 2

22 -
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 1
Introduction

Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing LOGIQ E9. The service provider
must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing a unit.

Section 1-2
Service manual overview
Attention

This manual contains necessary and sufficient information for the Field Service Engineer or Biotech
Engineer to maintain and service the system safely. Advanced equipment training may be provided by
factory trained Field Service trainers for the agreed-upon time period.

This service manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanning
unit. It is divided in 10 chapters as shown below, in Table 1-1 "Contents in this service manual" on page
1-2.

Indications for Use

The LOGIQ E9 is intended for use by a qualified physician for ultrasound evaluation. Specific clinical
applications and exam types include:

• Fetal/Obstetrics
• Abdominal (includes renal, GYN/Pelvic)
• Pediatric
• Small Organ (breast, testes, thyroid)
• Neonatal Cephalic
• Adult Cephalic
• Cardiac (adult and pediatric)
• Peripheral Vascular
• Musculo-skeletal Conventional and Superficial
• Urology (including prostate)
• Transrectal
• Transvaginal
• Transesophageal

Contraindication

The LOGIQ E9 ultrasound system is not intended for ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic
beam to pass through the eye.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-2-1 Contents in this service manual

The service manual is divided into ten chapters.

In the beginning of the manual, before chapter 1, you will find the language policy for GE’s service
documentation, legal information, a revision overview, and the Table of Contents (TOC).

An Index has been included after chapter 10.

Table 1-1 Contents in this service manual

CHAPTER
NUMBER CHAPTER TITLE DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.

2 Site preparations Contains pre-setup requirements for the LOGIQ E9.

3 LOGIQ E9 Setup Contains setup procedure with procedure checklist.

4 Functional Checks Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic
maintenance.
5 Components and Functions (Theory) Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the
electronics.

6 Service Adjustments Contains instructions on how to make any available adjustments to

the LOGIQ E9.

7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the
LOGIQ E9.

8 Replacement procedures Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all
changeable FRUs, available option installation instructions, and
upgrade installation instructions.

9 Renewal Parts Contains a complete list of replacement parts for the LOGIQ E9.

10 Care & Maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures for LOGIQ E9.

N/A Index A quick way to the topic you’re looking for.

1-2 Section 1-2 - Service manual overview

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-2-2 Typical users of the “Basic” Service Manual

• Service Personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.)
• Hospital’s Service Personnel
• Architectural Planners/Installation Planners (some parts of Chapter 2 - Site preparations)

1-2-3 LOGIQ E9 models covered by this manual

Table 1-2 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility -

Upgrade Options

CONSOLE
MODEL
NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION
Phase I BT2010 BT2011 BT2013 BT2014
4 Rev. 5 Rev.
1.0.3 1.0.4 1.0.5 1.0.6 2.0.3 2.0.4 2.0.5 3.1.2 3.1.3
x.x x.x
LOGIQ E9,
5205000 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
00-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-2 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-3 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-4 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-5 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-6 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-7 N N N N N N N N N U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-8 N N N N N N N N N N Y
100-240 VAC

LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility - Upgrade Options

LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software

Compatibility - Upgrade Options
Y Original
U Upgrade available
N Not supported

Front End Processor - see: 9-12-2 "Front End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-61.

Back End Processor - see: 9-13-1 "Back End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-73.

NOTE: When not otherwise specified, the contents of this manual applies to all LOGIQ E9 models.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-2-4 Product description

1-2-4-1 Overview of the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanner

The LOGIQ E9 ultrasound unit is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with total data
management.

The system provides image generation in B-Mode, Color Doppler, Power Doppler, M-Mode,
Color M-Mode, PW and 4D, Tissue Velocity imaging, Volume-Guided Ultrasound and Contrast
applications. The fully digital architecture of the LOGIQ E9 unit allows optimal usage of all scanning
modes and probe types throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies.

Signal flows from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End, and then over to the Back End Processor
and finally to the monitor and peripherals.

System configuration is stored on the hard drive in the Back End Processor.

• All necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up. to check for installed options.

1-2-4-2 Purpose of the operator manual(s)

The operator manuals should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ E9.

The online versions of the operator manuals are available via the Help function on LOGIQ E9’s operator
panel.

1-4 Section 1-2 - Service manual overview

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-3
Important conventions
1-3-1 Conventions used in book

1-3-1-1 Model designations

This manual covers the LOGIQ E9 scanners listed in 1-2-3 "LOGIQ E9 models covered by this manual"
on page 1-3.

1-3-1-2 Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels, and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.

1-3-1-3 Safety precaution messages

Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards to personnel are labeled in one of three ways:

• DANGER
• WARNING
• CAUTION
When a hazard is present that can cause property damage, but has absolutely no personal injury risk,
a NOTICE is used.

DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL

CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.

CAUTION CAUTION IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL OR CAN CAUSE
MINOR PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE POSSIBLE.

NOTICE Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.

Notice Example: Disk drive may crash.

NOTE: Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure.

NOTE: Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-3-2 Standard hazard icons

Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle,
as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be
used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm. Even if a symbol
isn’t used in this manual, it may be included for your reference.

Table 1-3 Standard hazard icons

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

BIOLOGICAL ELECTRICAL MOVING

ACOUSTIC OUTPUT EXPLOSION SMOKE / FIRE

LASER HEAT PINCH

LASER
LIGHT

1-6 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-3-2 Standard hazard icons (cont’d)

Table 1-4 Standard hazard icons (cont’d)

RADIATION “ “
“ “

Other icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.

Table 1-5 Standard Icons that indicate that a special procedure is to be used

AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION

TAG
&
LOCKOUT

Signed Date

OR

HAND PROTECTION FOOT PROTECTION “

“

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-3-3 Product icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the equipment.

Table 1-6 Product icons 1 of 7

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

Identification and Rating Plate

Manufacturer’s name and address Rear panel

Identification and Rating Plate

Date of manufacture Rating Plate

Serial Number Rating Plate

Catalog Number Rating Plate

Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or

protection.

United States only Rear panel

Prescription Requirement label

Authorized European Representative Rear panel

address

Equipment Type BF (man in the box

symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Probe connectors including Doppler
Type equipment having a floating probe connector
applied part.

Equipment Type BF Applied Part (man

in the box with paddle) symbol is in Probe
accordance with IEC 60417-5334.

Equipment Type CF (heart in the box

symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates Probe connectors and ECG connector.
equipment having a floating applied part On newer systems also on the rear of
having a degree of protection suitable the system.
for direct cardiac contact.

1-8 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-6 Product icons (Continued) 2 of 7

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

DEFIBRILLATOR-PROOF TYPE CF At the ECG connector on front of

EQUIPMENT. system.

Laboratory logo or labels denoting

Device Listing/Certification Labels conformance with industry safety Rear of console
standards such as UL or IEC.

This precaution is intended to prevent

injury that may result if one person
attempt to move the unit considerable Rear cover label
distances or on an incline due to the
weight of the unit.

DO NOT push the system at this point or

from this area. Use the handle to push/
Rear of LCD Monitor
pull the system, e.g., DO NOT use the
Front of On-Board V Nav Stand
LCD. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury or system damage.

Follow Instructions for Use.

“ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying Rear Cover,
documents is intended to alert the user
Rear of LCD Monitor,
to refer to the operator manual or other
Miscellaneous Probe Labels
instructions when complete information
cannot be provided on the label.

Follow Instructions for Use.

“ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying
documents is intended to alert the user Rear of particular Main Power Supply
to refer to the operator manual or other
instructions when complete information
cannot be provided on the label.

“DANGER - Risk of explosion used in...” The system is not designed for use with Rear cover console
flammable anesthetic gases.

The system is not designed for use with Rear of console

flammable anesthetic gases.

C-UL Mark Parts

Indicates that the product has been Rear of LCD Monitor (inside)
tested and approved in UL Laboratories, Footswitch
based on UL and CSA standards,
through mutual approval activities.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-6 Product icons (Continued) 3 of 7

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

This unit carries the CE mark.

The LOGIQ E9 unit complies with
regulatory requirements of the
European Directive 93/ 42/EEC
concerning medical devices. Rear of console
It also complies with emission limits for
a Group 1, Class B Medical Device as
stated in EN 60601-1-2
(IEC 60601-1-2).

Various

“CAUTION” The equilateral triangle is

usually used in combination with other
symbols to advise or warn the user.

Shear Wave Option Capacitor Pack

“ATTENTION - Consult
accompanying documents”
is intended to alert the user to refer to
Various,
the operator manual or other
Rear Cover,
instructions when complete information Probe Label
cannot be provided on the label.

General Warning

“Warning - Dangerous Voltage”

(the lightning flash with arrowhead in Various
equilateral triangle) is used to indicate
electric shock hazards.

“Mains OFF”
Rear of system adjacent to
Indicates the power off position of the
MAINS Switch
mains power switch.

1 - 10 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-6 Product icons (Continued) 4 of 7

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

“PINCH POINT”
Indicates moving parts that may cause Various
injury (such as the top, rear of the LCD
Arm or XYZ Mech).

“Mains ON”
Indicates the Power ON position of the
mains power switch.
“ON” Indicates the power on position of
the power switch.
CAUTION Rear of console
THE ON/OFF BUTTON ON
THE OPERATOR PANEL
DOES NOT ISOLATE MAINS
SUPPLY

ON/OFF button
CAUTION
SYSTEM SHUTDOWN USING
THE ON/OFF BUTTON DOES
or NOT DISCONNECT LOGIQ E9
Operating Panel
FROM MAINS VOLTAGE.
For disconnecting LOGIQ E9 from
mains voltage after system shutdown,
please set the circuit breaker close to
the mains inlet to OFF as described in
4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

“Protective Earth”
Indicates the protective earth Used several places inside the system.
(grounding) terminal.

“Equipotential”
Indicates the terminal to be used for
connecting equipotential conductors
Rear of console
when interconnecting (grounding) with
other equipment as described in
IEC60601-1.

Rear Panel, Rating Plate, Circuit

Alternating Current symbol is in
breaker label of console and Front
accordance with IEC 60878-01-14.
Panel (if applicable).

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 11
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-6 Product icons (Continued) 5 of 7

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

This symbol indicates that waste

electrical and electronic equipment
must not be disposed of as unsorted
municipal waste and must be collected
Rear of console
separately. Please contact an Rear of LCD Monitor (inside)
authorized representative of the
manufacturer for information concerning
the decommissioning of your
equipment.

This product consists of devices that

may contain mercury, which must be
recycled or disposed of in accordance Rear Panel
or with local, state, or country laws. (Within Rear of LCD Monitor (inside)
this system, the backlight lamps in the
monitor display, contain mercury.)

ETL Listing Mark Monogram Rear Panel

GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory

Rear Panel
Country Clearance.

ISO 7010 - P007

V Nav Transmitter
Volume Navigation Pacemaker Warning

Indicates the presence of hazardous

substance(s) above the maximum
concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic
information products, as set by the
People’s Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006,
include the hazardous substances of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, Probe
cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl
ether (PBDE). “10” indicates the number
of years during which the hazardous
substance(s) will not leak or mutate so
that the use of this product will not result
in any severe environmental pollution,
bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

1 - 12 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-6 Product icons (Continued) 6 of 7

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

Indicates the presence of hazardous

substance(s) above the maximum
concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic
information products, as set by the
People’s Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006,
include the hazardous substances of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, China Rating Plate
cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl
ether (PBDE). “20” indicates the number
of years during which the hazardous
substance(s) will not leak or mutate so
that the use of this product will not result
in any severe environmental pollution,
bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

CAUTION

LCD and Operator Panel information

and warnings.

Rear of the LCD monitor.

How to lower LCD prior to transport

How to lock Operator Panel prior to

transport

DO NOT place a finger, hand or any

object on the joint of the monitor or
monitor arm to avoid injury when moving
the monitor and monitor arm.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 13
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 1-6 Product icons (Continued) 7 of 7

LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

Non-ionizing Electromagnetic Radiation Rear Panel

Label

1-3-4 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment

There are different handling instructions when servicing consoles that are used in a veterinary
environment.

Table 1-7 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment

LABEL LOCATION

Side Covers

For Veterinary Back Cover

use only
5454608

Probe(s)

5447716

1 - 14 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-4
Safety considerations
1-4-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.

1-4-2 Human safety

• Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.
• Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ E9 Training Seminar are authorized to service the
equipment.

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.

WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUTDOWN MODE.

WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, GE HAS LIMITED THE LIFTING WEIGHT
FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG (35 LBS)
REQUIRES 2 PEOPLE.

WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PAD, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.

WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.
OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.

WARNING Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute
parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 15
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-2 Human safety (cont’d)

WARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and
stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of
the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/
when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is
removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the
elevation assembly.

WARNING Ensure that the system is turned off and unplugged.

Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off button will turn off.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and Back End Processor may be
energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet

WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power
source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to
discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off
button will turn off.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and Back End Processor may be
energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet

WARNING Use extreme caution as long as THE LOGIQ E9 is un-stable, not resting on all four
Casters.

WARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel
and damage to the equipment.

WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are
encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
The appropriate PPE is required per EHS Policies and SRA’s.

WARNING Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical MSDS.

1 - 16 Section 1-4 - Safety considerations

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-3 Mechanical safety

WARNING While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any
patient data, images, system setups to a DVD or hardcopy before doing a software
upgrade.

WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING THE SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE KEYBOARD IS LOCKED IN
ITS LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED AND THE
SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE
LOCKED POSITION.

WARNING WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE
EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER.

WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND
PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR
DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

WARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the
release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a
second time to engage the brake.

WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the
Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as
much as possible before moving the system.

CAUTION BEFORE YOU MOVE OR TRANSPORT THE SYSTEM, MAKE SURE TO LOCK THE LCD
MONITOR ARM FIRMLY AND FLIP DOWN THE MONITOR TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
SYSTEM.

CAUTION Always lock the Top/Upper Console in its parking (locked) position before moving the scanner
around.

CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY WHEN YOU MOVE THE LCD MONITOR AND THE MONITOR ARM, DO NOT
PUT YOUR FINGER, HAND, OR OBJECT ON THE JOINT OF THE MONITOR OR THE MONITOR
ARM.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 17
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-3 Mechanical safety (cont’d)

CAUTION LOGIQ E9 WEIGHS 135 KG (298 LB), R3.X AND EARLIER, 140 KG (309 LB), R4.X AND
LATER, OR MORE, DEPENDING ON INSTALLED PERIPHERALS, WHEN READY FOR
USE. CARE MUST BE USED WHEN MOVING IT OR REPLACING ITS PARTS. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THE PRECAUTIONS LISTED BELOW COULD RESULT IN INJURY,
UNCONTROLLED MOTION AND COSTLY DAMAGE. ALWAYS:
- BE SURE THE PATHWAY IS CLEAR.
- USE SLOW, CAREFUL MOTIONS.
- USE TWO PEOPLE WHEN MOVING ON INCLINES OR LIFTING MORE THAN
16 KG (35 LBS).

CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY OR DAMAGE TO THE MONITOR, MAKE SURE THERE IS NOTHING WITHIN
RANGE OF THE LCD BEFORE MOVING THE MONITOR AND MONITOR ARM. THIS INCLUDES
PEOPLE AS WELL AS THINGS.

CAUTION Ensure that nobody touches the console arm/frogleg when moving the Operator Panel.

CAUTION Use Protective Glasses during drilling, filing and during all other work where eyes need
protection.

CAUTION Use Safety Shoes when doing work where there is any chance of foot damage.

CAUTION Use Protective Gloves when drilling and cutting.

NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.

NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle, see 4-2-10-4 "Transporting
the LOGIQ E9 by vehicle" on page 4-16.

1 - 18 Section 1-4 - Safety considerations

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-4 Electrical safety

1-4-4-1 Safe practices

Follow these guidelines to minimize shock hazards whenever you are using the scanner:

• The equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.

• The unit is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved
electrical outlet with safety ground. A separate power outlet with a 20 amp circuit breaker for 120
VAC for 120V area, 7.5 amp circuit breaker for 220-240 VAC for 220/240V area or 15 amp circuit
breaker for 100 VAC for Japan.
• The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
• Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards.

WARNING Connecting a LOGIQ E9 scanner to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy it.

1-4-4-2 Probes
Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:

• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
- housing
- cable strain relief
- lens
- seal
- connector pins
- locking mechanism
• Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
• The system has more than one type of probe port. Use the appropriate probe port designed for the
probe you are connecting.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 19
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-5
Label locations
Refer to the approriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2.

Table 1-8 LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual per console

ENGLISH BASIC
CONSOLE MODEL USER MANUAL
NUMBER DIRECTION NUMBER
5205000 5180374-100
5205000-2, -3 5335626-100
5205000-4, -5 5389558-100
5205000-6, -7 5450756-100
5205000-8 5496408-100

1 - 20 Section 1-5 - Label locations

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-6
Dangerous procedure warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.

WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.

WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION
OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A
DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.

WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT.

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT
INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION
OF THE EQUIPMENT.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 21
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-7
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements (USA) or local Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring
you are in total control of the AC power plug at all times during the service process.

To apply Lockout/Tagout:

1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown.

2.) Shutdown the equipment.
3.) Isolate the equipment.
4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.
5.) Disconnect the Extended Power Shutdown battery at J3 when working in the BEP.
6.) Control all stored and residual energy.
7.) Verify isolation.
All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the scanner.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Signed Date
The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off button will turn off.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS
OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
If the Shear Wave Option is present, MAKE SURE the LEDs on the Capacitor Pack are OFF before
disconnecting the Capacitor Pack Cables.

1 - 22 Section 1-7 - Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-8
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.

GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have
been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment
with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound
probe).

The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.

For LOGIQ E9 Vet system

NOTE: Return used/unused spare parts from a veterinary environment with the purple recycling label
(regardless of its actual condition) and add a description on the label stating that the items were
removed from a LOGIQ E9 Vet in a veterinary environment.

This applies for Probes and covers labeled as Vet used.

If purple recycling label is not used in your region, use local recycling label.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 23
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-9
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1-9-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.

1-9-2 Compliance
LOGIQ E9 conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from
electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient
requirements.

Applicable standards are: 47CFR Part 18, IEC60601–1–2:2001.

NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are
in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all
comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.

1 - 24 Section 1-9 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-9-3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF
THE POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.

WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical
contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed
for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential
for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
If the Shear Wave Option is present, MAKE SURE the LEDs on the Capacitor Pack are
OFF before disconnecting the Capacitor Pack Cables.

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 25
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-10
Customer assistance
1-10-1 Contact information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the user manual, or if you
require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as
listed below.

Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to the Customer
Care team:

1.) System ID serial number.

2.) Software version.
3.) Date and time of occurrence.
4.) Sequence of events leading to issue.
5.) Is the issue repeatable?
6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.

NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

1 - 26 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-10 Customer assistance (cont’d)

Table 1-9 Phone numbers for Customer Assistance

LOCATION PHONE NUMBER

1-800-437-1171
USA Service: On-site
GE Healthcare
1-800-558-2040
Ultrasound Service Engineering Service Parts
9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2156)
1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-
Wauwatosa, WI 53226 Application Support
5698

Canada 1-800-668-0732

Service 1-262-524-5300
Latin America
Application Support 1-262-524-5698

Europe
GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH Support Phone: +49 (0) 212-2802-652
Beethovenstrasse 239
Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen Support Fax: +49 (0) 2122-8024-31
Germany

Egypt Service Center 0020 2322 1252

EAGM
UAE Service Center 00971 8003646

Asia (Singapore)
GE Ultrasound Asia
Tel: +65 6291-8528
Service Department - Ultrasound
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06
Fax: +65 6291-7006
Central Placa
Singapore 168730

Phone: 81-426-48-2940
Japan Support Center
Fax: 81-426-48-2905

86-800-810 8188
China 86-400-812 8188
86-10-6788 2652

1-800-425-8025
India 1-800-425-7255
1-800-102-7750

Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 27
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

1-10-2 System manufacturer

Table 1-10 System manufacturer

MANUFACTURER FAX NUMBER

GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics,

LLC
9900 Innovation Drive 414-721-3865
Wauwatosa, WI 53226
USA

Table 1-11 Authorized Representative

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE TELEPHONE / FAX NUMBER

The location of the CE marking is shown in the Safety chapter of this manual.

+49 761 45 43 -0 /
+49 761 45 43 -233

Authorized EU Representative European registered place of business:

GE Medical Systems Information Technologies GmbH (GEMS IT GmbH)
Munzinger Strasse 3, D-79111 Freiburg, GERMANY

1 - 28 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 2
Site preparations

Section 2-1
Overview
2-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the setup of a LOGIQ E9.
Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the LOGIQ E9.

Section 2-2
General console requirements
2-2-1 Console environmental requirements

2-2-1-1 If the LOGIQ E9 is very cold or hot

When unpacking the device, allow the temperature of the device to stabilize before powering up. The
following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport
temperatures. See: Table 2-1’

Table 2-1 LOGIQ E9 Acclimate Time

o
C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
oF 140 131 122 113 104 95 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
Hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

2-2-1-2 Environmental specifications

Table 2-2 Environmental Specifications for LOGIQ E9 Scanners

Operational Storage Transport (< 16 hrs.)

10º - 35º C -10º - 50º C -10º - 50º C
Temperature
(50º - 96º F) (-14º - 122º F) (-14º - 122º F)
30% - 80% 30% - 80% 30% - 80%
Humidity
non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing
Pressure 70 - 106 kPa 70 - 106 kPa 70 - 106 kPa

Heat Dissipation 4712 Btu/hour “ “

Chapter 2 Site preparations 2-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-1-3 Cooling
The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ E9 scanner with LCD and onboard peripherals, is up to 4712
Btu/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room.
Each person in the room places an additional 300 Btu/hr demand on the cooling system.

2-2-1-4 Lighting
Bright light is needed for LOGIQ E9 installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.

2-2 Section 2-2 - General console requirements

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-2 Electrical requirements

2-2-2-1 General requirements

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the LOGIQ E9.

The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220 volt
power, then a center tapped power source is required.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the LOGIQ E9 outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the LOGIQ E9 outlet.

NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.

2-2-2-2 Electrical requirements for LOGIQ E9

In the table below, the electrical specifications for LOGIQ E9 include LCD and on board peripherals.

Table 2-3 Electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E9

POWER
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE TOLERANCES CONSUMPTION FREQUENCY

5205000-x LOGIQ E9, 100-240 VAC 100-240 VAC +/-10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz

The current drain varies, depending on the mains voltage.

• At 230 VAC, the current may be up to 8 A.

• At 100 VAC, the current may be up to 10 A.

2-2-2-3 Inrush current

During power on, an inrush circuit prevents the current from increasing above the stated values.

Table 2-4 Inrush current at different mains voltages

VOLTAGE 50 Hz 60 Hz
90 VAC 13 A 12 A
110 VAC 9A 11 A
220 VAC 5.5 A 6A
264 VAC 6A 5A

Chapter 2 Site preparations 2-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-2-4 Site circuit breaker

CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.

THE LOGIQ E9 SCANNER REQUIRES A DEDICATED SINGLE BRANCH CIRCUIT. TO AVOID
CIRCUIT OVERLOAD AND POSSIBLE LOSS OF CRITICAL CARE EQUIPMENT, MAKE SURE
YOU DO NOT HAVE ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OPERATING ON THE SAME CIRCUIT.

It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the LOGIQ E9 be readily accessible.

2-2-2-5 Site power outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the LOGIQ E9 without extension cords. Other
outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this
LOGIQ E9 must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the LOGIQ E9. Electrical installation must meet
all current local, state, and national electrical codes.

2-2-2-6 LOGIQ E9 power plug

If the LOGIQ E9 arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer
or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.

2-2-2-7 Power stability requirements

Voltage drop-out

Max 10 ms.

Power transients (all applications)

Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including
line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

2-4 Section 2-2 - General console requirements

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-3 EMI limitations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The LOGIQ
E9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.

Possible EMI sources should be identified before the LOGIQ E9 is installed.

Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These
sources include:

• medical lasers,
• scanners,
• cauterizing guns,
• computers,
• monitors,
• fans,
• gel warmers,
• microwave ovens,
• light dimmers
• portable phones.
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.

See: Table 2-5 for EMI Prevention tips.

Table 2-5 EMI prevention/abatement

EMI RULE DETAILS

Keep the LOGIQ E9 at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special
Be aware of RF sources shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high
frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.

Ground the LOGIQ E9 Poor grounding is the most likely reason a LOGIQ E9 will have noisy images. Check
grounding of the power cord and power outlet.

After you finish repairing or updating the LOGIQ E9, replace all covers and tighten all
Replace all screws, RF screws. Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.
gaskets, covers, cores Install the Card Rack cover over the Card Rack. Loose or missing covers or RF
gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.

Replace broken RF If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the
gaskets gasket. Do not turn on the LOGIQ E9 until any loose metallic part is removed.

Do not place labels Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the LOGIQ E9. Otherwise, the gap
where RF gaskets touch created will permit RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move
metal the label.

Use GE specified The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding.
harnesses and Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is
peripherals specified.
Take care with cellular
Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
phones

Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the Card Rack or hang out of the peripheral
Properly dress
bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach
peripheral cables
the LCD cables to the frame.

Chapter 2 Site preparations 2-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-2-4 Probes environmental requirements

Table 2-6 Environmental Requirements - Probes

Standard Probes 4D Probes

Operation: 10o o
to 40 C (50 to 104 ºF) 18 to 40o C (64.4 to 104 ºF)
o

-10° to 60° C (14 to 140 ºF)

Storage:
-10° to 60° C (14 to 140 ºF) -10o to 50 o C (14 to 122 ºF)

Temperatures in degrees Celsius (oC) conversion to degrees F: (oF) = (oC * 9/5) + 32

NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF
-10 TO +50 degrees C. or +60 degrees C, DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF PROBE. WHEN
EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN
ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
Refer to the Table in section 2-2-1-1 on page 2-1 to determine the needed settlement time.

2-2-5 Time and manpower requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible, if possible, six weeks
before delivery, to allow enough time to make any changes.

CAUTION HAVE TWO PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO DELIVER AND UNPACK THE LOGIQ E9.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE LOGIQ E9 CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY ONE
PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.

2-6 Section 2-2 - General console requirements

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 2-3
Facility needs
2-3-1 Purchaser responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.
Purchaser responsibility includes:

• Procuring the materials required.

• Completing the preparations before delivery of the LOGIQ E9.
• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.

NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site
prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other
connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be
performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical
installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All
electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical
codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.

The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the LOGIQ E9 than the interface kit allows, presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).

The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact LOGIQ E9
reliability.

Chapter 2 Site preparations 2-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-2 Required facility needs

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.

The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220 volt
power, then a center tapped power source is required.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

• Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage (see: Table 2-3 "Electrical
specifications for the LOGIQ E9" on page 2-3) meeting all local and national codes which is located
less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the LOGIQ E9’s proposed location
• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.
• Proposed location for LOGIQ E9 is at least 0.46 m (18 inches) from the wall or objects for cooling.
• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the LOGIQ E9 to connect cables.
• Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer.
• Power outlets for test equipment within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of LOGIQ E9.
• Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack).
• Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal).

2-8 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-3 Desirable features

In addition to the Floor Plan Suggestions shown in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2, a nearby waiting room and a
Receptacle for Bio–hazardous Waste, like used probe sheaths is suggested. Grid represents 305 x 305 mm (1 x 1
foot).

2-3-4 Minimal floor plan suggestions

Figure 2-1 Floor Plan Suggestion 4.27 x 5.18 m (14 x 17 foot)

10 11 15
12

9 1

PW
X Z
CW
M CF
Elasto

Body Pattern Zoom

Ellipse
B
3D/4D

Comment
Auto
L R

Clear

16
2 3 4 5 13 14

7
1

17

18

Floor Plan Suggestion 4.27 x 5.18 m (14 x 17 foot) Key

Item Description Item Description

1. Secretaries or Doctors Desk 2. File Cabinet

3. Film Viewer 4. Counter Top

Overhead Lights Dimmer - Dual Level Lighting (bright

5. Counter Top and Sink with hot and cold water 6.
and dim)

7. Emergency Oxygen 8. Suction Line

9. 10. Dedicated Power Outlet - Circuit Breaker protected and

LOGIQ E9
easily accessible

457 mm (18 inches) distance of LOGIQ E9 from wall or

11. Network Interface 12.
objects

13. Stool 14. Footswitch

15. Storage for Linens and Equipment 16. Examination Table – 1930 x 610 mm (76 x 24 inches)

17. Lavatory and Dressing Room 18. Door – at least 762 mm (30 inches)

Chapter 2 Site preparations 2-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-4 Minimal floor plan suggestions (cont’d)

Figure 2-2 Floor Plan Suggestion 2.44 x 3.05 m (8 x 10 foot)

4 5
2 3

11
10
9

Elasto

1
2
12

Comment
Clear

M
CW
X
Body Pattern
Ellipse

PW
Y
e
13

Zoom
3D/4D

CF
Z
L

B
7

R
Auto
6 14
1

Floor Plan Suggestion 2.44 x 3.05 m (8 x 10 foot) Key

Item Description Item Description

1. Door – at least 762 mm (30 inches) 2. Film Viewer

Counter Top, Sink with hot and cold water and Supplies
3. 4. Linen Supply
Storage

5. Probes/Supplies 6. Examination Table – 1930 x 610 mm (76 x 24 inches)

7. Footswitch 8. Stool

9. LOGIQ E9 10. External Peripherals

Dedicated Power Outlet - Circuit Breaker protected and

11. 12. Network Interface
easily accessible

13. 457 mm (18 inches) distance of LOGIQ E9 from wall or 14. GE Cabinet for Software and Manuals
objects

2 - 10 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-5 Networking setup requirements

2-3-5-1 Stand alone scanner (without network connection)

None.

2-3-5-2 Scanner connected to hospital’s network

Supported networks:

• 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet network connection

• Up to 300 Mbps WLAN (option)

2-3-5-3 InSite Requirements

Need internet access available to be able to connect to Insite ExC.

2-3-5-4 Purpose of the DICOM network function

DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient
information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to
workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring
images in this manner frees up the on-board LCD and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while
scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at
a lower cost.

2-3-5-5 DICOM option setup requirements

To configure the LOGIQ E9 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator
must provide information to complete the form in Figure 2-3 "Worksheet for DICOM Network
Information" on page 2-12. Ensure that there are no spaces in any field of the form.

Entries must include:

• A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ E9.
• The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.
• The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
LOGIQ E9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the
revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for troubleshooting.

For connectivity setup information, refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual.
See: Table 1-8 "LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual per console" on page 1-20.

Chapter 2 Site preparations 2 - 11

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

2-3-5-5 DICOM option setup requirements (cont’d)

Figure 2-3 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information

LOGIQ E9

Host Name IP Address . . . Local Port

AE Title Net Mask . . .

Network
Speed Default Gateway . . .

DHCP

DICOM APPLICATION

OTHER
NAME MAKE/ AE TITLE IP PORT
CONFIGURATION

Store 1 __Raw Data

. . . __Allow Multiframe
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______

Store 2
__Raw Data
. . . __Allow Multiframe
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______

Store 3
__Raw Data
. . . __Allow Multiframe
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______
DICOM
Print Vendor: ___________
. . . Print Size: _________
Medium: ___________
Copies: ___________
Orientation: ________
Color ______________

Worklist . . .

Storage Associated
. . .
Commit Storage AE
_____________

DICOM . . .
MPPS

2 - 12 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 3
LOGIQ E9 Setup

Section 3-1
Overview
3-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter contains information needed to set up the LOGIQ E9. Included is a procedure that
describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim.

How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual setup, and how to check and test the unit, probes, and
external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-2
Setup reminders
3-2-1 Average setup time
Table 3-1 Average setup time

AVERAGE SETUP
DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
TIME
UNPACKING THE LOGIQ E9 0.5 HOUR

SET UP LOGIQ E9 WO/OPTIONS 4 HOURS DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION

DICOM NETWORK CONFIGURATION 2 HOURS OR MORE DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION

INSTALL INSITE / ILINK 0.5 HOUR

3-2-2 Setup warnings

DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH
THE UNIT!

CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK, CONNECT THE UNIT TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED

POWER OUTLET. DO NOT USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER. THIS DEFEATS SAFETY
GROUNDING.

CAUTION DO NOT WEAR THE ESD WRIST STRAP WHEN YOU WORK ON LIVE CIRCUITS AND MORE
THAN 30 V PEAK IS PRESENT.

CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THIS UNIT UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. LOGIQ E9 PERFORMANCE AND COOLING REQUIRE THIS.

NOTICE NEVER REVERSE POLARITY ON ANY METER THAT INTERCEPTS THE POWER CORD WITH
POWER CONNECTED TO THE SYSTEM.
EVEN IN THE OFF STATE, REVERSING POLARITY ON THE POWER CAN SERIOUSLY DAMAGE
THE POWER SUPPLY.

If the unit is very cold or hot, allow the temperature of the device to stabilize before powering up. The
following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport
temperatures. See: 2-2-1 "Console environmental requirements" on page 2-1.

3-2 Section 3-2 - Setup reminders

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-2-2 Setup warnings (cont’d)

CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

THE USER MANUAL(S) SHOULD BE FULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD BEFORE OPERATING
THE LOGIQ E9 AND KEPT NEAR THE UNIT FOR QUICK REFERENCE.

CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

ALTHOUGH THE ULTRASOUND ENERGY TRANSMITTED FROM THE LOGIQ E9 PROBE IS
WITHIN AIUM/NEMA STANDARDS, AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE. ULTRASOUND
ENERGY CAN PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-3
Receiving and unpacking the equipment
3-3-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to receive and unpack LOGIQ E9.

3-3-2 Receiving and unpacking warnings

CAUTION TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO UNPACK THE UNIT BECAUSE OF ITS WEIGHT.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE UNIT CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY
ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.
TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED WHENEVER A PART WEIGHING 16 KG (35 LBS) OR
MORE MUST BE LIFTED.

CAUTION REMEMBER TO USE RELEVANT PERSONAL PROTECTING EQUIPMENT (PPE) DURING

PACKING/UNPACKING. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL EHS REPRESENTATIVE.

3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-3-3 Receiving the LOGIQ E9

3-3-3-1 Overview
Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the
package itself is undamaged.

3-3-3-2 Examine package

Examine package closely at time of delivery.

3-3-3-3 Damage in transportation

Follow this procedure if damage is apparent:

Table 3-2 Damage in transportation

STEP TASK
1. Write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed
for“ by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent.

2. Report the damage to the carrier.

• Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in
any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier.
• A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14
day period.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-3-4 The Tilt and Shock indicators

3-3-4-1 Overview
Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the
package itself is undamaged.

To make it easier to detect if the handling during transportation has been improper, a Tilt or TIPNTELL
indicator and a Shock indicator have been attached to the transportation box.

3-3-4-2 Position of the Tilt or TipNTell and Shock indicators

The Tilt and Shock indicators have been attached to the side of the transportation box.

Figure 3-1 Tilt and Shock indicators

Figure 3-2 TIPNTELL indicator and Label

NOTE: Before cutting the straps, check the Tilt or TIPNTELL and Shock indicators to make sure they
have not been triggered. If triggered, report it to the carrier. If not, then cut the straps around
the crate.

3-6 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-3-4-3 LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Label

The LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Label is located on the transportation box.

Figure 3-3 LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Labeling

SYMBOL DEFINITION/COMMENTS SYMBOL DEFINITION/COMMENTS

RECYCLING
Recyclable Wood KEEP DRY
(protect from moisture)

or

RECYCLING FRAGILE, Handle with Care

China Specific

TOP,. UPRIGHT - Transportation

DO NOT STACK
and Storage

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-3-5 Unpacking the LOGIQ E9

The instruction manual describes the best method for unpacking the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanning
unit. Images are ONLY for reference; wear proper PPE when handling packaging (gloves, safety shoes,
etc...).

Table 3-3 Uncrating Instructions

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Before cutting the straps, check Shock and
Tilt Tags to make sure they have not been
triggered. If damaged, report it to the
carrier. If not, then cut the straps around the
crate.

2. Remove the top cover. 2

3-8 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-3 Uncrating Instructions (Continued)

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Remove the outside shipping box. 3

Note: Two people are recommended for

performing this step.

4. Remove the LCD foam.

4

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-3 Uncrating Instructions (Continued)

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Remove the a) Probes and b) accessory
boxes.

6. Remove the L-shaped Cardboard divider.

Note: Use special care when removing the 6

divider.

3 - 10 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-3 Uncrating Instructions (Continued)

Steps Corresponding Graphic

7. Remove the OP panel foam placed
between the monitor and probe holders.
7

8. Remove the lower OP panel brace placed

between the lower OP panel and the
wooden ramp, by moving upward and back.
Remove the wooden ramp.

9. Attach the wooden ramp to the Pallet Base

with Velcro on the rear side of the
LOGIQ E9.

10. Loosen the tie-down strap at the front of the

LOGIQ E9. Push the brass piece to pull
back handle, then push brass piece to
loosen strap.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 11

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-3 Uncrating Instructions (Continued)

Steps Corresponding Graphic

11. Disconnect the tie-down strap at the rear of
the LOGIQ E9.

12. Pull the LOGIQ E9 down the Pallet Base

ramp.

Note: Remember to pull in the LOGIQ E9

from the back for safer transportation.

13. Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around

the LOGIQ E9) from the unit.

14. Place all of the filling inside the

Transportation Box. Close the box, and
store the filling for possible future use.

Section 3-4
Packing materials - recycling information
The packing materials for LOGIQ E9 are recyclable:

• The Transportation Box is made of cardboard.

• Lever lockings (hinges) are made of zinc plated steel.
• The inner reinforcements are made of Ethafoam (Polyethylene foam).
• The plastic foil is made of LDPE (Low Density Polyethylene).

3 - 12 Section 3-4 - Packing materials - recycling information

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-5
Preparing for setup
3-5-1 Verify Customer Order
Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items
that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.

3-5-2 Physical inspection

Verify that the LOGIQ E9 arrived intact (visual inspection).
If the LOGIQ E9 has been damaged, please refer to “Damage in Transportation “on page x in the
beginning of this manual.

3-5-2-1 LOGIQ E9 voltage settings

See: 3-6-3-1 "Verification of the LOGIQ E9’s voltage setting" on page 3-17.

3-5-3 Volume Navigation Stand

To assemble the Volume Navigation Stand, See: 8-15-2 "Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand" on
page 8-617 or 8-15-4 "On-Board V Nav Stand Option Contents, location and placement of parts" on
page 8-625.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 13

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-5-3-1 Back Cover Label and ETL testing laboratories safety rating label (ETL may not be present)

Figure 3-4 Back Cover Label with ETL Label

Figure 3-5 Rating Plate Label - R3.x and earlier 100-120V shown

3 - 14 Section 3-5 - Preparing for setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-5-3-1 Back Cover Label and ETL testing laboratories safety rating label (ETL may not be present)
(cont’d)

Figure 3-6 Rating Plate Label - R4.x.x and Later

3-5-4 EMI protection

This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the LOGIQ E9 from image artifacts caused
by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and
secured before the unit is put into operation.

See: 2-2-3 "EMI limitations" on page 2-5 for more information about EMI protection.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 15

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-6
Completing the setup
3-6-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to complete the set up of LOGIQ E9.

3-6-2 LOGIQ E9 specifications

3-6-2-1 LOGIQ E9 requirements verification

• Verify that the site meets the requirements listed in (see: Section 2-3 "Facility needs" on page 2-7).
• Verify that the specifications below don’t conflict with any on-site conditions.

3-6-2-2 Physical dimensions

The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ E9 unit are summarized in Table 3-4.

Table 3-4 Physical dimensions of LOGIQ E9 with monitor and peripherals

PART NUMBER HEIGHT* WIDTH DEPTH UNIT

5205000, 1130 585 830 mm

-2, -3, -4, -5, -6 44.5 23.03 32.67 Inches

1300 585 830 mm

5205000-7, -8
51.2 21.9 32.7 Inches

* Dimensions given with floating keyboard stowed for transport and the LCD Monitor down.

3-6-2-3 Weight with monitor and peripherals

Table 3-5 Weight of LOGIQ E9 with monitor and peripherals

PART NUMBER WEIGHT [KG] WEIGHT [LBS]

5205000x 135 298

3-6-2-4 Acoustic noise output

Less than 48 dB(A) at 20 degrees Celsius, measured in the operators head position, 20 cm in front of
the keyboard’s right corner, at 1.30 m above the floor, and in a distance of 1 meter at all four sides, 1
meter above the floor.

3 - 16 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-3 Electrical specifications

WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ E9 UNIT TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST
LIKELY DESTROY THE UNIT.

3-6-3-1 Verification of the LOGIQ E9’s voltage setting

Verify that the mains voltage specified for the unit is available on-site.

The voltage setting for the unit is found on a label on the back of the LOGIQ E9 on lower rear frame of
the LOGIQ E9.

3-6-3-2 Electrical specifications for LOGIQ E9

See: Table 2-3 "Electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E9" on page 2-3 for the electrical specifications
for LOGIQ E9 include LCD and on board peripherals.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 17

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-4 Connections on the I/O Rear Panel

NOTE: Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according
to the respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC60950 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-
1 for medical equipment). Furthermore, all complete configurations shall comply with the valid
version of the system standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects additional equipment
to the signal input part or signal output part of LOGIQ E9, configures a medical system, and is
therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the valid version of
IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical service department or your local representative
for GE Healthcare.

3-6-4-1 Connect Ethernet

Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector (3) on the External I/O (rear side of LOGIQ E9).

Figure 3-7 Ethernet, Audio (1) and DVI-I (2) connection for External Monitor on
rear side of LOGIQ E9 - R3.x and earlier

L R

5180173 revx

1 2 3

3 - 18 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-4-1 Connect Ethernet (cont’d)

Figure 3-8 Audio (1), Ethernet (2), DVI-I (3) and SVHS (4) connection for External Monitor on
rear side of LOGIQ E9 - R4.x and Later

L R
4 3

2 1

1 4 3

CAUTION To avoid breaking the back cover while opening it in order to connect up the network cable, use
a flat blade screw driver or plastic card and pull hard to open up the back cover door.

SVHS Specificatios for BEP6

• DVI-I delivering both analog RGB and digital DVI out the rear customer accessible DVI-I port.
• The DVI-I output support a fixed 1280x1024 resolution @60Hz 24 bit color depth.
• The DVI-D Video output deliver a minimum of 1280x1024 @60Hz 24-bit color depth.

3-6-4-2 Connect USB Flash Drive

Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3, Section 7.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 19

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-5 Connections on the Patient I/O panel

3-6-5-1 Connect ECG

Refer to Chapter 10 in the Basic User Manual for more information.

3-6-6 Connecting Probes

3-6-6-1 Introduction to Connecting Probes

Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is on or off.

R3.x and earlier LOGIQ E9s have two types of probe ports: one non-DLP probe port and three DLP
probe ports (Figure 3-10). R4.x and later LOGIQ E9s have one type of probe ports: four DLP probe ports
(Figure 3-9).

The non-DLP probe port is compatible with the S1-5, S4-10, 6Tc (TEE probe), and 3CRF probe
connectors.
The three DLP probe ports are specific to the LOGIQ E9 probe connectors.

Figure 3-9 Probe connectors - (1) Non-DLP and (2) DLP Probe Port - R3.x and earlier

1 2

R4.x and later LOGIQ E9s have one type of probe ports: four DLP probe ports (Figure 3-10).
Figure 3-10 Probe connectors, four DLP Probe Ports - R4.x and Later

3 - 20 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-6-2 Connect a probe

NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a probe. However, it is a good
idea select a different probe or to freeze the image when removing a probe to avoid
disconnecting a live probe.

CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW THE PROBE HEAD TO HANG FREELY. EXCESSIVE IMPACT TO THE PROBE
WILL RESULT IN IRREPARABLE DAMAGE.

CAUTION TO PREVENT PROBE CONNECTOR PINS DAMAGE, OR PCB BOARD DAMAGE, DO NOT USE
EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN CONNECTING THE PROBES.

1.) Before connecting the probe:

a.) Perform a visual check of the probe pins and LOGIQ E9 sockets.
b.) Remove any dust or foam rests from the probe pins.
c.) Verify the probe and the probe cable for any visual damage.
2.) Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing upward.
3.) Turn the connector locking handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position.
4.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
5.) Turn the locking handle clockwise to the full vertical position to lock in place.
6.) Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor.

CAUTION KEEP THE PROBE CABLES AWAY FROM THE WHEELS.

DO NOT BEND THE PROBE CABLES.
DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES.

3-6-6-3 Disconnect a probe

1.) Select a different probe or Freeze the image before removing a probe in order to avoid
disconnecting a live probe.
2.) Rotate the lock handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector.
3.) Remove the connector from the port.
4.) Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case, see: 10-4-10
"Cleaning" on page 10-9 for cleaning instructions.

CAUTION REFER TO THE TEE PROBE MANUAL FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS (DIRECTION KZ192871).

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 21

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-7 Power On/Boot Up

3-6-7-1 Warnings

DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION LOGIQ E9 REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD LOGIQ E9
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.

NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.

NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five seconds. When turning OFF the
Circuit Breaker, WAIT until the ON/OFF button is no longer lit. The LOGIQ E9 should de-
energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.

3-6-7-2 Detailed Procedure

For a detailed procedure, see: 4-2-2 "Power ON/Boot Up" on page 4-3.

3 - 22 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-7-3 Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E9

Connecting AC Power to the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound unit involves preliminary checks of the power cord,
voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.

NOTE: The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power, then a center tapped power source is required (North America Only).

1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the Circuit Breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
3.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4.) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
5.) Connect the Power Cable’s female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
6.) Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp (ACC Clamp).
7.) Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, if not, switch it OFF.

Figure 3-11 The Circuit Breaker and ON/OFF button

8.) Connect the Power Cable’s other end (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the
proper rated voltage, and the unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 23

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-7-4 Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ E9

1.) Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit. The ON/OFF button will become
amber.

Figure 3-12 The Circuit breaker and ON/OFF button

You should hear a “click” from the relays in the AC Power and the unit is ready to boot. The ON/OFF
button will turn amber. This indicates that there is power to the PS, but the system is OFF.

2.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to boot the unit. The ON/OFF button will
turn green when it is pressed.

During a normal boot, you may observe that:

a.) The unit’s ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the
fan sound).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Operator Panel (Console), Monitor, Front End
Processor and Back End Processor.
c.) Back End Processor and rest of the LOGIQ E9 starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
d.) Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
e.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
f.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
g.) The software initiates and sets up the Front End electronics and the rest of the instrument.
h.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.
i.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that
no probe has been connected.

3 - 24 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-7-4 Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ E9 (cont’d)

Figure 3-13 2D Screen on the display

NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typically less than 170 seconds. When using the sleep mode
(R2.x.x or R3.x.x), start-up time is less then 120 seconds. If starting after a power loss or a lock-
up, the start-up time may be up to four minutes.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 25

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-8 Power shut down

When you switch off the unit, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence.

Figure 3-14 System - Exit menu - R1.x.x

The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when switching off the unit, gives you these choices:

• Logoff
Use this button to log off the current user.

The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.

If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment.

• Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down. It is recommended to
perform a full shutdown at least once a week.

If the Shutdown button is dimmed, press the ON/OFF button or Alt F10 to shut down the unit.

• Cancel
Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.

3 - 26 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-8 Power shut down (cont’d)

Sleep mode (only available in LOGIQ E9 running R2.x.x and R3.x.x software).
Figure 3-15 System - Exit menu

The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when switching off the unit, gives you these choices:

• Logoff
Use this button to log off the current user.

The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.

If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment.

• Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down. It is recommended to
perform a full shutdown at least once a week.

If the Shutdown button is dimmed, press the ON/OFF button or Alt F10 to shut down the unit.

• Cancel
Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 27

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-9 Complete power down

1.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to display the System - Exit menu.

Figure 3-16 Press once on the ON/OFF button

3 - 28 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-9 Complete power down (cont’d)

Figure 3-17 System - Exit menu (R1.x.x)

Figure 3-18 System - Exit menu (R2.x.x and R3.x.x)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 29

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-9 Complete power down (cont’d)

Figure 3-19 System - Exit / Download menu (R5 and later)

2.) Select Shutdown to do a complete power down of the unit.

The Back End Processor will first turn off the LOGIQ E9 activity and print the message “Please wait
- Shutdown in progress in the LCD display on the Operator Panel.

Next, it starts to shut down itself. The time to turn down the unit, including the Back End Processor,
may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute.

The last thing that shuts down, is the light on the Operator Panel, indicating that you can continue
with the next step.

NOTICE Be sure to wait with the next step until the system has finished its shut-down. Failing to do so, may
destroy data on the Hard Disk Drive, making the system fail later.

3.) Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the unit. This will cut power
distribution within the unit.

3 - 30 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-6-9 Complete power down (cont’d)

3-6-9-1 Sleep Mode

Only available in LOGIQ E9 running R2.x.x and R3.x.x software.

Use Sleep Mode when you do a portable exam in order to reduce the time to start up the system. When
you use Sleep Mode, it only takes 90 seconds to start up the system versus 2-3 minutes. To activate
Sleep Mode, press the ON/OFF button and select Sleep.

NOTICE For optimum system operation, it is recommended that a full shutdown of the system is performed at
least once every 24-hour period. If you shut down the system at the end of the day, no other action is
needed.

Before returning a system to the customer, perform the functional checks. See: Section 4-3 "Functional
checks" on page 4-31.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 31

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-7
Configuration
3-7-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to configure the LOGIQ E9.

3-7-2 LOGIQ E9 configuration

For complete instructions, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter
16. See: Table 1-8 "LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual per console" on page 1-20.

3-7-2-1 System Configuration

- Set Device Destinations (see: 4-2-11-8 "Connectivity — Recording Miscellaneous settings" on
page 4-24).
- Set Dataflow (see: 4-2-11-6 "Connectivity — Recording Dataflow settings" on page 4-22).
- Set Buttons (see: 4-2-11-7 "Connectivity — Recording the Print Key Assignments" on page 4-
23).
- Set up System Admin (see: 4-2-11-9 "Admin — Recording the Software Option Keys" on page
4-26).
- Set up Users (see: 4-2-11-10 "Admin — Users" on page 4-27).
- Set up Backup management (see: 4-2-11-11 "System — Data Store Management" on page 4-
28).
- Set up Peripherals (see: 4-2-11-12 "System — Recording Peripheral settings" on page 4-29).
- Set up Keyboard: language and regional settings. (For complete instructions, refer to the
appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16.)

3 - 32 Section 3-7 - Configuration

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-7-3 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection

3-7-3-1 Approved Internal Peripherals (Optional)

This list covers the internal peripherals available for LOGIQ E9:

• Printer, Monochrome (Black and White), Digital, SONY.

• Digital Video Recorder (DVR). Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 DVR Option
Installation Manual (5180205-100).
• USB Flash Drive. Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 User Manual.
• 4D Motor Controller. Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options Manual, Direction
5180288-100.
• Volume Navigation. Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options Manual, Direction
5180409-100.
• WLAN (Wireless LAN R2.x.x or later)
• Patient I/O (ECG Option R2.x.x or later)

3-7-3-2 Approved External Peripherals (Optional)

The external printers are connected via Ethernet (TCP/IP Network) as DICOM devices.

• DICOM Printers. Connected via Ethernet (TCP/IP Network or WLAN) as DICOM devices.
• USB Printers, see: 9-15-1 "Printers" on page 9-79.
• USB Footswitch

3-7-3-3 Additional Information

See: Section 9-15 "Peripherals" on page 9-78 for replacement units.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 33

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-7-3-4 Printer/DVR Checks

Check that Printer/DVR work as described below:

Table 3-6 Peripheral Checks

Step Task to do Notes

1. Press Freeze. Stops image acquisition.

Press (Print 1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or (Print 4) on Prints image displayed on the screen on Black and White or Color
2.
the Control Panel printer, depending on the key assignment configuration.

3. Press [VIDEO] icon on the Control Panel. Brings up the DVR Touch Panel (if the customer has the DVR option).

4. Press [VIDEO] icon on the Control Panel Returns to the scanning mode

5. Press [RECORD] icon on the Control panel. Starts Recording.

6. Press [PLAY] icon on the Control panel. Plays back an examination.

7. Press [STOP] icon on the Control panel. Stops recording.

3-7-3-5 Turn OFF Power to LOGIQ E9

See: 3-6-8 "Power shut down" on page 3-26.

3-7-4 Available Probes

See: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-104.

3-7-5 Software Options Configuration

3-7-5-1 Software Option Installation

A password (Software Option String) enables a software option or a combination of software options.
This password is specific for each LOGIQ E9.

3 - 34 Section 3-7 - Configuration

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-7-5-2 Installing a Software Option

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.
2.) Enter the new option key code in the SW Option Key section.

Figure 3-20 System Admin screen, R1.x.x - Add button

Figure 3-21 System Admin screen, R2.x.x or later - Add button

3.) Select the Add button.

CAUTION INCORRECT PASSWORD ENTRY WILL RESULT IN LOSS OF SYSTEM OPTIONS.

IF PASSWORD IS INCORRECT, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL GE SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE OR THE ONLINE CENTER.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 35

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-7-5-2 Installing a Software Option (cont’d)

4.) In R5 and later the Option String can be imported from the media.

Figure 3-22 Option Keys File in R5 and later - Import

Media (CD/DVD, USB)

Option keys file can be imported from
Service Folder

There is an import button on the Utilities/

System Admin Preset Menu.

5.) Press Save to save the new setting.

6.) Restart to save and activate the settings and adjustments you have done so far.

3 - 36 Section 3-7 - Configuration

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-8
Connectivity overview
NOTE: If you are new or unfamiliar to connectivity on the LOGIQ E9, read Chapter 16, Customizing
Your System, of the Basic User Manual before you continue with the next descriptions and
procedures.

3-8-1 Physical connection

3-8-1-1 Stand-alone LOGIQ E9

No network connection needed.

3-8-1-2 Sneaker Net environment

No network connection needed.

3-8-1-3 Wired Ethernet from LOGIQ E9 to a Workstation

3-8-1-3-1Direct Cable Connection from the LOGIQ E9 to a Workstation via a Crossover Cable.
You will only need a Crossover Cable for network use to connect the two units this way.

1.) Connect one end of the crossed network cable to the network connector on the LOGIQ E9.
2.) Connect the other end to the network connector to the Workstation, see the Workstation Service
Manual.

3-8-1-3-2Connection via a Peer-to-Peer Network

You will need a network switch and one network cable for each unit connected to the switch.

3-8-1-3-3Connection via Hospital Network

You will need one network cable to connect the LOGIQ E9 to a wall outlet on the hospital’s network.

3-8-1-4 Connection using Wireless Option (R2.x.x or later)

Refer to:

- R2.x.x and R3.x.x, see: 8-6-8-3 "WLAN - Set up and Check" on page 8-164.
- R4.x and later, see: 8-11-23-3 "WLAN Set-up" on page 8-530.
- Chapter 5 for theory.
- Chapter 16, Configuring Connectivity of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 37

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-9
Connectivity Setup and Tips
Refer to the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual and see: Section "3-9-1 Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM
Communications for R2.x.x Software (some features only apply to R3.x.x) (cont’d)" on page 3-39 for
more information.

TOPICS covered in this Section:

• Section 3-9-1 "Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications for R2.x.x Software (some
features only apply to R3.x.x)" on page 3-38
• Section 3-9-2 "Devices, Services, Dataflows and Print Buttons" on page 3-40
• Section 3-9-3 "How to Get the LOGIQ E9 to Recognize another Device on the Network" on page 3-
41
• Section 3-9-4 "How to Setup and Use a DICOM Image Storage Service" on page 3-42

3-9-1 Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications for R2.x.x Software (some
features only apply to R3.x.x)

Table 3-7 Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP screen

1. Enter the LOGIQ E9 computer name. This may be the same as the station name.
2. Enter the LOGIQ E9 IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and network speed.
For automatic assignment of IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, select DHCP.

NOTE: If possible, set the LOGIQ E9 Network Speed to match that of the Network switch. If in
doubt, set it to AutoDetect. Otherwise, transfer times can be two to five times longer, during
which the LOGIQ E9 will appear to be locked up. (If the Hard Drive activity light on the front of
the console is lit steady or blinks quickly, the LOGIQ E9 is most likely not hung.)

3 - 38 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-1 Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications for R2.x.x Software (some features
only apply to R3.x.x) (cont’d)

Table 3-8 Utility -> Connectivity -> Device screen

1. Select MyComputer.
2. Assign an AE Title to the LOGIQ E9. (AE stands for Application Entity. DICOM services use
this to identify the LOGIQ E9.) AE Title is case-sensitive. This title may contain the Computer
Name from the TCP/IP page, if desired.

NOTE: It is NOT recommended to use the factory default. This is not prohibited, but more than
one system with the same AE Title can cause confusion.
3. Edit the Port Number if needed. “104” is typical. Save your changes and reboot the system.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 39

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-2 Devices, Services, Dataflows and Print Buttons

Figure 3-23 Dataflows

PACS Server,
Device
Printer, etc.

Services

Storage Performed Query /

Print Service Image Storage
Commitment Worklist Service Procedure Retrieve
Service
Service Service Service

Transfer of
Images and
Data Send To: Print Button Dataflow
LOGIQ E9
Local Archive

A device is a physical unit, separate from the LOGIQ E9, where images and data can be stored and shared. A
device provides various services to the LOGIQ E9.

To represent the device on the LOGIQ E9, add it in Utility -> Connectivity -> Device.

To represent the services of the device(s) on the LOGIQ E9, add them in
Utility -> Connectivity -> Service.

Set up Dataflows and Print Buttons to direct images and data to the services.

Use Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow and Utility -> Connectivity -> Button.

A dataflow stores images in the clipboard to the local Hard Disk Drive. When the exam ends, the dataflow sends
the images to the services assigned to it. (A Direct Store setting on the dataflow changes this behavior.
See: 1.) "Dataflow" on page 3-49.)
A print button sends an image to the services assigned to it whenever pressed. A print button also stores the image
locally (to the “clipboard”) if “Copy to Dataflow” is assigned to it.

Send To (in the Exam View tab) sends an existing exam’s images and other data to one service at a time.
See: 3.) "Send To" on page 3-49.)

Worklist and Query/Retrieve services transfer data to the LOGIQ E9. See: 3-9-4-5 "How to Setup and Use a DICOM
Worklist Service" on page 3-58 and 3-9-4-9 "How to Setup and Use a DICOM Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Service" on
page 3-69.

Keep in mind that the settings of a print button that stores an image on the LOGIQ E9 determine the format of the
image file stored locally. A service’s settings dictate the format of the file that is sent to the service.

3 - 40 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-3 How to Get the LOGIQ E9 to Recognize another Device on the Network

Table 3-9 Utility -> Connectivity -> Device screen

1. Press Add. The system creates a device called “NewDevice.”

2. Change the name to one of your choosing.
3. Enter the IP address of the device.
Ping / Smiley

4. Save your changes and then press Ping. A “Smiley Face” indicates
successful communication between your LOGIQ E9 and the device. A “Frown”
indicates failed communication. Check the following:
• Is the device running?
• Is it connected to the network?
• Did you enter the right IP address?

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 41

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Image Storage Service

An Image Storage Service provides a place to store patient and exam data from the LOGIQ E9 and
corresponding images. The Image Storage Service, or the device that hosts it, is often called a Patient
Archiving and Communication System (PACS).

3 - 42 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-1 Initial Steps

To setup an Image Storage Service on the LOGIQ E9, follow these steps:
Table 3-10 Initial Steps - Setup an Image Storage Service
R3.x and earlier

R4.x and later

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 43

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-10 Initial Steps - Setup an Image Storage Service

1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select the
device on which the service resides. (This assumes you have already setup the device in the
Device tab in 3-9-1 "Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications for R2.x.x Software
(some features only apply to R3.x.x)" on page 3-38).
2. From the Select Service Type to Add drop-down menu, select DICOM Image Storage and
press Add.
3. Change the name of the service to one of your choosing.
4. Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service. AE Title is case-sensitive.
5. Save your changes and press Verify. A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with
the service.

NOTE: If you get a successful Ping (Smiley Face) at the device level but not at the service
level, it is possible that the AE Title or Port Number of the service settings are incorrect. Ensure
that these are correct then re-verify. Be sure that the service type (Store, Print, etc) is correct
and supported by the device.

3 - 44 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-2 Properties

Maximum Retries, Retry Interval, and Timeout are used by the Retry protocol when the LOGIQ E9
encounters communication problems with a service:
Table 3-11 Properties

Maximum Retries, Retry Interval, Timeout

How many seconds the LOGIQ E9 should attempt to establish

Timeout
communications with the service

How many times to attempt to establish communication again in the event

Maximum Retries
of failure

Retry Interval How many seconds to wait between each retry attempt

Using the values in Table 3-10 "Initial Steps - Setup an Image Storage Service" on page 3-43 (which
are the default and recommended settings), the LOGIQ E9 will attempt to establish communications
for 30 seconds, up to three times (the original attempt and two retries), with a gap between each
attempt of 10 seconds.

When a print button is set to RawDicom Single (see: 2.) "Print Button" on
page 3-57), and the user presses it while scanning live, it stores a single
DICOM frame (bitmap of the image), along with the raw-data of the image.
The raw data allows the system to treat this as a multi-frame image (cine
clip) because it can regenerate the multiple frames from the raw data
when the situation calls for it.

One such situation is “Allow Multiframe.” It instructs the LOGIQ E9 to

generate a multi-frame image to send to the service in the event that the
Allow Multiframe
clip was stored via a print button set to RawDicom Single. When the time
comes to send the clip to the service, the LOGIQ E9 will generate a multi-
frame from the raw data before putting it on the spooler. Such multi-frames
are not permanently stored on the LOGIQ E9 local hard drive.

NOTE: “Allow Multiframe” is relevant only for clips stored via a print button
set to RawDicom Single. Images stored with either “Dicom & Multiple” or
“RawDicom & Multiple” print button settings are always transferred as
multi-frame images, regardless of the setting for “Allow Multiframe.”

R4.x and later Loops (RawDicom & Single or DICOM Multiframe file) shall be transferred
Allow Clips only if this option is checked. Default state should be checked.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 45

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-11 Properties

This will transfer the raw data of an image, if the image was stored as
RawDICOM. Checkmark this when transferring to a service that can
interpret GE-proprietary raw image data, such as Centricity. If it is
checked when sending to a service that does not support GE raw data,
the service may accept the image but ignore the raw data, or may not
Allow Raw Data accept the image.

NOTE: The LOGIQ E9 stores raw data in a DICOM private tag in an image
file. A PACS may delete all private tags, or it may leave them intact, or it
may allow configuration in this regard. Keep this in mind if you later want
to retrieve raw data images from the service.

R4.x and later

Enhanced DICOM objects shall only be transferred if this option is
Allow Enhanced DICOM
checked. Default state should be unchecked.
Objects

R4.x and later

This compresses still image files prior to sending them to the service.
Still Image Compression

R4.x and later

This compresses loops /enhanced DICOM files prior to sending them to
Clip/Volume
the service.
Compression

This compresses image files prior to sending them to the service.

Compression takes time, but saves time when the image is transferred.
Compression
Also, storage space on the service is reduced with compression. Set the
compression type to one the service accepts.

Compression Formats

NOTE: Determine which compression formats the service accepts. Using an incorrect format will
cause problems that can be hard to troubleshoot.

None No compression occurs.

Run-length Encoding – compression that does not lose any data that will
RLE
degrade image quality (so-called “lossless” compression).

Joint Photographic Experts Group – compression that provides both

lossless and lossy (image quality degradation) settings. Select this and a
JPG “Quality %” field appears, in which you can select “lossless” or various
numeric settings; the higher the setting, the less image data is
compressed (bigger image file) and the less image quality is degraded.

Improved version of JPEG that, compared to JPEG, maintains the same

JPEG2000 image quality in a smaller image file, or provides better image quality in a
file of the same size.
(continued on next page)

3 - 46 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-11 Properties

This controls the maximum number of frames per second that are
transferred:
• 25, 30 – Certain high-frame-rate applications like cardiology can
generate very large datasets. Use 25 or 30 to decimate image frames as
Max Framerate desired to send no more than 25 or 30 frames per second. This can affect
image quality.
• Full - no frame rate decimation occurs (frames are not dropped). In
radiology, frame rates are typically under 25-30 so Full should be an
acceptable setting.

This controls when color appears in images sent to the service:

• Gray – Regardless of color in the image area, or in annotation
(comments, measurements, arrows, body patterns, depth scale, title bar),
images sent to the service will be in shades of gray. (In DICOM terms, the
Gray setting forces images to be sent in MONOCHROME2 format.)
• Color – Even if there is no color in the image area itself, an image sent
to the service will still have color, even if only the title bar and depth scale
Color Support
have color. (The Color setting forces images to be sent in RGB format.)
• Mixed – If the image area itself has color, an image sent to the service
will have color; otherwise, the image will be in shades of gray. (The Mixed
setting sends images as is, without conversion.)

NOTE: Color is recommended unless the user wants to reduce image

storage size. Then, Mixed is suggested.
(continued on next page)

The creates an “association” with the service prior to sending images to

it. Think of it as a handshake. When check-marked, “Reopen Per Image”
causes the to create an association with the service for each image in a
group of images and to release that association after each image is
transmitted. When it is unchecked, the creates only one association prior
Reopen Per Image
to sending any images, and doesn’t release it until all images have been
sent. Reopen Per Image is common for CT or MR, where associations are
used to distinguish views (one association for each view). This is not a
typical use for Ultrasound. Unless you have a specific reason to create an
association for each image, leave this option unchecked.

A Structured Report is a non-image DICOM data file that contains

Enable Structured
measurements and calculations of an exam. If you want to transmit a
Reporting
Structured Report, check Enable Structured Reporting.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 47

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-11 Properties

Key Image Notes (KIN) provides a way in DICOM to convey certain

information and requests about images in an exam between the
and the service. The supports one KIN mode: Image Rejection. Image
Rejection indicates which images in a currently-open exam should be
deleted.
Key Image Notes
To use Image Rejection, assign the service to a dataflow, and check the
Direct Store dataflow setting. When the user scans with this dataflow in
an exam, deletes one or more images in the clipboard and ends the exam,
the sends a KIN DICOM object to the service. This object lists the images
to be rejected. The service either deletes the images or tags them with a
label such as “Rejected for Quality Reasons.”

3 - 48 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-3 Sending Images and Data to a DICOM Image Storage Service

The provides three ways to send images and data:

1.) Dataflow
2.) Print Button
3.) Send To
1.) Dataflow
The default setup stores images in its local Hard Disk Drive. A dataflow allows the to send images to
other locations as well.

To setup a dataflow, follow these steps:

Table 3-12 Dataflow

Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow screen

1. Navigate to Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow; press Add. The system creates a dataflow
called “NewDataflow.”
2. Change the name to one of your choosing.
3. Notice the list of available services to the left of the << and >> buttons. Select each DICOM
service you want to attach to your dataflow and press >>. This makes it appear in the list on
the right, indicating that the service is now assigned to the dataflow.

NOTE: You cannot remove “Local Archive – Int HD” from the dataflow. This guarantees that
images will be saved on the local Hard Disk Drive of the and not just transmitted to the service.
4. Check Direct Store if you want an image generated by a print button to immediately be sent
to the dataflow’s attached services rather than waiting until the exam is ended for all images.

NOTE: If you plan to generate long cine loops, “Direct Store” is NOT recommended (either on
the dataflow or via a Print button directly), because system response may be slow.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 49

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-12 Dataflow

Utility -> Connectivity -> Button

5. Navigate to Utility -> Connectivity -> Button, select a print button and add “Copy to Dataflow”
to its Printflow View. DO NOT add the DICOM Image Storage Service to the Printflow as you
would run the risk of sending each image to the service twice. Set the other parameters of the
print button as you choose, using “Print Button Settings” in section Table 3-14 "Print Button
Settings" on page 3-52 as a guide; but keep in mind that the settings of the service will override
the settings of the button for the images sent to the service.
Patient Page - Dataflow Drop-down Menu

6. Back on the Patient page, select your dataflow from the drop-down menu. From that point on,
pressing your configured print button sends your images to the service(s) added to your
dataflow.

NOTE: Whenever you change the settings of a dataflow, before you use it, select a different
dataflow or “No Archive” on the Patient screen, and then reselect the changed dataflow. This
forces the to read the modified resource file and implement your changes. If you change the
settings of any service to which the dataflow directs traffic, you do not need to reselect it.

3 - 50 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-3 Sending Images and Data to a DICOM Image Storage Service (cont’d)

2.) Print Button

The typical use for a print button is to copy to dataflow. However, the print button can be set up for image
transfer to a DICOM Image Storage service as a quick way to accomplish “direct store” to that service
without having to setup a dataflow. Each image is immediately sent to the service rather than waiting
until the exam is ended for all images to be transferred. Another use of this technique is to send existing
images directly to a PACS.

NOTE: If you plan to generate long cine loops, it is NOT recommended to use “Direct Store” (either on
the dataflow or via a print button directly) as the system response may be slow.

To setup a Print Button for this purpose, follow these steps:

Table 3-13 Print Button Setup

1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Button, select one of the “Physical Print Buttons.”
2. Set Format, Image Frames, and Compression as desired. See: Table 3-14 "Print Button
Settings" on page 3-52.
3. Notice the list of available services to the left of the << and >> buttons. Select each DICOM
service you want to assign to your print button and press >>.

(If you don’t add “Copy to Dataflow” to the print button’s Printflow, you will send images directly
to the DICOM service(s) without having them stored permanently on the . With a dataflow, the
images are always stored permanently in the database of the .)

From this point on, pressing your configured print button immediately places the image on the
spooler to be sent to the service(s) assigned to the button.

NOTE: If you are using a dataflow to which one of your DICOM services is assigned, DO NOT
add that same service to a print button. If you do, two copies of each image may be sent to the
service with each press of the print button.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 51

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-3 Sending Images and Data to a DICOM Image Storage Service (cont’d)

Table 3-14 Print Button Settings

Format

The resulting file contains DICOM data and a bitmap of the image. Use
DICOM format to store to DICOM Print devices or to Image Storage
services that do not support raw data. Raw DICOM can still be used in
DICOM
these cases, but it is best to uncheck the Allow Raw Data box on the
service. This flexibility is why the system defaults to RawDicom (Single)
for P1.

The resulting file includes the Raw Data, the DICOM data and a bitmap of
the image. Use RawDicom format to store locally to the . This allows for
numerous post-processing, non-acquisition actions and for the replay of
RawDicom cine loops without the overhead of storing multiple DICOM frames. (Loops
are included in the raw data.) RawDicom can also be used to send to a
PACS, such as Centricity and ViewPoint, which supports various degrees
of raw data functionality.

Use this to generate a Structured Report for the measurements and

calculations of the exam currently open.
M&A
See: 3-9-4-8 "Structured Reporting" on page 3-67 for additional
information.

Image Frames

Stores a single DICOM frame (bitmap of the image). Note that a raw-data
Single loop is still available if used with RawDicom. This format captures the
video area. It allows measurements without calibration.

Stores multiple DICOM frames (one bitmap for each frame). Select this to
either store multiple DICOM frames locally on the or to export cine loops
to import elsewhere.
Multiple
This option requires more disk space and takes longer to store images
after the print button is pressed. This format captures the image area only.
It allows measurements without calibration.

Stores a screen capture of a selected area. Select this and another drop-
down menu lets you select Image Area, Video Area, or Whole Screen for
the capture area. A Secondary Capture contains no calibration data, just
Secondary Capture
pixel data. Thus it requires manual calibration for measurements, if you
recall the image on the or review it on the PACS. Measurements without
calibration use pixels as the unit.

Independent of the Single, Multiple and Secondary Capture, dual and quad screen images are sent
as secondary captures to a PACS. Measurements on these types of images are in pixels.

Note about “bitmap”: Bitmap does not refer to a file in “.bmp” format. The terms “image”, “frame”, and
“bitmap” are interchangeable in a way. For multi-frame images it makes sense to say frame. On the
other hand, DICOM is all about images; the image portion of the file (as opposed to the header) is
really nothing more than a bitmap or screen capture.
(continued on next page)

3 - 52 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-14 Print Button Settings

Print buttons use the same formats as Compression on the Image Storage
Service.

NOTE: Suppose compression is specified on both a print button and on

an image storage service, either assigned to the button or assigned to the
dataflow in use. Also, suppose the compression settings are different. At
the point the is to send an image generated by the print button to the
service, the will first un-compress the compressed version of the print
Compression button, and then recompress it using the settings of the service. If the
compression of the print button is lossy, the un-compression will not
completely restore the original image. Then applying the compression of
the service still generates a lossy image. The process of un-compressing
and recompressing only has a negative impact on system performance.

In general then, DO NOT use compression on a print key if images it

generates end up getting sent to a service; or, IF YOU DO, use the exact
same compression on the service.

NOTE: Print button actions can also be modified per model (abdomen, etc.) by settings in
Utility -> Application -> Print Controls. Inspect them when print button behavior differs from
expected.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 53

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-3 Sending Images and Data to a DICOM Image Storage Service (cont’d)

3.) Send To
Use Send To to send existing exams to a DICOM service. Follow these steps:
Table 3-15 Send To

1. On the Patient screen, select the desired patient. In the Exam View tab, select the exam to
transfer.
2. Press Send To.

3. A pop-up appears with a drop-down menu. Select any existing service to which images can be
sent (typically, DICOM Image Storage and Print services). Select the desired service and
press OK.
4. Press F4 to access the DICOM Job Spooler to can confirm successful transmission of the
exam.

3 - 54 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-4 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Print Service

A DICOM printer is different from a typical network printer. It understands and accepts image files in
DICOM format, and extracts and prints the images within.

Print Service Setup

To setup a Print Service on your , follow these steps:

Table 3-16 Print Service Setup

1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select the
device on which the service resides. (This assumes you have already setup the device in the
Device tab.)
2. From the Select Service drop-down menu, select DICOM Print and press Add.
3. Change the name of the service to one of your choosing.
4. Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service. AE Title is case-sensitive.
5. From the Vendor drop-down menu, select the vendor of the service printer. The system adjusts
some of the Properties of the printer accordingly.
6. Maximum Retries, Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image
Storage Services. See: 3-9-4-2 "Properties" on page 3-45.
7. Set the Properties of the printer as desired. Refer to the operator manual of the printer for
preferred or expected settings. The graphic in this Table shows typical settings.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 55

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-16 Print Service Setup

8. The allows you to annotate each image: check Enable. The Annotation section of the screen
expands to let you set parameters for this feature:
a.) Field: Combination of patient id, last name, and first name to appear in the annotation
b.) Location: one or more of these, depending on the Vendor selected:
• Top: Annotation appears once, at the top of each sheet, whether one or more images are
on the sheet
• Bottom: Annotation appears once, at the bottom of each sheet, whether one or more
images are on the sheet
• Per Image: Annotation appears on each image
c.) Format ID and Starting Position: These are available only if the Vendor is “Other.” “Other”
settings and uses are beyond the scope of this document. Refer to the operator manual of the
printer for guidance.
9. Save your changes and press Verify. A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with
the service.

3 - 56 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-4 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Print Service (cont’d)

Print Service Use

As with a DICOM Image Storage Service, the provides three ways to send images to a Print Service:

1.) Dataflow
2.) Print Button
3.) Send To

The setups and uses are basically the same, except when the Format of the Print Service is set to
something other than 1x1. Then, if the Print Service is tied either to a dataflow with Direct Store set, or
to a print button, the will hold each image in its spooler until the number of images specified by Format
is reached. For example, a Format of 3x4 specifies 12 images per sheet. Until you press the print button
12 times, the sends nothing to the Print Service. If you press the print button 24 times, the sends the
images in two batches of 12 each. Any images left on the spooler when you start a new exam or end
the patient are sent at that point.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 57

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-5 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Worklist Service

A Worklist provides a repository of data for patients scheduled for an exam. The can query and filter
the entries of the Worklist and retrieve one or more of them to create a patient for each with an initial
exam.

Worklist Setup

To setup a Worklist Service on the , follow these steps:

Table 3-17 Worklist Setup

1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select the
device on which the service resides. (This assumes you have already setup the device in the
Device tab.)
2. From the Select Service drop-down menu, select DICOM Worklist and press Add.
3. Change the name of the service to one of your choosing.
4. Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service. AE Title is case-sensitive.
5. Maximum Retries, Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image
Storage Services. See: 3-9-4-2 "Properties" on page 3-45.
6. Set Maximum Results to the maximum number of results returned. The default and
recommended setting is 100.
7. Search Criteria are filters that restrict the entries returned by a query to those that match all
criteria. The provides two defaults: Modality (set to “US” for Ultrasound), and Scheduled
Procedure Step Start Date (commonly known as Exam date, and set to today). Modify these
or add other criteria as you wish. These define “remote” filtering.
See: "“Remote” versus “Local” Filtering" on page 3-59.
8. Save your changes and press Verify. A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with
the service.
9. Select the Don’t Use checkbox when you DO NOT want to remotely filter on that search
criterion, but still WANT TO keep the tag and its value for future use.

3 - 58 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-5 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Worklist Service (cont’d)

“Remote” versus “Local” Filtering

The search criteria you set up in the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page are used in “remote” filtering.
When you press the Query button on the Worklist screen, the criteria becomes part of the DICOM
message exchange between the and the Worklist service. The service returns only those entries that
match all of the search criteria.

In contrast, “local” filtering occurs “on the fly” on the patient data already queried, listed and stored on
the . Local filtering occurs every time you enter a value in one of the fields above the list on the Worklist
screen, such as Patient ID. The displayed list gets filtered progressively for each selection you make or
character you enter. Table 3-18 ""Remote” versus “Local” Filtering" illustrates this example: For a
Worklist with dozens of entries, select Accession Number as the Search Key and enter “1.” The list is
filtered to display only those entries whose Accession Number starts with “1.” Now enter “2” after the
“1.” The list is filtered again to display only those entries whose Accession Number starts with “12.”
Table 3-18 "Remote” versus “Local” Filtering

Local Filtering - Query Button NOT pressed

Local filtering DOES NOT generate any DICOM traffic between the and the service. It acts only upon
the list already on the . This local list does not constitute actual patients and exams on the . Creation
of patients and exams does not occur until you select one or more entries on the list and press
Transfer. But, there is a twist; if you enter a value in one of the fields above the list on the Worklist
screen, and then press Query, you are doing “remote” filtering again. The filter comprises the search
criteria you set up in the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page, plus whatever you entered in the
field(s) above the list on the Worklist screen.
Remote Filtering - Query Button PRESSED (exact match ONLY)

Continuing the Accession Number example: Enter “12” and press Query. The query returns only
exact matches.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 59

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-5 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Worklist Service (cont’d)

“Remote” versus “Local” Filtering (con’t.)

To get partial matching, similar to what local filtering provides, add an asterisk at the end of the string:
Table 3-19 "Remote” versus “Local” Filtering (con’t.)

Remote Filtering - Query Button PRESSED (partial matching)

Some of the remote search keys use special formats:

- A tag that represents a date (example: 00400002 Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date, which is
generally called "Exam Date") – three formats:
* A valid single date in format YYYYMMDD (example: 20141112 for November 12, 2014)
* A range of dates separated by a dash (example: 20140902-20141002 for the range
September 2, 2014 through October 2, 2014)
* TODAY[x,y], a range around today’s date where x represents the number of days before today,
and y represents the number of days after today (examples: TODAY[0,0] means today only;
TODAY[1,3] means yesterday, today, and the three days after today)
- A tag that represents a person’s name, such as 00100010 Patient's Name. A complete name entry
has five components separated by carets ( ^ ):
* LastName^FirstName^MiddleName^Prefix^Suffix (Example: Public^John^Q.^Mr.^Jr. for
"Mr. John Q. Public Jr.")
- Many non-date tags formed by letters, numbers or both can use the asterisk as a wildcard.
* For example, “M*” for Patient’s Name will return all patients whose last name starts with M. “M” by
itself though returns only those patients whose name is exactly “M”.
* Exceptions: Patient ID and Modality require an exact match.

3 - 60 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-5 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Worklist Service (cont’d)

“Remote” versus “Local” Filtering (con’t.)

The format of the values used for Search Criteria for both Worklist and Query/Retrieve services are
defined in the DICOM standard: http://medical.nema.org/dicom. Select the latest year available in this
folder. Open Part 5: “Data Structures and Encoding”, and examine Table 3-20 "Dicom Value
Representations" . For example, here are the rules for a valid AE Title:

Table 3-20 Dicom Value Representations

VR Name Definition Character Repertoire Length of Value

A string of characters that

Default Character Repertoire
identifies an Application Entity
excluding character code 5CH
with leading and trailing
AE (Application (the BACKSLASH “\” in 16 bytes
spaces (20H) being non-
Entity) ISO-IR 6) and control maximum
significant. A value consisting
characters LF, FF, CR and
solely of spaces shall not be
ESC.
used.

Basically, an AE Title can be up to 16 characters. Leading and trailing spaces are ignored. A title of all
spaces is not valid. These characters are not allowed: “\”, line feed, form feed, carriage return, and
escape.

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 61

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-5 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Worklist Service (cont’d)

Worklist Use

Follow these steps for Worklist Use:

Table 3-21 Worklist Use

Worklist Display

1. From the Patient screen, press Worklist. The Data Transfer screen appears with Worklist
selected as the Task.
2. In the From: drop-down menu, select the Worklist to query.
3. Press Query. The displays a list of all entries in the Worklist that meet the criteria set in both
the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page and on this Worklist screen.
4. To filter this list further, enter (more) values in Patient ID, Last Name, etc. This provides local
filtering. It DOES NOT generate more query requests to the Worklist service.
5. Select one or more entries from the list and press Transfer. The creates initial patient and
exam data for each entry. If you transferred a single entry, the returns to the Patient screen
with the patient and new exam selected.

The Worklist screen provides a couple of other controls:

6. Clear: This clears all local filters and restores the list to the last actual Query.
7. Dicom properties: This button displays some DICOM tags for the currently selected entry.

3 - 62 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-6 How to Setup and Use a DICOM MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Step) Service

A DICOM Performed Procedure, also known as Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS), is a way
to inform your billing system that an ultrasound procedure has been completed and can be billed.

A typical setup has your Worklist Service handle MPPS communications. For example, you can retrieve
today’s scheduled exams and report completed exams to the same system.

To set up MPPS on the , follow these steps:

Table 3-22 Setup and Use a DICOM MPPS

Utility -> Connectivity -> Service

1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select
your Worklist device.
2. From the drop-down menu of services, select Dicom Performed Procedure and press Add.
3. Provide a name, set the AE Title and Port Number for your Worklist service. AE Title is case-
sensitive.
4. Maximum Retries, Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image
Storage Services. See: 3-9-4-2 "Properties" on page 3-45.
5. Save your changes and press Verify. A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with
the service.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 63

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-22 Setup and Use a DICOM MPPS

Dataflow tab - MPPS added

6. In the Dataflow tab, add your MPPS service to the same dataflow that handles your DICOM
Image Storage service.

To set up MPPS on the server end, refer to the documentation of the Worklist service.

From this point on, from the perspective of the user, MPPS works quietly in the background. It
handles completed exams, abandoned exams, and empty exams with no input or monitoring
required from the user.

3 - 64 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-7 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Storage Commitment Service

DICOM Storage Commitment enables the to obtain a commitment from the image storage service that
images have been stored. With this commitment, you may choose to delete the images from the .

To set up Storage Commitment on the , follow these steps:

Table 3-23 DICOM Storage Commitment Service Setup and Use

1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select
your Image Storage server.
2. From the drop-down menu of services, select Dicom Storage Commitment and press Add.
3. Provide a name, set the AE Title and Port Number for your Image Storage service.
4. Maximum Retries, Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image
Storage Services. See: 3-9-4-2 "Properties" on page 3-45.
5. For Associated Storage, select the name of your Image Storage service.
6. Save your changes and press Verify. A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with
the service.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 65

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-23 DICOM Storage Commitment Service Setup and Use

7. In the Dataflow tab, add your Storage Commitment service to the same dataflow that handles
your Image Storage service.

Storage Commitment includes “reverse negotiation” with the receiving end – the Image
Storage service. Basically, the receiver needs to know the AE Title, IP address and Port
Number of the . Refer to the documentation of the Image Storage service for setting up Storage
Commitment.

NOTE: The Store Commit and its Associated Storage (A) MUST BE in the same Dataflow!
DICOM Job Spooler - STC identified

To confirm a successful Storage Commitment, press F4 to inspect the spooler after you send images
to the Image Storage service. An entry of:
• Type: STC
• Contents: Value equals the number of images stored, plus one if a Structured Report was sent.
• Status: “Done” or “Success”
• Error: no indications
confirms a successful storage commitment.

3 - 66 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-8 Structured Reporting

Structured Reporting provides for transmission of exam measurements and calculations in a separate
non-image file. It is not a service in itself, but is a feature of some DICOM Image Storage services, and
is always associated with one. The service must be able to interpret and display the data in the
Structured Report. Refer to the documentation of the Image Storage service documentation for
Structured Reporting.

Table 3-24 Structured Reporting

Utility -> Connectivity -> Service - Enable Structured Reporting checked

To enable Structured Reporting for an Image Storage service, go to the set-up screen for that service
in Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, check the Enable Structured Reporting box and press Save.

From that point on, the sends a Structured Report at the end of an exam with measurements.

(continued on next page)

Sending Structure Report

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 67

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-24 Structured Reporting

A Structured Report can be sent for the measurements and calculations of the currently-open exam
via a Print button. Add the Image Storage service to the Printflow setting of that button and set the
Format for that button to “M&A.” Take measurements in an exam and press the Print button. The
generates a Structured Report and sends it to the Image Storage service.

The does not store Structured Report files. Instead, when called upon, it conveys the measurements
and calculations to the service via the DICOM message exchange between them.

3 - 68 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-9 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Service

A Q/R service retrieves patients’ data and corresponding exams from a PACS. The can query the
service for exams belonging to patients that match search attributes. The can then retrieve the exams
from the service and store them in the local archive.

Q/R Service Setup

Follow these steps for Q/R Service Setup:

Table 3-25 Q/R Service Setup

1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select the
device on which the service resides. (This assumes you have already setup the device in the
Device tab.)
2. From the Select Service drop-down menu, select Dicom Query/Retrieve and press Add.
3. Change the name of the service to one of your choosing.
4. Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service. AE Title is case-sensitive.
5. Maximum Retries, Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image
Storage Services. See: 3-9-4-2 "Properties" on page 3-45.
6. Set Maximum Results to the maximum number of results returned.
7. Search Criteria are essentially the same as with Worklists. The concepts of “Remote” and
“Local” queries are also the same. See: "“Remote” versus “Local” Filtering" on page 3-59.
8. Save your changes and press Verify. A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with
the service.

NOTE: In many cases, the Q/R service allows a to query its patient data, but will not allow
actual transfer of exams/images without some level of authorization. Typically, the service
needs to know the AE Title, IP address, and Port Number of the . Refer to the documentation
of the Q/R service.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 69

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-9 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Service (cont’d)
Q/R Service Use

Follow these steps for Q/R Service Use:

Table 3-26 Q/R Service Use

1. From the Patient screen, press Data Transfer. The Data Transfer screen appears.
Select Q/R as the Task.
2. In the From: drop-down menu, select the Q/R service to query.
3. Press Query. The displays a list of all patients in the Q/R service that meet the criteria set in
both the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page and on this Q/R screen.
4. To filter this list further, enter (more) values in Patient ID, Last Name, etc.

NOTE: This provides local filtering; it DOES NOT generate more query requests to the Q/R
service, unless you press the Query button again.
5. Select one or more entries (patients or individual exams) from the list and press Transfer. The
retrieves the patients and their exams and stores them on its local hard drive. These patients
are available on the patient screen. You can view their exams and images, and create new
exams for them.

Each patient entry in the list indicates the number of series (exams) available for retrieval (5a).
To retrieve all of them, double-click anywhere in the row, or single-click the row and press the
Transfer button. To retrieve individual exams, single-click on the entry’s folder icon (5b). This
displays a list of the exams. Double-click the exam you want to retrieve, or Ctrl-click and Shift-
click to select more than one and then press Transfer.
6. During the transfer, the Transfer button changes to “Cancel”. Press it to return control to the
before all selected patients download. Example: If you selected 5 patients to transfer, but
pressed Cancel while the third one was transferring, Patients 1 and 2 have been retrieved and
will remain on the . Patients 4 and 5 will not be retrieved. As for
Patient 3, cancellation depends on when you pressed Cancel during its transfer; a partial
cancellation may occur: the patient's data transfers, but not its images.

3 - 70 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-9 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Service (cont’d)

Q/R Support for Volume Navigation

V Nav (Volume Navigation) combines 3D images from other modalities (CT, MR, etc.) with Ultrasound
scanning. Use Q/R to load non-Ultrasound images into the .

The supports retrieval of these non-US image types:

• MR (Magnetic Resonance)
• CT (Computed Tomography)
• PT (Positron Emission Tomography)
• XA (X-Ray Angio)
• MG (Digital Mammography)

Use filter “00080061 Modalities in Study” to retrieve non-US images. To filter on more than one modality,
separate each by a “\“ (backslash). For example, “US\MR\CT\PT\XA\MG” returns entries for all
modalities supported by the .

Basic Use with V Nav

This guide is not intended to cover V Nav extensively. However, here are the initial steps:

Table 3-27 Q/R Support for Volume Navigation

Image History Display

1. Query and retrieve the non-US study from PACS.

2. Create a new exam for this patient.
3. Press the V Nav key located above the keyboard on the operator panel.
4. On the Touch Panel, press Load; select From Database from the pop-up menu.
5. An Image History page displays on the screen. Select any desired image in the non-US series
and press Review.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 71

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-27 Q/R Support for Volume Navigation

Scan Screen

6. The displays the scan screen, prompts you to confirm the patient data set selected, and
displays the non-US volume on the right side of the screen.
7. To scroll through the dataset, press the Scroll Z Trackball button. Use the Trackball to scroll
through the dataset to find the area of interest.
8. When done, press Scroll Z again. You are now scanning live on the left side of the screen with
your reference view on the right screen.

3 - 72 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-10 Spooler
The DICOM Job Spooler shows all current and recent outgoing jobs performed by the . Outgoing jobs
involve objects sent to a remote service: images, Structured Reports, and Key Image Notes sent to a
PACS; print jobs to a DICOM printer; Storage Commitment to a PACS; and Modality Performed
Procedure Step to a Worklist service. They do not include incoming objects – namely, Worklist and Q/
R queries and transfers.
Table 3-28 Spooler

Dicom Job Spooler Display

Toggle F4 on the keyboard to alternately display and hide the Spooler.

The columns in the DICOM JOB SPOOLER display:
• # – job number
• Last Name and Patient ID – patient data
• Destination – name of service receiving the objects
• Type – object type: “Storage” for images, Structured Reports, and Key Image Notes; “STC” for
Storage Commitment; “MPPS” for Modality Performed Procedure Step
• Contents – number of objects being sent
• Status – Pending, Active, Hold, Done or Success, Failed
• Error – populated if the transfer fails
• Information – may contain general information

The buttons in the DICOM JOB SPOOLER display:

• Refresh – Refresh the status of jobs on the spooler
• Delete… – Select one or more jobs on the spooler and press Delete... to delete them. A pop-up
asks you to confirm your choice. (Successful jobs get deleted automatically after several minutes.)
• Resend – Select a single job and press Resend to send it to its original destination. If you select
more than one job, the Resend button is disabled.
• Send To… – Select a single job and press Send To... to send the job to any image storage or
print service set up on the LOGIQ E9. A pop-up presents a list of these services. If more than one
job is selected, the Send To… button is disabled.
• Hide – Same as F4: return to scan screen
• Select All – Selects all jobs in the list
NOTE: Data for a service, such as IP address, AE Title and Port #, become part of the job. If any are
incorrect, the job fails. If you correct the error, do not use Resend to try to send the job again. The
job file is not updated with the correct data and it will fail to transfer. Instead, return to the Exam View
tab, press Send To... and select the service or press "Send To" on the Spooler Display. This
replaces the old job file with one that has the correct data.
(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 73

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-10 Spooler (cont’d)

Common Error Messages

No connection established – check network and log file: This usually indicates a bad
or missing network connection OR incorrect IP Address, AE Title, or Port # between the and service.

The remote system was not able to interpret the image information – check log
file: This indicates an issue with the image or patient data, such as a missing Patient ID.

The remote service is out of resources: For example, the PACS has no more storage space.

3-9-4-11 Wireless
Configuring a Wireless network is beyond the scope of this guide. Both the User and Service manuals
cover Wireless setup in detail. In particular, for setting up the WLAN, refer to the appropriate version the
Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Configuring the Wireless Network (Option). (Available via the “Help” F1
key on the keyboard.)

Table 3-29 Wireless

“Help“ F1 Key Display

NOTE: When both wired and wireless are enabled, the chooses wired.

3 - 74 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

3-9-4-12 Network “Sniffer”

The includes a network sniffer, Wireshark, that displays network traffic between the
and other devices. Its output can be saved in files. It is useful for debugging connectivity issues. Usually
only DICOM traffic is . Follow these steps:

Table 3-30 Network “Sniffer”

Wireshark: Capture Interfaces

1. Press Alt-N to display Wireshark.

2. In Capture/Interfaces press Options on the interface that corresponds to the IP address.
Wireshark: Capture Options

3. Make sure "Capture packets in promiscuous mode" is unchecked. Press Start.

(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 75

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-30 Network “Sniffer”

Network Connection: Capturing Wireshark

4. In the "Filter" bar, enter "dcm" or "dicom." (Which one Wireshark accepts, depends on its
version. Wireshark will indicate whether it accepts one or the other by turning the Filter
background green.) Press Apply.

Once Wireshark displays DICOM traffic, select an individual line and expand the DICOM tree
in the lower frame to view DICOM-specific data.
Wireshark Info column

Capture Restart clears the current traffic display, in preparation for the next DICOM exchange.

In the Wireshark Info column, entries with “Reject” or “Abort” definitely indicate issues. For example,
the above exchange occurred when the tried to send an exam to Viewpoint, but Viewpoint did not
have the correct AE Title for the .
(continued on next page)

3 - 76 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-30 Network “Sniffer”

Encoded Value in the “Status” tag

Other times, however, the actual reason for an issue is often encoded in innocuous-looking entries
near the end of the exchange. For example, the above situation involved the attempting to send an
image to Viewpoint directly via a print button, without a patient id. Viewpoint’s “C-STORE-RSP”
message to the indicated, by an encoded value in the “Status” tag, that it did not store the image.

(continued on next page)

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 77

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3-30 Network “Sniffer”

Wireshark: Save file as

To save the network traffic currently displayed, stop the capture and press File / Save As. In the
pop-up, select a destination drive or folder, name the file, select both “All packets” and “Displayed”
under Packet Range, and press Save.

This saves the DICOM traffic in a file with suffix “.pcap”, which can be analyzed by Wireshark or a
similar network sniffer.

3 - 78 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-10
Setup paperwork
NOTE: During and after setup, the documentation (i.e. CDs with documentation, User’s Manuals,
Installation Manuals etc.) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system
documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during
the operation and service of the complete system.

3-10-1 User Manual(s)

Check that the correct User Manual(s) or CD with User Manuals, per software (SW) revision and
language, for the system is included.

3-10-2 Product Locator Card

NOTE: The Product Locator Card shown may not be the same as the provided Product Locator card.

Figure 3-24 Product Locator Card (Example)

GIB, European Central Admin Product Locator Card

g
GEHC - Americas Product Locator Cards Asia Service Operation
Mailing Product Locator – W523 XEROX Office No. 1, Yongchang North Road
Address P.O. Box 414 VÀKUUMTECHNOLÒGIAI GÈPGYÀR Beijing Economic and
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414 FÒTI ÙT 141 Technologic Development Area
1046 Budapest Hungary Beijing 100176 China
DESCRIPTION F DA MODEL REV SERIAL

OCP BS ORD

DISTRICT CUSTOMER NO. DATE (MO – DA - YR)

DESTINATION
NAME AND

SHIPMENT
ADDRESS

ZIP CODE

46-303268P1 Rev 14
Product Locator Card

g
GIB, European Central Admin
GEHC - Americas Product Locator Cards Asia Service Operation
Mailing Product Locator – W523 XEROX Office No. 1, Yongchang North Road
Address P.O. Box 414 VÀKUUMTECHNOLÒGIAI GÈPGYÀR Beijing Economic and
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414 FÒTI ÙT 141 Technologic Development Area
1046 Budapest Hungary Beijing 100176 China
DESCRIPTION F DA MODEL REV SERIAL

SYSTEM LTD. OCP BS ORD EMPLOYEE NO.

DISTRICT RO O M DATE (MO – DA - YR)

CUSTOMER NO.

DESTINATION

INSTALLATION NAME AND

ADDRESS

ZIP CODE
46-303268P1 Rev 14

Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 79

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

This page was intentionally left blank.

3 - 80 Section 3-10 - Setup paperwork

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 4
Functional Checks

Section 4-1
Overview
4-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ E9 scanner and
diagnostics instructions using the built-in service software.

4-1-2 Special Equipment required

• An empty (blank) DVD-R disk
• At least one probe (ideally you should check all the site probes used by the system.)
For available probes, see: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-104.
• ECG Harness:
- CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N:164L0025
- LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N: 164L0027

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-2
General procedures

NOTICE SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers
are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS BATTERY AT J3, OR THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT
PC N3 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY, EPS OR
CHARGEBOARD AND BEP MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF IF THE
CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET.

4-2-1 Overview
Some procedures are used more often than other. The intention with this section is to keep the most
used procedures in one place.

4-2 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up

4-2-2-1 Warnings

DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.

NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.

NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five (5) seconds. When turning OFF
the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker
ON.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-2-2 Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E9

Connecting AC Power to the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound unit involves preliminary checks of the power cord,
voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.

NOTE: The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power, then a center tapped power source is required.

1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the Circuit Breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
3.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4.) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
5.) Connect the Power Cable’s female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
6.) Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp (ACC Clamp).
7.) Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, if not, switch it OFF.

Figure 4-1 The Circuit Breaker and On/Off button

8.) Connect the Power Cable’s other end (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the
proper rated voltage, and the unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

4-4 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-2-3 Turn Unit ON

1.) Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit. The ON/OFF button will become
amber.

Figure 4-2 The Circuit breaker and ON/OFF button

You should hear a “click” from the relays in the AC Power and the unit is ready to boot. The ON/OFF
button will remain amber.

2.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to boot the unit. The ON/OFF button will
turn green when it is pressed.
During a normal boot, you may observe that:

a.) The unit’s ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the
fan sound).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Operator Panel (Console), Monitor, Front End
Processor and Back End Processor.
c.) Back End Processor and rest of scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
d.) Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
e.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
f.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
g.) The software initiates and sets up the Front End electronics and the rest of the instrument.
h.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.
i.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that
no probe has been connected.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-2-3 Turn Unit ON (cont’d)

Figure 4-3 2D Screen on the display

NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typically one and a half minutes or less. If starting after a power
loss or a lock-up, the start-up time may be up to four minutes.

4-6 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-3 Power shut down

When you switch off the unit, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence.
Figure 4-4 System - Exit menu

The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when switching off the unit, gives you these choices:

• Logoff
Use this button to log off the current user.

The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.

If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment.

• Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down. It is recommended to
perform a full shutdown at least once a week.

If the Shutdown button is dimmed, to shut down the unit.

• Cancel
Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-3 Power shut down (cont’d)

• Sleep Mode R2.x.x and R3.x
Use this button to reduce the boot up time (is less than 120 seconds). Intended to help on portable
studies.

Sleep saves all Memory content, in the Hard drive and shuts down. When booting up, memory
content is restored from HDD. This feature is not a substitute of a regular shutdown. The system
should be shutdown completely at least once a day to prevent performance issues.
Figure 4-5 Sleep Mode

4-8 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-3-1 Complete Power Down

Table 4-1 Power Down the LOGIQ E9

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Power down the system and disconnect the Press once on the ON/OFF button
mains power cable from the wall outlet.

Press once on the ON/OFF button on the

Operator Panel to display the System -
Exit menu. When you switch off the unit,
the system performs an automatic
shutdown sequence.

2. Select Shutdown to do a complete power

down of the LOGIQ E9.

The Back End Processor will first turn off

the scanner activity and print the message
“Please wait - Shutdown in progress” in the
LCD display on the Operator Panel.

Next, it starts to shut down itself. The time

to shutdown the LOGIQ E9, including the
Back End Processor, may vary from 10
seconds up to approximately 1 minute.

The last thing that shuts down is the light on

the Operator Panel, indicating that you can
continue with the next step.

NOTE: Sleep Mode only available in

LOGIQ E9 running R2.x.x and R3.x.x
software.

NOTICE

Be sure to wait with the next step until the system has finished its shut-down. Failing to do so may
destroy data on the Hard Disk Drive, making the system fail later.

Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the LOGIQ E9. This will cut power
distribution within the unit.

Unplug the unit.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-4 Top Console position adjustment

The system Top Console can be freely moved in all directions (if the power is on or if the mechanism is
not locked in position prior to powering down the system). The vertical displacement of the Top Console
is motor driven. The control buttons are located around the handles.

CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
Top Console. This includes both objects and people.

Power on the LOGIQ E9 before performing the following steps.

Figure 4-6 Top Console adjustment controls: Lock (1), Up/Down (2)

1. Lock button: unparking and sideways displacement of the console.

2.Up/Down button: raising/lowering the console.

To raise/lower the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Up/Down button (Figure 4-6, button 2) accordingly to raise or lower the
Top Console.
2.) Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired height.

4-2-4-1 To unlock the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button(s) (Figure 4-6, button 1) and pull the Top
Console out of the locked position until the Top console is in the desired position.
2.) Release the button(s).

4-2-4-2 To lock the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button(s) (Figure 4-6, button 1) while pushing
the Top Console in the locked position.
2.) Release the button(s).

4-2-4-3 To move the floating Top Console

1.) The unlocked Top Console can be easily moved by pressing and holding down the Lock and brake
release button(s) (Figure 4-6, button 1) and move the Top Console in any direction.
2.) Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired height.

4-2-4-4 To move the Top Console if Power is OFF

To manually release the console’s XY-mechanism (frogleg) if the power is OFF, see: Section 6-7
"Operator Panel movement" on page 6-21.

4 - 10 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-5 LCD Monitor Positions and Lock

Figure 4-7 LCD Monitor Position and Lock - R3.x and earlier

1. Unlocked LCD Monitor 2. Locked LCD Monitor

Figure 4-8 LCD Monitor Positions - R4.x

1 2 3

1. Tilt LCD Monitor 3. Move Monitor Up and Down

2. Move Monitor Back and Forth 4. Monitor front view / Monitor

tilted down (side view)

When the LCD Arm is unlocked. verify the LCD Monitor can move up/down (vertically) and left/right
(horizontally).

NOTE: The LCD Monitor can move approximately 100 mm (3.94 inches) vertically and
250 mm (9.84 inches) horizontally.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 11

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-5 LCD Monitor Positions and Lock (cont’d)

Figure 4-9 LCD Monitor Positions - R5.x

3
2

2
3

6 4b
4a
5 4c
6

1. Vertical Travel = 150mm 4. Pan Arm Rotation = 45º (90º total)

2. Rotation at Mount = 90º (180º total) 5. LCD Translation = 350mm

3. Lift Arm Rotation = 135º (270º 6. Tilt

total) a. No Collistion
b. Approximately 20º
(based on Pan Arm Off-set)
c. 85º-90º

When the LCD Arm Lock is unlocked. verify the LCD Monitor can move up/down (vertically) and left/
right (horizontally).

NOTE: The LCD Monitor can move approximately 100 mm (3.94 inches) vertically and
250 mm (9.84 inches) horizontally.

4 - 12 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-5-1 To unlock the LCD Monitor

• Turn the knob counter clockwise to unlock the LCD Monitor.
The LCD Monitor can be moved freely in all directions.

4-2-5-2 To lock the LCD Monitor

• Turn the knob clockwise to raise the lock and move the LCD Monitor into the parked position.

4-2-5-3 LCD Monitor position for Transport

Figure 4-10 LCD Monitor transport Position (R4.x shown)

Lock Arm and tilt LCD Monitor down.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 13

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-6 Removable Media

Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16 to perform the
following tasks:

• Using Removable Media

• Labeling Removable Media
• Formatting Removable Media
• Verifying Removable Media

4-2-7 Archiving and Loading Presets

4-2-7-1 Loading Presets from removable media

For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16.

4-2-8 Space Management

Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16 to perform the
following tasks:

• Configuring the Disk Management Function

• Setting the Disk Management Schedule
• Configuring Data Management Settings
• Configuring Destination Device Setting
• Running the Disk Management Function
• Starting Disk Management Manually

4-2-9 Backup
For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16.

3-7-3 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-33

4 - 14 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-10 Moving and Transporting the LOGIQ E9

4-2-10-1 The Casters (Wheels) control

The wheels of the LOGIQ E9 are controlled by the pedals located between the front wheels of the
LOGIQ E9.

Examine the wheels frequently for defects to avoid breaking or jamming.

Figure 4-11 Pedals

1.) Press the right pedal to engage the Parking brake.

2.) Press the center pedal to release the Parking brake.
3.) Press the left pedal to engage the Swivel lock.
4.) Press the center pedal to release the Swivel lock.

4-2-10-2 To prepare the LOGIQ E9 to be moved

1.) If not locked, move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position (see: 4-2-4 "Top
Console position adjustment" on page 4-10 and 4-2-5 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page
4-11).
2.) Turn the system off, including the circuit breaker (see: 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7), and
remove the plug from the wall.
3.) Disconnect all cables linking the LOGIQ E9 to any off-board peripheral devices and network.
4.) Secure the LOGIQ E9’s power cable.
5.) Place all probes in the probe holder. Ensure that the probe cables do not protrude from the
LOGIQ E9 or interfere with the wheels.
6.) Ensure that no loose items are left on the LOGIQ E9.
7.) Fold down the monitor.
8.) Unlock the brake.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 15

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-10-3 To ensure safety while moving the LOGIQ E9

1.) Ensure that the keyboard console and LCD monitor are in locked position (see: 4-2-4 "Top Console
position adjustment" on page 4-10 and 4-2-5 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page 4-11).

WARNING Do not move the LOGIQ E9 if the keyboard console and LCD Monitor are in free position.
Ensure that the hands of the patient and user are away from the console arm when
moving the keyboard console.
2.) Proceed cautiously when crossing door or elevator thresholds. Grasp the front handle grips or the
back handle bar and push or pull. Do not attempt to move the LOGIQ E9 using cables or probe
connectors. Take extra care while moving the LOGIQ E9 on inclines.
3.) Ensure that the LOGIQ E9 does not strike the walls or door frames.
4.) Ensure that the pathway is clear.
5.) Move the LOGIQ E9 slowly and carefully.

CAUTION Avoid ramps that are steeper than 10 degrees.

6.) Use two or more persons to move the LOGIQ E9 over long distances or on inclines.

4-2-10-4 Transporting the LOGIQ E9 by vehicle

Take extra care when transporting the LOGIQ E9 by vehicle. In addition to the moving precautions listed
on 4-2-10-3 "To ensure safety while moving the LOGIQ E9" on page 4-16‘, follow the procedure
described below.

1.) If not locked, move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position (see: 4-2-4 "Top
Console position adjustment" on page 4-10 and 4-2-5 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page
4-11).

WARNING Do not move/lift the unit if the keyboard console and LCD monitor are in free (unlocked)
position.
2.) Disconnect all probes and secure them in their boxes.
3.) Ensure that the transporting vehicle is appropriate for the unit’s weight.
4.) Park the vehicle on a level surface for loading and unloading.
5.) Secure the unit while it is on the lift, to prevent rolling. Do not attempt to hold it in place by hand.
Cushion the unit and strap the lower part so that it does not break loose.
6.) Ensure that the unit is secured inside the vehicle. Secure it with straps to the two hooks under the
system to prevent movement while in transit.
7.) Drive cautiously to prevent vibration damage.

4-2-10-5 Setting up at a new location

1.) When the unit is in place at a new location, lock the wheel brakes.
2.) Follow the set up procedure described in Section 3-6 "Completing the setup" on page 3-16.

4 - 16 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11 Recording important settings and parameters

NOTICE An error or power loss may occur during the software loading.
Always keep a paper record of the settings for the LOGIQ E9. Verify that it is current before starting a
software load!

4-2-11-1 Overview
See the following pages to record data.

These subsections include descriptions for recording/setting up data for the following screens.

With the system Powered On, follow the procedures below to document basic system information and
back up Presets, and if required, Patient Archive and Patient Images prior to software load.

• Utility -> Connectivity

- TCP/IP (see: 4-2-11-2 "Connectivity — Recording the TCP/IP settings" on page 4-18)
- Device (see: 4-2-11-4 "Connectivity — Recording the AE Title and Port settings" on page 4-
20)
- Misc (see: 4-2-11-8 "Connectivity — Recording Miscellaneous settings" on page 4-24)

• Utility -> Admin

- System Admin (see: 4-2-11-9 "Admin — Recording the Software Option Keys" on page 4-26

These subsections include descriptions for recording/setting up data for the following screens.
Hardcopy forms are provided here for convenience, but content will be included if selected during
Backup process.

• Utility -> Connectivity

- 4-2-11-5 "Connectivity — Recording Device Destination settings" on page 4-21Service (see:
4-2-11-5 "Connectivity — Recording Device Destination settings" on page 4-21).
- Dataflow (see: 4-2-11-6 "Connectivity — Recording Dataflow settings" on page 4-22).
- Buttons (see: 4-2-11-7 "Connectivity — Recording the Print Key Assignments" on page 4-23).
- Removable Media (see: 4-2-11-6 "Connectivity — Recording Dataflow settings" on page 4-
22).

• Utility -> Admin

- Users (see: 4-2-11-10 "Admin — Users" on page 4-27)

• Utility -> System

- Backup/Restore (see: 4-2-11-11 "System — Data Store Management" on page 4-28).
- Peripherals (see: 4-2-11-12 "System — Recording Peripheral settings" on page 4-29).
- About (see: 4-2-11-13 "System — Recording software and hardware versions" on page 4-30).
- General, Record Region, Language and Regional Options. See the latest revision of the
LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 17

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-2 Connectivity — Recording the TCP/IP settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP.

Figure 4-12 TCP/IP settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-2 "Record settings from TCP/IP screen" on page 4-18.

Table 4-2 Record settings from TCP/IP screen

PARAMETER VALUE

COMPUTER NAME

IP SETTINGS

IP ADDRESS

SUBNET MASK

DEFAULT GATEWAY

NETWORK SPEED

4 - 18 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-3 Connectivity — WLAN

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> WLAN.

Figure 4-13 WLAN settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-3 "Record settings from WLAN screen" on page 4-19.

Table 4-3 Record settings from WLAN screen

PARAMETER VALUE

NETWORK NAME (SSID)

NETWORK AUTHENTICATION

DATA ENCRYPTION

NETWORK KEY

KEY INDEX

Specify Yes/No to “The Key is

Provided Automatically”
IEEE 802.1x AUTHENTICATION
INFORMATION

EAP TYPE

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 19

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-4 Connectivity — Recording the AE Title and Port settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Device.
2.) Select My Computer in the List of Devices, if not already selected.

Figure 4-14 Device settings

3.) Record all settings in Table 4-4 "Record settings for My Computer from Device screen" on page 4-
20.

Table 4-4 Record settings for My Computer from Device screen

PARAMETER VALUE

AE TITLE

PORT NO

MACC ADDRESS

4.) Record all settings in Table 4-5 "Record settings for each device listed in Device table" on page 4-20.

Table 4-5 Record settings for each device listed in Device table

NAME IP ADDRESS

4 - 20 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-5 Connectivity — Recording Device Destination settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Service.

Figure 4-15 Service settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-6 "Record settings from Service screen" on page 4-21 for each
Destination Device and Service.

Table 4-6 Record settings from Service screen

DESTINATION DEVICE PROPERTIES

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 21

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-6 Connectivity — Recording Dataflow settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow.

Figure 4-16 Dataflow settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-7 "Record settings from Service screen" on page 4-22.

Table 4-7 Record settings from Service screen

DESTINATION DEVICE SERVICES (TYPES) FOR EACH

NAME DESTINATION DEVICE PROPERTIES NAME

4 - 22 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-7 Connectivity — Recording the Print Key Assignments

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Buttons.

Figure 4-17 Button settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-8 "Record settings from Button screen" on page 4-23.

Table 4-8 Record settings from Button screen

IMAGE COMPRESSION
PARAMETER FORMAT FRAMES COMPRESSION QUALITY PRINTFLOW VIEW
PRINT1

PRINT2

PRINT3

PRINT4

PRINTSCREEN

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 23

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-8 Connectivity — Recording Miscellaneous settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Miscellaneous.

Figure 4-18 Miscellaneous settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-9 "Record settings from Miscellaneous screen" on page 4-25.

4 - 24 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-8 Connectivity — Recording Miscellaneous settings (cont’d)

Table 4-9 Record settings from Miscellaneous screen

Patient/Exam Menu Options Setting Print and Store Options Setting

Use birthdate P[1-4] Key Sound

Auto search for patient Store Dual as DICOM Only

Automatic generation of patient ID Dual When Color Support is Mixed

After [End Current Patient], go to: Store Multiframe for Sec Capture Loops

Keep Search String Enable Smart Capture Area

Worklist Auto Query Store 2D (B-Mode) Loop with Timeline Data

Show BBT Patient List Print - Font Size

Double-click on patient list to start: DICOM Multi-frame image resolution

Detail Mode Show progress bar while storing image

Export to USB HDD: Create DICOMDIR Image Order Scheme

Automatic Disable Patient Data Columns in examination listing

Remember cursor position on Transfer Screen Enable Other ID

Patient/Exam Message Option Validation Format

Request acknowledge of End Exam action

Warn image store without patient

Warn register to No Archive

Warn image store to Read Only dataflow

Warn video titles exist in the internal storage

Columns in examination listing

Date | Category | Exam Description | Img. size | M&A | Disk

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 25

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-9 Admin — Recording the Software Option Keys

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.

Figure 4-19 System Admin settings

2.) Record the S/W Option Key(s) - alphanumeric string(s) - from the Installed Option Keys field in Table
4-10 "Software Option Keys" on page 4-26.

WARNING Make sure that the Software Option Keys (alphanumeric passwords) have been
recorded correctly. If the key is incorrect, you will not be able to log on after the SW
installation has been completed. The password is case sensitive. Hyphens must also
be recorded. There may be more than one password.

Table 4-10 Software Option Keys

SW OPTION KEYS

4 - 26 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-10 Admin — Users

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.

Figure 4-20 Users settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-11 "Record settings from Users screen" on page 4-27.

Table 4-11 Record settings from Users screen

GROUP
USER ID PREFIX LAST NAME FIRST NAME MEMBERSHIP OP RIGHTS

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 27

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-11 System — Data Store Management

1.) Select Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore.

Figure 4-21 Backup/Restore settings

2.) Record all settings in Table 4-12 "Record settings from Backup/Restore screen" on page 4-28.

Table 4-12 Record settings from Backup/Restore screen

MOVE FILES OLDER REMINDER DIALOG

THAN IN (DAYS) INTERVAL DAYS MEDIA CAPACITY
EZMove
EZBackup

4 - 28 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-12 System — Recording Peripheral settings

1.) Select Utility -> System -> Peripherals.

Figure 4-22 Peripherals settings

2.) Record Video Settings Format, DVR model, and Network printer model in Table 4-13 "Record
settings from Peripheral screen" on page 4-29.

Table 4-13 Record settings from Peripheral screen

PARAMETER VALUE

VIDEO SETTINGS FORMAT

___PAL ___NTSC

DVR PICTURE QUALITY

MIC LEVEL

STANDARD PRINTER

DEFAULT PRINTER

SETUP

ERASE VIDEO DATA AFTER BURNING IS

COMPLETE. (not pictured)

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 29

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-2-11-13 System — Recording software and hardware versions

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> About.

Figure 4-23 Hardware/Software information

2.) Record software and hardware versions in Table 4-14 "Record Software and Hardware versions"
on page 4-30.

Table 4-14 Record Software and Hardware versions

DESCRIPTION RECORD VERSIONS

APPLICATION SW VERSION

APPLICATION SW PART NUMBER

SYSTEM SW VERSION (IMAGE REV)

SYSTEM SW (IMAGE) PART NUMBER

4 - 30 Section 4-2 - General procedures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-3
Functional checks
4-3-1 Overview
After setting up the system, performing an upgrade, or replacing hardware, perform all appropriate
functional tests before returning a system to the customer.

4-3-2 Preparation
Turn on power to LOGIQ E9. For detailed description, see: 4-2-2 "Power ON/Boot Up" on page 4-3.

4-3-3 Basic Controls

4-3-3-1 Trackball Area

Different functions can be assigned to the trackball depending of the current active mode. The Trackball
area consist of:

• The Trackball: used as a cursor control in acquisition mode, scrolling control in freeze and as a
selection tool (like a mouse cursor) in post-processing mode.
• Three SELECT keys (identical): Perform the selected control or highlighted menu item.
• The TRACKBALL key: Toggles between the available trackball function assignments displayed in
the Status bar.
• The update menu key: enables quick access to image related functions from a pop-up menu.

4-3-3-2 Other Controls

Other controls are located on separate keys (knobs and buttons) or groups of keys on the Operator
Panel.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 31

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-4 Performance Tests

4-3-4-1 Recommended Test Phantoms (optional)

GE Healthcare recommends the RMI 430GS phantom (optional), but it is not required. It is the most
current phantom (optional) recommended to our field service personnel and provides the necessary
targets and extended life necessary for consistent system testing.
Figure 4-24 Performance tests

Lateral Distance
Measurement

Penetration
2

4
Axial Distance
Contrast Measurement
Resolution
& 6
Gray Scale
Photography 4 3 2 1
8 Functional
Resolution

10

Lateral
Resolution 12

14

Axial 16
Resolution
RMI 403GS

4 - 32 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-5 B-Mode Checks

For information on the system’s different modes as well as expected results, refer to the appropriate
version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

4-3-5-1 Introduction
The B-mode is the system’s default mode.
Figure 4-25 B-mode Screen Example

Depending on probe availability, choose the preset application shown below. The LOGIQ E9 probes are
ONLY approved for use for the applications listed in the table below.

For R4.x.x or later, IQC preset for Service is available.

Image Quality Check (IQC) is intended to facilitate Image Quality checks during Quality Assurance
Evaluations. Quality Assurance tests are used to determine whether a scanner is providing the same
level of performance year after year.

By using the same settings year after year, this ensures that the data collection is consistent,
independently of who performs the test.

This preset only includes fundamental settings for B-Mode.

Processing modes like SRI, Harmonics, etc., are turned off.

To do an Image Quality Check (IQC):

1.) Activate IQC via Utility -> Imaging Preset Manager -> Category (select the Category first).
2.) Click on the plus sign in front of IQC for Service.
3.) Assign IQC to a Touch Panel key by using the right arrow key.
4.) Map the IQC to the location you want it to appear on the Touch Panel.
5.) Select Model -> IQC.

4-3-5-2 Probe Indications for Use

See On-line Help or Chapter !7 of the Basic User Manual.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 33

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-5-3 Preparations
Use a phantom (optional) when doing these tests.

1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanner’s active probe connector.
- see: Section 3-6-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-20 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-104.
2.) Turn ON the scanner.
The B-Mode window is displayed (default mode).

3.) If needed, adjust the Display’s Brightness and Contrast setting (see: Section 6-3 "LCD Monitor
adjustments" on page 6-2).

WARNING ALWAYS USE THE MINIMUM POWER REQUIRED TO OBTAIN ACCEPTABLE IMAGES
IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE GUIDELINES AND POLICIES.
1.) Press B-MODE on the Operator Panel to access B-Mode.
2.) These Image Controls are used to optimize the B-Mode picture:
- Use Gain and TGC controls to optimize the overall image together with the Power control.
- Use Depth to adjust the range to be imaged.
- Use Focus to center the focal point(s) around the region of interest.
- Use Frequency (move to higher frequencies) or Frame rate (move to lower frame rate) to
increase resolution in image.
- Use Frequency (move to lower frequency) to increase penetration.
- Use the control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner, less noisy
image.
- Use Reject controls to reduce noise in the image.

4-3-5-4 Checks
• Check Width, Focus, Framerate, Frequency
The results of these adjustments must be verified on the B-Mode sector on the screen.

• Check Up/Down, Left/Right, B Color Maps and Cineloop

The results of these adjustments must be verified on the B-Mode sector on the screen.

• Check Gain, TGC and Depth

• Check B-Mode Soft Menu Controls
• Check Compress, Contour, Reject and Tilt
• Check Power and Dynamic Range

4 - 34 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-6 M-Mode Checks

For information on the system’s different modes as well as expected results, the Basic User Manual or
User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.

Table 4-15 B/M-Mode Functions

Control Description

Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%. Values
Power Output (Acoustic Power)
greater than 0.1 are displayed

Dynamic Range Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.

Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a
Focus Number and Position
specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.

Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before
Rejection
it will be processed).

Frame Average Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.

Colorize Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.

Gray Map Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.

Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.

Frequency Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.

Frame Rate/Resolution Optimizes B-Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.

Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.

4-3-6-1 Preparations
Use a phantom (optional) when doing these tests.

1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanner’s active probe connector.
- see: Section 3-6-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-20 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see: On-line Help or Chapter !7 of the Basic User Manual.
2.) Turn ON the scanner.

4-3-6-2 Checks
• Check Horizontal Sweep, Frequency, and Focus
• Check Compress, Reject, Power and Dynamic Range

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 35

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks

4-3-7-1 Introduction
For information on the system’s different modes as well as expected results, the Basic User Manual or
User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.

For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter
5.

4-3-7-2 Preparations
Use a phantom (optional) when doing these tests.

1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanner’s active probe connector.
- see: Section 3-6-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-20 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-104.
2.) Turn ON the scanner.

4-3-7-3 Color Mode Checks

Color Flow screens are B or M-Mode screens with colors representing blood or tissue movement. Color
Flow may be selected both from B-Mode, or from M mode, or a combination of these.

For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

4-3-7-4 Color B-Mode

For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

4-3-7-5 Color M-Mode

For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

• Check Horizontal Sweep, PRF, Baseline, and Invert

• Check Variance, Color Maps and Cineloop
• Check Sample Volume
• Check Frequency and Acoustic Power
• Adjust ROI

4 - 36 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-7-6 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks

For information on the system’s different modes, the Basic User Manual or User Guide will familiarize
you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.

Doppler is used to measure velocity (most often in blood). Doppler mode can be done with a special
pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary probe, you can first bring up a B-Mode
picture for navigation purpose and then add Doppler.

For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

4-3-7-7 Preparations
1.) Connect one of the probes to the scanner.
2.) See: Section 3-6-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-20 for info about connecting the probes.Section
9-18 "Probes" on page 9-104Turn ON the scanner
The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).

3.) If needed, adjust the Display’s Brightness and Contrast setting.

4.) Press PW or CW to start Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW) or Continuous Wave Doppler (CW).
5.) Use the trackball to select the Area of Interest (Sample Volume) in PW or direction of interest in CW.

4-3-7-8 Adjust the PW/CW Doppler Mode controls

Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the spectral Doppler area.

• Adjust Low velocity reject to reduce unwanted low velocity blood flow and tissue movement.
• In PW mode, adjust Sample volume to low setting for better resolution, or higher setting to more
easily locate the disturbed flows.
• Adjust the Compress setting to balance the effect of stronger and weaker echoes and obtain the
desired intensity display.
• Adjust Frequency to optimize flow display. Higher setting will improve resolution and the lower
setting will increase the depth penetration.
• Adjust Frame rate to a higher setting to improve motion detection, or to a lower setting to improve
resolution.

NOTE: Frequency and Frame rate settings may affect the Low Velocity Reject.

• Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible. This is particularly
important in CW mode, as the energy duty cycle is 100% (constant).

NOTE: The Doppler Power setting affects only Doppler operating modes.

• Adjust the following settings to further optimize the display of the image.
• Use the Horizontal sweep to optimize the sweep speed.
• To view signal detail, adjust Scale to enlarge the vertical spectral Doppler trace.
• Use Invert to reverse the vertical component of the spectral Doppler area of the display.
• Use Angle correction to steer the ultrasound beam to the blood flow to be measured.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 37

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-8 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks

4-3-8-1 Introduction
TVI calculates and color codes the velocities in tissue. The tissue velocity information is acquired by
sampling of tissue Doppler velocity values at discrete points. The information is stored in a combined
format with grey scale imaging during one or several cardiac cycles with high temporal resolution.

4-3-8-2 Preparations
1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanner’s left-most probe connector.
- See: Section 3-6-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-20 for info about connecting the
probesSection 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-104
2.) Turn ON the scanner
The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).

3.) If needed, adjust the Display’s Brightness and Contrast setting.

4.) Press TVI.
5.) Use the trackball (assigned function: Pos) to position the ROI frame over the area to be examined.
6.) Press Select. The instruction Size should be highlighted in the trackball status bar.

NOTE: If the trackball control pointer is selected, press trackball key to be able to select between
Position and Size controls.

7.) Use the trackball to adjust the dimension of the ROI.

4-3-8-3 Adjust the TVI Controls

• To reduce quantification noise (variance), the Nyquist limit should be as low as possible, without
creating aliasing. To reduce the Nyquist limit: Reduce the Scale value.

NOTE: The Scale value also affects the frame rate. There is a trade off between the frame rate and
quantification noise.

• TVI provides velocity information only in the beam direction. The apical view typically provides the
best window since the beams are then approximately aligned to the longitudinal direction of the
myocardium (except near the apex). To obtain radial or circumferential tissue velocities, a
parasternal view must be used. However, from this window the beam cannot be aligned to the
muscle for all the parts of the ventricle.

NOTE: PW will be optimized for Tissue Velocities when activated from inside TVI.

4 - 38 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-9 Contrast checks

For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes as well as expected results, refer to the
appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

4-3-10 Basic Measurements

NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.

4-3-10-1 Check Distance and Tissue Depth Measurement

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the TRACKBALL to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior
point (tissue depth).
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
4.) The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
5.) Move the TRACKBALL to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most
posterior point (tissue depth).
6.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.

NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

• To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE.
• To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press
CLEAR once.

NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.

NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point,
but not data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 39

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-10-2 Check Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper.
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
4.) The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
5.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper.
6.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.

NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.

7.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers).
8.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn the
Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction.
9.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.
10.)Press Set to complete the measurement.
11.)The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.

NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

• To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is
displayed to restart the measurement.
• To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.

4-3-10-3 Worksheets
Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations.
There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected
from the Measurement Touch Panel.

4-3-10-4 Report Pages

Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages.
Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.

4 - 40 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-11 Multi Image Checks

For information on the system’s different modes as well as expected results, refer to the appropriate
version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

4-3-12 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images

For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5.

4-3-13 Software Configuration Checks

Table 4-16 Software Configuration Checks

Step Task to do Notes

1. Verify Date and Time is correct

2. Verify that Location (Hospital Name) is correct

3. Verify Language settings are correct

4. Verify assignment of Printer Keys

5. Demo Option strings turn on all options for a limited

Verify all of the customer’s options are set up correctly period of time. Do Not leave a demo Option string in a
unit when it is sold to a customer.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 41

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks

NOTE: Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is ON or OFF.

4-3-14-1 To Connect a Probe

1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not
resting on the floor.

CAUTION TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WITH THE PROBE CABLES:

- KEEP AWAY FROM THE WHEELS
- DO NOT BEND
- DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES

Table 4-17 Probe and Connectors Checks

Step Task Expected Result(s)

1. The probe activates in the currently-selected operating
Select the appropriate connected probe from the probe
mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and
indicators on the Touch Panel.
selected exam are used automatically.

2. Launch the application.

To change application without changing the current The selected application starts.
probe, press THE DESIRED MODE on the Operator
Panel.

3. Verify no missing channels All channels is functioning.

4. Verify there's no EMI/RFI or artifacts specific to the

No EMI/RFI or artifacts.
probe.
5. Test the probe in each active connector slot., see:
It will display pictorial data each time
Section 3-6-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-20.

6. Do a leakage test on the probe, see: Section 10-6

It passes the test.
"Electrical Safety Tests" on page 10-9.

7. Repeat this procedure for all available probes.

4-3-14-2 ECG
Select Preset, Select Cardiac, Select Scan.

If you do not see: the ECG line, select the ECG tab, you should see selection on touch screen for
DISPLAY ECG, select and press. You should then see the line.

Plug in the ECG cables with nothing attached, so you pick up noise, the line should display noise.

4 - 42 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-15 Peripherals Checks

See: Table 3-6 "Peripheral Checks" on page 3-34.

4-3-16 Cineloop Check

For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter
5.

4-3-16-1 To Activate CINE

1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE.
2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.

4-3-16-2 To Omit Images

1.) Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.

4-3-16-3 To Restore Images

1.) To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.

4-3-16-4 To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame

1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame.
2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.

4-3-16-5 To Start Frame/End Frame

1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial
to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.
2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the
left to move backward through the CINE Loop.

4-3-16-6 To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed

1.) Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.

4-3-16-7 To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame

1.) Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.

4-3-16-8 Checks
• Check Left Marker, Right Marker, Cycle Select and Number of Cycles
• Check First, Last Cycle, Select all
• Adjust Scroll and Cine Speed

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 43

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-17 Back End Processor checks

• If all the previous tests have been passed successfully, the Back End Processor is most likely OK.
• See: Service Platform.
• If the system seems to be operating erratically, refer to: "Diagnostics/Troubleshooting" on page 7-1.

4 - 44 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

4-3-18-1 Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display Platform (Console) Checks

See: 7-5-16-1 "Keyboard" on page 7-125.

4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.

Table 4-18 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Press the left pedal (1), this:

Releases the brake and engages the locked

wheel direction.

You may need to move the system around a little

to get the wheels to lock into the locked direction.

2. Press the right pedal (2) this:

Engages the brakes in full lock.

3. Press the middle pedal (3), this:

Engages swivel lock.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 45

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

4-3-18-3 Operator I/O Movement - LCD

Check that the monitor functions as described below

Table 4-19 19” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

Step Task Note(s)

1. Use both hands, one at the top of the LCD and one at the bottom, to
Tilt Forward/Back
rotate the screen forward and back.

2. Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the LCD and one
Move Left/Right
at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left and right.

See: 4-2-5 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page 4-11.

4-3-18-4 Operator Console Movement (XY)

See: 4-2-4 "Top Console position adjustment" on page 4-10.

4-3-18-5 Footswitch
1.) Plug in the footswitch.
2.) Select Utility -> Application.
You should see the footswitch programming options for Left Middle Right switches.

3.) Program them all for Freeze.

4.) Then Scan and use each pedal to freeze and unfreeze to be sure each works.

Figure 4-26 Footswitch Function Checks

4-3-18-6 WLAN
• R2.x.x or R3.x.x, see: 8-6-8-3 "WLAN - Set up and Check" on page 8-164.
• R4.x.x or later, see: 8-11-23-3 "WLAN Set-up" on page 8-530.

4 - 46 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-4
Application Turnover Check List
Complete these checks before returning the scanner to customer for use:

4-4-1 Software Configuration Checks

Table 4-20 Software Configuration Checks

STEP TASK CHECK ( )

1. Check Date and Time setting

2. Check that Location (Hospital Name &

Department) is correct

3. Check Language settings

4. P1 P2 P3 P4
Check assignment of Printer Keys

5. Check that all of the customer’s options are

correctly installed

Section 4-5
Power supply test and adjustments
4-5-1 Power Supply Test Procedure
Run the System Voltage test. Refer to 7-5-12-4 "System" on page 7-70.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 47

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-6
3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check
For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual,
Chapters 5 and 6.

6-10-5 "Setup" on page 6-306-10-6 "Measure Initial Accuracy" on page 6-31

Section 4-7
SWAVE (Shear Wave “Shear Elasto“) Functional Check
If the Capacitor Pack is not present or the Power Supply to Capacitor Pack Cable is not connected, or
connected properly, the option to select the “Shear Elasto” soft button after pressing the Elasto button,
the Touch Panel key “Shear Elasto/strain Elasto” button WILL NOT be present.

• Select a probe (9L D and C1-6D).

• Select ELASTO button.
• In the Touch Panel, select Shear Wave button if not already selected.
• Verify that the Shear Wave button is available.

4 - 48 Section 4-6 - 3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-8
Site Log
Table 4-21 Site Log

DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 49

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 4-21 Site Log (Continued)

DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS

4 - 50 Section 4-8 - Site Log

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 4-21 Site Log (Continued)

DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 51

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 4-21 Site Log (Continued)

DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS

4 - 52 Section 4-8 - Site Log

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 4-21 Site Log (Continued)

DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS

Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 53

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

This page was intentionally left blank.

4 - 54 Section 4-8 - Site Log

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)

Section 5-1
Overview
5-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter explains LOGIQ E9’s ultrasound system concepts, component arrangement, and
subsystem functions. It also describes the Power Distribution System. Refer to the Basic User Manual
for more information.

Table 5-1 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility - Upgrade

Options

CONSOLE
MODEL
NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION
Phase I BT2010 BT2011 R4 R5
4 Rev. 5 Rev.
1.0.3 1.0.4 1.0.5 1.0.6 2.0.3 2.0.4 2.0.5 3.1.2 3.1.3
x.x x.x
LOGIQ E9,
5205000 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
00-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-2 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-3 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-4 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-5 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-6 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-7 N N N N N N N N N Y U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-8 N N N N N N N N N N Y
100-240 VAC

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-1 Purpose of this section (cont’d)

LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations Key

LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations Key

Y Original
U Upgrade available
N Not supported

Front End Processor - see: 9-12-2 "Front End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-61

Back End Processor - see: 9-13-1 "Back End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-73

5-2 Section 5-1 - Overview

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-2
LOGIQ E9 description
5-2-1 Purpose of this section
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of LOGIQ E9 and how it functions.

5-2-2 Introduction
The LOGIQ E9 ultrasound system is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with total
data management.

The LOGIQ E9 provides image generation in B-Mode, Color Doppler, Power Doppler, M-Mode, PW, 4D,
Harmonic Imaging, and Contrast imaging applications. The fully digital architecture of the LOGIQ E9
ultrasound system allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types throughout the full
spectrum of operating frequencies.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-3 LOGIQ E9 general description

LOGIQ E9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the
Front End Electronics, then to the Back End Processor, and finally, the results are displayed on the
monitor

System configuration is stored on the hard drive, inside the Back End Processor (BEP), and all
necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.

5-2-4 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - R3.x and earlier

GFI Configuration

Overall block diagram includes the following sections:

• Main Power Supply

• Front End Card Rack, with:
- GRLY(1) - Global Relay Board
- GRX (2) - Receiver Boards (GRX64 & GRX128)
- CW (0) - Note: supported on R2.x.x and later.
- GTX (3) - Transmitter Boards (64 channels each, in this configuration). Note: some
illustrations show that there are four boards; this is for illustration purposes only.
- DRX (3) - Digital Receiver Boards (64 channels each, in this configuration). Note: some
illustrations show that there are four boards; this is for illustration purposes only.
- GFI (1) -
• Back End Processor (BEP), with:
- BEP Power Supply
- I/O Board
- HDD -- 160GB Hard Drive
- ADD Video Card for DVI
- DVR Card (Optional)
- Front Panel LEDs, etc.
• Volume Navigation (V Nav) Bay of Birds Assembly
• CD/DVD
• Operator Console Assembly, with:
- LCD Monitor
- Upper Operator Panel Assembly
- Lower Operator Panel Assembly
- Bulkhead
- Gel Warmer (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
- TV Probe Holder (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
• XYZ Controller Assembly
• Z-Axis Motor Assembly

5-4 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E9 description

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-4 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - R3.x and earlier (cont’d)

CW is supported for R2.x.x or later. The CW circuitry is found on the CW version of the GRX128 board.

Figure 5-1 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - GFI configuration (BEP5.x)

X-Y FROG
LOCK BRAKES
MOTOR
T INNER
LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B
C
D2 D1
D4

W
W MAIN LCD DISPLAY
+12V
D3 HV INV
5V

Z MOTOR C VIDEO FLAT

B INNER OUTER
CNTL SCREEN
RIGHT BRAKE RIGHT BRAKE
E 5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB
A 48V WLAN R2.x.x and R3.x.x
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CARD RACK Option
12V
F G REG
5V
POWER
XYZ CONTROLLER

SPARE or not POPULATED

FACTOR
CORRECTION

RX-64 or RX-128
TO CONTROLLER BOARD J15
J24 MEMORY STICK

SPARE or GTX
J PRINTERS ISOLATION
AND
GEL WARMER 5V FROM J21 MICROPHONE

RELAY
DRX

DRX

GTX
J25

DRX

GTX
BULKHEAD

RX-128
GTX
120VAC

GFI
48V DC HEAD R
BOARD
H INVERTER 5V FROM J22 5V J19
TRACKBALL
TEMP J21
P1 P5 P7
CONTROL
L J22 USB
USB
USB
CONTROL P2 HUB
J18
USB P8 J23
USB KEYBOARD
AUDIO
S P3 48V
12V 5V 3.3V
3.3V +12V
DC +5V
VOLTAGES P4 +48V
DC-DC +5V BSCAN P6 J1
CONVERTERS (X2 = P4 on MPS) REG uP
GFI AUDIO
BACKPLANE
A
I2C ON/ 5V +12V
BB PULSER VPD L OFF TOUCH

CW PROBE

HV INV
VOLTAGES
I 4D MOTOR (X1 = P3 on MPS)
USB/ 10.4"
CNTRL 4D MOTOR DRIVE CONNECTION VIDEO LCD SWITCH
H-BRIDGE (R2.x.x OPTION) BOARD

K BULKHEAD UP/DN/LOCK
PLATE BUTTONS

SATA PWR
DVD ADAPT PWA
DVD 1
OP PANEL
U

SATA
M
Y

POWER
MAIN CABLE
BAYBIRD
USB (VGU DVI VIDEO
OPTION) 48V POWER/AUDIO
Z USB FOR OP PANEL
USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES

J1 BEP EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

J5 J4 J3 J2
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
5 1 48V, 5Vstby
A 5148381-X MAIN POWER CORD (X DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)
48V,+12V
PS_ON#
48V_OK
B GA200335 FROG BRAKE CONTROL (2 used)
6 +5V,+5Vstby DC-DC AC_FAIL# C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM (2 used)
CONVERTERS
4
PS_ON#, PWROK
& SEQUENCE
LOGIC BEP PWR D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
+12V, -12V + 5V
3.3V, 5Vstby SUPPLY FRONT D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE – POWER/AUDIO
PANEL
D2 5262473-2 MAIN CABLE – VIDEO
MODULE
3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE – XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS
REAR D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE – USB (2 used)
12
PANEL
J46 E 5196889 VIDEO (HDMI) CABLE - LCD
F 5196890 POWER/USB CABLE - LCD
IF NO
10/100bT
J44 10 DVR 11 G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2 used)
DVI-I OUT
H 5194492 USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY
AUDIO R
J42 I 5194495 POWER CABLE – BEP 48V
AUDIO L J43 J 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE
J40
K 5266407 POWER CABLE – DVD
EXT USB 1
PATIENT I/O L 5194492-6 USB CABLE - XYZ CONTROLLER
DVI-A
J41
(BT2010 or later
16X PCI EXPRESS

PCI

EXT USB 2
M 5270048 SATA CABLE – DVD
PCI EXPRESS

PCI

CN1 CN4
OPTION)
CN21
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I IN

J20
AUDIO IN

DVI-D ATX2
ANALOG VIDEO
MOTHERBOARD

USB 1,2,3,4
1000MbT

MAIN
N 5194491 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE CABLE
SPARE PCI EXPRESS x4
10/100/

TX DVI-D POWER + LED’S

RX

A P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER

DVI-D
J21 TX
Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
(OPTIONAL)

R 5194493 POWER CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)

VIDEO CARD

DVR

+5stby
SPARE PCI

48V
J22 S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
DIGITAL

GFI SATA3
AUDIOJ36
+12V
LR
AUDIO 8 T 5310448 XY LOCK
+5V
OUT
U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
HOST

+5V SATA2
DVD

+12V AUDIO
J29 AMP IF NO POWER
W 5196892 SAFETY GROUND WIRE LCD ARM (2 used)
N
BSCAN

DVR
ON/OFF SW, SATA1 Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
I2C

J30
PWR LED
J31
USB 6 2 Z 5194492-3 USB CABLE – BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
SATA0
USB 5 J35 AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
J32
USB BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE – 4D CONTROLLER
CN5
USB 8 J3
J100
USB
USB7

5,6,7,8
PCI 7 BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES:
J7 EXPRESS x1
USB HUB 1

J28 USB Micro CN18 ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

USB HUB 2

Controller
J27 (IO Ports & AUDIO IN
1 5165844-2 BEP POWER HARNESS
BW Q VPD) OPTION L,R,CENTER AUDIO OUT,
2 5193725-2 MOTHERBOARD HARNESS
USB HUB 3

KEY * ON/OFF SW,

PRINTER J26 J12
uBTX
PWR LED
3 5193726 FRONT PANEL HARNESS
(OPTIONAL) J25 J14 12V
MOTHERBOARD
+12V ATX1
POWER 4 5152291 PCI EXPRESS BULKHEAD
USB
TO MAIN
J33
AUDIO
CENTER AUDIO OUT 5 5195600 SATA BULKHEAD J3
PWR PWR P AMP 6 5183810 SATA BULKHEAD J2
J34
SUPPLY +5V +12V 48V +5stby
SATA SATA PWR

7 5183841 SATA HARD DRIVE

R HARD
REG +3.3V DRIVE
8 5183841-2 SATA DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
+12V
+5V 9 5266922 POWER HARD DRIVE
I/O BOARD 20A
10 5169280 DVI FLEX MAIN ICHIRO
48V OUT 11 5197215 DVI FLEX DVR JUMPER ICHIRO (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
* On systems running R2.03 DC-DC
CONVERT
ER
+
12V
- 9 12 5194363 NETWORK PATCH CABLE CAT6

or earlier, Option Key was 48V IN

CONTROL
BATTERY

installed into J25 and these V SENSE

EPS
BOARD -
12V
+
BATTERY
systems have no cable L.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-4 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - R3.x and earlier (cont’d)

MRX

Overall block diagram includes the following sections:

• Main Power Supply

• Front End Card Rack, with:
- GRLY(1) - Global Relay Board
- MRX (1) - Receiver Board with and without CW
- GTX (3) - Transmitter Boards (64 channels each, in this configuration). Note: some
illustrations show that there are four boards; this is for illustration purposes only. Back End
Processor (BEP), with:
• Back End Processor (BEP), with:
- BEP Power Supply
- I/O Board
- HDD -- 160GB Hard Drive‘
- ADD Video Card for DVI
- DVR Card (Optional)
- Front Panel LEDs, etc.
• Volume Navigation (V Nav) Bay of Birds Assembly
• CD/DVD
• Operator Console Assembly, with:
- LCD Monitor
- Upper Operator Panel Assembly
- Lower Operator Panel Assembly
- Bulkhead
- Gel Warmer (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
- TV Probe Holder (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
• XYZ Controller Assembly
• Z-Axis Motor Assembly

Table 5-2 New Card Rack configuration for MRX

New Part Replaces Comments

DRXs
MRX Board combines the functionality of the Digital Receiver Boards (DRXs),
MRX GRXs
Analog Receiver Boards (GRXs) and the Global Front End Interface (GFI)
GFI

Function of power
Power Distribution (PD distribution previously Power Distribution Board replaces all power supplies previously present in DRX
and GRX Boards, plus the Monitoring circuitry for the Card Rack Fan control.
supplied from DRX Boards.

Backplane Backplane Change for MRX compatibility

Front Plane Front Plane Change for MRX compatibility

5-6 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E9 description

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-4 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - R3.x and earlier (cont’d)

CW is supported for R3.x.x and later. The CW circuitry is found on the MRX Board.

NOTE: Figure 5-6 "LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow - MRX" on page 5-11 is identified in color to simplify the
differences between R2.x.x and earlier (or GFI configuration) and R3.x.x and later (MRX). Red
represents GFI configuration and blue represents MRX. The Card Rack only shows MRX.

Figure 5-2 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - MRX (BEP5.x)

X-Y FROG
LOCK BRAKES
MOTOR
T INNER
LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B
C
D2 D1
D4

W
W MAIN LCD DISPLAY
+12V
D3 HV INV
5V

Z MOTOR C VIDEO FLAT

B INNER OUTER
CNTL SCREEN
RIGHT BRAKE RIGHT BRAKE
E 5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB R2.x.x and R3.x.x
A 48V WLAN
MAIN POWER SUPPLY Option
CARD RACK F REG
12V
G 5V
POWER
XYZ CONTROLLER FACTOR
J CORRECTION

METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD
GTX

GTX

GTX
PD

RELAY
TO CONTROLLER BOARD J15
MEMORY STICK

MRX
J24
PRINTERS ISOLATION
AND 5V FROM J21 MICROPHONE
48V
120VAC DC HEAD
GEL WARMER BULKHEAD J25
BOARD R
H INVERTER 5V FROM J22 5V J19
TRACKBALL
TEMP J21
P1 P5 P7
CONTROL
L J22 USB
USB
USB
CONTROL P2 HUB
J18
USB J23
P8 USB
AUDIO
KEYBOARD
P3 3.3V
DC BSCAN
S 48V 12V 5V 3.3V +12V
+5V
DC-DC VOLTAGES DOPPLER AUDIO +48V J1
P6 uP
CONVERTERS (X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V REG
PCI EXPRESS P4 ON/ 5V +12V
BB PULSER
VPD
I2C EXTRA PCI
CW PROBE L OFF TOUCH
EXPRESS LANES

HV INV
VOLTAGES

A
I 4D MOTOR (X1 = P3 on MPS) J2 J1 CONNECTION
USB/ 10.4"
CNTRL BACKPLANE 4D MOTOR DRIVE
(BT2010
VIDEO LCD SWITCH
H-BRIDGE BOARD
OPTION)
K Na J2 J1 BULKHEAD UP/DN/LOCK
to/from BEP

A
PLATE BUTTONS

SATA PWR
DVD ADAPT PWA
DVD 1
OP PANEL
U
SATA
M
Y

POWER
MAIN CABLE
BAYBIRD
USB (VGU DVI VIDEO
OPTION) 48V POWER/AUDIO
Z USB FOR OP PANEL
USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES

J1 BEP EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

J5 J4 J3 J2
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
Na
5 1 48V, 5Vstby
A 5148381-X MAIN POWER CORD (X DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)
48V,+12V
PS_ON#
48V_OK
B GA200335 FROG BRAKE CONTROL (2 used)
6 +5V,+5Vstby DC-DC AC_FAIL# C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM (2 used)
CONVERTERS
4
PS_ON#, PWROK
& SEQUENCE
LOGIC BEP PWR D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
+12V, -12V + 5V
3.3V, 5Vstby SUPPLY FRONT D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE – POWER/AUDIO
PANEL
D2 5262473-2 MAIN CABLE – VIDEO
MODULE
3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE – XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS
REAR D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE – USB (2 used)
12
PANEL
J46 E 5196889 VIDEO (HDMI) CABLE - LCD
F 5196890 POWER/USB CABLE - LCD
IF NO
10/100bT 10 DVR 11 G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2 used)
J44
DVI-I OUT
H 5194492 USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY
AUDIO R
I 5194495 POWER CABLE – BEP 48V
J42
AUDIO L J43
J 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE (OMTTED)
J40
K 5266407 POWER CABLE – DVD
EXT USB 1
PATIENT I/O L 5194492-6 USB CABLE - XYZ CONTROLLER
DVI-A
J41 (BT2010 or later
16X PCI EXPRESS

PCI

EXT USB 2
M 5270048 SATA CABLE – DVD
PCI EXPRESS

PCI

CN1 CN4
OPTION)
CN21
ATX2
ANALOG VIDEO
MOTHERBOARD

DVI-D J20 USB 1,2,3,4

1000MbT

MAIN
N 5194491 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE CABLE (OMTTED)
SPARE PCI EXPRESS x4
10/100/

TX DVI-D + LED’S
AUDIO IN

POWER
DVI-I IN

DVI-I OUT

RX
DVI-D
Na 5372764 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE AND PCI EXPRESS CABLE
J21 TX
A P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER
(OPTIONAL)

J2 J1
Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
VIDEO CARD

SPARE PCI

DVR

+5stby
48V DOP
R 5194493 POWER CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
DIGITAL

J22 AUDIO SATA3

LR
XFMR
8 S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
+12V AUDIO +5V
T 5310448 XY LOCK
HOST

OUT SATA2
DVD

+5V AUDIO
+12V AMP
XFMR J36
IF NO POWER
U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
J29
Na
BSCAN

DVR
SATA1 W 5196892 SAFETY GROUND WIRE LCD ARM (2 used)
I2C

J30
ON/OFF SW,
J31 PWR LED 2 Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
SATA0
J32
J35
Z 5194492-3 USB CABLE – BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
USB HUB 2 USB AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
CN5 J3 BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE – 4D CONTROLLER
J100 USB 5
USB
USB 6

5,6,7,8 PCI 7 BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES:

EXPRESS x1
J7
USB 8
USB HUB 1

USB Micro
USB 7

J28
Controller CN18
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
(IO Ports
&VPD AUDIO IN
1 5165844-2 BEP POWER HARNESS
BW Q J27 OPTION L,R,CENTER AUDIO OUT,
2 5193725-2 MOTHERBOARD HARNESS
USB HUB 3

KEY ON/OFF SW,

PRINTER J26 J12 PWR LED uBTX 3 5193726 FRONT PANEL HARNESS
(OPTIONAL) J25 12V
MOTHERBOARD
J14
ATX1
POWER 4 5152291 PCI EXPRESS BULKHEAD (OMTTED)
USB +12V

TO MAIN J33 AUDIO CENTER AUDIO OUT

5 5195600 SATA BULKHEAD J3
PWR PWR P AMP 6 5183810 SATA BULKHEAD J2
SUPPLY J34
SATA SATA PWR

+5V +12V 48V +5stby

7 5183841 SATA HARD DRIVE
R HARD
REG +3.3V DRIVE
8 5183841-2 SATA DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
+12V
+5V 9 5266922 POWER HARD DRIVE
I/OBOARD 20A
10 5169280 DVI FLEX MAIN ICHIRO
48V OUT 11 5197215 DVI FLEX DVR JUMPER ICHIRO (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
DC-DC
CONVERT + - 9 12 5194363 NETWORK PATCH CABLE CAT6
ER
12V
48V IN BATTERY
CONTROL

EPS
V SENSE BOARD - +
12V
BATTERY

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-5 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.x - R4.x

Figure 5-3 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - BEP6.x -

X-Y
LOCK FROG
MOTOR BRAKES
INNER
T LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B C
D2
D1 D4

MAIN LCD DISPLAY

+12V
D3 HV INV
5V

C VIDEO FLAT
Z MOTOR B INNER OUTER CNTL SCREEN
RIGHT BRAKE RIGHT BRAKE

5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB NOT
E
A
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CARD RACK NOT INSTALLED 48V
USED
12V
REG
G STARTING
5V

XYZ CONTROLLER
POWER APRIL 2014
FACTOR
CORRECTION

METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD
GTX

GTX

GTX
PD

RELAY
CONTROLLER BOARD J15
TO MEMORY STICK

MRX
J24
PRINTERS ISOLATION
48V
AND GEL WARMER J25
5V FROM J21 MICROPHONE
120VAC DC HEAD BULKHEAD 5V FROM J22 5V
INVERTER
H TEMP
BOARD
J21
J19
TRACKBALL
P1 P5 P7
CONTROL USB
J22 USB
CONTROL USB
HUB
L P2 USB
P8
J18
J23
AUDIO
USB KEYBOARD
DC
BSCAN
S P3 48V
12V 5V 3.3V
3.3V +12V
VOLTAGES P4 +5V
DC-DC DOPPLER AUDIO +48V J1
(X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V P6 REG uP
CONVERTERS PCI EXPRESS
I2C ON/
VPD EXTRA PCI OFF 5V +12V
PULSER L TOUCH
BB EXPRESS LANES

HV INV
I VOLTAGES USB/ 10.4"
4D MOTOR (X1 = P3 on MPS)
BACKPLANE
J2 J1 CW PROBE VIDEO LCD

A
CNTRL 4D MOTOR DRIVE SWITCH
H-BRIDGE CONNECTION BOARD
(BT2010 OPTION)
BULKHEAD
PLATE UP/DN/LOCK
BUTTONS

SATA PWR SATA

DVD 1 OP PANEL
U

M
Y

POWER

BAYBIRD MAIN CABLE

USB (VGU DVI VIDEO
Z OPTION) 48V POWER/AUDIO
USB FOR OP PANEL
USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES

J1

1 EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
A 5148381-X MAIN POWER CORD (X DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)
B GA200335 FROG BRAKE CONTROL (2 used)
C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM (2 used)
A HARD
DRIVE D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
J2 J1
SATA SATA PWR 9 without DVR
FRONT I/O D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE – POWER/AUDIO
11 D2 5262473-2 MAIN CABLE – VIDEO
REAR SVGA 9 with DVR

PANEL DVI-D J 3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE – XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS

4
S-VIDEO J30 TX DVI-D
RX
DVI-D 2 D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE – USB (2 used)
OUT DVI-D
(OPTION)
J44 TX 8 E 5430937 VIDEO (HDMI)+USB CABLE - LCD
DVI-I OUT G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2 used)
PCI

16X PCI EXPRESS

USB #H3 CN DVI 2

IPASS2 CN F101
PCIE x1 IPASS1 H 5194492-8 USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY
DVI-I IN

DVI-I OUT

AUDIO IN

USB PWR ENABLE

J40
EXT USB 1
FET +5V I 5194495 POWER CABLE – BEP 48V
J41
EXT USB 2
USB #H4
OC DETECT CN
SATA6
CN
SATA4
CN DVI 1
J 5431486 PCI EXPRESS RIBBON CABLE
J46 CN AUDIO1
L 5194492-6 USB CABLE – XYZ CONTROLLER
USB 1,2
+ LED’S
(OPTIONAL)

100/1000bT CN
SPARE

SATA0
LAN
PATIENT IO M 5431110 POWERED eSATA CABLE – DVD
DVR

J42
AUDIO R
CTRL
AUDIO L
J43
(BT2010 P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER
48V OPTION) Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
R 5194493 POWER CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
HOST

J21 TO DVR
DVD

+5stby +12V
GFI/MRX
AUDIO
S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
J22
48V
AUDIO 5 T 5310448 XY LOCK
AMP
U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
5V STBY

DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE)

+12V CODEC

AUDIO
SATA0
SATA4 5A Without DVR 48v TO 28v Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
CONVERT
ACFAIL

+3.3V SATA5 With DVR

AMP
+5V
+3.3V
PCIe L5
CN SATA5
Z 5194492-3 USB CABLE – BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
+5V STBY +5V
6
J3
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED
+5V STBY
PCIe L6
Vbat AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
+12V PCH POWER
SATA #3 CN IO 1
USB8 CN SATA3
BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE – 4D CONTROLLER
HUB 28v/BAT
SATA2 48V
J2 SOURCE
+12V CN PWR1
SATA #2 SELECT
CN IO 2 48V
POWER ON/OFF
ACFAIL BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES:
J100 USB 0 SATA3 5V STBY USB
5vDUAL
J7 USB 1 USB0
SATA0 cFast
5vDUAL
POWER
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
J28 USB 2
1 #$ BEP POWER
Q
J27 USB7 3.3vDUAL 2 #% FRONT PANEL
USB 3 USB9 PCIe L8

USB Micro
USB13
USB10 USB12
Mini PCIe
POWER 28v
TO
28v
TO
28v
TO
3 #@ SATA HARD DRIVE
J26 USB 4
USB Controller
IO Ports &
USB 13
3.3vDUAL
12v 5v 3.3v
4 #@ POWER HARD DRIVE
TO MAIN J25 +5V
PWR PWR
USB 5 VPD +5V
+12V
5 5439827!! SATA TO DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
SUPPLY USB 6 +48V +12V +12V
J4
+28V BATT 5A 5439827-2!! DVR TO SATA (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
BW R +48V

PRINTER
J14 USB 7 +5V
6 #$ SATA JUMPER (USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED)
USB 9
(OPTIONAL)
J12 +3.3V 7 #$ PAT IO POWER AND USB
OPTION KEY CN PWR2 8 5408168$ VIDEO JUMPER FLEX
+5V R4 ONLY POWERBOARD
+12V
J29
Patient IO 9 5428990$!! DVI-SAMTECH FLEX
+5V
11 5435462 AUDIO FOR DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
5vDUAL
ACFAIL

J30
+12V
Vbat
48V

P J33
SIDE I/O BOARD MOTHERBOARD CN USB11 # = no GE number for cable
$ = included in cable kit 5433408-80
% = cable comes with Front Panel 5433408-41
@ = cable comes with HD 5433408-50
20A
!! = cable comes with DVR kit 5263884-3
48V

CHARGER
- + Vbat
12V
BATTERY 5vDUAL

AC FAIL

+ - CHARGEBOARD
12V 7
BATTERY
BEP 6.1

5-8 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E9 description

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-6 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.x - R5.x and later

Figure 5-4 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - BEP6.x - R5.x and later

X-Y
LOCK FROG
MOTOR BRAKES
INNER
T LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B C
D2
D1 D4

MAIN LCD DISPLAY

+12V
D3 HV INV
5V

C VIDEO FLAT
Z MOTOR B INNER OUTER CNTL SCREEN
RIGHT BRAKE RIGHT BRAKE

5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB NOT
E
A
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CARD RACK 48V
USED
12V
REG
CC G 5V

POWER
XYZ CONTROLLER FACTOR
SWAVE TO CORRECTION

METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD
Option

GTX

GTX

GTX
PD

RELAY
PRINTERS UPPER OP MEMORY STICK

MRX
(Capacitor ISOLATION
120VAC
48V
Pack) INVERTER
AND
DC HEAD
GEL WARMER J25
MICROPHONE
BULKHEAD 5V FROM J22 5V
BOARD
H TEMP
P5 J21
J53 TRACKBALL
CONTROL P1 USB
USB USB J18
J22 HUB
CONTROL HUB
L USB
J23
P8
USB KEYBOARD
AUDIO
DC
BSCAN
S P3 48V
3.3V J52
uP
VOLTAGES P4 12V 5V 3.3V
DC-DC DOPPLER AUDIO
(X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V P6 +48V uP
CONVERTERS PCI EXPRESS REG
VPD I2C 5V TOUCH
PULSER EXTRA PCI L
BB EXPRESS LANES 10.4" ON/
I VOLTAGES USB/ SVGA OFF
4D MOTOR (X1 = P3 on MPS)
BACKPLANE
J2 J1 CW PROBE VIDEO LED

A
CNTRL 4D MOTOR DRIVE SWITCH
H-BRIDGE CONNECTION Back Light
BOARD
(BT2010 OPTION) LOWER OP
BULKHEAD
UP/DN/LOCK 5V 3.3V
PLATE
BUTTONS
REG

SATA PWR SATA

DVD 1 OP PANEL U

M
Y

POWER

USB
BAYBIRD MAIN CABLE
(VGU EE DVI VIDEO
Z OPTION) 48V POWER/AUDIO
USB FOR OP PANEL
USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES

J1

1 EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
A 5148381-X MAIN POWER CORD (X DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)
B GA200335 FROG BRAKE CONTROL (2 used)
C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM (2 used)
A HARD
DRIVE D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
J2 J1
SATA SATA PWR 9 without DVR
FRONT I/O D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE – POWER/AUDIO
11 D2 5262473-2 MAIN CABLE – VIDEO
REAR SVGA 9 with DVR

PANEL DVI-D J 3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE – XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS

4
S-VIDEO J30 TX DVI-D
RX
DVI-D 2 D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE – USB (2 used)
OUT DVI-D
(OPTION)
J44 TX 8 E 5430937 VIDEO (HDMI)+USB CABLE - LCD
DVI-I OUT G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2 used)
PCI

16X PCI EXPRESS

USB #H3 CN DVI 2

IPASS2 CN F101
PCIE x1 IPASS1 H 5194492-8 USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY
DVI-I IN

DVI-I OUT
AUDIO IN

USB PWR ENABLE

J40
EXT USB 1
FET +5V I 5194495 POWER CABLE – BEP 48V
J41
EXT USB 2
USB #H4
OC DETECT CN
SATA6
CN
SATA4
CN DVI 1
J 5431486 PCI EXPRESS RIBBON CABLE
J46 CN AUDIO1
L 5194492-6 USB CABLE – XYZ CONTROLLER
USB 1,2
+ LED’S
(OPTIONAL)

100/1000bT CN
SPARE

SATA0
LAN
PATIENT IO M 5431110 POWERED eSATA CABLE – DVD
DVR

J42
AUDIO R
CTRL
AUDIO L
J43
(BT2010 P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER
48V OPTION) Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
R 5194493 POWER CABLE – BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
HOST

J21 TO DVR
DVD

+5stby +12V
GFI/MRX
AUDIO
S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
J22
48V
AUDIO 5 T 5310448 XY LOCK
AMP
U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
5V STBY

DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE)

+12V CODEC

AUDIO
SATA0
SATA4 5A Without DVR 48v TO 28v Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
CONVERT
ACFAIL

+3.3V SATA5 With DVR

AMP
+5V
+3.3V
PCIe L5
CN SATA5
Z 5194492-3 USB CABLE – BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
+5V STBY +5V
6
J3
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED
+5V STBY
PCIe L6
Vbat AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
+12V PCH POWER
SATA #3 CN IO 1
USB8 CN SATA3
BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE – 4D CONTROLLER
HUB 28v/BAT
J2
+12V
SATA2
CN PWR1
48V
SOURCE CC 5486912 CAPACITOR PACK CABLE – (USED ONLY IF SWAVE INSTALLED)
SATA #2 SELECT
CN IO 2 48V EE 5439524 CABLE V NAV INSIDE – (USED ONLY IF V NAV INSIDE INSTALLED)
POWER ON/OFF
ACFAIL
J100 USB 0 SATA3 5V STBY USB
5vDUAL 5vDUAL
SATA0 cFast
J7 USB 1 USB0 POWER

J28 USB 2 BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES:

Q 3.3vDUAL
J27 USB 3 USB7
USB9
USB13
PCIe L8
POWER 28v 28v 28v ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
Mini PCIe

USB
J26 USB 4
USB Micro
Controller USB 13
USB10 USB12 TO
12v
TO
5v
TO
3.3v 1 #$ BEP POWER
3.3vDUAL
TO MAIN J25 USB 5
IO Ports &
VPD +5V
+5V 2 #% FRONT PANEL
PWR PWR
SUPPLY J4 USB 6
+12V
+48V +12V +12V 3 #@ SATA HARD DRIVE
+28V BATT
BW R J14 USB 7
+48V
+5V 4 #@ POWER HARD DRIVE
PRINTER USB 9 5 5439827!! SATA TO DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
J12
(OPTIONAL) +3.3V
5A 5439827-2!! DVR TO SATA (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
OPTION KEY CN PWR2
+5V POWERBOARD 6 #$ SATA JUMPER (USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED)
+12V Patient IO
J29
+5V 7 #$ PAT IO POWER AND USB
5vDUAL
ACFAIL

8 5408168$ VIDEO JUMPER FLEX

J30
+12V
Vbat
48V

P J33 9 5428990$!! DVI-SAMTECH FLEX

SIDE I/O BOARD MOTHERBOARD CN USB11

11 5435462 AUDIO FOR DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)

# = no GE number for cable

20A
$ = included in cable kit 5433408-80
48V % = cable comes with Front Panel 5433408-41
-
CHARGER @ = cable comes with HD 5433408-50
+ Vbat
12V !! = cable comes with DVR kit 5263884-3
BATTERY 5vDUAL

AC FAIL

+ - CHARGEBOARD
12V 7
BATTERY
BEP 6.1

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-7 Signal flow overview

Figure 5-5 LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow - GFI Configuration
192

Frontplane GTX 64 Ch DRX 64

GTX 64 Ch DRX 64
GRX 64
David GTX Nathan DRX
GRLY GRX 128 Pulser
0 A/D
64 Ch 64 Ch
128

David Nathan GFI

1
192

R 1
192 192

...
e

...
l T/R TGC
a David Nathan
192

y 2 2 FDEM SDEM
s
CW David Nathan
Pulser A/D ATGC T_sig
192

Option 3 3

GDIF GDIF

BEP

Backplane

Weak ultrasound echoes from body structures and blood cells are received by the probes and routed
via the Relay board and the XD bus to the RX board. The RX board amplifies these signals. Then the
signals are routed to the DRX board(s) where the signals are A/D converted. The digital signals are then
further processed on the DRX boards.

5 - 10 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E9 description

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-7 Signal flow overview (cont’d)

Figure 5-6 LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow - MRX

Frontplane
256 GTX 64 Ch
GTX 64 Ch
David GTX
Pulser 0 64 Ch
CW
Option David

MRX 1

...
A/D
Converters David
I/ Q 2

David
Filter Pulser 3

GRLY MRX 192 Ch GDIF

256

X I Analog
X
X Q Beamformer
TGC A/DA Nathan
TGC A/DA 32 Ch
192

R
TGC A/DA Nathan
e 256 32 Ch Front End
TGC A/DA
l T/ R Nathan Interface
a 32 Ch
192

Nathan
y 32 Ch
s Nathan
DSP
32 Ch
Nathan
192

32 Ch
TGC A/D SED

TGC Test
GFE
Gen Gen

The MRX Board combines the functionality of the Receiver Boards (DRX and GRX) and the GFI.Weak
ultrasound echoes from body structures and blood cells are received by the probes and routed via the
Relay board and the XD bus to the MRX board. The MRX board amplifies the ultrasound signal and
connects it with an A/D converter to the digital domain. The digital signals are then further processed
on the MRX boards.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 11

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-8 LOGIQ E9’s Operating Modes

5-2-8-1 B-Mode
B-Mode is a two-dimensional image of the amplitude of the echo signal. It is used for location and
measurement of anatomical structures and for spatial orientation during operation of other modes. In B-
mode, a two-dimensional cross-section of a three-dimensional soft tissue structure such as the heart is
displayed in real time. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale or
color values in the display. The outline of the 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) cross-section is a sector,
depending on the particular transducer used. B-mode can be used in combination with any other mode.

5-2-8-1-1 Harmonic Imaging

Tissue Harmonic Imaging, acoustic aberrations due to tissue, are minimized by receiving and
processing the second harmonic signal that is generated within the insonified tissue. LOGIQ E9`s high
performance Harmonic Imaging provides superb detail resolution and penetration, outstanding contrast
resolution, excellent acoustic clutter rejection and an easy to operate user interface for switching into
Harmonic Imaging mode. Coded Harmonics enhances near field resolution for improved small parts
imaging as well as far field penetration. It diminishes low frequency amplitude noise and improves
imaging technically difficult patients. It may be especially beneficial when imaging isoechoic lesions in
shallow-depth anatomy in the breast, liver and hard-to-visualize fetal anatomy. Coded Harmonics may
improve the B-Mode (2D (B-Mode)) image quality without introducing a contrast agent.

5-2-8-2 M-Mode
In M-mode, soft tissue structure is presented as scrolling display, with depth on the Y-axis and time on
the X-axis. It is used primarily for cardiac measurements such as value timing on septal wall thickness
when accurate timing information is required. M-mode is also known as T-M mode or time-motion mode.
Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display. M-
mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam. Depth is
arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis. M-mode is normally used in
conjunction with a 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) image for spatial reference. The 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)
image has a graphical line (M-line) superimposed on the 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) image indicating where
the M-mode beam is located.

5-2-8-3 Color Flow Doppler Mode

Color Doppler is used to detect motion presented as a two-dimensional display. There are three
applications of this technique:

• Color Flow Mode - used to visualize blood flow velocity and direction
• Power Doppler (Angio) - used to visualize the spatial distribution of blood
A real-time two-dimensional cross-section image of blood flow is displayed. The 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)
cross-section is presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent blood flow
(velocity, variance, power and/or direction). To provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-
section is overlaid on top of the gray scale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)
echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler), gray scale (echo)
information or a blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft
tissue structures and from the red blood cells. Blood velocity is the primary parameter used to determine
the display colors, but power and variance may also be used. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to
remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from
blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional
parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination. Color flow can be used in combination with
2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) and Spectral Doppler modes.

5 - 12 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E9 description

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-8-3-1 Power Doppler

A real-time two dimensional cross-section of blood flow is displayed. The 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) cross-
section is presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent the power in
blood flow echoes. Often, to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid
on top of the gray scale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) echo). For each
pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler power), gray scale (echo)
information or a blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft-
tissue structures and from the red blood cells. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals
from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming
that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be
used to enhance the discrimination. The power in the remaining signal after wall filtering is then
averaged over time (persistence) to present a steady state image of blood flow distribution. Power
Doppler can be used in combination with 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) and Spectral Doppler modes as well
as with 4D mode.

5-2-8-4 Pulsed (PW) Doppler

PW Doppler processing is one of two spectral Doppler modalities, the other being CW Doppler. In
spectral Doppler, blood flow is presented as a scrolling display, with flow velocity on the Y-axis and time
on the X-axis. The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow, while the absence of
spectral broadening indicates laminar flow. PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed
Doppler signals. This information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the
sample volume. PW Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D (B-Mode)
(B-Mode) image with an M-line and sample volume marker superimposed on the 2-D image indicating
the position of the Doppler sample volume. The sample volume size and location are specified by the
operator. Sample volume can be overlaid by a flow direction cursor which is aligned, by the operator,
with the direction of flow in the vessel, thus determining the Doppler angle. This allows the spectral
display to be calibrated in flow velocity (m/sec.) as well as frequency (Hz). PW Doppler also provides
the capability of performing spectral analysis at a selectable depth and sample volume size. PW Doppler
can be used in combination with 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) and Color Flow modes.

5-2-8-5 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler

Continuous Wave Doppler systems use two crystals, one to send and one to receive the echoes.

The transmitter inputs a continuous sinusoidal wave. The receiver detects the shift.

An audible sound is created and recorded by either an analog recorder or spectral analyzer. Spectral
analysis separates the signal into individual components and assigns a relative importance.

The benefits of CW Doppler include high sensitivity to low velocities and detection of high velocities
without aliasing. Although CW Doppler cannot distinguish between the sending and receiving signals or
extraneous echoes, nor does CW Doppler produce a precise image like Pulsed Wave Doppler.

5-2-8-6 Other Modes

4D: The LOGIQ E9 Ultrasound System may be used to acquire multiple, sequential 2D (B-Mode) (B-
Mode) images which can be combined to reconstruct a three dimensional image. These 4D images are
useful in visualizing three-dimensional structures, and in understanding the spatial or temporal
relationships between the images in the 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) sequence. The 4D image is presented
using standard visualization techniques, such as surface or volume rendering.

For more information on Volume Navigation and Contrast Imaging, refer to the Basic User Manual.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 13

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-8-6-1 4D Data Collection and Reconstruction

2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) gray scale images may be reconstructed. The acquisition of volume data sets
is performed by sweeping 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)-scans with special transducers (called 4D-
transducers) designed for the 2D (B-Mode)-scans and the 4D-sweep.

Images are spatially registered, using internal probe position sensing and a position control to ensure
geometric accuracy of the 4D data.

2D (B-Mode) ultrasound imaging modes are used to view a two dimensional cross-sections of parts of
the body. For example in 2D (B-Mode) gray scale imaging, a 2 dimensional cross-section of a 3-
dimensional soft-tissue structure such as the heart is displayed in real time. Typical, the user of an
ultrasound machine manipulates the position and orientation of this 2D (B-Mode) cross-section in real
time during an ultrasound exam.

By changing the position of the cross-section, a variety of views of the underlying structure are obtained,
and these views can be used to understand a 3-dimensional structure in the body.

To complete survey a 3-dimensional structure in the body, it is necessary to collect 2D (B-Mode) images
which span a volume containing the structure. One way is to sweep the imaging cross-section by
translating it in a direction perpendicular to the cross-section. Another example method is to rotate the
cross section about a line contained in the cross section. The LOGIQ E9 Ultrasound System uses the
automated so called C-Scan for the motion perpendicular to automated B-scan. Once a representative
set of 2D (B-Mode) cross-sections are obtained, standard reconstruction techniques can be used to
construct other 2D (B-Mode) cross-sections, or to view the collection of the cross-sections as a 4D
images.

5-2-8-6-2 4D Image Presentation

The basic technique for 4D image presentation is to combine the 2D (B-Mode) cross–sections into an
image which represents how the volume of the data would appear from a particular viewing direction.
The mathematics behind this feature is called 4D-rendering. Such combined images are called
projections, because the data from the volume is projected onto a flat 2-dimensional surface, e.g. the
ultrasound system display. This technique can be applied to any 2D (B-Mode) ultrasound mode.

Several techniques can be used to aid the human observer in understanding the resulting 2D (B-Mode)
image as a representation of a three-dimensional object. One is to rotate the volume of data, and
present the resulting sequence of 2D (B-Mode) projections to the observer. The changing direction of
observation helps the observer to separate the features in the volume according to their distance from
the observer.

5-2-8-7 Volume Navigation

Using a position sensor attached to the probe, Volume Navigation Fusion (V Nav) lets you import a pre-
acquired Ultrasound, CT or MR DICOM volume dataset and register it to the live Ultrasound image. As
a result, you can view live Ultrasound scanning simultaneously with the corresponding multi-planar
reformatted (MPR) slice from the pre-acquired dataset.

In addition, you can use V Nav as a type of “GPS” positioning marker to track an anatomy of interest.

V Nav is available in B-Mode, Color Flow, PDI, and Contrast Modes; it is not available while in 3D/4D
or when timeline modes are active. Biopsy capability is available while in V Nav.

5-2-8-8 Contrast Imaging

The LOGIQ E9 is designed for compatibility with commercially available Ultrasound contrast agents.
Because the availability of these agents is subject to government regulation and approval, product
features intended for use with these agents may not be commercially marketed nor made available
before the contrast agent is cleared for use. Contrast related product features are enabled only on
ultrasound systems for delivery to an authorized country or region of use. It is not currently approved for
use in the United States.
5 - 14 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E9 description
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-2-8-9 Elastography
Elastography shows the spatial distribution of tissue elasticity properties in a region of interest by
estimating the strain before and after tissue distortion caused by external or internal forces. The strain
estimation is filtered and scaled to provide a smooth presentation when displayed.

With Elastography active, the image will show a color map/bar indicating the level of elasticity detected
by the system. The Elastography image is achieved by pulsating the probe manually while you are
scanning the anatomy of interest.

5-2-8-9-1 Shear Wave

With the Shear Wave option, the scanner creates the distortion by generating shear waves in tissue
using a diagnostic ultrasound transducer. Shear waves "push" the tissue at a low frequency in either a
single burst of high amplitude, long duration pulses or a series of such pulses.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 15

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-3
Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
5-3-1 Purpose of this section
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of LOGIQ E9’s Top Console and to tell you how
it function.

5-3-2 Transporting LOGIQ E9

The Top Console must be locked into the lower, center (X/Y) position before transporting the
LOGIQ E9. The LCD Monitor must be in its flipped down position. And the rear wheel brake must be
set. Refer to the Basic User Manual (Direction 5180374-100) for more information.

5 - 16 Section 5-3 - Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-3-3 Top Console description

The Top Console includes:

• LCD monitor
• Operator Panel with;
- An On/Off switch
- A Touch Panel Screen and a Control Panel with controls for manipulating the picture quality
and for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A)
- An alphanumeric keyboard (QWERTY keyboard).
- Trackball
- XYZ Control, e.g., frogleg controls and lock to move the Top Console left/right, forward/
backward, and up/down.
• speakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning/replay)

A flexible harness of electrical wires secures the connection between the Top Console and the rest of
the LOGIQ E9.

The Top Console can be moved up/down (Z-axis), sideways to the left and to the right (X-axis) and back
and forth (Y-axis). The XYZ Mechanism is commonly referred to as the frogleg.

The up/down movement of the console is motor driven. The control buttons for the electrical motor are
centered between the handles. A gas spring inside the LOGIQ E9 counterbalances the Z-axis (vertical)
movement, lessening the load the Z motor must move.

The brakes used for locking the console’s X and Y movement are all operated by electrical motors

5-3-3-1 Top Console’s location in the LOGIQ E9

The Top Console is located on the top of the LOGIQ E9, and includes the Main LCD monitor, the Monitor
Arm, the Operator Panel with the Touch Screen, Speakers, an alphanumeric keyboard, and frogleg
controls.

Figure 5-7 Top Consoles location (A) - R1 through R3 (left) and R4 shown

A
A

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 17

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-3-4 Operator Panel

5-3-4-1 Operator Panel general description

The Operator Panel includes an On/Off switch, different controls for manipulating the picture quality,
and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A), an alphanumeric keyboard and frogleg controls.

Figure 5-8 Operator Panel

13

1.) Probe and Cord Holder

2.) USB Ports (2)
3.) Measurement Selection Menu and Joystick controls
4.) Keyboard
5.) Feature Keys: Elastography, Volume, Navigation, Loop View, Contrast
6.) Modes (B, M, CF, PDI, PW, CW, TVi) /Gain/XYZ Controls for 3D/4D Mode
7.) TGC
8.) Trackball, Trackball Keys, Pointer, Measure, Comment, Body Pattern, Clear, Zoom, 3D/4D, P1
See: Figure 5-9 "Customer Removable Trackball" on page 5-19.
9.) L/R, Start/Stop, Freeze
10.)Steer/Width/Depth/Reverse
11.)Auto
12.)P2, P3, P4
13.)Frogleg Controls (XYZ Mechanism)

5 - 18 Section 5-3 - Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-3-4-1 Operator Panel general description (cont’d)

Customer Removable Trackball introduced for forward production in R4.

A new Bezel was introduced with different dimensions around the Trackball and Trackball Keys to fit the
Removable Trackball. Trackball Keys are slightly narrower.

Figure 5-9 Customer Removable Trackball

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 19

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-3-4-2 Operator Panel Block Diagram

Figure 5-10 Operator Panel Block Diagram - R4 and earlier

USB Inductive or
BUTTON MATRIX
Optical Trackball
E J6 BUTTON MATRIX KEYBRD
CONTROLLER AMBER
LED +12V
ENCODERS (X12) MATRIX
+5V
GRN CH A/B HI FET
BUFFER
+5V
CH A/B
BUFFER AMB
AMB PWM
A/N KEYBOARD ON/OFF CH A/B INTENSITY
BACKLIGHT BUTTON BUFFER CONTROL
LED MATRIX LOW FET
+12V SLIDE
POTS

AMB AMB
GREEN
ENABLE +3.3V +3.3V LED
FET +12V
A/N KEYBOARD MATRIX A/D +3.3V MATRIX
CONV QUAD QUAD QUAD
HI FET
USB + MUX DETECT DETECT DETECT
KEYBRD CHIP
+5V
CONTROLLER SELECT
GRN
PWM
SERIAL INTENSITY
BUS CONTROL
J7
LOW FET
+12 / +5 / +3.3V
J1 SWITCH PCB
D
F
A

J19 J18 J1 CONTROL PCB

+12 / +5 / +3.3V
+12V
MODE+
CLK

SERIAL BUS

+3.3V
I2C
+5V BUS BOOT
J5 MICRO- EEPROM
TS CONTROL
CTRL
AUX USB LER PROGRAM
EEPROM
PCB
AUX USB J3 RAM
PORT 1 5V stby
AUX USB PWR LED
PORT 2 +3.3V PWR SW
2.5V=MAX BRIGHT
0V = MIN
+3.3V USB +3.3V
HV INVERTER USB6
J6 HUB
REG +5V
XFMR
+12V B +12V EE
+12V
POT
ENABLE

PTC

3.3V 3.3V USB5

C 48V
TOUCH LVDS USB
SCREEN XMTR uP
J24 J25
Daughter Card
J22 J21 J23

LCD DISPLAY
UPPER OP PANEL REAR SHEET METAL

5 - 20 Section 5-3 - Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-4
Main Console
5-4-1 Main Console description

Figure 5-11 Main Console location (A)

The Main Console hosts the:

• Patient HDD and Network Indicators

• Front End Card Rack
• Back End Processor (BEP)
• Optional B/W printer
• DVD Recorder (card in BEP) Option
• DVD player
• Power Supply (Main Power)
• 4D Motor Controller Option
• Volume Navigation Option
• Lifting mechanism for the Frog Leg and Top Console
• Rear handle
• Front and Rear Casters with lock and brake mechanism

The Main Console consists of a frame that acts as the skeleton of the LOGIQ E9. The other parts, listed
above, are mounted to the frame. The outside of the Main Console is covered with plastic covers.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 21

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-5
Air Flow control
5-5-1 General description
The Air Flow Control includes the following components: Air cooling fans located at the bottom of the
LOGIQ E9.

5-5-2 Location in the LOGIQ E9

There are two filters. One located on the rear of the LOGIQ E9 and one located beneath the air cooling
fans at the bottom of the LOGIQ E9. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information.

Section 5-6
Casters and Brakes description
The front brake is used for everyday use; the back brake is ONLY used to transport the LOGIQ E9. Refer
to Chapter 8 for more information.

5 - 22 Section 5-5 - Air Flow control

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-7
Power distribution
5-7-1 Purpose of this section
The power distribution within the LOGIQ E9 is described in this section.

5-7-2 Main Power Supply

5-7-2-1 General description

The Main Power Supply’s main task is to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on-site Mains Power
System and to supply the various internal subsystems with AC or DC power.

Figure 5-12 Main Power Supply

90-250Vac Line Filter

Rectifier

IEC60601-1
Inrush Current Isolation
Limier
113 – 400 V Stand By + 5Vstb (12W)

110V
Inverter 120VA

SELV outputs (<60Vdc)

400V
PFC 24V + 24V

+ 48V
+ 48V
+ 15V
± 48V + 12V
+ 6V

- 48V – 15V
– 6V

+/- 48V 0-140V

MLP 0-140V
130W

± 100 V
PMX
8W

± 0 – 95V
TLP ± 0 – 95V
2X20W

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 23

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-2-1 General description (cont’d)

Figure 5-13 Power Supply Block Diagram - R4 and earlier

A MAIN POWER SUPPLY

POWER
FACTOR
CORRECTION

TO
PRINTERS ISOLATION
AND
120VAC
DC HEAD
INVERTER
USB MAIN POWER H
SUPPLY TO BEP (J4) CONTROL

TO XYZ DC VOLTAGES ->

I
CONTROLLER (48V) FEP’S MOTHERBOARD ->
DC-DC
CONVERTERS FEP’S BOARDS
(X2 = P4 on MPS)
USB CABLE BB 4D MOTOR
4 D CONTROLLER (J28) CNTRL TX POWER to
H-BRIDGE
FEP MOTHERBOARD to
RELAY CARD
TO BEP (J1) (X1 = P3 on MPS)

Power from the wall outlet (100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz) is connected to the Main Power Supply. The
Main Power Supply delivers the needed voltages to the rest of the LOGIQ E9:

• Internal Printer (110 VAC)

• Front End Rack (DC power with several voltages)
• Front End Rack (TSV1 and TSV2 for the transmitters)
• Front End Rack (PMXVOUT for the probe channel multiplexers)
• Back End Processor
An inrush current limiter reduce the peak input current when the LOGIQ E9 is switched on. An EMI filter
helps to reduce EMI to acceptable levels.

The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
wall outlet.

Fuses are located inside the power supply (only to be replaced by the manufacturer).

5 - 24 Section 5-7 - Power distribution

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-2-1 General description (cont’d)

Figure 5-14 Power Supply Block Diagram - R5 and later

A MAIN POWER SUPPLY

POWER
FACTOR
SWAVE CORRECTION
Option TO
PRINTERS
(Capacitor ISOLATION
120VAC AND
Pack) INVERTER DC HEAD

USB MAIN POWER

SUPPLY TO BEP (J4) H
CONTROL

TO XYZ DC VOLTAGES ->

I
CONTROLLER (48V) FEP’S MOTHERBOARD ->
DC-DC
CONVERTERS FEP’S BOARDS
(X2 = P4 on MPS)
USB CABLE BB 4D MOTOR
4D CONTROLLER (J28) CNTRL TX POWER to
H-BRIDGE
FEP MOTHERBOARD to
RELAY CARD
TO BEP (J1) (X1 = P3 on MPS)

Power from the wall outlet (100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz) is connected to the Main Power Supply. The
Main Power Supply delivers the needed voltages to the rest of the LOGIQ E9:

• Internal Printer (110 VAC)

• Front End Rack (DC power with several voltages)
• Front End Rack (TSV1 and TSV2 for the transmitters)
• Front End Rack (PMXVOUT for the probe channel multiplexers)
• Back End Processor
An inrush current limiter reduce the peak input current when the LOGIQ E9 is switched on. An EMI filter
helps to reduce EMI to acceptable levels.

The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
wall outlet.

Fuses are located inside the power supply (only to be replaced by the manufacturer).

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 25

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-2-1 General description (cont’d)

Figure 5-15 Main Power Supply

MAIN POWER SUPPLY

5-7-2-2 Temperature Control

The Main Power Supply is equipped with an internal fan with variable speed for temperature control.
Both the temperature of the air entering the power supply and leaving the power supply are measured.
Fan speed is controlled by the power supply.

5-7-2-3 Input
Mains Power, 100 VAC or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Figure 5-16 L1 - Mains IN connector

5 - 26 Section 5-7 - Power distribution

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-3 Power Up Sequence Description

5-7-3-1 Overview
The Power Up Sequence can be divided in the following steps:

1.) Switch AC Breaker to ON position

2.) Press the ON button on the Operator Panel
3.) BEP power-up

5-7-3-2 AC Breaker to ON position

Figure 5-17 Power On Sequence

BEP

Op I/O
Power On

PSON_N
PSON_N via BEP
(5Vstb)

M M
a +24V a
+48V
i +/-15, +/-6, +11V
n

48V_OK

M
a
PC Voltages
n

BEP
PS-OK

BEP
enumerates PCI

TS Voltage USB

TS_OK
TS_LEVEL_OK

1.) BEP, powered by 5Vstb, detects contact of Power-On Button.

2.) BEP sends PSON_N low to the Main Power supply.
3.) Main Power supply powers up +48V.
4.) Main Power supply powers up +24V, ±15V, ±6V, +11V.
5.) Main Power supply provides 48V_OK as soon as +48V is within specification.
6.) BEP Power supply Provides PC voltages from +48V.
7.) BEP enumerates PCI. (note that GFI DSP, or MRX DSP and PCI Express bridge must be powered
before BEP enumerates PCI).
8.) BEP application software controls +24V, ±15V, ±6V, +11V via USB (RackPower 0x6A).
9.) BEP application software controls TSV1and TSV2 via USB (SetTxPS 0x68).
10.)Main Power supply provides TS_OK and TS_LEVEL_OK output signals to GFI or MRX.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 27

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-4 Power Down Sequence description

5-7-4-1 Overview
There are three possible scenarios for Power Down of the LOGIQ E9:

• Power Down - normal power down (short push)

• Enforcement Power Down (long push)
• Power Loss
Each of the scenarios are described below.

5-7-4-2 Power Down

Figure 5-18 Power Down Sequence

Main Power Supply BEP GFI

or
Short-
Push
MRX
Power
Sw.

OS dialog box

USB SetTxPS GFI Stop PCI

and TX
Dischage
Shutdown
TSV1 and Stop Scanning.
TSV2 Disconnect HV.
TS_ON_STRB false.
Shutdown
Card Rack

Shutdown
PMX Voltages USB
RackPower

BEP OS
shutdown of
Shutdown all HD and
power supplies peripherals
except 48V

Shutdown all PSON_N PSON_

power supplies N False

1.) BEP detects short-term contact of Power Switch.

2.) BEP OS dialog box prompts user for power down.
3.) BEP, via PCI express, commands the GFI or MRX to stop scanning, disconnect TX circuits from
TS, stop strobe TS_ON_STRB.
4.) BEP, via USB, commands Power Supply to shutdown TSV1 and TSV2 (SetTxPS 0x68).
5.) Controller turns OFF PMX voltages.
6.) BEP, via USB, commands Power Supply to shutdown card rack (RackPower 0x6A).
7.) BEP OS performs shutdown.
8.) BEP sends PSON_N high to Power Supply.
9.) Controller turns OFF TS voltages.
10.)Controller TS_OK output signal goes low.
11.)Controller turns OFF PMX voltages.
12.)Controller turns OFF voltages +/-15, +/-6, +11V, +24V.
13.)Controller turns OFF +48V.
14.)Controller output 48V_OK goes low.

5 - 28 Section 5-7 - Power distribution

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-5 Shear Wave (SWAVE) Option

What is Shear Wave?

A Shear wave is a transverse wave that occurs in an elastic medium when it is subjected to periodic
shear.

Figure 5-19 SWAVE Visually Explained

A = Ultrasound “push“ pulse applied. B = Shear Wave response.

There are basically two methods of creating shear waves in tissue.

• External, low frequency vibrator applied to the body of the patient. Used in Magnetic Resonance
Elastography (MRE).
• Generating shear waves in tissue using a diagnostic ultrasound transducer. Shear waves "push"
the tissue at a low frequency in either a single burst of high amplitude, long duration pulses or a
series of such pulses.
Where is it used?

Because elasticity, stiffness, viscosity and a number of other Properties of certain tissue types change
with disease states, there is a clinical need of a quantitative method for assessing elasticity of tissue in
order to help detect potentially cancerous masses and help diagnose diffuse soft tissue diseases like
liver fibrosis.

Pre-SWAVE Mode

• Intermediate mode between B mode scanning and a single point analysis technique.
• During this pre-mode, the previous B-mode imaging mode is still active.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 29

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-5 Shear Wave (SWAVE) Option (cont’d)

SWAVE Acquisition

Pressing the “Start" set key initiates SWAVE acquisition.

Post-SWAVE Acquisition

• System displays the acquired SWAVE image and background B-mode image.
• User can cycle through the acquired frames, measure and annotate.
SWAVE images can be stored in both raw data and DICOM format.

In order to support the Shear Wave functionality, the Main Power Supply and the GTX Boards have
been modified.

• GTX Boards: A new version of the GTX Boards (GTX 2.4) has been introduced in R5 to support
Shear Wave. The new GTX Boards ARE NOT backwards compatible.
• Main Power Supply: The Capacitor Pack Module is added and connected to the HV outputs of the
Power Supply to support the extra power needed to handle the Ultrasound pulse for Shear Wave.
Shear wave is only available with MRX configurations. GFI configuration will not be compatible with the
Shear Wave option.

5 - 30 Section 5-7 - Power distribution

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-6 V Nav Inside Option

The VNAV inside allows the use of probes that have built in VNAV sensors, avoiding having external
cables and VNAV bracket use.

The following hardware is introduced to support the VNAV option:

• DriveBay2+
• GRLY Board with Hi-Pass connection
• Card Cage Front Cover to access the GRLY
• Cable from GRLY to DriveBay2+ (EE)
Some of them are already present in the standard console, depending upon the console vintage.

Figure 5-20 V Nav Inside Option Block Diagram

CARD RACK
METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD

METAL SHIELD
GTX

GTX

GTX
PD

RELAY
MRX

DC
BSCAN
S
VOLTAGES DOPPLER AUDIO
(X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V
PCI EXPRESS
VPD I2C
PULSER EXTRA PCI
EXPRESS LANES
VOLTAGES
(X1 = P3 on MPS)
BACKPLANE
J2 J1 CW PROBE

A
4D MOTOR DRIVE
CONNECTION
(BT2010 OPTION)
Y
Z POWER

USB
BAYBIRD
(VGU EE
OPTION)

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 31

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

5-7-6 V Nav Inside Option (cont’d)

Figure 5-21 V Nav Inside Option HDMI Auxiliary Sensor Input from GRLY

Figure 5-22 V Nav Inside Option Cable from GRLY to Auxiliary Sensor Input

5 - 32 Section 5-7 - Power distribution

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-8
Power Loss description

Section 5-9
Cables for LOGIQ E9
Please refer to:

• Section 9-16 "Mains Power Cables" on page 9-84

• Section 9-17 "Internal Cables" on page 9-86

Section 5-10
Probes description
See: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-104.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 33

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-11
Product manuals
The information needed to use and service the LOGIQ E9 scanner is collected in the documents
described in this section.

NOTE: Dates on screenshots are represented in MM/DD/YYYY format throughout the manual.
Information on how to change the LOGIQ E9’s date can be found in Customizing Your System,
Chapter 16 in the LOGIQ E9 User Manual/User Guide.

5-11-1 User documentation

• LOGIQ E9 User Manual/User Guide
• LOGIQ E9 Advanced Reference Manual
• Release Notes
• eDOCs CD (contains all user manuals and translations and the Basic Service Manual)

5-11-2 Service documentation

• LOGIQ E9 Basic Service Manual
• LOGIQ E9 Unpacking/Packing Procedure
• LOGIQ E9 Option Manuals

5 - 34 Section 5-11 - Product manuals

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 6
Service Adjustments

Section 6-1
Overview
6-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This section describes how to adjust the scanner.

Section 6-2
LCD Monitor adjustments
6-2-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to adjust the LCD monitor for optimal performance.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-2-2 Access to Adjustments

The monitor adjustment is done via three controls (buttons) on front of the monitor.

The LCD settings have been optimized at the factory, so normally, there should be no need for any
further adjustments.

Under special light conditions, you may want to adjust the LCD screen’s backlight intensity.

Factory default Intensity is: 100%.

Figure 6-1 LCD adjustment buttons - see Table 6-2 "Advanced LCD Adjustments" on page 6-4 for
feature descriptions

For complete information, refer to the of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16 for R3.x.x.

To obtain different test patterns for B/W or color adjustments, press Utility in the Touch Panel and select
Test Patterns.

6-2 Section 6-2 - LCD Monitor adjustments

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-2-3 LCD Adjustment Procedure

Table 6-1 Recommended LCD Settings

Room Condition Contrast Brightness

Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology 85 35

Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology 90 55

Bright Room 100 100

Factory Settings 100 60

6-2-3-1 Brightness
• To reduce the brightness, press the left arrow button. A popup box with the current brightness
setting will be displayed on the screen.
• To increase the brightness, press the right button.
• Push the mode button once to remove the popup bow from the screen and save the current values.

6-2-3-2 Contrast
Use the recommended LCD settings. The contrast is adjusted by the LOGIQ E9 software, when
selecting scanning modes and doing scanning adjustments. Changing the monitor’s contrast settings in
one mode will influence the picture quality in other modes.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-2-4 Advanced LCD Adjustments

Table 6-2 Advanced LCD Adjustments

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. NOTE: DO NOT adjust these LCD Adjustment Buttons

settings unless necessary!

To get access to the advanced

adjustments, press the mode button
for more than 10 seconds. This will
display the Advanced Menu on the
screen.

Menu on LCD original version:

• < Screen >
• < Color >
• < Others >
• < Information >
• < Language >
• < Exit >

1 Left
2 Mode
3 Right
4 Microphone

LCD Controls Advanced Menu

Menu on LCD V2
• < picture >
• < OSD >
• < Function >
• < Exit >

1 Left
2 Mode
3 Right
4 Microphone

On the LCD V2 Monitor menu, you

will find the sub-menus shown.

6-4 Section 6-2 - LCD Monitor adjustments

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-2-4 Advanced LCD Adjustments (cont’d)

Use the right button to select any of the menu items. The details for the original LCD monitor are
described below:

• The Screen sub-menu:

Not used on this LCD screen.

• The Color sub-menu has the following choices:

- Color: Brightness: (%)
- Color: Contrast: (%)
- K: Color temperature. Factory setting
- Gamma: Factory setting
- Gain: Retain Factory settings R (%), G (%), B (%)
- Reset: Reset all LCD Color settings to factory default.
- Return: Return to the Advanced Menu.
• The Others sub-menu has the following choices:
- Screen Size: Adjust screen size.
- Menu Position: Adjust the menu’s position.
- Reset: Reset all position settings.
- Return: Return to the Advanced Menu.

• The Information sub-menu is divided in two:

First part:

- Input Signal
- fH: Retain Factory settings (kHz)
- fV: Retain Factory settings (Hz)
Second part:

- (The monitor’s part number)

- Usage Time xxx H (counts the monitor usage in hours)
• The Language sub-menu:
This sub-menu has several language choices. Factory setting: English.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-2-4 Advanced LCD Adjustments (cont’d)

Use the right button to select any of the menu items. The details are described below:

• The Screen sub-menu:

Not used on this LCD screen.

• The Color sub-menu has the following choices:

- Color: Brightness: (%)
- Color: Contrast: (%)
- K: Color temperature. Factory setting
- Gamma: Factory setting
- Gain: Retain Factory settings R (%), G (%), B (%)
- Reset: Reset all LCD Color settings to factory default.
- Return: Return to the Advanced Menu.
• The Others sub-menu has the following choices:
- Screen Size: Adjust screen size.
- Menu Position: Adjust the menu’s position.
- Reset: Reset all position settings.
- Return: Return to the Advanced Menu.

• The Information sub-menu is divided in two:

First part:

- Input Signal
- fH: Retain Factory settings (kHz)
- fV: Retain Factory settings (Hz)
Second part:

- (The monitor’s part number)

- Usage Time xxx H (counts the monitor usage in hours)
• The Language sub-menu:
This sub-menu has several language choices. Factory setting: English.

6-6 Section 6-2 - LCD Monitor adjustments

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-2-5 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion Adjustment - R3.x and earlier

Table 6-3 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion Adjustment - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. LCD in vertical position

Remove the Monitor Rear Cover.

NOTE: If the monitor is not level,

see: 8-6-3-2 "LCD Monitor
installation - R3.x and earlier" on
page 8-117 to level the monitor.

LCD Hinge Nuts

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-3
DC Offset Calibration
6-3-1 Introduction
The DC offset calibration is performed to calibrate each ADC channel of the GRX inputs. The system
calibrates the ADC to zero output when there is no signal on the input. These bias voltages are stored
in the Back End Processor.

6-3-2 When to do a DC Offset Calibration

Do DC Offset Calibration:

• when installing a new LOGIQ E9

• after software has been updated or replaced
• when DRX board(s) or a MRX board has been interchanged
• when a DRX board(s) or a MRX board has been replaced
• when the Back End Processor has been replaced

6-3-2-1 DC Calibration Procedure

1.) Disconnect all connected probes.
2.) Power on the LOGIQ E9.
3.) On the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Service to access CSD.
4.) Log in as GE Service, enter current password
5.) Select Diagnostics tab.
6.) Select Service -> Diagnostics.
7.) Select the “+” before Service Diagnostics folder to open the list of choices.
8.) Select the “+” before Analog Receive to open the test choices for the analog receiver.
9.) Select DC Offset Calibration and then follow the on-screen instructions.

6-8 Section 6-3 - DC Offset Calibration

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-4
Operator Panel movement
6-4-1 Purpose of this section
The Operator Panel movement within the LOGIQ E9 is described in this section.

6-4-2 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism

Table 6-4 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. This procedure is intended to adjust the XY Adjustment for Operator Panel
locking mechanism for the XY Assembly.

Locate hex screw behind the XY Assembly

to adjust it correctly.

Use a 3 mm hex tool to adjust. Rotating the

screw clockwise will tighten and rotating
the screw counterclockwise will loosen the
lock.

Too tight will reduce the slack and make it

harder to engage the lock. Make the
adjustments in 1/4 turn increments and test
the lock until the optimum adjustment is
achieved.

NOTE: When turning the hex screw, do not

exceed half turn increments.
Overtightening will prevent the console
from locking into place and too loose will
make the console loose. You may try 1/2
turn adjustments, but the console may be
too tight or have too much slack.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-4-3 Adjusting the Z Mechanism

Table 6-5 Adjusting the Z Mechanism

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. There are no adjustments for the OP Z Mechanism Manual adjustment lever
vertical movement.

The Z mechanism can be manually

repositioned in the event the drive gear is
disconnected or has failed.

Push and hold the lever toward the center

of the device, and the OP can be adjusted
vertically.

WARNING
Operator console can drop unexpectedly when the mechanism is released.

6-4-4 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment

6-4-4-1 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts

Table 6-6 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts

Items Corresponding Graphic

1 U-bolt XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts

2 Brakes (one inside each of the

4 XY arms)

3 Park Lock (engages U-bolt)

6 - 10 Section 6-4 - Operator Panel movement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-4-4-2 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Table 6-7 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. This procedure is intended to release and XY Manual Release for Lock and
adjust the XY mechanism.
Brake Mechanism
Use a small tipped screwdriver and press in
until a "click" or the release, releases.
Some force may be required if the lock
adjustment is too tight.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6 - 11

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-4-4-3 XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Follow this procedure if the park lock is not working, or the lock does not respond when pressing the
Frogleg Controls:

Table 6-8 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Release the lock manually. See: Table 6-7 Park Lock screws
"XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake
Mechanism" on page 6-11.

Remove the four screws (1).

NOTICE

DO NOT pull the park lock out, the power cable is fragile, guide it

6 - 12 Section 6-4 - Operator Panel movement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 6-8 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. If park lock nut, (2) and park lock lever (3)
are in these positions., the lock will not Park Lock WILL NOT engage
engage. (This occurred in some earlier when in these positions
systems.) The nut and retainer did not
return to the "charged" mode after unlock.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6 - 13

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 6-8 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Rotate the threaded lead screw on the
actuator, (4) counterclockwise until the lock Park Lock WILL NOT engage
nut is barely touching the bearing housing when in these positions
(5) of the threaded lead screw and the two
plastic springs just touch, but do not
deform. Make sure the lever is loose and
engages with the lock wheel, (6), as shown.

Adjustment Set
Before reassembling the lock assembly,
make sure the nut, (2) and lever (3) are in
the position, as shown.

6 - 14 Section 6-4 - Operator Panel movement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

6-4-5 Using the Park Lock Properly

It is important to inform a customer of the following if they are experiencing problems with the XY park
lock function.

Be sure to:

• Apply the brakes. The locking mechanism will not engage if the device can move when trying to
park the console.
• Push the release button and gently guide the console into the locked position until the lock is
engaged.
• Not apply any weight on the console or lean on it. If the console is not in the normal resting position,
the lock will not engage when trying to park it.

6-4-6 Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation

When the OP is in the locked position, press the left button ”lock” of the Frogleg Controls, which causes
the motorized park lock to release and releases the brakes, momentarily in the froglegs. This allows the
OP to move in the XY direction.

When the console is not locked (floating), press the lock button, this will only release the brakes in the
froglegs, to allow easy movement. When the lock button is pressed and the console is pushed back into
the locked position, the U-bolt mechanically engages the park lock (similar to a car door). Pushing the
lock button does not affect the locking action of the park lock, it only releases the brakes, to allow the
OP to get pushed into the park lock easier. But, the lock button must be pushed to get the OP to the
locked position. Once the OP is in the lock position and the lock button is released, you can hear the
sound of the park lock rotating to engage the U-bolt.

For R4, at shutdown, a message will appear ONLY if the Operator Panel is not parked. This message
tells the user that the Operator Panel is not parked.

The user can proceed to park the Operator Panel or to leave it un-parked.

Notice that ONCE the user selects shutdown in the Monitor, the 2 buttons (Z-motion and XY-motion)
are disabled. The brakes on the XY mechanism are released the XY movement is free but the Z-motion
is disabled. If the user wants to adjust the Z mechanism after shutdown, they will need to use the handle
in the back of the unit.

NOTE: Remember, if the device brakes are not locked when trying to lock the OP, this can act as a
“shock absorber” and make it more difficult for the park lock to lock.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6 - 15

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-5
Direction Lock and Brake adjustments
There are no adjustments for the Direction Lock or the brakes.

Section 6-6
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers
When portable (off-line), use minimum time-out and no retries or it will affect shutdown speed.

The absolute value of the magnetic distortion reading ("1-2 Distortion") should be consistently less than
1 mm, especially since the transducer is held steady in one location. It is also important that the reading
is not cycling quickly between values such as continuously looping from -0.2 to 0.6. The environmental
quality for both sensor 1 and sensor 2 should be in the green range, preferably at 6 or 7 bars.

6 - 16 Section 6-5 - Direction Lock and Brake adjustments

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Section 7-1
Overview
7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host-, system-, and board-level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

Section 7-2
Service Safety Considerations.

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.

WARNING IF A LOGIQ E9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT PROCESSOR (CARD CAGE) COVER
IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.

WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PAD, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.

Section 7-3
Gathering Troubleshooting Data
7-3-1 Purpose of this Section
Problem images and system data (logs) can be acquired at the device or through remote diagnostics
(InSite ExC). These data can be used to perform service at the device, or can be sent back to the
manufacturer for analysis.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-2 Collecting Vital System Information

The following information is necessary to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:

NOTE: This information is normally collected with the Alt+D or Gather Logs utility.

- Product Name = LOGIQ E9

From the Utility -> System -> About screen:

Applications Software

- Software Version
- Software Part Number
- Build View
- Build Date
System Base Image Software

- Base Image Revision

- Image Part Number
- Image Date

7-2 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-3 Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs

If the system malfunctions, press the Alt+D keys simultaneously. This Alt+D function is available at all
times, and collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and the following logs:

• Keyboard Shadow Log

• Error Logs
• Crash Log
• Vital Product Data
• DICOM Logs
• Windows Event Logs
• Diagnostic Logs
• Service Logs
For a detailed list of Service Logs captured, see: 7-3-4 "Capturing Service Logs with ALT+D" on page
7-5.

Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box

When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box opens. Enter the following information:

• System ID serial number.

• Software version.
• System Date and time of occurrence.
• Sequence of events leading to issue.
• Is the issue repeatable?
• Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
• Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
• Select the Destination (storage media or Service directory for remote viewing through InSite ExC)
and click the Store button.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-3 Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs (cont’d)

NOTE: For Application SW R3.x.x or later, the Service Directory is no longer located under the export
folder, it is located in d:\ root directory (d:\service).

NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

NOTE: To save to a CD/DVD you MUST select CD/DVD Recordable as the destination device,
otherwise the data is written to the default Export/Service directory on the hard drive. The
Export/Service directory is only used for InSite ExC. It is not intended for images or report
storage use.

For CD/DVD; the system will automatically format if you insert an unformatted disk, gather logs and write
it out to the disk.

The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates
the possibility of artifacts from compression.

Double check the media that you made to ensure it contains at least two files. An example is shown in
Figure 7-2 "Example of Zipped Trouble Image and Logs File" on page 7-4.

Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image and Logs File

NOTE: In R2.x.x or later, the name of the file includes the name of the system:
log_93448US9_090910_101235.ziplog_computerName_YYMMDD_HHMMSS.zip.

7-3-3-1 Marking Log files

If a customer is experiencing issues during operations, the event can be marked and logged by pressing
Alt+1 or Alt+2 when they occur. When Alt+1 or Alt+2 are pressed, a marker is placed in the log to aid
log analysis.

7-4 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-4 Capturing Service Logs with ALT+D

The following is a list of the Service logs captured during an ALT+D log capture:

Figure 7-3 Capture Service Example

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x)

A sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it.

Launch the network sniffer application one of the following two ways:

1.) On the Regular Scan Screen, press Alt+N. This launches the network sniffer application.
2.) Select Configure on the Distinct Network Monitor Window.

Figure 7-4 Distinct Network Monitor Window

3.) Click on Capture Settings after selecting the Configuration pull-down menu.
4.) The Configuration screen opens.

Figure 7-5 Configuration Screen

7-6 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) (cont’d)
NOTE: Steps 5 - 12 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this system’s network activity.

If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will
capture all network activity, not just this system’s.

5.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-6 "Configuration - Filters Tab" on page 7-7), select the Filters
tab
6.) In the New Filter section confirm “built-in templates” is selected, then click Create.

Figure 7-6 Configuration - Filters Tab

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) (cont’d)
7.) On the Select Filter Task screen, select “Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more IP
addresses”, then select Next.
The Enter Filter Settings screen opens.

Figure 7-7 Enter Filter Settings

8.) Enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the Add button (). Repeat this step for all IP
addresses you wish to add, then select Finish.
The Enter Filter Settings screen closes.

9.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-8 "Capture Tab on Configuration
Screen" on page 7-9).

7-8 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) (cont’d)
10.)In the Filter to Apply field, select “My Computer”.

Figure 7-8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen

11.)Select Close. The Configuration screen closes.

12.)On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play).

NOTE: The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop.

13.)Double-click on the Go Ichiro icon to start the system application.

14.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS,
etc.). Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) (cont’d)
15.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager.
Select Exit to close the application and return to Windows. Then open Windows Task Manager to
open the Distinct Network Monitor screen.

Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen

16.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button.
The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.

7 - 10 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-5 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) (cont’d)
17.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-4 "Distinct Network Monitor Window" on page 7-
6), select Capture > Stop.
After stopping the data collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-11 "Save As Capture File dialog box"
on page 7-11 opens

Figure 7-10 Capture Data Sample

18.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name “d:\log\Sniffer\MyLog“.
19.)Select Save.
20.)On the Save As Capture File dialog (Figure 7-11), select Save.

Figure 7-11 Save As Capture File dialog box

21.)Check the d:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files: MyLog.cap,
MyLog.num.
22.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 11
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later)
Wireshark is a new network sniffer program that replaces Distinct in R2.x.x or later. Functionality is
similar from previous software.

Logs collected should be stored under d:/log/Sniffer folder to ensure they form part of general log
collection Alt+D or Collect Log.

1.) Press Alt+N.

2.) On the network sniffer screen, select Capture -> Options.

Figure 7-12 Network Sniffer Screen

3.) Select the interface that will be receiving packets (Network card A or Wireless B).

NOTE: Remember, if the device has a DVR, it will show up in the list. Select either Intel Network
connection or the Wireless network adapter.

If you are working with a Wireless connection, you must uncheck the “Capture packets in promiscuous
mode”; the wireless option does not support this mode.
Figure 7-13 Sniffer Captions Options

UNCHECK

7 - 12 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) (cont’d)
Use filters to limit the captured data. Filter by IP or by IP and port number.

By IP only: press on Capture Filter.

4.) Select IP only.

Use the IP address of the Scanner or the one from the DICOM device under test, on the Filter string
field, using the following syntax: (example) host 3.62.12.33 as shown in Figure 7-14 "Capture Filter IP
Only" on page 7-13, press OK.

Figure 7-14 Capture Filter IP Only

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 13
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) (cont’d)
By IP and port: Select Capture filter.

5.) Select New.

6.) Edit name for example DICOM port 104.
7.) Enter the string with the following syntax: port xxx and host yy.yy.yy.yy, where xxx is the port
number of “My Computer” in the scanner and yy.yy.yy.yy is the IP address of the device under test
(PACS,server, etc).
8.) Press OK.

Figure 7-15 Sniffer Capture Filter IP and Port

9.) Select Start.

10.)Minimize network sniffer window and initiate communication to the DICOM device (eg. send images
to the storage device or query Worklist).

7 - 14 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) (cont’d)
11.)Press Alt+N to restore Sniffer window and observe the network activity.

Figure 7-16 Sniffer Window and Network Activity

A.) "Packet List" pane - the packet list pane displays all the packets in the current capture file. Each line
in the packet list corresponds to one packet in the capture file.
B.) "Packet Details" pane - shows the current packet (selected in the "Packet List" pane) in a more
detailed form. This pane shows the protocols and protocol fields of the packet selected in the
"Packet List" pane.
C.) "Packet Bytes" pane - The packet bytes pane shows the data of the current packet (selected in the
"Packet List" pane) in a hexdump style.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 15
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) (cont’d)
In addition to the pre capture filter, use the Filter tool on the screen to filter what is displayed.

Filter the DICOM packets, since they are the most probable for the troubleshooting.

12.)Type “dcm” and press Apply. The display should filter all DICOM packets, filtering out image data.

Figure 7-17 Filter Tool Display

13.)Select Capture > Stop. Or, select the icon in the task bar to stop the capture.
14.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name d:\log\Sniffer\MyLog. (MyLog can be changed to the
name of your preference).
WireShark uses the libpcap (*.pcap, *.cap) file format as the default format to save captured packets.
(If you need to open this file with D-Trace or DVTK, the capture can be re-saved in NA Sniffer Windows
format).

Figure 7-18 Select Capture Stop Icon

7 - 16 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) (cont’d)
15.)Select Displayed. This will save only the filtered values rather than the entire capture.
16.)Select SAVE.
If you perform Alt+D or Gather Logs, these sniffer logs will be included in the zip file.

Figure 7-19 Select Capture Display

17.)Exit the sniffer application by clicking on the X in the upper right corner.
18.)If you have already performed Save as, you can continue without saving and quit the program.
Make sure you have saved your data before exiting the program.

Figure 7-20 Save Capture Data Question

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 17
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-4
Screen Captures
7-4-1 Purpose of this Section
To capture screen images that can be used for diagnostic and troubleshooting purposes.

7-4-2 Ctrl+PrintScreen Shortcut

A Ctrl+PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image displayed on the system. Images
captured using this shortcut are saved in the d:\export\service\image (R2.x.x or earlier) or in
d:\service\image (R3.x.x or later) directory using both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw DICOM (.dcm) formats.

The InSite ExC connection will have access to the export folder on the “D” drive to retrieve these
images. This feature will allow the customer to quickly and easily acquire images that can then be
viewed by the OLC.

7-4-3 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut

With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc (print screen) keys
simultaneously.

If you want to compress or delete them:

1.) From the touchpanel, select Utility -> Service -> Utilities -> Common Utilities -> Image
Compress & Delete Utilities. 7-5-17-13 "Image Compress & Delete Utility" on page 7-94.
2.) Select the checkbox for the image(s) you want to save, compress or delete.
3.) Select Compress or Delete Files, whatever function is desired.
A compressed file of the images is stored in d:\export (R2.x.x or earlier) or in d:\service (R3.x.x or
later). You may rely on the date and time of the Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent
image recorded. The uncompressed files are stored in d:\export\service\image (R2.x.x or earlier) or
in d:\service\image (R3.x.x or later).

7 - 18 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-5
Common Service Desktop
7-5-1 Purpose of this Section
This section describes the features of the Common Service Desktop (CSD).

NOTE: To run diagnostics, you should detach all probes.

NOTE: Reboot the system after performing any diagnostics before returning the system to customer
use.

NOTE: When using the Common Service Desktop do NOT minimize any of the Common Service Desktop
windows. If you minimize them they end up in the lower left corner of the screen behind the Service
Desktop Manager window and cannot be restored.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 19
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-2 Error Logs

1.) From the Log Viewer page click the Click Here link.

Figure 7-21 Error Logs - Log Viewer

2.) Select the log you wish to view.

Figure 7-22 Log Viewer - Log Options

NOTE: Informatics is no longer present for R4.x and later.

7 - 20 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-2 Error Logs (cont’d)

Features of the log viewer include:

• Plot logs and pages using the Utilities menu.

• Text search using the Search menu.
• Color-coded log entries to identify severity levels:
- Green: A Level 3 severity indicates that the parameter is within 0% - 50% of specified
tolerance.
- Orange/brown: A Level 2 severity indicates that the parameter is 50% - 100% of specified
tolerance.
- Red: A Level 1 severity indicates that the parameter is out of specification.

Figure 7-23 Log Viewer - Sample Page

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 21
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-3 Diagnostics Window Overview

1.) Instructions Frame
- Displays either test-specific text or the default instructions.
2.) Status Frame
- Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts,
the frame displays the “current” status of all test results. Also see: Figure 7-26 "Details Link
on Diagnostic Window" on page 7-24 for more current status data reporting.
- The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and
Operator Feedback.
3.) Loop Count
- This is an editable text field that only accepts numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the
switch is configured as an “execute” switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried
to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.
4.) Execute Button
- This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:
- Execute - to start the diagnostic
- Abort - to stop a diagnostic
5.) Progress Indicator
- Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.
6.) Short Text Message
- Displays brief messages about the test’s progress during execution.
7.) Status Frame Background Color
- Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to
indicate completion status.
- Code Status Fail = Red
- Code Status Pass = Green
- Code Status Abort = Yellow

7 - 22 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-3 Diagnostics Window Overview (cont’d)

Figure 7-24 Diagnostic Window Overview

The Service Diagnostics windows have some advanced features.

NOTE: The Loop Count field must have a value of 2 or greater to activate the Advanced features.

8.) This button toggles between Standard and Advanced mode. The window below shows the
advanced features.
9.) Select the choice for Stop On Failure for the Looping and List sections:
- Yes = the test will abort at the first failure
- No = the test will complete even if there are failures
10.)Select the choice for Stop On Abort for the Looping and List sections:
- List = the list will abort when you click the Abort button
- Loop = the looping will abort when you click the Abort button
- Diag = the diagnostic test will abort when you click the Abort button

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 23
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-3 Diagnostics Window Overview (cont’d)

11.)Select the Loop Order:
- ABCABCABC = Runs the selected diagnostics as one group and runs each group for the
number of loops specified.
- AAABBBCCC = Runs the selected diagnostics one at a time for the maximum loop value then
proceeds to the next diagnostic.

Figure 7-25 Advanced Features of Service Diagnostic Windows

Some diagnostic windows that verify the tolerance of known values compile the test data and display it
in a table. You can access this data through the Details links.

12.)Click the Details icon to open the Details window.

13.)Click the See Details link to compile the Details data.
14.)The table displays the compiled detail data.

Figure 7-26 Details Link on Diagnostic Window

7 - 24 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-3 Diagnostics Window Overview (cont’d)

Figure 7-27 Details Window

Figure 7-28 Details Table

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 25
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-4 Diagnostic Utility Freezes Up/Times Out

If the diagnostic utility has timed out (freezes up, will no longer run) you have to close the Common
Service Desktop and launch it again. This may occur when issues with the scanner cause the diagnostic
utility to fail completion of an executed test.

7-5-5 Diagnostic Symptom Guide

Use this Diagnostic Symptom Table to help match a symptom with the possible diagnostic test.

7 - 26 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6 OP Panel Utilities - Op Panel Interface

The Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program (GE Test App) available through the
Service Platform.

R4 or earlier

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 27
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-1 Launching the Op Panel Test

If the LOGIQ E9 is running R5 or later, see:
Figure 7-32 "OP Panel Test Start Up - R5 and later" on page 7-31.

Figure 7-29 Select System Type - R4 or earlier

15.)In R4 or earlier, on the Startup tab, select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test
interface. The other buttons on the Startup tab will now be active. See: Figure 7-30 and Figure 7-
31 "Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab - Detach and Other Buttons Active - R4 and earlier" on
page 7-30.

7 - 28 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-1 Launching the Op Panel Test (cont’d)

Figure 7-30 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab - Attach Button Active - R4 and earlier

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 29
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-1 Launching the Op Panel Test (cont’d)

Figure 7-31 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab - Detach and Other Buttons Active - R4 and earlier

16.)Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel.

7 - 30 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-1 Launching the Op Panel Test (cont’d)

Figure 7-32 OP Panel Test Start Up - R5 and later

For R5 and later, the upper right corner indicates the type of Op Panel is detected (connected).

• 5207000 series (used in consoles 5205000-7 and earlier).

• Upper/Lower 5209000 / 5208000 series (used in consoles 5205000-8 and later) R5 or later.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 31
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-2 Trackball Tab

Test the trackball functionality by moving the pointer over the blue box. Verify that the X and Y position
are updated as the pointer is moved.

Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed.

See: Figure 7-33 or Figure 7-34.

Figure 7-33 Trackball Tab - R4 and earlier

Figure 7-34 Trackball Tab - R5 and later

7 - 32 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-3 Keyboard Tab

Test the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard. Verify that the corresponding key is
highlighted when each key is pressed. See: Figure 7-35 or Figure 7-36.

NOTE: The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed.

Figure 7-35 Keyboard Tab - R4 and earlier

Figure 7-36 Keyboard Tab - R5 and later

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 33
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-4 Slidepots Tab

Test the slidepot (TGC) functionality by moving each slidepot through its range. Verify that the visual
and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved.

Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons. See: Figure 7-37 or Figure 7-38.
Visually verify the LED functionality on the upper operator panel.

Figure 7-37 Slidepots Tab - R4 and earlier

Figure 7-38 Slidepots Tab - R5 and later

7 - 34 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-5 Encoders Tab

Test the encoder functionality by rotating each encoder knob. Verify that the position is updated as the
encoder is moved.

Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed. See: Figure 7-39 or Figure 7-40.

Figure 7-39 Encoders Tab - R4 and earlier

Figure 7-40 Encoders Tab - R5 and later

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 35
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-6 Pushbuttons Tab

Test the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel. Verify that the
corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed. See: Figure 7-41 or Figure 7-42.

Figure 7-41 Pushbuttons Tab - R4 and earlier

Figure 7-42 Pushbuttons Tab - R5 and later

7 - 36 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-7 LEDs Tab

Test the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App. Verify that the
corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected. See: Figure 7-43 or
Figure 7-44.

Figure 7-43 LEDs Tab - R4 and earlier

Figure 7-44 LEDs Tab - R5 and later

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 37
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-8 Touch Screen Tab

Test the Touch Screen functionality by pressing on the Touch Screen of the upper operator panel. Verify
that the press is indicated in the black window by a highlighted circle. See: Figure 7-45 or Figure 7-46.

Figure 7-45 Touch Screen Tab - R4 and earlier

Figure 7-46 Touch Screen Tab - R5 and later

Check calibration:

Select Touch screen test, press each

target as they appear/Calibrate: Press
Touch screen and verify dots follow/ Run Windows calibration. Press very
Calibrate: Press and hold each touch lightly on each target until it moves to
target until it moves to next target. next location.

7 - 38 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-6-9 Ending the Program

1.) When you have finished testing the Op Panel, close the GE Test App.
2.) Shutdown the system and reboot.

7-5-7 Diagnostics - Common Diagnostics

7-5-7-1 Disruptive Mode

The customer enables this feature by choosing “Disruptive Mode” and confirming “Yes”, before a GE
Service FE can access the customer’s ultrasound scanner remotely. “Disruptive Mode” can be
requested remotely by the service technician or OLC, or it can be selected by the customer directly on
the scanner or workstation.

Section 7-6 "Troubleshooting using InSite ExC" on page 7-161

Figure 7-47 Disruptive Mode Utility Window

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 39
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8 Diagnostics for Service Diagnostics

7-9-19 "LOGIQ E9 Transmit and Receive Signal Path Diagnostics" on page 7-268. Also for 7-5-12-15
"Diagnostics Window Overview - R3.x.x and later" on page 7-96

7-5-8-1 Digital Receive

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• Intermittent general problems (communication between DRX and GFI)

• Image artifacts - pixilated/jagged edges

1.) Select the Digital Receive checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only
the selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

7 - 40 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-1 Digital Receive (cont’d)

Tests the signal path from the DRX to the GFI to the BEP. Also tests for latency signals of the DRX or
Nathan to the GFI.

Name: FDEMOD Signal Test

Description: Signal path test starting from the Fixed Demod on the GFI
Run Time: 00:03
If this test failed:
1.) Replace the PCIe cable.
2.) If GFI test above fails, replace the GFI board.
3.) Replace the BEP.

NOTE: The DRX High Speed Bit Error Rate Diagnostic Test Fails intermittently (not reliable) when run
on a system with MLA4 DRX3.1 (5301040-4) with production software revision R1.0.6 ONLY.

The intermittent errors encountered by the diagnostic may not be due to real failure; therefore the DRX
High Speed Bit Error Rate Diagnostic test results are not reliable when under this configuration.
This problem does not affect in any way the operation or performance of the LOGIQ E9, it is only related
to the diagnostic result.
DO NOT REPLACE BOARDS DUE TO THIS FAILURE.
The Diagnostic “DRX Signal Path” tests the same functionality without being affected by the issue and
will be a reliable test to troubleshoot any issue with the DRX board since it checks bit by bit all vector
data send to the FE DRX back at the backend PC.

Name: DRX High Speed Bit Error

Description: High Speed Bit Error Test on the DRX
Run Time: 00:03
If this test failed:
1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be cause of the failure. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

Name: DRX IF FPGA Test

Description: Signal path test starting from IF FPGA on DRX boards
Run Time: 00:03
If this test failed:
1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be cause of the failure. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

Name: DRX ASIC Test

Description: Digital Signal path tests sourced from output of Nathan ASIC
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be cause of the failure. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 41
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-1 Digital Receive (cont’d)

Name: DRX Signal Path Test (this test provides the most coverage on the DRX)

Description: Digital signal path sourced from input to Nathan. Does not test ADC. Sends simulated data
across the signal path.

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be cause of the failure. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

Name: Nathan Channel Repeater Test

Description: Tests the functionality of the Nathan channel repeater. Looks for latency signal
communication issues analog signal path.

Run Time: 00:05

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.

Name: Nathan Alignment Test

Description: Output TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. Verifies the alignment (16 identical samples in a row) of IF to GFI.

Run Time: 00:05

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.

Name: Nathan Input TVG Alignment Test

Description: Input TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. (Internal and external test modes of Nathan.)

Run Time: 00:05

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.

7 - 42 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-1 Digital Receive (cont’d)

Name: Nathan MLA Data Alignment Test

Description: Output TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. Each MLA gain is set differently to detect MLA ordering problems. Verifies the alignment (16
identical samples in a row) of IF to GFI.

Run Time: 00:05

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.

7-5-8-2 Memory
See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• Intermittent Problems
• Communication Problems

1.) Select the Memory checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only the
selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 43
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-2 Memory (cont’d)

Assesses the general state of the system. Tests the integrity of memory and communication of the
described boards. Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. The utility fills the memory with
data, retrieves the data, and compares it to the original data.

Name: GFI Memory Access Test

Description: Tests the internal and external RAM of the GFI Board.

NOTE: There may be multiple board dependencies causing this test to fail. Also, see the FDEMOD
Signal Test, 7-5-8-1 "Digital Receive" on page 7-40.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the GFI board.

Name: DRX IF FPGA Memory Test

Description: Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the DRX boards

NOTE: Also run the DRX Memory Test (next test below) for a full range of testing capacity.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the failed DRX board.

Name: DRX Memory Test

Description: Tests the memory of the Nathan ASICs on the DRX Boards.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the failed DRX board.

7 - 44 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-2 Memory (cont’d)

Name: GTX IF FPGA Memory Test

Description: Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the GTX boards

NOTE: Also run the GTX Memory Test (next test below) for a full range of testing capacity.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the failed GTX board.

Name: GTX Memory Test

Description: Tests memory of the David ASICs on the GTX Board

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the failed GTX board.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 45
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-3 GFI
See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• TGC Problems
• Doppler Audio Problems
• Image Artifacts
• Intermittent Instability

1.) Select the GFI checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only the selected
tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

7 - 46 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-3 GFI (cont’d)

Name: GFI Swept Demodulator Test

Description: Performs a signal path test of the swept demodulator FPGA on the GFI

Run Time: 00:05

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the GFI board.

Name: GFI Swept Demodulator Engineering Test (Not used in the field)

Name: GFI Front End Interface Test

Description: Test that the GFI can access Front End cards

Run Time: 00:06

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the GFI board.

2.) If the diagnostic identifies problems with other boards, run tests on those boards also.
3.) Replace any other failed boards as identified by the diagnostics for those boards.

Name: GFI Analog Test

Description: Tests the analog circuitry of the GFI Board.

NOTE: Used for test purposes only. There may not be any symptoms displayed by the system.

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Also run the Analog RX Tests (high, medium, low gain) for a complete test of the GFI gain.
See: 7-5-8-8 "Analog Receive" on page 7-54.
2.) Replace the GFI board.

Name: GFI Memory Access Test

Description: Tests the internal and external RAM of the GFI Board. (Same as the GFI Memory Test)

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the GFI board.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 47
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-3 GFI (cont’d)

Name: GFE Access Test

Description: Reads the version of the GFE FPGA

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the GFI board.

Name: Relay LVDS Test

Description: Tests the LVDS connection between the GFI interface and the GRLY

Run Time: 00:02

If this test failed:

1.) Swap GFI boards and/or GRLY board to determine which board has failed.
2.) Replace the failed board.

Name: GFI Fan Test

Description: Test Front End card rack fan control and fan speed measurements

Run Time: 00:40

If this test failed:

1.) Check fan drawer in Front End Card Rack. Verify connection with backplane. Replace defective fan.
2.) Replace GFI board.

Name: GFI GTX Test

Description: Test communication with the GTX Board. (Same as the GFI Memory Test)

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Based on failure information, replace the failed GTX or swap the GTX boards to isolated failure.

Name: GFI Fixed Demod Test

Description: GFI Fixed Demodulator signal path test. (Similar to the FDEMOD test with a slight variation
on how the test is run.)

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the GFI board.

7 - 48 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-4 System
See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• High temperature reports on the Home page.

• Temperature specifications are out of tolerance.
• Voltage specifications are out of tolerance.

1.) Select the System checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only the
selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 49
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-4 System (cont’d)

NOTE: You can also view temperature logs in the System Health Information section of the Home
page. These logs may help identify a trend or subsystem where temperature and voltage have
been high. low. or erratic.

Name: System Temperature Test

Description: Compares all system temperatures to their specified values

Run Time: 00:01

If temperature specifications are out of tolerance:

1.) The system should not be in a small enclosed space with other equipment that generates a lot of
heat. Move the system away from walls and other equipment.
2.) Clean or replace any dirty fan filters.
3.) Replace the fan tray beneath the card rack if the tachometer readings are slow.
4.) Check the fan on the BEP and replace the fan if it is not working.
5.) Replace the GFI board if none of the above fixes the temperature problems.

Name: System Voltage Test

Description: Compares all system voltages to their specified values

Run Time: 00:01

If any system is out of tolerance:

1.) Check the voltage test points on the system boards.

2.) Replace the system boards that are out of tolerance.
3.) Check the power supply.
4.) Replace the power supply if it is out of tolerance.

Name: FPGA Versions

Description: Displays the version for all of the FPGAs

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) If the test fails to read every FPGA version, check the connection between the Host and the GFI
board. Replace the GFI board.
2.) If the test fails to read the DRX IF FPGA version, check the DRX boards.
3.) If the test fails to read the GTX IF FPGA version, check the GTX boards.

7 - 50 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-5 Noise
See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• Image artifacts
• Image noise
• Poor image quality
• Missing image channels

1.) Select the Noise checkbox or the individual subtest to run the test.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 51
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-5 Noise (cont’d)

Name: Noise Floor Test

Description: Measures the noise floor of the System. The entire system is required for this diagnostic.
The noise floor is calculated from IQ data received without a signal source.

Run Time: 00:02

1.) See: 7-5-19 "Noise" on page 7-97 for information on minimizing environmental noise. If the problem
continues:
2.) Try a new probe (channels in the probe may be faulty). If the problem continues:
3.) Run the tests for 7-5-8-8 "Analog Receive" on page 7-54.

7-5-8-6 Transmit

Name: GTX High Speed Bit Error Test

Description: High Speed Bit Error Test on the GTX

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Swap GTX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed GTX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be the cause of the failure. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

Name: Tx P6 Illegal Waveform Test

Description: Transmits an illegal waveform and checks the error registers.

Run Time: 03:21

If this test failed:

1.) Swap GTX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed GTX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be the cause of the failure. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

7 - 52 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-7 Transmit/Receive

Name: T/R Channel Test

Description: Transmit and Receive Channel Test. Transmits on one at a time and received on one
channel at a time using an open probe connector.

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Swap front-plane boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved. Replace any
failed DRX board.
3.) Run Analog Receive Tests from section 7-5-8-8 "Analog Receive" on page 7-54.
4.) Replace GRX boards.
5.) Replace GRLY.

NOTE: Tx Rx Chain Test Tx1

Tx Rx Chain Test Tx2
These tests will be removed from the Service Diagnostics folder. They will remain in the
Engineering Diagnostics folder.

NOTE: GRLY folder

GRLY Receive Test conn 1
GRLY Receive Test conn 2
GRLY Receive Test conn 3
GRLY Receive Test conn 4
These tests will be removed from the Service Diagnostics folder. They will remain in the
Engineering Diagnostics folder.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 53
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-8 Analog Receive

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• Image artifacts - channel failure/noise

1.) Select the Analog Receive checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only
the selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

7 - 54 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-8 Analog Receive (cont’d)

Tests the signal path from the GFI to the backplane (GTX) to the GRX.

Name: DC Offset Calibration Utility

NOTE: The DC Offset Calibration Utility diagnostic MUST be run when the DRX boards are replaced
or moved. See: Section 6-6 "DC Offset Calibration" on page 6-20.

Description: Measures and corrects for the DC offset of the ADCs on the DRX.

Run Time: 00:02

Run this utility to calibrate the correct DC offset after replacing or moving DRX boards. A popup
message alerts the user to run this utility after DRX boards have been replaced or moved.

Name: Analog RX Test (High Gain)

Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to high (peak) gain. Failures could be
channel in DRX boards, Nathan, GRX to DRX communication.

Run Time: 00:02

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.

NOTE: A block of 8 dead channels indicates a failed DRX board.

2.) Replace any failed boards.

3.) Replace GRX boards (these cannot be swapped as one is 64 channel and one is 128 channel).

Name: Analog RX Test (Medium Gain)

Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to medium gain.

Run Time: 00:02

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.

NOTE: A block of 8 dead channels indicates a failed DRX board.

2.) Replace any failed boards.

3.) Replace GRX boards (these cannot be swapped as one is 64 channel and one is 128 channel).

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 55
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-8 Analog Receive (cont’d)

Name: Analog RX Test (Low Gain)

Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to low gain.

Run Time: 00:02

If this test failed:

1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.

NOTE: A block of 8 dead channels indicates a failed DRX board.

2.) Replace any failed boards.

3.) Replace GRX boards (these cannot be swapped as one is 64 channel and one is 128 channel).

7 - 56 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-9 Analog CW
Analog Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Tests.

Under Service Diagnostics / Analog CW.

INPUT > a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator and injected on the GRX board(-s).

OUTPUT > The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board and into the GFI.

The test input signal is a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator (TVG) and injected on
the GRX board (-s). The setup of the analog Doppler is done through a 512-bit setup word. The output
signal from the GRX will depend on the Doppler setup. For example the frequency will be determined
by the frequency of the signal in and the Mixer clock setup.

The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board and into the GFI. The GFE is
setup to receive CW data and the GFI processing in bypass mode.

The level is adjusted with the TSIG_GAIN and IQ_GAIN parameters to avoid saturation through the
GRX Doppler circuit.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 57
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-9 Analog CW (cont’d)

The 3-term Blackman-Harris window function is used for the analog CW tests. The input frequency is
2.521 MHz for a number of the tests and with the Mixer clock at 2.5 MHz; a Doppler frequency at 21 kHz
should result. To be able to find such low frequencies a vector is acquired that enables the Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT) of 16K samples (I-data) or 8K (I- & Q-data). This will give bin spacing of approximately
3 kHz (8K samples) and 1.5 kHz (16K samples).

The following tests will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is recommended to disconnect
all probes before running diagnostics. Only connect a probe or test connector if instructed for a specific
test.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Dual Channel

For each channel pair, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the Band Pass (BP) filter at 3.1 MHz and
a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The Doppler channel
pairs are measured for the parameters: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS, SNR and THD. This is calculated
for I & Q data separately.

Disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

If this test fails:

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Dual Channel test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Beam Forming

A sum of sine waves with the same frequency, but different phase, gives a sine wave output where the
amplitude is a function of the different phase settings.

The test uses small overlapping groups (4 channels) where the channel pairs have different phase
settings. Any amplitude deviation detected in this test, should indicate that there is something wrong
with phase setup. For each subtest, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and
a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The parameters tested
are: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS and SNR on the I-data.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Beam Forming test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

7 - 58 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-9 Analog CW (cont’d)

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW IQ Symmetry

For each subtest, a signal is setup with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer frequency
of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The number of sub-test, with identical
setup, is by default, eight. For the I/Q- symmetry test, the DC-component and RMS value for both the I-
and Q-part of the data set are measured. The symmetry quality measurement for this test is calculated
from the RMS values for each sub-test.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW IQ Symmetry test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Mixer Clock Sync

For the Mixer Clock Sync test, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer
frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The test enables one channel
pair, plus each of the other channel pairs per sub test, one at the time. The parameters to test for are
fdop, spectrum peak, RMS and SNR on the I-data.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Mixer Clock Sync test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW BP Filter / Mixer Clk

In the Band Pass Filter / Mixer Clock Test, for each channel pair, a signal is set up with combinations of
input signal frequency, Band Pass (BP) filters and mixer frequencies. The dither and Pedof probe inputs
are disabled. The Doppler channel pairs are measured for the parameters: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS
on I-data.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:08

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW BP Filter / Mixer Clk test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 59
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-9 Analog CW (cont’d)

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Post Mixer Gain

For each subtest, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer frequency
of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof inputs are disabled. The TSIG_GAIN parameter is set to give -26.1
dB gain. The test is run by setting up the four different IQ_GAIN parameter settings that corresponds to
the 4 post mixer gain setting of 0 dB, -4 dB, -8 dB and -12 dB. The RMS and RMS attenuation between
the four mixers gain settings on both I- and Q-data are tested.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Post Mixer Gain test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Doppler LPF

For the Low Pass Filter test, Doppler test frequencies, both in the filter pass band and the stop band are
set up. The mixer clock frequency is set to 2.5 MHz and the band pass filter to 3.1 MHz. The dither and
Pedof inputs are disabled. The LP-filter 3 dB frequency will typically be at about 40 kHz. The following
parameters are tested: fdop, spectrum peak and RMS both in the I- and Q-data.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Doppler LPF test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

7 - 60 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-9 Analog CW (cont’d)

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Dither Injection

A signal is injected in the dither input and result in the received I/Q data is checked. The test signal
generator is used for signal injection where the input signal is f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz
and a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither input is enabled for this test, while the Pedof inputs are
disabled. The DITHER_GAIN parameter values are set to 0, 1, 2 and 3. The parameter values
corresponds to Dither gain of 0 dB, -7 dB, -19 dB and -30 dB respectively. The RMS and the RMS
attenuation between the different gain settings in both I- and Q-data are tested.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Dither Injection test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Pedof

In the test, the two center frequencies of 2 MHz and 6 MHz are verified. These frequencies are set by
switching the Pedof band pass filter. The GFI test signal generator is used to input sine waves. The
Pedof test signal input is enabled. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. Sub tests using
combinations of input signal frequency, Pedof band pass filter settings, mixer clock frequency, test
signal gain, and IQ gains are run.

Parameters tested: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS, SNR and THD on both I- & Q-data. With this test the
Pedof (SD probe) CW path on the GRX board is tested.

The aCW Pedof Test will only be run on the CW64 board.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Pedof test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 61
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-9 Analog CW (cont’d)

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX ADC Digital LVDS

For the Analog-to-Digital Converter Digital Low-Voltage Differential Signaling test, the digital link from
the Doppler ADC and to the GFI board is verified. To verify signal integrity, the ADC is set up to
continuously transmit a predefined bit-pattern. Both I- and Q-data are acquired and each sample value
is tested. Port 0 on the PCA9554 I2C register on the GRX board is used to turn the ADC test pattern on/
off. The test signal generator on GFI is disabled for this test.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX ADC Digital LVDS test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX Mixer Phase Setup

This test utilizes a PCA9554 I2C register on the GRX board. All phase bits are set to one in the analog
Doppler setup data, before reading back from the I2C register and test bits 6 and 7 in the returned byte.
Next, all zeroes are sent to the analog Doppler, read back again and bits 6 and 7 appear in the returned
byte. The test passes if the bits of interest in the read back byte match the phase values that were setup.
Bit 6 and 7 are the last bits in the two shift register chains and if the correct value were read, the chains
must be intact. The test signal generator on GFI is disabled for this test.

Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.

Run Time: 00:05

1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI Tests
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX Mixer Phase Setup test fails:

2.) Replace the CW GRX board.

7 - 62 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-10 I/O Board Tests

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• Intermittent Problems
• Popup messages warning of system voltage problems - I/O Board Pwr Supply Test
• System comes up in simulator mode - run I/O Board GFI Voltage Test
• Unable to run diagnostics
• No doppler audio/system audio/general audio sounds - run I/O Board Audio Test
• No display on the monitor

1.) Select the I/O Board Tests checkbox to run all the subtests, or select the individual subtests to run
only the selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 63
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-10 I/O Board Tests (cont’d)

Name: I/O Board Pwr Supply Test

NOTE: Description: Compares all local I/O Board voltages to their specified values.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the I/O Board.

Name: I/O Board GFI Voltage Test

Description: Compares all voltages on the GFI to their specified values. The GFI may not be working,
therefore the BEP cannot communicate with the Front End.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Run the GFI tests to determine if the GFI is faulty. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

Name: I/O Board GFI Temperature Test

Description: Reads temperature sensors on the GFI board and compares the values against specified
limits.

Run Time: 0:05

If this test failed:

1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Check the Front End card rack cooling fans.
3.) Run the GFI Tests to determine if the GFI is faulty. See: 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46.

Name: I/O Board Self Test

Description: The processor on the I/O Board performs a check of its basic functions.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Replace the I/O Board.

7 - 64 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-10 I/O Board Tests (cont’d)

Name: I/O Board Loop Back Test

Description: Basic test of the USB communications with the I/O Board

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Verify that the USB cable/connections are properly connected. If the problem continues:
2.) Swap the USB cable/device with a known working cable/device. If the problem continues:
3.) Replace the I/O Board.

Name: I/O Board Audio Test

Description: Test all the audio channels on the I/O board.

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Run the GFI tests on 7-5-8-3 "GFI" on page 7-46 to verify that the GFI is working correctly. If the
GFI board is OK and the problem continues:
3.) Replace the I/O Board.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 65
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-10 I/O Board Tests (cont’d)

NOTE: The following Video tests can be used when the Touch Panel and the keys on the control panel
are on/illuminated, but the monitor does not come on.

Name: Video Status (Manufacturing)

Description: Tests if the I/O can detect a primary, secondary monitor and mother board video signal.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Swap monitors with a known working monitor. If the problem continues:
3.) Replace the monitor.

Name: Video Status (Service)

Description: Tests if the I/O can detect the primary monitor and the mother board video signal.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Swap monitors with a known working monitor. If the problem continues:
3.) Replace the monitor.

7 - 66 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-11 Tx Power Supply Test

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• System will not scan

• Interrupted scanning
• Scan unexpectedly stops

1.) Select the Tx Power Supply Test checkbox to run all the subtests, or select the individual subtests
to run only the selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 67
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-11 Tx Power Supply Test (cont’d)

Name: TxPs Control Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply Control Test (Verifies the voltage points are within specifications)

Run Time: 00:10

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the power supply

Name: TxPs Watchdog Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply GFI Watchdog Test (Tests that the power supply watchdog is
working)

Run Time: 00:07

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the power supply

Name: TxPs Alarm Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply Alarm Test (Tests the fault detection of power supply)

Run Time: 00:04

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the power supply

Name: TxPs Keep Alive Test

Description: Transmit Power Supply Keep Alive Test (Tests the communication between BEP and
power supply and fault detection)

Run Time: 00:07

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the power supply

7 - 68 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-12 EPS (Extended Power Shutdown) or CB (ChargeBoard used in BEP6) Tests

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• System shuts down immediately after power loss/interruption

1.) Select the Extended Power Shutdown Tests checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual
subtests to run only the selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 69
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-12 EPS (Extended Power Shutdown) or CB (ChargeBoard used in BEP6) Tests (cont’d)

Name: Extended Power Shutdown Detection Test

Description: Extended Power Shutdown Detection Test (Verifies the BEP can communicate with the
Extended Power Shutdown through the I/O board)

Run Time: 00:03

If this test failed:

1.) Run the I/O board tests: see: 7-5-8-10 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-63.
2.) Replace the I/O board if there are any problems. If the I/O board tests are OK:
3.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown.

Name: Extended Power Shutdown Voltage Test

Description: Extended Power Shutdown Voltage Test (Tests the specified voltages of the Extended
Power Shutdown)

Run Time: 00:05

If this test failed:

1.) Run the I/O board tests: see: 7-5-8-10 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-63.
2.) Replace the I/O board if there are any problems. If the I/O board tests are OK:
3.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown.

Name: Extended Power Shutdown Load Test

NOTE: Run this test with only one (1) loop. Do not run multiple loops on this test. Each loop will cause
the battery to discharge power, requiring a longer time to recharge after the test.

Description: Extended Power Shutdown Load Test (tests the battery load capacity)

Run Time: 00:30

If this test failed:

1.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown battery

Name: Extended Power Shutdown Charge State Test

Description: Reads the charge state of the Extended Power Shutdown unit and displays it.

Run Time: 00:06

If this test failed:

1.) Run the I/O board tests. See: 7-5-8-10 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-63.
2.) Replace the I/O Board if there any problems. If the I/O Board tests are OK:
3.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown board and the battery pack.

7 - 70 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-13 bayBIRD Tests

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of the looping and list
features.

Symptoms:

• 3D triangulation position is off/wrong

• V Nav Issues/poor tracking

NOTE: RF/EMI interference may also cause conditions of these symptoms. See: 2-2-3 "EMI limitations"
on page 2-5.

1.) Select the bayBIRD Tests checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only
the selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 71
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-13 bayBIRD Tests (cont’d)

Sensor 4 added for DriveBay2+ 3D Tracking System, introduced in R4.

Name: Run All Tests

Description: Runs all of the tests that are in the box

Run Time: 00:24

If this test failed:

1.) Run subsequent tests as identified in the failed test results

Name: Sensor 1

Description: Runs the tests for Sensor 1

Run Time: 00:21

If this test failed:

1.) Move the sensor (trandsucer) to a different port. If the transducer fails, replace the transducer.
2.) If the problem still persists, replace the bayBIRD.

Name: Sensor 2

Description: Runs the tests for Sensor 2

Run Time: 00:21

If this test failed:

1.) Move the sensor (transducer) to a different port. If the transducer fails, replace the transducer.
2.) If the problem still persists, replace the bayBIRD.

Name: Sensor 3

Description: Runs the tests for Sensor 3

Run Time: 00:21

If this test failed:

1.) Move the sensor (transducer) to a different port. If the transducer fails, replace the transducer.
2.) If the problem still persists, replace the bayBIRD.

Name: Sensor 4 (R4 and bayBird2+)

Description: Runs the tests for Sensor 4

Run Time: 00:21

If this test failed:

1.) Move the sensor (transducer) to a different port. If the transducer fails, replace the transducer.
2.) If the problem still persists, replace the bayBIRD.

7 - 72 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-8-13 bayBIRD Tests (cont’d)

Name: Transmitter

Description: Runs the tests for Transmitter

Run Time: 00:21

If this test failed:

1.) If the problem still persists, replace the bayBIRD.

Name: System

Description: Runs the tests for System

Run Time: 00:25

1.) If the problem still persists, replace the bayBIRD.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 73
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-9 DVR Test

Figure 7-48 DVR Test Screen

Name: DVR Version Test

Description: Reads the current version of the DVR board if installed

Run Time: 00:01

1.) If fails, re-seat board and run DVR self test

2.) If problem persist, replace DVR Board

Name: DVR self Test

Description: This test executes a self test of the DVR Board if installed

Run Time: 00:07

1.) If fails, re-seat board

2.) If problem persist, replace DVR Board

7 - 74 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-10 Diagnostics - BEP

For Diagnostic differences, see 7-5-12 "Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests - R4.x and later" on page
7-83.

7-5-10-1 Essential Tests

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs tests on essential functions of the BEP. This is a good starting point for isolating issues that may
originate from the BEP. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window.

Run Time: About 2 minutes.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button.
3.) Failed tests may have another diagnostic test that can help isolate the failure, or will indicate which
part to replace. For:
- PCI Bus configuration
- CMOS memory
- CPU - run 7-5-10-3 "System Board" on page 7-76
- RAM - run 7-5-10-9 "Memory" on page 7-81
- Hard Drive status and Random Seek - run 7-5-10-4 "Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan" on page
7-77 and run 7-5-10-5 "Hard Disk Drive Quick Test" on page 7-78
- Network Interface (loopback only) - run 7-5-10-7 "Network Adapter" on page 7-80.

7-5-10-2 Essential Tests differences in R4 and later

Essential test in R4 has two versions:

• Essential test: Complete test, same as R3 or earlier

Essential test, No network: same test, except it does not run the network tests for wired or wireless
connection.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 75
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-10-3 System Board

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs tests on essential functions of the PC Mother Board. The test results are displayed in the Status
portion of the window.

Run Time: About 1 minute.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button. If there are any failures:
3.) Check the Motherboard Harness. Swap with a known good harness. If the problem continues:
4.) Replace the Motherboard. If the problem continues:
5.) Replace the BEP.

7 - 76 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-10-4 Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs tests on essential functions of the Hard Disk Drive. The test results are displayed in the Status
portion of the window. This test can take a long time to complete. For a quick test to determine if there
are possible problems with the Hard Disk Drive, run
7-5-10-5 "Hard Disk Drive Quick Test" on page 7-78 before running this test.

The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the Hard Disk Drive controller and the
drive mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked.

• Drive Status - Hard Disk Drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one track at a
time.
• Random Seek - Hard Disk Drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times.
• Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the Hard Disk Drive.

Run Time: May take over an hour.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button. If there are any failures:
3.) Replace the Hard Disk Drive.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 77
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-10-5 Hard Disk Drive Quick Test

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs an overview set of tests on essential functions of the Hard Disk Drive. The test results are
displayed in the Status portion of the window. Run this test before running the 7-5-10-4 "Hard Disk Drive
Surface Scan" on page 7-77.

Run Time: May take about 6 minutes.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button. If there are any failures:
3.) Defragment the Hard Disk Drive. See: 7-5-17-10 "Disk Defragmenter" on page 7-93. If the problem
continues:
4.) Run the 7-5-10-4 "Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan" on page 7-77. If the problem continues:
5.) Replace the Hard Drive.

7 - 78 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-10-6 Video Card

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs a test on essential functions of the Video Card. The test results are displayed in the Status portion
of the window.

This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the video memory with 18
patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see these tests being performed
on your monitor.

You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key.

The following tests are performed on your monitor:

• Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one pattern at a
time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color.
• Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These tests will
appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various sizes and
colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed.
• Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video device driver
and video controller.

Run Time: May take about 10 minutes.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button.
3.) Replace the Video Card if there are any errors. If the problem continues:
4.) Replace the BEP.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 79
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-10-7 Network Adapter

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs a test on essential functions of the Network Interface. The test requires the system to be
connected to a network. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window.

This test gives the current status of the network and provides the option to restart the network
components in the BEP.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
Click the Execute button.

7 - 80 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-10-8 Network Adapter Diagnostic Changes for R4

Network Adapter Test is split into 2 folders:

• Network Adapter - see: Table 7-124 on page 7-157 and Table 7-125 on page 7-158
• Network Adapter Reliability - see: Table 7-126 on page 7-159 and Table 7-127 on page 7-160
Each folder contains separate tests for Wired and Wireless Adapters.

7-5-10-9 Memory
See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs a test on essential functions of the Memory. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of
the window.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button.
3.) Replace the BEP if any tests fail.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 81
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-11 Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests

Table 7-1 BEP Interactive Test Description Table - R3.x and earlier

Test Description

AVI playback Tests playing back an AVI file.

CD-R test Tests writing and reading to a CDR

CD-RW Not supported - Tests writing and reading data to a CD-ROM

DVD-R Tests writing and reading data to a DVD-R disk

DVD-RDL Not supported - Tests writing and reading to a DVD-R double layer disk

DVD-RW Not supported - Tests writing and reading a DVD-RW disk

DVD+R Not supported - Tests writing and reading to DVD+R media.

DVD+RDL Not supported - DVD+R double layer

DVD+RW Not supported - DVD+RW read write test

DVD_RAM Not supported - DVD RAM read and write test

DVD READONLY Not supported - DVD RAM read and write test

Keyboard N/A

Microphone N/A

Monitor Monitor test patterns

Trackball N/A

Sound Generates sounds for testing the speakers

USB Ports Lists USB Devices

7 - 82 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-12 Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests - R4.x and later

Interactive tests in R4 and later have been reduced. Tests that are not supported are no longer listed.

Table 7-2 BEP Interactive Test Description Table - R4.x

Test Description

AVI playback Tests playing back an AVI file.

CD-R test Tests writing and reading to a CDR

DVD-R Tests writing and reading data to a DVD-R disk

DVD READONLY Not supported - DVD RAM read and write test

Keyboard N/A

Microphone N/A

Monitor Monitor test patterns

Trackball N/A

Sound Generates sounds for testing the speakers

USB Ports Lists USB Devices

If you want to run these tests, it is recommended to run on a DOS prompt instead of CDS. This test will
take approximately 70 seconds.

• Insert the service ky

• Exit from the scanner software and exit to Windows
• Start a DOS prompt
• Insert a blank DVD-R into the drive
• Enter the command:
cd %insite_home%\PCDoctor\bin
pcd run --file scripts\dvdminusr.xml

There is another test with a CD-R disk. It is not recommended because it takes over 30 minutes. If you
want to run the CD-R test, enter the command:

pcd run --file scripts\cdr.xml-R

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 83
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-12-1 Keyboard
See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

1.) Click the Execute button on the Keyboard window. The PC-Doctor Keyboard Test opens.
2.) Select your keyboard type from the drop-down menu. Usually the default choice is the correct one.
3.) Click the Start button.
4.) Press each key on the system’s keyboard once and make sure the corresponding keys on-screen
are removed from view.
- Click the Pass button if all the keys are removed from the PC-Doctor Keyboard Test.
- Click the Fail button if any key is not removed from the on-screen keyboard. Failed keys may
be damaged and you may have to have your keyboard repaired or replaced.
- Click the Abort button to exit the test.
5.) The test status is displayed in the Current Status portion of the window.

7 - 84 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-12-1 Keyboard (cont’d)

Footswitch Tests

Under Service Diagnostics / BEP Interactive/ Keyboard

INPUT > Press left, middle or right footswitch keys.

OUTPUT > Keys will be registered as follows:

- Left Footswitch = Left Windows + F10

- Middle Footswitch = Left Windows + F11
- Right Footswitch = Left Windows + F12

7-5-12-2 Mouse (Trackball)

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

Runs a test on essential functions of the Trackball. The test results are displayed in the Status portion
of the window.

1.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
2.) Click the Execute button.
3.) Verify the signal cable is connected securely.
4.) Clean the Trackball. If the problem continues:
5.) Replace the Trackball.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 85
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-12-3 Audio (Sound)

See: 7-5-3 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-22 for a description of this window’s features.

1.) Click the Execute button at the bottom of the screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the first
test screen to open.
2.) Click Left Front and Right Front buttons to test your speakers. You should hear a recorded message
from each speaker.
3.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low “beep” from your PC.
4.) If all work, click the Pass button. Click the Close button.
5.) Do not perform the Microphone Interactive Test. Click the Close button.
6.) To test the WAV sound reproduction, click Left Channel, Right Channel, or Both Channels to test
your speakers. You should hear a guitar chord.
7.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low “beep” from your PC.
8.) Click the Close button.
9.) When you return to the Audio Test screen, click the Abort button.
10.)After closing the Service screen, you may see a Runtime Error screen(s). Close the screen(s).
11.)Before returning the system to the customer, always remember to reboot.
12.)If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the More Info button in the Audio Test dialog box for
information about possible causes and solutions.

7 - 86 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-13 Touch Panel

7-5-13-1 Calibration

NOTE: Always try TP calibration verification before attempting to calibrate. 7-5-13-2 "Calibration
Verification" on page 7-87. If the Touch Panel is so far out of calibration, hangs or does not
calibrate and the normal calibration procedure does not work, it may be necessary to do a
complete Pre-calibration. See: Section 6-5 "Touch Panel Pre-Calibration when Replacing
Upper OP FRUs" on page 6-12.

To do a Touch Screen Calibration, follow the directions on the Touch Screen. As each of the cross-hairs
appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser.

NOTE: You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair until it moves to the next location. If you just tap
the calibration cross-hair, there is a good chance your calibration will be corrupt.

7-5-13-2 Calibration Verification

The Start Touch Screen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small red dots
appears where you touch, this will indicate that the calibration is correct and you do not need to
re-calibrate.

If the red dots do not show up at the touched places, you need to run the Touch Panel calibration. To
terminate the verification, move the trackball pointer into the grid and press the set key.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 87
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-14 4D Motor Controller

NOTE: This test requires a 4D probe be connected to the system. This test requires a 4D probe to be
connected to the system.

Name: Presence Test

Description: This test detects the presence of the 4D Motor Controller.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Verify USB connection between the Host and the Main Power Supply.
2.) Verify 4D Motor Controller connections in Main Power Supply.
3.) Replace 4D Motor Controller.

Name: Version Test

Description: Displays the 4D Motor Controller version number.

Run Time: 00:01

If this test failed:

1.) Verify USB connection between the Host and the Main Power Supply.
2.) Verify 4D Motor Controller connections in Main Power Supply.
3.) Replace 4D Motor Controller.

7 - 88 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-14 4D Motor Controller (cont’d)

Name: Static 3D Test

Description: Performs a basic static 3D scan using the RAB2-5 probe connected in probe socket 4.

Run Time: 00:11

If this test failed:

1.) Verify an RAB2-5 probe is connected to probe socket 4 (right-most probe socket).
2.) Verify the correct probe icon appears on the touch panel.
3.) Verify there is no red arrow in the icon indicating that no 4D Motor Controller was detected. Re-run
the 4D Motor Controller Presence Test in this case.
4.) Replace the 4D Motor Controller board.

Name: 4D Test

Description: Performs a basic 4D scan using the RAB2-5 probe connected in probe socket 4.

Run Time: 00:11

If this test failed:

1.) Verify an RAB2-5 probe is connected to probe socket 4 (right-most probe socket).
2.) Verify the correct probe icon appears on the touch panel.
3.) Verify there is no red arrow in the icon indicating that no 4D Motor Controller was detected. Re-run
the 4D Motor Controller Presence Test in this case.
4.) Replace the 4D Motor Controller board.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 89
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-15 Patient I/O Tests

Under Service Diagnostics / Patient I/O.

This procedure provides a basic test of the ability of the system to start and stop the acquisition of data
from the Patient I/O Module to the Host via the GFI.

INPUT > The connection of ECG leads, PHONO (PCG) or AUX is optional.

OUTPUT > The results display information about the signal data acquired from the ECG input to the
Patient I/O Module. The information includes the minimum signal value, maximum signal value and
mean signal value.

If this test fails:

1.) Run GFI tests

If GFI is ok:

2.) Replace Patient I/O module

If this test passes and there are still issues with poor or no ECG trace, replace ECG leads.

7 - 90 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-16 Configuration

7-5-16-1 Software Options Interface

Use this window to add, delete, and view details for software options.

• Add = Click the Add button to enter a new Software Option Key.
• Delete = Select a Software Option Key and click the Delete button to remove a Software Option Key.
• Details = Select a Software Option Key and click the Details button. A table at the bottom of the
screen displays information for Hardware ID, Product Code, Version, Options Serial Number, and
Key Life.
• Refresh = Click the Refresh button to update the list after adding or deleting Software Option Keys.

7-5-16-2 InSite ExC Agent Configuration

• Device Name = LE9_<the serial number>
• CRM Name = may be different in different countries (poles) (equivalent to the System ID)
• Enter the appropriate data for the InSite ExC configuration and click the Submit Changes button.

NOTE: If data is missing from any required fields the form will refresh and the required fields will be
identified by red labels when you click Submit Changes.

• Click the Reset Form button to clear the current data.

7-5-17 Utilities - Common Utilities

7-5-17-1 Event Log Viewer

1.) Select the log you wish to view:
- Application link = an event log relative to application events
- System link = an event log relative to system events
- Log Name = enter the Log Name you want to view and click the View button

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 91
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-17-2 Disruptive Mode

Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. If you are accessing through InSite
ExC, this can only be enabled with the customer/operator confirmation.

7-5-17-3 Disk Usage

View capacity and usage statistics for the different disk drives.

7-5-17-4 IP Configuration
View Windows IP configuration and LAN connection data.

7-5-17-5 Network Status

View data for active network connections.

7-5-17-6 Windows Services

View the Windows Services that are started and running. A Windows Service is a computer program
that has been automatically started and is running in the background on the computer.

7-5-17-7 User Accounts

View the user accounts that have been given access to this system.

7-5-17-8 Shared Resources

This screen displays all shared network resources on this system.

7-5-17-9 System Shutdown

System Shutdown gives you the ability to Restart or Shutdown the system when using Virtual Console
Observation from a remote computer.

NOTE: Retain Disruptive Mode checkbox:

• MUST be checked if you are working from a remote computer.

Should be unchecked if you are working locally on the scanner.

7 - 92 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-17-10 Disk Defragmenter

Disk fragmentation can reduce the amount of disk space available, and slow computing speed. Use the
disk defragmenter to restore optimum disk space and speed performance.

NOTE: System performance can be significantly reduced while the Disk Defragmenter is running.

1.) Select the Volume (drive) you want to defragment, or analyze for fragmentation.
- Click the Defragment button to defragment the selected volume.
- Click the Analyze button to generate an Analysis Report that identifies any files that require
de-fragmenting. Continue with step 2 below.

Figure 7-49 Disk Defragmenter Window

NOTE: The Disk Defragmenter Window may hide behind the service browser.

2.) Select the file(s) you wish to defragment and click the Defragment button on the Analysis Report
window.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 93
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-17-11 Gather Logs Utility

Click the Gather Logs button to prepare them for retrieval by the On Line Center. The logs are
compressed into a .zip file and the filepath and file name is displayed on the window.

If the application is not running, logs can be gathered using the Gather Logs shortcut on the Windows
desk top.

7-5-17-12 Image Viewer Utility

The Image Viewer Utility lists the availability of images for export. This example shows no images
available for export.

7-5-17-13 Image Compress & Delete Utility

Select the images you want to compress or delete. This example shows no images available at this time.

• Compress Files = compresses images into a .zip file.

• Delete Files = deletes the images from the image Export/Service directory.

7 - 94 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-17-14 Scanner Documentation Interface

Use this to view the user and service documentation for the system. You need to have your
documentation disk inserted in the drive in order to open it. Otherwise you will see the message
displayed in Figure 7-50 "Scanner Documentation Interface Window" .

Figure 7-50 Scanner Documentation Interface Window

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 95
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-17-15 Distinct Network Monitor R1.x.x

The Distinct Network Monitor has a sniffer that monitors network traffic and allows you to capture
network data without redirecting or altering it.

For directions on how to configure the sniffer go to "Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer
(Software R1.x.x)" on page 7-6.

LOGIQ E9 R2.x.x or later Distinct was replaced by Wireshark. This menu is no longer available. Use
Alt+N to open the sniffer application.

7-5-17-16 Virtual Console Observation (VCO)

VCO is used by a remote service technician or the Online Center (OLC) to access and modify all
scanner settings and programs on the customer's ultrasound scanner.

7-5-17-17 Telnet Server Control

Telnet Server must be running to allow remote access to the DOS command prompt window. Click the
Start button to run Telnet Server.

NOTE: Telnet Server is a Windows service that runs in the background. StopTelner Server when you
are not using it to perform a service action. It can slow the system down if left running in the
background.

7-5-18 Utilities - Scanner Utilities

7-5-18-1 DICOM Verify

This utility provides an easy way to verify DICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices
on the network.

1.) Enter AE Title, IP Address, and Port values of the DICOM device.
2.) Check the Loop checkbox to repeat the operation, or leave it unchecked to perform the operation
once.
3.) Click the Verify button to see the results.
4.) Uncheck the Loop checkbox to stop the operation.

7-5-18-2 Replacement
Field is not populated on the LOGIQ E9.

7-5-18-3 PM
Field is not populated.

7 - 96 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

7-5-19 Noise
Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. Possible EMI sources
should be identified before the unit is installed.

Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. Some of
these sources include:

• medical lasers
• scanners
• cauterizing guns
• computers
• monitors
• fans
• gel warmers
• microwave ovens
• light dimmers
• portable phones
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.

When talking to the customer, try to gather as much information as possible about the conditions when
the noise appear:

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 97
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

This page was intentionally left blank.

7 - 98 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 8
Replacement procedures

Section 8-1
Overview
8-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter describes how to remove and install, or replace, modules and subsystems in the
LOGIQ E9. It also includes instructions for installing and re-installing the software.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-2
Warnings and important information
8-2-1 Purpose of this section
This section includes important information. Read it before doing any of the procedures in this chapter.

8-2-2 Warnings

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
Signed Date
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN OR
CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
4. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
5. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
When the BEP door is open, the Extended Power Shutdown circuit board or ChargeBoard is exposed.
When working inside the BEP, remove the battery cable from the Extended Power Shutdown or
ChargeBoard to prevent accidental short circuit of the 24V of the battery that can damage the Extended
Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard circuitry.

WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, WE HAVE LIMITED THE LIFTING
WEIGHT FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG
(35 LBS) REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE.

WARNING AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS (WHEELS) OR
ADJUSTING BRAKES.

8-2 Section 8-2 - Warnings and important information

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-2-2 Warnings (cont’d)

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE POWER
CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.

WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE

DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED
SEPARATELY.
CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL COMPANY TO
DECOMMISSION YOUR EQUIPMENT.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-2-3 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.

GE Healthcare policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior
to shipment. GE Healthcare employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/
equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part
or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils
or an ultrasound Probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation
industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.

8-2-4 Manpower - When two persons are needed

These replacement procedures require two persons:

• Casters Replacement
The rest of the replacement procedures can be carried out by one person.

8-4 Section 8-2 - Warnings and important information

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-2-5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9

In addition to the standard tools listed in 10-4-2 "“Standard” GE Tool Kit in the USA" on page 10-4, the
following tools (TORX bits or drivers) are needed to service the LOGIQ E9. If the torque is not indicated
with the procedure, hand tighten the screws/nuts.

Table 8-1 Tools used for servicing LOGIQ E9

TOOL TYPE TOOL SIZE

BIT # TX-10

BIT # TX-15

BIT # TX-20
TORX
BIT # TX-25

BIT # TX-30*

BIT # Tx-45*

FLAT BLADE
1/4 inch or 6 mm
SCREWDRIVER

PH1
PHILLIPS
PH2
SCREWDRIVER
PH3

5 mm

HEX KEY 8 mm

10 mm

5 mm

10 mm
OPEN END WRENCH
13 mm
TORQUE WRENCH
3/16 inch

Up to 81 Nm (59.7 lbf-ft)**

ADJUSTABLE
152 mm (6 inches) long
WRENCH

PRY BAR approximately 18 inches overall (457 mm)

* 90 degree “L“ is suggested. A full set of 90 degree “L“ Torx wrenches are
recommended.
** Heavy mechanical parts may need a specific torque. Each procedure will
indicate the torque needed.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-3
Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front
Figure 8-1 illustrates what is the Left Side (1), Rear / Back (2), Right Side (3), and Front (4) of the
LOGIQ E9.

Figure 8-1 Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front

8-6 Section 8-3 - Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-4
Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software
8-4-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to install and/or reinstall software on LOGIQ E9.

8-4-2 LOGIQ E9 models versus software requirement

Table 8-2 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility -
Upgrade Options

CONSOLE
MODEL
NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION
Phase I BT2010 BT2011 BT2013 BT2014
4 Rev. 5 Rev.
1.0.3 1.0.4 1.0.5 1.0.6 2.0.3 2.0.4 2.0.5 3.1.2 3.1.3
x.x x.x
LOGIQ E9,
5205000 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
00-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-2 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-3 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-4 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-5 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-6 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-7 N N N N N N N N N U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-8 N N N N N N N N N U Y
100-240 VAC

8-4-3 Tools provided with the LOGIQ E9 or as part of an upgrade

• CD with LOGIQ E9 System software
• CD with LOGIQ E9 Application software

If a patch software CD has been included:

• CD with a Patch for LOGIQ E9

Verify that the software is current. Updated software may be available. Check for any available
FMIs.

NOTE: Service Dongle is not required and should NOT be installed during the software loading
session.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-4 Space management - moving all images

NOTICE In order to complete a successful restore of the Patient Database, if needed, the images must be moved
away from LOGIQ E9 before doing backup of the Patient Database. Depending on the location set-up,
either move the images to a remote server or to removable media like DVD or CD discs.
As the images are moved, the database will point to the new location.
If the backup procedure is not completed correctly, the images and database information could be lost.

Refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3 to perform the following
tasks:

• Configure the Disk Management Function

• Set the Disk Management Schedule
• Configure Data Management Settings
• Configure Destination Device Setting
• Run the Disk Management Function
• Start Disk Management Manually
Speak with the personnel at the site to determine which patient images need to be backed up prior to
starting.

8-8 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-5 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations

For information, refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3.

8-4-6 Loading the Software

8-4-6-1 Manpower
One person, 60 minutes.

8-4-6-2 Tools
• Software CDs
• Service Dongle

8-4-6-3 Overview
The Hard Disk Drive on LOGIQ E9 is divided into five partitions.

NOTE: The Hard Disk Drive on LOGIQ E9 has three visible partitions (two partitions are hidden).

Table 8-3 Use of the Partitions

DRIVE LETTER LABEL

C: SYSTEM

D: USER

E: ARCHIVE

When installing (and reinstalling) software, you get the choice to either replace all the contents on the
Hard Disk Drive, or only install the software on the C: partition. If you chose to replace all the contents
on the Hard Disk Drive, all stored data, including all set-up data will be lost. It is considered to be the
best practice to always move images away from the Hard Disk Drive, do backup of databases etc. and
record important configuration data on paper before starting a software load or reload, as described
earlier in this section.

The software is delivered on two CDs, one for the system software (which is technically a DVD) and one
for the LOGIQ E9 application software. In some cases, a third CD with a software patch, may also be
included. A software patch CD is used when a few new files should be installed or changed, but the
changes do not require a complete software load.

When installing the software, start with the system software, then the application software and if
included, install the patch software at the end. This is described in detail over the next pages.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-3 Overview (cont’d)

NOTE: System Software may also be referred to as the Base Image or Ghost.

WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,

YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS AND
CUSTOMER PRESETS TO CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE
UPGRADE

Before the System Software Load, you must perform the following steps:

• contact the customer to allow enough lead time to back up the system.
• be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams.
• review troubleshooting section to collect information for future analysis if you are troubleshooting
loss of image or patient data.
• disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
• be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash Drives).
If a printer is plugged in at this time, it is automatically installed.
• save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after
something is completed.
• save all User Presets.

NOTE: After a full or partial system software load, confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving
Time feature is turned off (Utility -> System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab ->
Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox). Be sure the system and DVR date, time and time zone
are set correctly.

NOTE: System and Application software disables the Run window normally accessed from Start ->
Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.

8 - 10 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-4 System Software Load - R3 and earlier

1.) Turn on the system.
2.) Turn on all digital peripherals.

NOTE: R.2.x.x or later: If Wireless LAN option is installed. Collect Wireless LAN information as well.
See: 4-2-11-3 "Connectivity — WLAN" on page 4-19. Also, if WLAN is using WPA-2 security
and requires user name and password to access the network, you need to contact the IT
department to obtain this data since it will be lost during reload.

3.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility -> Configuration -> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back
to the system in the System Checkout section after the install.
For a convenient form, see: 4-2-11-2 "Connectivity — Recording the TCP/IP settings" on page 4-18
and 4-2-11-4 "Connectivity — Recording the AE Title and Port settings" on page 4-20.

4.) Record the system’s installed Option strings from the Utility -> Admin -> System Admin page.
This step is precautionary in the event the software load has issues. For a convenient form, see:
4-2-11-9 "Admin — Recording the Software Option Keys" on page 4-26.

5.) Perform a Backup from the Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore page. You should back up the
Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and
Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the install.
For a full Base load, this step is mandatory.

For a C: Partition load, this step is precautionary in the event the software load has issues. The data
should transfer over for a C: Partition load.

See: the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3.

6.) Confirm with customer that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.
7.) Insert the applicable LOGIQ E9 System Software disk into the DVD drive.
8.) Properly power down the System. Depress the ON switch and select “Shutdown” on the window.
9.) Wait until the LCDs on the Operator Panel are switched off and the ON switch has turned amber.
10.)Power ON the System.
The scanner boots from the Software disk and displays a load warning message.
Figure 8-2 System Software load warning message
****WARNING * WARNING * WARNING * WARNING * WARNING * WARNING ****

THIS PROCEDURE MAY RESULT IN COMPLETE PATIENT DATA LOSS IF NOT USED CORRECTLY! PLEASE READ
THE OPTIONS BELOW CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING.

This process is NOT REVERSIBLE and should NOT be stopped once started! DO NOT power off the
system until the process has completed. It will take less than 10 minutes to load the drive.
If this process is stopped for some reason, you will have to run it again to completion or
else the system will not work.

If you want to proceed with this process press the “Enter” key to continue with option
selection.

...or...

Remove the disk from the Optical drive and Press “CTRL-C” now to exit and power cycle your
system to restart it without overwriting your disk drive’s current contents.

Press any key to continue...

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 11

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-4 System Software Load - R3 and earlier (cont’d)

11.)Press any key to continue; or to abort, remove the disk from the drive and press CTRL-C.

The System Software Load Instruction window displays.

Figure 8-3 System Software load instruction (R1x.x)

Figure 8-4 System Software load instruction (R2.x.x)

NOTICE If you select [1] in the next step, ALL existing software and data will be erased. If backup has not been
performed as described earlier in this manual, all data like Patient Database, System Configuration and
User Configurations (Customer Presets) will be lost.

8 - 12 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-4 System Software Load - R3 and earlier (cont’d)

12.)Choose one of the following:
a.) Select [1] ONLY if a [2] update cannot be used: Selecting [1] performs a complete LOGIQ E9
software installation. (All data will be erased.)
b.) Select [2] to update/re-install the software on the C:\ partition. (Only data on the C:\ partition
will be erased. This will keep Patient Archive and Presets intact.) On R2.x.x or later, C:\ and
Z:\ partitions will be reloaded. Archive and presets are not affected.
c.) Select [3] to Exit.(The procedure exits without software load.)
Depending on the choice, a message displays explaining choice again. This is the last
warning message prior to software load. Press CTRL-C to abort.

With choice [1] or [2], the Software loader program launches.

The Norton Ghost window displays.

Figure 8-5 Norton Ghost window

WARNING Do not interrupt the software loading at any time.

13.)Wait for the software installation to complete. (Typical installation time: 5-10 minutes). Status bar
on the screen indicates progress.
The Base Load Complete message displays. See: NOTICE below.
Figure 8-6 Base Load Complete message

If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully com-
pleted. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system.

Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software”
load procedure.

NOTICE DO NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet.

DO NOT insert the Application disk into the DVD drive until you have completed all the remaining
directions in this section. If you insert media in the drive beforehand, the drives will not remap correctly.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 13

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-4 System Software Load - R3 and earlier (cont’d)

14.)Remove the Base Load disk.

NOTE: If you do not remove the disk, the Base Load process repeats when the system boots up.

15.)Restart the System using Ctl+Alt+Del.

When the system reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process.

NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button (button turns
amber).

16.)Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.

NOTE: Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front
panel could corrupt the installation. While the script is running, several windows or dialog
boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive.

17.)Wait for the “System Settings Change” window asking “Do you want to restart your computer now?”
to display, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.

Figure 8-7 System Settings Change dialog box - Restart Windows Message

18.)Select “Yes” (see: Figure 8-7) to restart.

NOTE: In R2.x.x, a DOS window will display, that times out and automatically reboots the system. You
can wait or select “Yes“ to restart.

19.)Wait until all drivers are installed automatically and the reboot is complete.
20.)Check your Service Dongle. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights
up.
21.)From Windows, double-click on My Computer to confirm the CD/DVD drive is mapped to G:\.
If the drive is not mapped to the G:\:

a.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer”.

b.) Open C:\remap\newmap.
c.) Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.
22.)Remove the Service Dongle.

8 - 14 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-5 System Software Load - R4 or later

1.) Turn ON the LOGIQ E9.
2.) Turn ON all digital peripherals.

Table 8-4 Software Load - R4 or later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Insert the applicable LOGIQ E9 Base System Software Load warning message
Image Load Software disk provided in the
Kit, into the DVD drive.

Power down the LOGIQ E9.

Wait until the LCDs on the Operator Panel

are switched off and the ON switch has
turned amber.

Power ON the LOGIQ E9. Some Windows

screens will be displayed before displaying
the software load warning message.

The scanner boots from the Software disk

and displays a load warning message.

2. R5 Base Image consist of two disks. Insert Disk #1 (1 of 2).

3. If “CTRL-C” to cancel is pressed: after any key is pressed

Type “y“.

if cancelled
Type “exit“.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 15

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-4 Software Load - R4 or later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Press any key to continue; or to abort,

remove the disk from the drive and press System Software load
CTRL-C. instruction (R.4)

The System Software Load Instruction

window displays.

5. Choose Option 1 to perform a complete After any key to boot DVD Ghost
Software installation, all data will be erased.
Choose Option 2 to install Software on C
partition only. Only data on C partition will
be erased.

Choose Option 1.
Ghost wait until next

The Software loader program will begin to

launch and the following warning will
appear:

You are about to reload the

entire disk. If you DO NOT want
to do this, remove the CDROM from
the CDROM drive and Press
"CTRL-C" now to exit and power
cycle your system to restart
without overwriting your disk
drive's current contents. Symantec Ghost Window

Press any key to continue...

The Software loader program will continue

to launch.

In R5 or later, at some point the system will

prompt to insert Disk #2. Follow the screen
instructions.

The Symantec Ghost window displays.

WARNING
DO NOT interrupt the software loading at any time.

8 - 16 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-4 Software Load - R4 or later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

6. Wait for the software installation to Partition Load

complete. (Typical installation time: 30
minutes). Status bar on the screen
indicates progress.

The Base Load Complete message

displays.

DO NOT insert the Application disk into the

DVD drive until you have completed all the
remaining directions in this section. If you
insert media in the drive beforehand, the
drives will not remap correctly.
Base Load Complete message

NOTICE

DO NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet.

7. Remove the base load disk.

NOTE: If you do not remove the disk, the base load process repeats when the LOGIQ E9 boots
up.

8. To restart the LOGIQ E9, type "exit" and press enter to reboot.

When the LOGIQ E9 reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process.

NOTE: If the LOGIQ E9 does not reboot, press and hold down the Power ON/OFF button (button
turns amber).

Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.

NOTE: DO NOT TOUCH THE LOGIQ E9 during this process. Activating the keyboard,
mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation. While the script is running, several
windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the LOGIQ E9 is
unresponsive.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 17

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-4 Software Load - R4 or later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

9. Wait until all drivers are installed Restart Windows Message

automatically and the reboot is complete.

DO NOT PRESS ANY KEY, ignore all

messages until the automatic reboot is
complete.

10. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights up.

From Windows, double-click on My Computer to confirm the CD/DVD drive is mapped to G:\. If
the drive is not mapped to the G:\:

From the Desktop:

a. select “My Computer.”

b. Open C:\remap\newmap.
c. Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.

Remove the Service Dongle.

8 - 18 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-6 Loading the Application Software

1.) Insert the applicable disk labelled LOGIQ E9 Application SW.
2.) Wait about 30 seconds.
A window opens (see: Figure 8-8) showing the contents of the drive.

3.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.

Figure 8-8 LoadSoftware.bat File

4.) If the pop-up window in Figure 8-8 does not open in a minute, perform steps A - C below.
A.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer.”
B.) Double-click the G:\ drive to open the pop-up window in above.
C.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.

NOTE: If the base image does not match the part number and revision of the approved base image,
then the system notifies you of the required base image needed and does not run the software.

A Command window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-9 opens.

Figure 8-9 Command Window (Note: Window will reflect actual software version instead of “Rx.x.x”)

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 19

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-6 Loading the Application Software (cont’d)

5.) As indicated, press any key to continue, ONLY for R4 and earlier.
The process is completely automated and provides you with several status messages, including the
message in Figure 8-10 (LoadSoftware Information Window).

NOTE: When the LoadSoftware Information Window displays asking you to select OK, do nothing. This
window closes automatically.

Figure 8-10 LoadSoftware Information Window - Do not select OK

6.) Wait while the software loads (approximately 7-8 minutes). Do not interrupt process.

WARNING Do not interrupt the software loading at any time.

After software load is complete, the system reboots.

After the reboot, the System installs the Service Platform.

NOTICE Do not try to prevent the reboot. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper
threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.

If hyper threading turns off, you must perform the re-ghost and application software load again.

NOTE: After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot, you may get some error
messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present,
these messages are normal and should be ignored.

After the Service Platform reboot, the Start Application window displays.
Figure 8-11 Start Application window (Note: Window will reflect actual software version instead of “Rx.x.x”)

8 - 20 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-6 Loading the Application Software (cont’d)

7.) Remove the applications disk from the DVD drive.
8.) From the Start Applications window, select “Start” (if the CD is still in the tray; otherwise, the system
starts up automatically).
The System powers down and reboots.

The first time the application loads after a SW reload, you may see: the error shown in Figure 8-12.
Select OK and reboot the system.

Figure 8-12 SW Reload Error Message

During the reboot process, the system may prompt for the Basic Option string (valid license) (see:
Figure 8-13 "Enter Option String" on page 8-21.
If the Basic Option string is not saved in the Option Dongle, or if this is a software upgrade, the SW
License window may open.

NOTE: If only the title bar is visible in the lower left corner of the monitor, double-click the SW License
title bar to expand the window.

Figure 8-13 Enter Option String

NOTE: All systems must have at least the Basic Option string for the software to run. Any single Option
String may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic).
Demo Option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo Option
string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

8-4-6-7 Verifying the software versions

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> ABOUT.
2.) Verify software and hardware versions as recorded in Table 4-14 "Record Software and Hardware
versions" on page 4-30.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 21

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-8 Verifying the software option key settings

NOTE: Software Option Dongles are software version dependant. If a new software version has been
installed, follow installation instructions for that software. Usually, new software option strings
are needed. When reinstalling the same software, the Software Option Strings should be
reused.

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.
2.) Verify that the Software Option String(s) (alphanumeric strings) in the S/W Option Dongle section
is (are) the same as recorded in Table 4-10 "Software Option Keys" on page 4-26.
3.) If needed, enter any new or missing option key string(s) in S/W Option Key field and select Add.

8-4-6-9 Verifying the TCP/IP settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utilities -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP.
2.) Verify that all settings on the TCP/IP screen match those recorded in Table 4-2 "Record settings
from TCP/IP screen" on page 4-18.
3.) Select “SAVE SETTINGS.“
4.) Select OK to continue.
5.) Reboot system.

8-4-6-10 Verifying the AE Title and Port settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utilities -> Connectivity -> Device.
2.) Verify that all settings on the Device settings screen match those recorded in 4-2-11-4 "Connectivity
— Recording the AE Title and Port settings" on page 4-20.
3.) Select “SAVE SETTINGS.”
4.) Select OK to continue.

8 - 22 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-11 Restoring Patient Archive and System Configurations

For complete instructions, refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16.

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore.
2.) On the Restore screen, select as needed:
- Patient archive to restore the patient archive images.
- Report archive
- System configuration to restore all System Settings/User Defined Configuration (Presets), OR
- One or several system configuration items to restore parts of the System Settings and User
Defined Configuration (Presets), see: Figure 4-21 "Backup/Restore settings" on page 4-28.
3.) Select the appropriate Source Device.

CAUTION The Restore procedure will OVERWRITE the existing data on the local Hard Drive. Make sure to select
the correct source device.

4.) If restore is done from a backup on a removable media, insert the media in the drive.
5.) Select Restore Now.
Depending on the selection, one or two Restore confirmation windows are displayed:

6.) Ensure that the correct source is selected, and select OK.
The selected items are copied to the systems. If items from the System Configuration are restored
the system needs to be rebooted. The Reboot system window is displayed.

7.) Select OK to reboot the system, and verify the Customer Presets are working properly.

8-4-6-12 Verifying the Video and DVR settings

1.) Select Utility -> System -> Peripherals.
2.) Verify Video Settings Format as recorded in Table 4-13 "Record settings from Peripheral screen"
on page 4-29.
Correct the selection if needed.
3.) Verify DVR model as recorded in Table 4-13 "Record settings from Peripheral screen" on page 4-29.
Correct the selection if needed.
4.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper DVD/DVR write functionality.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 23

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-6-13 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-1 Loading the Software Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-10 Basic Measurements

8-4-7 Loading the Application Software Only

Use this procedure to update application software only.

1.) Place the LOGIQ E9 Application Software DVD in the CD/DVD Drive, while the system is running.
2.) Reboot the system. The Start Application window displays.

Figure 8-14 Start Application window (window will reflect actual software version
instead of “Rx.x.x”)

3.) Select “Install SW.” Press OK on the Start Loader message and then press OK on the New System
Software message. A Command window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-15 "Command
Window" on page 8-25 opens.

8 - 24 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-7 Loading the Application Software Only (cont’d)

Figure 8-15 Command Window

NOTE: The window reflects the actual software version instead of “R6.0.6EP1_L9_, as shown above.

4.) As indicated, press any key to continue.

NOTE: When the LoadSoftware Information Window displays asking you to select OK, do nothing. This
window closes automatically.

Figure 8-16 LoadSoftware Information Window - Do not select OK

5.) Wait while the software loads (approximately 7-8 minutes). Do not interrupt this process and ignore
any errors.

WARNING Do not interrupt the software load at any time.

After the software load is complete, the system reboots.

NOTICE Do not try to prevent the reboot.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 25

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-7 Loading the Application Software Only (cont’d)

After the reboot, the Start Application window displays.

6.) Remove the LOGIQ E9 Applications Software DVD from the DVD drive.
7.) Store the application disks with the system.
8.) Remove and destroy the previous Application software version disks.

Figure 8-17 Start Application window (window will reflect actual software version
instead of “Rx.x.x”)

9.) From the Start Application window, select “Start.”

The first time the application loads after a SW reload, you may see: the error shown in Figure 8-18,
"SW Reload Error Message." Select OK and reboot the system.

Figure 8-18 SW Reload Error Message

During the reboot process, the system may prompt for the Basic Option string (valid license) (see:
Figure 8-19 "Enter Option String" on page 8-27.

If the Basic Option string is not saved in the Option Dongle, or if this is a software upgrade, the SW
License window may open.

NOTE: If only the title bar is visible in the lower, left corner of the monitor, double-click the SW License
title bar to expand the window.

8 - 26 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-7 Loading the Application Software Only (cont’d)

Figure 8-19 Enter Option String

NOTE: All systems must have at least the Basic Option string for the software to run. Any single Option String
may enable multiple options (i.e., Basic).
R2.x.x requires basic plus BT2010 option String.
Demo Option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo Option string
in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

8-4-7-1 Verifying the software versions

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> About.
2.) Verify the software version. Ensure that the software version shown on the screen matches the
disk label.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 27

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-4-7-2 Verify and Update Vital Product Data

It is essential that Vital Product Data (VPD) is verified or updated after any hardware change to the Back
End Processor (BEP) or Front End Processors.

NOTE: NOTE: Failure to properly program Vital Product Data could cause adverse affects on system
operation and image quality.

8 - 28 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-5
Replacing Covers and Bumpers
8-5-1 Purpose of this section

This section describes how to replace the Covers and Bumpers on the LOGIQ E9.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 29

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-2 Side Covers replacement

Table 8-2 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
5 minutes per Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
Side Cover

Table 8-3 Preparations and Preparation Link

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8 - 30 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-2-1 Side Covers removal

NOTE: Whenever the left Side Cover is removed, clear the BEP Fan(s) intake(s) of any debris.

When removing or installing the right side cover on a LOGIQ E9 with the On-board V Nav Stand, the
cover is removed and installed in the same manner, except the rear portion of the cover must be placed
behind the stand.

Table 8-4 Side Covers removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. NOTE: The removal procedure is easier if
the rear lock is released first, and then the
front lock.

The Side Covers are “clicked” on to the

LOGIQ E9 with two locks, located at the
lower end of the cover.

1a. Push a #1 phillips screwdriver into the

rectangular hole in the Side Bumper until it
reaches the lock mechanism.

1b. Push the handle on the screwdriver

downwards to release the lock.

2. Lift the cover backwards and up to remove

it from the system. Repeat steps for the
opposite side.

Set cover in a safe place.

LOGIQ E9 with Covers and

Side Cover removed

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 31

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-4 Side Covers removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. If the LOGIQ E9 has the Removable Fan
Tray, the right Side Cover removes by
removing the Fan Tray and the four Phillips
screws at the bottom of the Cover.

Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9.

Remove the four Phillips screws at the

bottom of the Cover.

8 - 32 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-2-2 Side Covers removal

Table 8-5 Side Covers removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. NOTE: If the left Side Cover was removed,
MAKE SURE to clear the BEP Fan(s)
intake(s) of any debris, before installing the
cover.

Align tabs at the top inside of the Side

Cover with the slots on the Top Cover.

Place the top edge of the Side Cover so it

hooks onto the Top Cover.

2. Align and squeeze the front edge of the side

cover to latch it into place.

Position the Side Cover side lock first.

Position the Side Cover front lock.

Align and squeeze the bottom front of the

side cover to latch it into place.

Position the Side Cover rear lock, lifting up

the rear tab and guiding it into place.

Align and squeeze the bottom rear of the

side cover to latch it into place. Repeat
steps for the opposite side.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 33

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-5 Side Covers removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. If the LOGIQ E9 has the Removable Fan
Tray, reinstall the four Phillips screws at the
bottom of the Cover.

Slide the Fan Tray into the LOGIQ E9.

Make sure the Fan Tray SEATS
COMPLETELY into the Card Cage.

8 - 34 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-2-3 Removable Fan Tray Cover replacement

Table 8-6 Removable Fan Tray Cover removal / installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9.

2. Flip the Fan Tray over and lay on a safe

surface.

Remove the four screws securing the Fan

Tray Cover to the Fan Tray.

Retain the screws.

3. Install the replacement Cover and secure with the screws removed.
4. Reinstall the Fan Tray Assembly.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 35

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-3 Shearwave Console Cover replacement

NOTE: Whenever the left Side Cover is removed, clear the BEP Fan(s) intake(s) of any debris.

Table 8-7 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
10 minutes

Table 8-8 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Left Side Cover and loosen the Top Cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.

8 - 36 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-3-1 Shear Wave Console Cover removal / installation

NOTE: Whenever the left Side Cover is removed, clear the BEP Fan(s) intake(s) of any debris.

Table 8-9 Shear Wave Console Cover removal / installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Loosening the Top Cover or removing it will
allow the Front Cover to flex enough to
slide the Shear Wave Console Cover out.

Slide the Cover out.

2. Reinstall the replacemnt Cover.

3. Reinstall the Top Cover, if removed and the Side Cover.
4. If the Top Cover was removed, perform Functional Checks. See: 8-5-4-3 - Calibration and
adjustments, 8-5-4-4 - Verification and 8-5-4-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-40.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 37

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-4 Top Cover replacement

Table 8-10 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-11 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove Side Covers.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8-5-4-1 Top Cover removal

Table 8-12 Top Cover removal

(Top Cover Screw placement as seen from above.)

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1.. Remove the two screws that secure the Top
Cover.

Remove the Top Cover and gently pull back

and up.

Reinstalled to the screws to avoid damage

to the Rear Handle.

8 - 38 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-4-2 Top Cover installation

Table 8-13 Top Cover Installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the two screws reinstalled to avoid Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover
damage to the Rear Handle. (seen from front)

Position the Top Cover onto the Front Cov-

er at the four hooks.

Install and tighten the two Phillips screws.

Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover

(seen from side)

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 39

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-4-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-4-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-4-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-14 Top Cover replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 40 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-5 Side Bumpers replacement

Table 8-15 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-16 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Cover(s).

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8-5-5-1 Side Bumpers removal

Table 8-17 Side Bumpers removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Unscrew and remove the six screws and washers that fasten the Side Bumper to the Side Cover.

Remove the Side Bumper from the Side Cover.

8-5-5-2 Side Bumpers installation

Table 8-18 Side Bumpers installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Align the fastening holes in the Side Bumper with the holes in the Side Cover.

Fasten the screws with washer, one by one until all have been inserted.

Tighten the screws.

2. Install the Side Cover(s).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 41

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-5-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-5-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-5-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-19 Side Bumpers replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 42 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-6 Foot Rest Bumper replacement

Table 8-20 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
No additional tools required.
15 minutes

Table 8-21 Preparations and Preparation Link

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8-5-6-1 Foot Rest Bumper removal

NOTE: In Table 8-22, the Side Cover was removed to be able to view the Side Latch. You do not need
to remove the Side Cover to perform this procedure.

The Foot Rest Bumper is fixed with snap locks.

Table 8-22 Side Latch for Foot Rest Bumper

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1.. Pull the Foot Rest Bumper upwards and
over the pedals to release the snap locks,
while freeing the side latches.

You may need to push down the pedals to

be able to remove the Foot Rest Bumper.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 43

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-6-2 Foot Rest Bumper installation

Table 8-23 Foot Rest Bumper installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Position the Foot Rest Bumper in place.

Push the Foot Rest Bumper down and over the pedals.

You may need to push down the pedals to be able to place the Foot Rest Bumper.
2. Replace the Side Covers, if they were removed.

8-5-6-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-6-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier.

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-6-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-24 Foot Rest Bumper replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 44 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-7 Front Cover replacement

Table 8-25 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-26 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Covers, Top Cover and the Foot Rest Bumper.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-5-6 "Foot Rest Bumper replacement" on page 8-43.

8-5-7-1 Front Cover removal

The Front Cover Assembly is made of two pieces.

Table 8-27 Front Cover Screw placement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1.. Unscrew the two Phillips screws that fix the
Front Cover Assembly to the chassis.

Pull the upper end of the Front Cover out

and upwards to free it from the pedals and
the frame.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 45

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-7-2 Front Cover installation

Table 8-28 Front Cover installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Thread the Front Cover so it fits in between
chassis and pedals.

Align the Front Cover guide pins with holes

in the frame.

Front Cover Assembly (cover on left and

probe plate on right) with guide pins.

Fasten Front Cover with two Phillips

screws.

2. Install the Foot Rest Bumper, the Top Cover and the Side Covers.

8 - 46 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-7-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-7-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-7-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-29 Front Cover replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 47

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-8 Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement

NOTE: The Plate Connectors w/Guide is replaced, it does not include the Probe Connectors Label. If
the Plate Connectors w/Guide is replaced, the Label MUST BE installed. Or, if only replacing
the Label, see: Table 8-33 "Probe Connectors Label Placement" on page 8-49.

Table 8-30 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-31 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Covers, Top Cover, Foot Rest Bumper and the Front Cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-5-6 "Foot Rest Bumper replacement" on page 8-43.
• 8-5-7 "Front Cover replacement" on page 8-45.

8-5-8-1 Plate Connectors w/Guide removal

The Plate Connectors w/Guide is attached with hatches.

Table 8-32 Plate Connectors w/Guide removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen the hatches.

Remove the Plate Connectors w/Guide.

8 - 48 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-8-2 Probe Connectors Label Placement

Table 8-33 Probe Connectors Label Placement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the adhesive from the new Label
and place it above the Probe Connector
openings, as shown. 5328860

If replacing the Label only, remove the old

Label completely.

8-5-8-3 Plate Connectors w/Guide installation

Table 8-34 Plate Connectors w/Guide installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Position the plate and snap it into position.
2. Install the Front Cover, Foot Rest Bumper, Top Cover and the Side Covers.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 49

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-8-4 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-35 Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required
checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks
4-2-4 Top Console position adjustment

8 - 50 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-8-5 Label Placement for the LOGIQ E9 used in a Veterinary Environment

Table 8-36 LOGIQ E9 used in a Veterinary Environment Label Placement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. If the Side Cover Assemblies are replaced,
reinstall the “VET“ Label as shown.

1. If the Rear Cover Assembly is replaced,

reinstall the “For Veterinary use only“ Label
for the Rear Cover Assembly as shown.

For Veterinary
use only
5454608

NOTE: The Back Cover Label with ETL

Label is not a Spare Part.

2. If a Probe is replaced, reinstall the “For

Veterinary use only“ Label for Probes as
shown.

5447716

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 51

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-9 Filter Cover replacement

8-5-9-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-9-2 Tools
No tools are needed to replace the filter cover.

8-5-9-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.

Follow this link if you need more information:

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8-5-9-4 Filter Cover removal

1.) Gently pull the Filter Cover out and away from the System.

Figure 8-20 Remove the Filter Cover

8-5-9-5 Back Filter Cover installation

1.) Inspect the Filter, and clean if necessary.
2.) Place the Filter Cover into position and press the Filter Cover top corners until the Filter Cover locks
engage.

8 - 52 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-9-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-9-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-9-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-37 Filter Cover replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8-5-10 Filter replacement

See: 8-7-2 "Rear Filter and “handle type“ Bottom Filter replacement / cleaning" on page 8-176.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 53

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-11 Rear Cover replacement

NOTE: When replacing Rear Cover Assembly for a LOGIQ E9 used in veterinary environment, the
LOGIQ E9 Spare Parts Handling for Veterinary Systems MUST BE reinstalled before the
LOGIQ E9 returned for use. See: 8-5-8-5 "Label Placement for the LOGIQ E9 used in a
Veterinary Environment" on page 8-51 and Section 9-20 "Product Labels on LOGIQ E9
consoles used in a veterinary environment" on page 9-113.

If the V Nav On-Board Stand Option is present on the LOGIQ E9, the Option must be removed to
remove the Rear Cover. See:
8-12-5 "Assembling or replacing the On-Board V Nav Stand" on page 8-310.

8-5-11-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-11-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-11-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Rear Bumper.
5.) Remove both Side Covers.
6.) Remove Filter Cover at rear.
7.) Remove Filter.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-9 "Filter Cover replacement" on page 8-52.
• 8-7-2 "Rear Filter and “handle type“ Bottom Filter replacement / cleaning" on page 8-176.

8 - 54 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-11-4 Rear Cover removal

1.) Remove the two Phillips screws on each side of the Rear Cover.
2.) Lift the Rear Cover away.

Figure 8-21 Rear Cover fixing screws

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 55

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-11-5 Rear Cover installation

1.) Position the lower edge of the Rear Cover into place on the rear of the system frame.
2.) Tilt the top edge of the Rear Cover toward the system frame.
Be sure the manual release handle of the Z Mechanism extends through the air vent on the Rear
Cover.

Figure 8-22 Z Mechanism manual release handle

3.) Position the Rear Cover into place.

4.) Gently pull up on the Z Mechanism’s manual release handle to confirm proper position through the
Rear Cover air vents.
5.) Install the four screws, two on each side.
6.) Inspect the Filter, and clean in necessary.
7.) Install the Filter.
8.) Install the Filter Cover
9.) Re-install the V Nav On-Board Stand if present.

8 - 56 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-11-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-11-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-11-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-38 Rear Cover replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 57

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-12 Door, I/O Panel replacement

8-5-12-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-12-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-12-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.

Follow this link if you need more information:

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8 - 58 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-12-4 Door, I/O Panel removal

1.) At the back of the system, push a four, flat blade screwdriver into the rectangular hole, next to the
Door, I/O panel until it reaches the lock mechanism.
2.) Push the handle on the screwdriver to the left to release the lock.

Figure 8-23 Door, I/O Panel

3.) Open the Door, I/O Panel.

4.) Hold the Door, I/O Panel near the upper hinge (1), and pop hinge out and away from the upper hinge
post (2) on the Rear Cover.

Figure 8-24 Hinge placement on Door, I/O Panel

8-5-12-5 Door, I/O Panel installation

1.) Place the Door, I/O Panel into position by sliding lower hinge (3) onto lower hinge post (4).
2.) Pop the upper hinge into place onto the upper hinge post.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 59

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-12-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-12-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-12-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-39 Door, I/O Panel replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 60 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-13 Cable Hook replacement

8-5-13-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-13-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-13-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Remove the Side Covers.
4.) Remove the Rear Cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-11 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-54.

8-5-13-4 Cable Hook removal

1.) Locate the Cable Hook(s).

Figure 8-25 Cable Hooks

2.) Place the Rear Cover face down on a protected, flat surface.
3.) Remove the screw securing the Cable Hook.
4.) Repeat step 2 to remove the other Cable Hook, if necessary.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 61

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-13-4 Cable Hook removal (cont’d)

Figure 8-26 Cable Hook screw placement

8-5-13-5 Cable Hook installation

1.) Position the Cable Hook on the Rear Cover.
2.) Install the screw to secure the Cable Hook to the Rear Cover.
3.) Repeat step 2 to replace the other Cable Hook, if necessary.

8 - 62 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-13-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-13-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-13-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-40 Cable Hook replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 63

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-14 Rear Bumper replacement

8-5-14-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-14-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-14-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove Side Covers.
5.) Remove Rear Cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-11 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-54.

8-5-14-4 Rear Bumper removal

1.) Remove the two screws securing the Rear Bumper.
2.) Remove Bumper.

Figure 8-27 Left screw placement for Rear Bumper

8-5-14-5 Rear Bumper installation

1.) Place the Rear Bumper into position
2.) Install the two screws to secure the Rear Bumper.

8 - 64 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-14-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-14-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-14-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-41 Rear Bumper replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 65

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-15 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement

Two types of V2 Arm Assembly Covers are described in this Section. For R4, see: Table 8-44 "LCD
Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R4" on page 8-66 or Table 8-45 "LCD
Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R5.x and later" on page 8-67.

Table 8-42 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-43 Preparations and Preparation Link

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower position.
3. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

Table 8-44 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R4

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove Arm Assembly Covers.
Illustration shows direction and
The Rear (1) and Upper (2) LCD Arm sequence covers should be removed
Covers snap into place and removed, in the
direction shown. The Upper Cover must be
installed before the Rear Cover.

The Rear (1) snaps into place pushing

forward and removed pulling back.

The Upper (2) snaps into place at the rear,

after the front guides are inserted into
place. The Upper can be removed, by tilting
forward.

The Lower Cover (3) and LCD Bracket

Cover (4) are secured with screws (5). After
the front guide of the Lower Cover is
inserted into place, the cover can be
secured. To remove, remove the screw and
tilt forward. The arm must be released and
the upper arm clear.

The LCD Bracket Cover (4) seats in

position.

8 - 66 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-15 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement (cont’d)

Table 8-45 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R5.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Pan Arm Down Cover (1), remove two
Phillips screws and lift the cover off.
Lift Arm Cover - Right (2) and Lift Arm
Cover - Left (3), remove the 3 mm screws 2 4
and slide the Cover toward the Monitor. 1
Joint Cover (4), slightly push the bottom of
the Cover forward to “bow“ the cover and
pry at the leading, forward edge of the
3
Cover to remove.
Extension Arm Cover (5), remove the
3 mm screw and lower cover.
Install covers in the reverse motion. To 5
install the Joint Cover, place top of Cover
into position and snap into place.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 67

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-15-1 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-15-2 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
3.) LCD Arm and LCD Monitor movement functions in all directions without the covers loosening.

8-5-15-3 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-46 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement Functional

Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 68 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-16 Rear Handle replacement

8-5-16-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-16-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-16-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Rear Cover.
6.) Remove the Top Cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-11 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-54.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.

8-5-16-4 Rear Handle removal

1.) Remove the two upper screws (1), one on each side.
2.) Remove the four hexcap screws (2), two on each side.

Figure 8-28 One Phillips and two hexcap screws on each side (left side illustrated)

3.) Lift the Rear Handle away.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 69

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-16-5 Rear Handle installation

1.) Install the Rear handle in position so the fastening holes are flush with the holes in the frame.
2.) Install the two screws for the Rear Handle (torque 3 Nm {2.2 lbf-ft}).
3.) Install the four hexcap screws for the Rear Handle.
4.) Install the Top Cover.
5.) Install the Rear Cover.
6.) Install the Side Covers.

8-5-16-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-16-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-16-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-47 Rear Handle replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 70 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-17 Printer Filler Storage

8-5-17-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-17-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-17-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Right Side cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8-5-17-4 Printer Filler Storage

1.) Release the fixing bracket.
2.) Pull the Printer Filler Storage forwards, out of the system.

8-5-17-5 Printer Filler Storage installation

NOTE: The Printer Filler Storage is used in the printer compartment on systems without an on-board
printer.

1.) Insert the Printer Filler Storage from the front of the system, into the empty printer compartment.
2.) Fasten (lock) the fixing bracket.
3.) Install the Side Cover you removed earlier.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 71

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-17-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-17-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Printer Filler
Storage replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier has been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes you removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-17-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-48 Printer Filler Storage replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 72 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-18 Column Cover Assembly replacement

8-5-18-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-18-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

• Flexible shaft bit driver extension (optional)

8-5-18-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Top Cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.

8-5-18-4 Column Cover Assembly removal

1.) Lower the console to lowest possible level.
2.) Remove the lower screw on the right side that is visible near the rear of the DVD drive.

Figure 8-29 With console lowered, lower right side screw placement

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 73

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-18-4 Column Cover Assembly removal (cont’d)

3.) Raise the console to full height.

4.) Remove the remaining screw on the right side that secures the Column Cover Assembly.

Figure 8-30 With console raised, upper right side screw placement

5.) Remove the two screws on the left side that secure the Column Cover Assembly.

Figure 8-31 With console raised, left side screw placement

6.) Remove Column Cover Assembly.

NOTE: The Main Cable Cover will also be released.

8 - 74 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-18-5 Column Cover Assembly installation

1.) Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges.
2.) Install screws to Column Cover Assembly (tighten by hand).
3.) Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover.

Figure 8-32 Position the column cover inside the front cover

4.) Install the Top Cover.

5.) Install the Side Covers.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 75

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-18-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-18-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-18-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-49 Column Cover Assembly replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks
Operator I/O Movement - XY and Z
Mechanism

8 - 76 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-19 Main Cable Cover replacement

8-5-19-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-19-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-19-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Top Cover.
6.) Remove the four screws to the Column Cover Assembly.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-5-18 "Column Cover Assembly replacement" on page 8-73.

8-5-19-4 Main Cable Cover removal

1.) Remove the Main Cable Cover.

Figure 8-33 Main Cable Cover (Column Cover overlaps Main Cable Cover)

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 77

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-19-5 Main Cable Cover installation

1.) Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges
(see: Figure 8-33 "Main Cable Cover (Column Cover overlaps Main Cable Cover)" on page 8-77).
2.) With the console raised to its full height, install the 3 screws to secure the Main Cable Cover and
Column Cover Assembly.
3.) Lower the console and install the lower right side screw (see: Figure 8-29 "With console lowered,
lower right side screw placement" on page 8-73).
4.) Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover.

Figure 8-34 Position the column cover tab inside the front cover

5.) Install the Top Cover.

6.) Install the Side Covers.

8 - 78 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-19-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-19-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-19-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-50 Main Cable Cover replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks
Operator I/O Movement - XY and Z
Mechanism

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 79

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-20 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement

8-5-20-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-20-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-5-20-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Follow this link if you need more information:

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8 - 80 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-20-4 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal

1.) At the rear of the system, release the console’s frogleg mechanism by inserting a screwdriver into
the release point and pressing until release. Pull the console out to its extended position to gain
access to the screws in the next step.

Figure 8-35 XY / Frogleg mechanism release

2.) Under the XY / Frogleg mechanism, identify the four separate covers. There are two types of
covers, one type has two screws (1) and the other type has one screw (2).
3.) Remove the screws from the cover(s) to replace.

Figure 8-36 XY / Frogleg mechanism covers, right side frog leg, from underneath

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 81

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-20-4 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal (cont’d)

4.) Pull down and slide the cover(s) away from the XY / Frogleg mechanism. Be sure to flex the plastic
slightly so the plastic clears the XY.

Figure 8-37 Pull down and slide XY / Frogleg cover out

5.) Disconnect the cable.

6.) Remove the screw securing the ground.
7.) Thread the cover(s) off the cable.

8-5-20-5 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors installation

1.) Thread the cover(s) on the cable.
2.) Perform a dry fit of the covers (confirm the covers face the correct way) before connecting the cable
and ground.
3.) Install the screw securing the ground.
4.) Connect the cable.
5.) Slide cover(s) into place.
6.) Replace the screws to the cover(s).

8 - 82 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-20-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-20-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-20-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

Table 8-51 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-2-4 Top Console position adjustment
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 83

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-21 Bulkhead Cover replacement

8-5-21-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-5-21-2 Tools
No tools are needed to replace the Bulkhead Cover.

8-5-21-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Follow this link if you need more information:

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8-5-21-4 Bulkhead Cover removal

1.) At the rear of the system, release the console’s frogleg mechanism by inserting a screwdriver into
the release point and pressing until release. Pull the console out to its extended position to gain
access to the screws in the next step.

Figure 8-38 XY / Frogleg mechanism release

8 - 84 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-21-4 Bulkhead Cover removal (cont’d)

Figure 8-39 Bulkhead Cover

2.) Use thumbs to press upper lock tabs toward the front of the system to release the top of the
Bulkhead Cover.

Figure 8-40 Upper lock tabs (placement on Bulkhead Cover)

3.) Pull the Bulkhead Cover away from the system.

Figure 8-41 Bulkhead Cover Tabs (cover removed)

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 85

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-5-21-5 Bulkhead Cover installation

1.) Position the Bulkhead Cover, tucking any cables within the cover to avoid pinching the cables.
2.) Install lower tab locks first, and then upper tab locks.
3.) Replace the Bulkhead Cover.

8-5-21-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-5-21-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-5-21-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-52 Bulkhead Cover replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

8 - 86 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-6
Replacing Top Console Parts
8-6-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to replace the Top Console parts.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 87

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2 LCD Monitor assembly replacement

There are two types of Monitors:

• Original LCD Monitor (P/N 5167953)
• LCD Monitors used in R4 original consoles, LCD Monitor V2 (5392293-21, used in R4.x and later
production)
For LCD Monitor V2 (LCD and Arm Assembly used in R4.x production), see: Table 8-58 "LCD Monitor
V2 removal - R4.x" on page 8-93.

For LCD Monitor V2 (LCD and Arm Assembly used in R5.x and later production), see: Table 8-60 "LCD
Monitor V2 removal - R5.x and later" on page 8-97.

Table 8-53 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

NOTE: If the device is equipped with WLAN option, Velcro will be required to ensure proper installation
of the reinstalled WLAN dongle.

Table 8-54 Preparations and Preparation Link

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
LOCKOUT

Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE
ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL
ON/OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS
SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD
IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP
may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC
Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower position.
3. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8 - 88 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2 LCD Monitor assembly replacement (cont’d)

NOTE: New labels have been added to the LCD rear cover to meet the IEC 60601-1 compliance
requirements. When replacing the LCD Monitor on a LOGIQ E9 console, make sure that if the
LCD back cover labels are on the console, the labels are on the replacement FRU. This will
ensure there is no confusion between the labels on the console and the labels described in the
User and Service Documentation.

Table 8-55 LCD Rear Cover Labels

Console FRU Action

Console is third edition The original VESA cover with

compliant: FRU DOES NOT have the new new labels should be used on the
labels ARE ON the LCD Monitor labels on the LCD Cover. replacement Monitor to maintain
Cover compliance of the console.

The original VESA cover on the

Console is pre-third edition console should be used on the
compliant and the new labels FRU HAS the new labels on the replacement LCD Monitor. The
ARE NOT on the LCD Monitor LCD Monitor Cover. new labels ARE NOT described
Cover. in the User and Service
Documentation.

8-6-2-1 LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier

A cover at the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly covers the two cables to the monitor. To get
access to the cable connectors, remove the Cable Cover.

Table 8-56 LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. For easy access, tilt the LCD Monitor Monitor Cables Cover Screw and
forward to horizontal position. Monitor tilted forward

Unscrew the fixing screw on the rear side of

the LCD Monitor assembly.

Remove the Monitor Cables Cover.

Lift the cover away and place it in a safe

place.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 89

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-56 LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. Disconnect the cables to the Monitor. LCD Monitor Cables and Clamps

NOTE: If you are replacing any cables (1),

you will also need to remove two additional
tie-wraps (2) at the bracket.

Remove the clamps (3).

NOTE: If the device is equipped with the

WLAN option, remove the WLAN dongle
and transfer it to the new monitor.

WLAN Dongle removal

To remove the dongle, slightly lift up the
end to disengage the Velcro, then pull the
dongle out of the USB port.

3. Tilt the monitor back to vertical position. LCD Monitor fixing screws
Lock the monitor back into place vertically.

Loosen the four screws by turning each

screw between one half and one turn
counter-clockwise. You don’t need to
remove the screws.

Lift the LCD Monitor assembly upwards

until you can lift it away from the Monitor
Bracket.

Place the LCD Monitor on a clean and safe

surface.

8 - 90 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2-2 LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier

Table 8-57 LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. NOTE: To ensure the LCD Monitor is
installed level with the system and before
tightening the four screws:

MAKE SURE:
- the system is on a level surface,
- the wheels are in-line,
- the LCD Monitor Arm Lock is LOCKED.

Check that the system is level.

Install the LCD Monitor assembly on the

Monitor Bracket. Verify that all four fixing
screws have engaged in their slots.

Place a level on the monitor (as shown).

Tighten the four screws, torque: 160 Ncm

{14.2 lbf-in}).

NOTE: If a level is not available, make sure

the Monitor is as square as possible with
the system, visually.
2. Tilt the monitor to horizontal position. LCD Monitor Cables and Clamps

Connect the cables (1).

If the cables were replaced the tie-wraps

(2) and cable clamps (3), if present.

Reinstall WLAN dongle, if device is

equipped with option.

NOTE: It is important to reapply a piece of

the “loop“ portion of Velcro to the WLAN
dongle when it is reinstalled into the new
monitor.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 91

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-57 LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Install the Monitor Cables Cover and fasten
it with the fixing screw.

NOTE: If the replacement FRU DOES NOT

have the new labels on the LCD Cover, the
original VESA cover with new labels should
be used on the replacement Monitor to
maintain compliance of the console. See:
Table 8-55 "LCD Rear Cover Labels" on
page 8-89.

4. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-6-2-7 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-6-2-8 - Verification
and 8-6-2-9 "Functional Checks" on page 8-101.

8 - 92 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2-3 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R4.x

A cover at the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly covers the cable to the monitor. To get access to
the cable connector, remove the Cable Cover.

Table 8-58 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R4.x

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the LCD Cable Cover fixing
screws.

2. The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the

LCD with a retaining screw (1), an EMC
shielded retainer (2) and two phillips
screws (3).

Remove the screws and retainer.

Disconnect the Cable from the LCD.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 93

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-58 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R4.x

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE LCD FROM THE
ARM, KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY
IN THE LOCKED POSITION. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN
CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN
CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

4. Keep the LCD supported and remove the

two M5x20 screws and spring “lock”
washers which mount the LCD to the Arm
Assembly.

8 - 94 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2-4 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x

Table 8-59 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD TO THE
ARM, KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY
IN THE LOCKED POSITION. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN
CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN
CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

Keep the LCD supported and mate the flat

surfaces of the LCD Arm to the flat surfaces
of the LCD mounts.

Install the LCD Arm Assembly to the LCD

with the two M5x20 screws and spring
“lock” washers removed. Torque: 9.8 Nm
(7.2 lbf-ft {86.7 lbf-in}).

2. The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the

LCD with a retaining screw (1), an EMC
shielded retainer (2) and two phillips
screws (3).

Remove the screws and retainer, if present

or re-install the Cable into LCD and tighten
the screw (1).

Install the retainer and secure with the two

M4X12 screws (3).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 95

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-59 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. NOTE: To ensure the LCD Monitor is
installed level with the system and before
re- installing the LCD Back Cover:

MAKE SURE:
- the system is on a level surface,
- the wheels are in-line,
- the LCD Monitor Arm Lock is LOCKED.

Check that the system is level.

Place a level on the monitor (as shown).

Tighten the four screws, torque: 160 Ncm

{14.2 lbf-in}).

NOTE: If a level is not available, make sure

the Monitor is as square as possible with
the system, visually.

Re-install the LCD Cable Cover and fixing

screws.

4. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-6-2-7 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-6-2-8 - Verification
and 8-6-2-9 "Functional Checks" on page 8-101.

8 - 96 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2-5 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R5.x and later

A cover at the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly covers the cable to the monitor. To get access to
the cable connector, remove the Cable Cover.

Table 8-60 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R5.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the LCD Cable Cover fixing
screws.

2. The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the

LCD with a retaining screw (1), an EMC
shielded retainer (2) and two phillips
screws (3).

Remove the screws and retainer.

Disconnect the Cable from the LCD.

3. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE LCD FROM THE
ARM, KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY
IN THE LOCKED POSITION. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN
CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN
CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 97

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-60 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R5.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Lay the Monitor flat.

Remove the two lower Phillips screws (1).

Loosen the upper Phillips screws (2). The

Monitor will be supported by the two upper
screws.

Slide the Monitor off of the Arm Assembly.

Remove the upper Phillips screws to

reinstall into the replacement LCD Monitor.

Upper Monitor mounting screw and hole

8 - 98 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2-6 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R5.x and later

Table 8-61 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R5.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD TO THE
ARM, KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY
IN THE LOCKED POSITION. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN
CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN
CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

2. Reinstall the upper two Phillips into the

Monitor.

With the Monitor flat, slide the Monitor onto

the Arm Assembly. The Monitor will be
supported by the two upper screws.

Reinstall the two lower Phillips screws (1)

and tighten the upper Phillips screws (2).
Make sure the Monitor is level before
tightening the screws securely.

3. The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the

LCD with a retaining screw (1), an EMC
shielded retainer (2) and two phillips
screws (3).

Remove the screws and retainer, if present

or re-install the Cable into LCD and tighten
the screw (1).

Install the retainer and secure with the two

M4X12 screws (3).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 99

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-61 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R5.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. NOTE: To ensure the LCD Monitor is
installed level with the system and before
re- installing the LCD Back Cover:

MAKE SURE:
- the system is on a level surface,
- the wheels are in-line,
- the LCD Monitor Arm Lock is LOCKED.

Check that the system is level.

Place a level on the monitor (as shown).

If any adjustment is required, loosen the

four mounting screws and make the
adjustment. Re-tighten the four screws
after the adjustment.

NOTE: If a level is not available, make sure

the Monitor is as square as possible with
the system, visually.

Re-install the LCD Cable Cover and fixing

screws.
5. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-6-2-7 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-6-2-8 - Verification
and 8-6-2-9 "Functional Checks" on page 8-101.

8 - 100 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-2-7 Calibration and adjustments

Refer to: Section 6-3 "LCD Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.

8-6-2-8 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-6-2-9 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-62 LCD Monitor assembly replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Leakage Current
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks measured at (record the value) and meets
allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
checks and is ready for use.
6-3-4 LCD Adjustment Procedure

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 101

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3 LCD Arm assembly replacement

Three types of LCD Arms Assemblies are covered in this Section. LCD Arm used in R3.x and earlier,
R4.x production and R5.x and later.

For LCD Arm Assembly used with LCD Monitor V2 (LCD and Arm Assembly used in R4.x production),
see: 8-6-3-2 "LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly replacement (used in R4.x production)" on page 8-105.

For LCD Arm Assembly used with LCD Monitor V2 (LCD and Arm Assembly used in R5.x and later
production), see: 8-6-3-3 "LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly replacement - R5.x and later" on page 8-111.

If the V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter is being replaced, see: 8-6-4 "V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter
replacement - R4.x and later" on page 8-118,

Table 8-63 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
15 minutes

Table 8-64 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
LOCKOUT

Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE
ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL
ON/OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS
SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD
IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP
may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC
Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
NOTE: If you are also replacing the LCD Monitor, you do not need to remove the monitor from the arm.
3. Remove the LCD Monitor assembly and the Bulkhead cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7
• 8-6-2 "LCD Monitor assembly replacement" on page 8-88
• 8-5-21 "Bulkhead Cover replacement" on page 8-84

8 - 102 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-1 LCD Arm replacement - R3.x and earlier

Table 8-65 LCD Arm assembly removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Disconnect the LCD cables; video (P10) LCD Cables at Bulkhead
and power (P3) from the connectors on the
Bulkhead. The Gel Warmer cable (P1)
does not have to be removed.

2. Push the LCD Mount Lock handle (1) into LCD Mount Lock Handle
the unlocked position (shown LOCKED).
DO NOT loosen nut (2).

Move the LCD Arm from side to side when

at the same time pulling upwards, until you
can lift LCD Arm assembly away.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 103

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-1 LCD Arm replacement - R3.x and earlier (cont’d)

Table 8-66 LCD Arm assembly installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Carefully install the LCD Arm assembly into LCD Mount Lock Handle
position, first feeding the LCD Arm cables
down through the console opening.

Push the LCD Mount Lock handle (1) into

locked the position (shown LOCKED).
DO NOT adjust nut (2).

2. Connect the LCD cables; video (P10) and LCD Cables at Bulkhead
power (P3) from the connectors on the
Bulkhead. The Gel Warmer cable (P1)
does not have to be removed.

Install the Bulkhead Cover.

Install the LCD Monitor assembly.

3. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-6-3-4 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-6-3-5 - Verification
and 8-6-3-6 "Functional Checks" on page 8-117.

8 - 104 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-2 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly replacement (used in R4.x production)

Table 8-67 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly removal - R4

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the LCD Monitor.
2. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE LCD ARM, KEEP
THE ARM LOCKED, AS SHOWN TO
ENSURE THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS
IN THE LOCKED POSITION UNTILL THE
ARM AND LCD ARE INSTALLED. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN
CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN
CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

3. Remove the Bulkhead Cover.

4. Disconnect the LCD cables; video (P10)
and power (P3) from the LCD.

The Video Cable has a retainer and screw.

Loosen the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 105

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-67 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly removal - R4

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Remove the Set Screw.

Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up from the

LOGIQ E9.

8 - 106 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-2 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly replacement (used in R4.x production) (cont’d)

Table 8-68 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R4

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD ARM
ASSEMBLY, KEEP THE LCD ARM IN
THE LOCKED POSITION. THE SPRINGS
TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE
THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IF INSTALLING A NEW FRU, KEEP THE
SHIPPING WRAP INTACT TO ENSURE
THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS IN THE
LOCKED POSITION UNTIL THE LCD IS
INSTALLED.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 107

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-68 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R4

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. Take the LCD Arm and Cable Assembly
and feed the LCD Power Cable into the
Adapter first.

Position the Video Cable Connector as

shown and continue to feed the cables into
the Adapter.

Install the Arm Assembly.

3. Position the Arm Assembly so the Set

Screw mounting hole faces the left side of
the LOGIQ E9.

Install the Set Screw. Torque: 9.8 Nm

(7.2 lbf-ft {86.4 lbf-in}).

8 - 108 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-68 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R4

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Connect the LCD cables; video (P10) and
power (P3) from the LCD.

The Video Cable has a retainer and screw.

Tighten the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.

Make sure the cables do not interfere with

the installation of the cables. It may be
necessary to push the cables up before
installing the Bulkhead Cover.

NOTICE

DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power (P3) connector on the Bulkhead when the
LOGIQ E9 is powered up. Damage to the LCD Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead Board can
occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
48VDC pin in the P3 connector (center pin), shows damage.
The outside two pins are Ground. Cable left, Bulkhead Connector right.

5. Re-install the LCD Monitor.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 109

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-68 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R4

Steps Corresponding Graphic

6. After plugging in the LCD Cable, bend the
cable as shown, pull with your index finger
and push with your thumb. The “S” bend
allows the cable to flex in the up direction
when the Bulk Head Cover is installed.

Install the Bulkhead Cover.

7. Remove the shipping wrap, if present. DO NOT damage the surface of the Arm Assembly.
8. Install the Bulkhead Cover.
9. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-6-3-4 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-6-3-5 - Verification
and 8-6-3-6 "Functional Checks" on page 8-117.

8 - 110 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-3 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly replacement - R5.x and later

Table 8-69 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly removal - R5 and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the LCD Monitor.
2. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE LCD ARM, KEEP
THE ARM LOCKED, AS SHOWN TO
ENSURE THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS
IN THE LOCKED POSITION UNTILL THE
ARM AND LCD ARE INSTALLED. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN
CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN
CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

3. Remove the Bulkhead Cover.

4. Disconnect the LCD and Arm cables; Video
(P10) and power (P3) from the LCD and the
and ground Cable from the Arm.

The Video Cable has a retainer and screw.

Loosen the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver. The ground Cable uses a
Phillips screw.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 111

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-69 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly removal - R5 and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Remove the Set Screw.

Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up from the

LOGIQ E9.

8 - 112 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-3 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly replacement - R5.x and later (cont’d)

Table 8-70 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R5 and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY, KEEP THE LCD ARM IN THE LOCKED
POSITION. THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING
OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
2. Make sure the Bushing is installed and
positioned in the orientation shown. The
larger hole in the Bushing is to
accommodate the pin.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 113

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-70 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R5 and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. The R5 and later Arm Assembly Cable
route in the same manner as R4, except
there is now a ground Cable for the Arm.

Take the LCD Arm and Cables and feed the

LCD Power Cable into the Adapter first.

Position the Video Cable Connector as

shown and continue to feed the cables into
the Adapter.

Install the Arm Assembly.

4. Position the Arm Assembly so the Set

Screw mounting hole faces the left side of
the LOGIQ E9.

Install the Set Screw. Torque: 9.8 Nm

(7.2 lbf-ft {86.4 lbf-in}).

8 - 114 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-70 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R5 and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Connect the LCD and Arm cables; Arm
ground Cable (A) first, Video (P10) and
power (P3) from the LCD.

The Video Cable has a retainer and screw.

Tighten the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.

Make sure the cables do not interfere with

the installation of the cables. It may be
necessary to push the cables up before
installing the Bulkhead Cover.

NOTICE

DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power (P3) connector on the Bulkhead when the
LOGIQ E9 is powered up. Damage to the LCD Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead Board can
occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
48VDC pin in the P3 connector (center pin), shows damage.
The outside two pins are Ground. Cable left, Bulkhead Connector right.

5. Re-install the LCD Monitor.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 115

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-70 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation - R5 and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

6. After plugging in the LCD Cable, bend the
cable as shown, pull with your index finger
and push with your thumb. The “S” bend
allows the cable to flex in the up direction
when the Bulk Head Cover is installed.

Install the Bulkhead Cover.

7. Install the Bulkhead Cover.

8. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-6-3-4 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-6-3-5 - Verification
and 8-6-3-6 "Functional Checks" on page 8-117.

8 - 116 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-3-4 Calibration and adjustments

Refer to: Section 6-3 "LCD Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.

8-6-3-5 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
4.) Move the LCD Monitor Arm from side to side and ensure that it moves as intended.

8-6-3-6 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-71 LCD Arm assembly replacement Functional Checks

See
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
6-3-4 LCD Adjustment Procedure
10-6-4 Grounding continuity
10-6-5 Chassis leakage current test

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 117

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-4 V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter replacement - R4.x and later

Table 8-72 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
30 minutes

Table 8-73 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
LOCKOUT

Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE
ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL
ON/OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND
THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP
may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC
Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
NOTE: If you are replacing the V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter replacement, you do not need to remove the monitor
from the arm.
3. Remove the LCD Monitor and Arm Assembly and the Bulkhead cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-6-3-2 "LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly replacement (used in R4.x production)" on page 8-105.
• 8-5-21 "Bulkhead Cover replacement" on page 8-84.

8 - 118 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-4-1 V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter removal

Table 8-74 V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the Bulkhead Cover.
2. Disconnect the LCD cables; video (P10)
and power (P3) from the LCD.

The Video Cable has a retainer and screw.

Loosen the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.

3. Remove the Ground Cable from the LCD LCD Ground Cable installed
Adapter and the Bulkhead. Discard (the
new FRU will includes the cable and
mounting hardware).

2. Remove the Plate. The plate is captured by

the two retaining pins that protrude from the
Adapter.

NOTE: A pin or pick can be used to lift the

plate slightly to remove.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 119

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-74 V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the two M5 x 50 hex key screws
using a 4 mm Hex Key.

Remove adapter.

8 - 120 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-4-2 V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter installation

Table 8-75 V2 Arm Adapter installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Insert the Adapter into the Frame UI Upper
Assembly.

Align the mounting holes and install the two

M5 x 50 hex key screws using a 4 mm Hex
Key to secure the Adapter. Torque 2.5 Nm
(1.8 lbf-ft {21.6 lbf-in}).

NOTE: Note the shape of the rear

mounting hole, this is important for the
next step before the Thrust Plate is
installed.

2. NOTE: MAKE SURE the rear mounting

hole for the Arm Neck Lock Pin, in the Trust
Plate is aligned with the rear mounting hole
of the Adapter BEFORE installing the
Plate. If the Plate is installed incorrectly, it
may be very difficult to remove.

Align the rear mounting hole for the Arm

Neck Lock Pin, in the Trust Plate with the
rear mounting hole of the Adapter.

Seat the Plate. The plate will be captured

by the two retaining pins that protrude from
the Adapter.

3. Install the Ground Cable to the LCD LCD Ground Cable installed
Adapter and to the Bulkhead using the two
screws and lock washers. Torque 1.3 Nm
(0.96 lbf-ft {11.5 lbf-in}).

4. Re-install the LCD and Arm Assembly and connect the LCD Cable.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 121

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-75 V2 Arm Adapter installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

NOTICE

DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power (P3) connector on the Bulkhead when the
LOGIQ E9 is powered up. Damage to the LCD Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead Board can
occur. See: images below of damage that can occur.
48VDC pin in the P3 connector (center pin), shows damage.
The outside two pins are Ground. Cable left, Bulkhead Connector right.

5. Install the Bulkhead Cover.

8-6-4-3 Calibration and adjustments

Refer to: Section 6-3 "LCD Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.

8-6-4-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the LOGIQ E9 to verify that it operates as intended.

8 - 122 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-4-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional tests to confirm the LOGIQ E9 is operational before returning the
LOGIQ E9 to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.

Table 8-76 V2 LCD Arm Adapter replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Checks Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-2-4 Top Console position adjustment 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Leakage Current
measured at (record the value) and meets
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks checks and is ready for use.

6-3-4 LCD Adjustment Procedure

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 123

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-5 WLAN replacement - R2.x and R3.x only

Table 8-77 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time

Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
One person /
• Appropriate PPE
15 minutes
• ESD

Table 8-78 Preparations and Preparation Link

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
&
LOCKOUT 4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE
Signed Date
NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS
SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD
IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP
may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC
Outlet.

1.Select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP -> Wireless Network -> Configuration
2.As a precautionary step:
a.Document all the information regarding configuration of the WLAN.
b.Select the Properties tab.
c.Record the following information (provided by the Customer site IT):
i. Network Name (SSID)
ii. Network Authentication
iii.Data Encryption
iv.Network Key
v.Key Index
vi.Specify Yes/No to “The Key is Provided Automatically”
vii.IEEE 802.1x Authentication information
viii.EAP type
d. Press Close.
3. Power down the system.
4. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to the lowest position.
5. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8 - 124 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-5-1 WLAN removal

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the LCD Monitor or the LCD Arm.

Table 8-79 WLAN removal

Steps

1. Remove the rear cover of LCD monitor.

For easy access, tilt the LCD Monitor forward to horizontal position.

NOTE: You CANNOT fully remove the cover unless the LCD is tilted forward to the horizontal
position.

2. To remove the dongle, slightly lift up the end to disengage the Velcro, then pull the dongle out of
the USB port.

8-6-5-2 WLAN installation

Table 8-80 WLAN installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. NETGEAR USB dongle WN111 is

identified with the following markings:

Remove the dongle from the Factory

packaging.

Remove the plastic cover from the dongle

and discard.
Remove the Velcro pieces from the Factory
packaging.

Discard all other items included in the

dongle packaging, only the dongle and
Velcro are required.

2. Choose a piece of Velcro with the Hook

“gender” (rigid piece). Remove the
adhesive protection strip and attach this
portion of the Velcro to the dongle on the
side WITHOUT the LED, at the orientation
and location as shown.

The outer edges of the Velcro have no

hooks. Attach the Velcro at this orientation,
to prevent covering up the vent holes. DO
NOT cover the vent holes.

Align the Velcro where the flat starts to

curve (1).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 125

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-80 WLAN installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Attach the opposite piece of the Velcro to WLAN with opposite piece of Velcro attached
the “hook” side and remove the adhesive
protection strip, if the loop side of Velcro is
not present in the monitor.

NOTE: If this is a replacement WLAN

dongle, you do not need to attach this
opposite piece of Velcro if the opposite
piece is already attached to the LCD.

4. Install the WLAN dongle into the USB port; WLAN Dongle installed
lifting slightly, to prevent the adhesive from
attaching before the dongle is installed.

Once installed, push on the end of the

dongle, to adhere the adhesive.

NOTE: To remove the dongle, slightly lift up

the end to disengage the Velcro, then pull
the dongle out of the USB port.

5. Reinstall the LCD monitor cover. Reboot the system.

8 - 126 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-5-3 WLAN - Set up and Check

Table 8-81 WLAN - Set up and Check

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. All configuration parameters should have WLAN Active

been kept and the WLAN should start
working right away. If it does not, check
configuration.

For setting up the WLAN, refer to the latest

revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User
Manual, Chapter 16.
WLAN not Active
When the WLAN is active, an icon appears
in the status bar to indicate whether the
WLAN is installed or disconnected.

2. Select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP -> Configuration Tool Screen
Wireless Network -> Configuration.
If enabled, Available Wireless Networks
appear.

If not connected:

• Highlight the wireless network you wan to

use.
• Click “Connect” at the bottom of the
“Configuration” tool.

To check WLAN is working properly, ping/

verify a device in the network, query WL or
Send an image.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 127

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-5-4 Functional Test

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-82 WLAN replacement instructions Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-10 Basic Measurements

8 - 128 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-6 Probe Holder Insert replacement

8-6-6-1 Probe Holder Insert removal

Table 8-83 Probe Holder Insert removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Carefully pull the flexible Probe Holder Probe Holder placement

Insert out of the lower UI frame. Large (1)
and small (2) soft, Probe Holder Inserts.

2. To remove the dongle, slightly lift up the end to disengage the Velcro, then pull the dongle out of
the USB port.

8-6-6-2 Probe Holder Insert installation

Table 8-84 Probe Holder Insert installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Install the flexible Probe Holder Insert into Probe Holder placement
the lower UI frame. Be sure the hooks (1)
and tabs (2) fit properly and the Probe
Holder fits snugly.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 129

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-7 OP Panel Knobs replacement

8-6-7-1 Operator Panel Knobs removal

Table 8-85 Operator Panel Knobs removal

Step

1. Carefully pull the knobs, one by one, to remove them.

8-6-7-2 Operator Panel Knobs installation

Table 8-86 Operator Panel Knobs installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. NOTE: The Operator Panel knobs are OP Panel Knobs

concentric knobs, the center shaft has a D
LOGIQ
shape. Replace the outer knobs first then
the inner ones.

Install the knobs, one by one in their

1

respective positions. 2

PW
X Z
CW
PDI
M CF
Εlasto V Nav Logiq Contrast
View

CHI
Steer Width
Measure

Zoom Depth
B

Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R

P4
Clear
Freeze
P1 P2 P3

8 - 130 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8 Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly replacement

8-6-8-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal

Table 8-87 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Make sure that the OP Panel is in its OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly

uppermost position, with the LCD out of the
way: LOGIQ

CW
PDI

Εlasto V Nav Logiq Contrast

View

CHI
Steer Width
Measure

Zoom Depth

Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R

P4
Clear
Freeze
P1 P2 P3

2. Remove the five OP Panel Knobs.

NOTICE

Failure to remove the five OP Panel Knobs first, could cause damage to the knob shafts.

3. At the rear of the system, release the XY / Frogleg mechanism release

frogleg mechanism for the console by
inserting a screwdriver into the release
point and pressing until release. Pull the
console out to its extended position to gain
access to the screws in the next step.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 131

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-87 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Remove the four screws with washers from Back Cover of the Upper OP Panel/Touch
the rear of the console. Panel Assembly, Screws and Washers

5. NOTE: Make sure the five OP Panel Knobs Removing the Upper OP Panel/Touch
have been removed. Panel Assembly

Lift the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel

assembly slightly from the bottom, and then
tilt the top toward the front of the system.
There are tabs at the bottom of the Touch
Panel Assembly. Pull straight up on these
tabs.

NOTE: For better access, swing the LCD

Monitor to the side.

6. Disconnect the cables at the back of the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly (see:
Figure 8-42 "Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R4 and earlier" on page
8-133).

8 - 132 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal (cont’d)

Figure 8-42 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R4 and earlier

1. Upper OP Panel 5. Power - ON/OFF LOGIC to BEP

USB - OUT to Bulkhead Board
2. Cable to J24 is not present in later 6. AN Keyboard USB and Power
production
3. USB - Video from BEP 7. USB - Trackball
4. USB - Upper OP Panel from BEP

NOTE: The spacers (circled) on the back of the Upper Op Panel are not included with early FRUs
(these will be added to FRUs after product release). So, if you have to swap an Upper Op Panel,
take the spacers off of the old Op panel and swap them into the new one. If they are on so tightly
that you cannot take them off using your fingers, use a pair of pliers and rotate them back and
forth to work them off. These spacers prevent the Op panel from working past its mounting
surface and getting “sucked” too far into the upper frame, causing the Op panel to get twisted
and causing problems.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 133

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal (cont’d)

Figure 8-43 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R5 and later

1. Upper OP Panel 4. USB - Video - J22

48V Power - ON/OFF LOGIC to
2. USB - Main Display - J25 5.
BEP - J23
Upper to Lower Connector:
3. USB - BEP - J21 6. Power - J17 (top)
USB - J16

8 - 134 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal (cont’d)

Figure 8-44 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cables - R4 and earlier

Bulkhead Board USB Cable 2 (from

Ribbon Cable from the Operator
1. 5. bulkhead position furthest from the
Panel, Lower
OP) in position J25

2. Trackball Cable from the Operator 6. USB Cable 1 (part of Main Cable) in
Panel, Lower position J21
USB Cable 2 (part of Main Cable) in
3. A/N Cable from the A/N Keyboard 7.
position J22
Bulkhead Board USB Cable 1
4. Power/On-Off switch (part of Main
(from bulkhead position closest to 8.
Cable) in position J23
the OP) in position J24

NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the 195 Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 135

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal (cont’d)

Figure 8-45 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cables - R5 5208000 and 5209000 family

UPPER OP J3 MEMORY STICK

USB
HUB MICROPHONE
R J25 (2)
J4 6
BULKHEAD
BOARD
J21 USB TRACK 6 J53
P1 P5
J22 USB USB J18 8 J52
HUB BALL
HUB
(3)
USB J23 (7)
P8 J51
USB
7
J17
AUDIO KEYBOARD
P3 48V
+48V uP

VPD
VPD
BKLT
P4

REG
12V CNTRL TOUCH
P6 J12 J5 J26 J7 12V
CNTRL

1 2 3

ENABLE
L LED
REG
5V ON/
CN10 CN4
BKLight PCAP OFF
3.3V VIDEO
CNTRL TOUCH
CN7
10.4" BUTTONS, LIGHTS
4 SVGA
ROTARIES, SLIDES

BULKHEAD UP/DN/ 5V 3.3V

PLATE LOCK REG LOWER OP
BUTTONS

MAIN CABLE OP PANEL X = comes in OP Panel Cable Kit

DVI VIDEO
48V POWER/AUDIO
USB for OP PANEL
USB for VIDEO on TOUCH PANEL
UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES

Customer USB Ports:

1. Video Controller Power 5. Power - J17
USB - J16
2. Video Controller USB 6. Trackball
3. Backlight 7. Power Upper to Lower
4. Video 8. USB Upper to Lower

NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the Touch Panel Assembly.

8 - 136 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal (cont’d)

Table 8-88 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation (cont’d)

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Attach the cables to the Upper OP Panel/ Cables to Upper OP

Touch Panel Assembly before installing it
to the system.

9 - Power - ON/OFF (from BEP)

10 - USB - Upper OP Panel (from BEP)
11 - USB - Video (from BEP), if present

4. Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly

Assembly into the Frame UI Upper. Be sure alignment tabs and slots
the Upper OP Bezel alignment tabs are
positioned, correctly into the slots in the
Lower OP Bezel and Frame UI Upper
Cover.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 137

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-88 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation (cont’d)

Steps Corresponding Graphic

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.

5. Install the four screws to the Back Cover Back Cover of the Upper OP Panel/Touch
from behind. Panel Assembly, Screws and Washers

6. Install the five OP Panel Knobs.

8 - 138 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-8-2 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-6-8-3 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-6-8-4 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-89 Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly installation Functional
Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-10 Basic Measurements
7-5-17-2 Touch Panel Calibration Verification
7-5-12-11 I/O Board Tests

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 139

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-9 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard replacement

Table 8-90 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard replacement Manpower / Time and
Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time

One person / • Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
15 minutes • Keytop removal tool

Table 8-91 Preparations and Preparation Link

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
LOCKOUT

Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
Signed

TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS
SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS
EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8 - 140 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-9-1 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly removal

Table 8-92 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. The Alphanumeric Keyboard Keycap Tool

Assembly is installed in the Lower
Operator Panel.

Remove the two shift keys (cap lock

arrows), using the key removal tool
[the “MacGyver” keycap removal
tool will work as well, e.g., a
paperclip] to expose the screws that
secure the keyboard to the Lower
Operator Panel.

NOTE: If the keycap plunger does

not come off with the key, you have
to reinstall it.

Keyboard Mounting Screw

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the keytops, use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the keyboard
screws.

2. Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard screws (M3 x 8).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 141

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-92 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. NOTE: Ensure that the elastomer Elastomer Actuators on

actuator (white spacers) do not get
Keyboard Assembly
separated from the shift keys when
you remove the keys. The new
keyboard keys will include these
actuators. So remove these if they
get left over when removing the shift
keys.

Using both hands, lift up on the

Keyboard space bar.
The Alphanumeric Keyboard
assembly tabs will act like a hinge

Slide the Alphanumeric Keyboard

assembly out and away from the
tabs.

Remove the Alphanumeric

Keyboard screws (M3 x 8).

8 - 142 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-9-2 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly installation

Table 8-93 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Guide the Alphanumeric Keyboard Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly tabs

assembly tabs into the slots.

Lower the Alphanumeric Keyboard,

making sure the plastic “fingers”
seat into the board.

2. Lower the Alphanumeric Keyboard, Alphanumeric Keyboard plastic “fingers”

making sure the plastic “fingers”
seat into the board.

3. Install the two screws.

4. Install the keytops.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 143

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-9-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-6-9-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-6-9-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-94 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-10 Basic Measurements 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display
4-3-18-1
Platform (Console) Checks
7-5-12-11 I/O Board Tests
Calibration

8 - 144 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10 Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement

Table 8-95 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time

One person / • Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
15 minutes • Keytop removal tool

Table 8-96 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
LOCKOUT

Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS
SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS
EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly in order to remove the Lower Op Panel.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-6-8 "Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly replacement" on page 8-131.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 145

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-1 Lower Operator Panel (OP) removal

Table 8-97 Lower Operator Panel (OP) removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Keep XY / Frogleg mechanism in a Frogleg mechanism released and

released state and the console
console extended
extended to gain access to the
screws in the next step. The screws
are available from the underside of
the OP Panel Lower Frame.

2. Remove the five longer, and the Screw placement, Lower OP Panel Frame
three shorter screws (closest to
Assembly (shown) to Lower OP Panel
front) that secure the Lower
Operator Panel to the Lower
Operator Panel Frame Assembly.

Access the screws from beneath

the Lower OP Panel Frame
Assembly.

3. Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard screws (M3 x 8).

8 - 146 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-97 Lower Operator Panel (OP) removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Holding the front edge, gently flex Flex points on Lower OP Panel
the Lower OP Panel up until the
(when the front edge is lifted)
Trackball Assembly just clears the
Lower OP Panel Frame Assembly
handle.

Pull the Lower OP Panel out and

away from the Lower OP Panel
Frame Assembly.

Store it on an ESD safe place.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 147

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-2 Lower Op Panel Board replacement

Table 8-98 Lower Op Panel Board replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. To replace the Lower Op Panel Lower Op Panel Board - face down

Board, remove all the knobs from
the control board before removing it
(Mode knobs, TGC Slide Pots,
Alpha-numeric keyboard, Body
Pattern, Zoom, and Depth joystick
encoder knobs). For the Mode
knobs, ensure that these stay intact.
There are d-ring inserts in to spots
in the Mode keys -- DO NOT let
these come apart.

Remove all the knobs.

NOTE: The two encoders near the

trackball have different knobs than
the other six locations. These knobs Lower Op Panel Board with
have taller ribs inside, so they sit Customer Removable Trackball
higher up on the shaft. This position
prevents the knob from hitting the
“puffy” feature on the bezel.

Turn the board over, face down.

Remove the Trackball.

Remove the power and USB

cables. These cables are anchored
to a screw, so you’ll need to remove
the screw first.

5208000 OP Panel Lower family

8 - 148 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-98 Lower Op Panel Board replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

Joystick Encoder Cables
2. Detach the five joystick encoder
cables that stick through the Upper
OP I/O.

J1 Cable attached
3. DO NOT remove the flat J1 cable
that is attached to the Lower Op
Panel Board.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 149

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-98 Lower Op Panel Board replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Unscrew the 34 screws. Lower Op Panel Board - screws

Slowly and carefully lift the board

away from the Lower Op Panel
Bezel. IF any of the keycap holders
are upset, reset them. DO NOT
drop the Lower Op Panel Bezel
because you will have to replace all
of the keycap holders.

8 - 150 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-98 Lower Op Panel Board replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Remove the TGC dust gasket. The TGC Dust Gasket

gasket is included with the complete
Lower Panel and the Lower Panel
Circuit Board.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 151

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-2-1 Lower Bezel Replacement

Table 8-99 Lower Bezel Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove and transfer keycap and Ring of Keys Parts

carriers over to the new Lower (used on P/N 5207000-33 and prior only)
Bezel.

Remove and transfer Encoders to

the new Lower Bezel.

Remove and transfer the Trackball

ring of keys parts to the new Lower
Bezel.

8 - 152 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-99 Lower Bezel Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. Customer Removable Trackball

Bezel DOES NOT use a Ring of C
Keys. B

The keys are smaller and retained

to the Bezel with pivot points (E).
D
A - Trackball Key, Bottom
B - Trackball Key, Left
C - Trackball Key, Top
D - Trackball Key, Right
E - Trackball Key, Pivot Points
A E

One Pivot Point (E) shown on

Bottom Key (A).

The Keys MUST BE tilted up to

remove. Keys A - Bottom, B - Left
and D - Right, are squeezed to be
removed.

Key C - Top, Pivot Points are pulled

outward.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 153

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-2-2 Touch Panel Joystick Encoder Replacement

Table 8-100 Touch Panel Joystick Encoder Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

Encoder Hex Nuts
1. From the front of the Lower Bezel,
remove the hex nut from the
Joystick Encoder.

8 - 154 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-2-3 Depth-Type Joystick Encoder Replacement

Table 8-101 Depth-Type Joystick Encoder Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the elastomer covering Elastomer Cover

from the Lower Bezel.

2. Flip the board over. Bottom of Board

Detach the cable.

Flip the board over again.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 155

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-101 Depth-Type Joystick Encoder Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Remove the hex nut. Joystick Encoder Nuts (top view of board)

8-6-10-2-4 Mode Encoder Replacement

Table 8-102 Mode Encoder Replacement

Step

1. These encoders plug into the headers on the board; so remove the nut from the top side and pull
out the encoder from the bottom side.

NOTE: The elastomer is on the top side.

8 - 156 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-2-5 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement

Table 8-103 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Align the elastomer guides. Elastomer

Elastomer Guides - bottom view

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 157

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-103 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. On the bottom side of the Lower Elastomer Guides - top view (not
Bezel, pull through the elastomer
all elastomer anchors are identified
guides until they lock in.

Double check that all 16 elastomer

guides (anchors) are pulled through
all the way, or else it will not seat
properly.

Install the Trackball.

Reattach the Power and USB

cables.

3. When replacing the Lower Op Lower Op Panel Board and Lower Bezel
Panel Bezel:

• Make sure that carriers, buttons,

knobs are all in place before setting
the Lower Op Panel Board on top of
the Lower Bezel.

• Ensure that the board is flat on top

of the bezel. Put a few screws in,
then flip it over to make sure none of
the buttons are ‘cocked,’ or out of
place.

• Replace the remaining screws.

D. Replace the TGC dust gasket.

The clear, plastic backing must be
facing down when the bezel is
installed. (The clear, plastic backing
should be facing up from this view.)

8 - 158 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-103 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Replace the TGC dust gasket. The TGC Dust Gasket to Lower Bezel
clear, plastic backing must be
facing down when the bezel is
installed. (The clear, plastic backing
should be facing up from this view.)

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 159

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-3 Lower Operator Panel installation

Table 8-104 Lower Operator Panel installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. While holding the Lower OP Panel, Cables over top of Lower OP Panel
be sure to maintain control of the
three OP Panel cables so that they
come up and over the top of the
Lower OP Panel.

2. NOTE: Edge tips described are Left edge tip of Lower OP Panel Assembly
fragile. DO NOT lift or bend the
Lower OP Panel Assembly sharply,
or the edge tips may break.

Slide the left and right Lower OP

Panel edge tips carefully between
the Upper OP Panel
Frame (1 - white) and the Lower OP
Panel Frame (2 - blue).

Begin to slide the Lower OP Panel

into its compartment while making
sure the Trackball Assembly just
clears the Lower OP Panel Frame
Assembly handle.

3. Place the Lower OP Panel into its compartment.

Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.

Install the eight screws that affix the Lower OP Panel assembly to the Lower OP Panel Frame
Assembly.

Be sure the three shorter screws are installed at the front (see: Table 8-97 "Lower Operator
Panel (OP) removal" on page 8-146).

8 - 160 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-10-4 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-6-10-5 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-6-10-6 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-105 Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-10 Basic Measurements 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display
4-3-18-1
Platform (Console) Checks
7-5-12-11 I/O Board Tests
Calibration

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 161

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-11 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement

The Options Holder (the Left Support or Right Support) is the base piece that attaches to the upper
console to support either a Transvaginal Probe Holder, a Gel Warmer, or a Storage Tray. The system
can support one Left Options Holder and one Right Options Holder at the same time. A Right Options
Holder comes standard with the system, with the Gel Warmer (48V).

8-6-11-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-6-11-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-6-11-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) If the Options Holder is supporting the Gel Warmer, remove the Gel Warmer first (8-6-12 "Gel
Warmer replacement" on page 8-166).
4.) Separate and remove the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder from the Options Holder, if
applicable.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-6-12 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-166.
• 8-6-13 "Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement" on page 8-170.

8 - 162 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-11-4 Options Holder removal

1.) From underneath the Upper Console, remove the three screws securing the Options Holder.

Figure 8-46 Screws, underneath upper console - gel warmer and option tray shown

2.) Remove the Options Holder from the Upper Console.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 163

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-11-5 Options Holder installation

Figure 8-47 Screw locations

1.) If this Options Holder will be supporting a Gel Warmer, place the Gel Warmer in the Options Holder
first and then install the Gel Warmer to the Options holder.

NOTE: Be sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched.

2.) Position the Options Holder in place.

NOTE: Be sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched.

3.) Install the three screws securing the Options Holder.

4.) Install the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder to the Options Holder, if applicable.

8 - 164 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-11-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-6-11-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
4.) If a Gel Warmer is installed in the Options Holder, see: additional Verification and Functional
Checks for Gel Warmer (see: 8-6-12 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-166).

8-6-11-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-106 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-10 Basic Measurements
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 165

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-12 Gel Warmer replacement

8-6-12-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-6-12-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-6-12-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.

Follow this link if you need more information:

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

8 - 166 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-12-4 Gel Warmer removal

1.) Remove the Bulkhead Cover.
2.) Disconnect the Gel Warmer cable from (P1) on the back of the bulkhead.
3.) The Gel Warmer cable is routed through the cable channel (1) and the lower frame support (2). Pull
the Gel Warmer cable through the lower frame cable support to free the cable.

Figure 8-48 Gel Warmer Cable placement

4.) Remove the Options Holder (8-6-11 "Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement" on page
8-162).

Figure 8-49 Options Holder removed, with Gel Warmer in place

5.) Remove the two screws at the Gel Warmer base.

6.) Lift the Gel Warmer out of the Options Holder.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 167

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-12-5 Gel Warmer installation

1.) Place the Gel Warmer in the Options Holder, routing the cable through the cutout (1) between the
Options Holder and Gel Warmer and through the cable channel (2).

NOTE: Be careful not to pinch wires.

Figure 8-50 Options Holder removed, with Gel Warmer in place

2.) Install the two screws at the Gel Warmer base, securing the Gel Warmer to the Options Holder
(Torque: 3 Nm {2.2 lbf-ft}).
3.) Install the Options Holder.
4.) Route the Gel Warmer cable through the lower frame cable support.
5.) Connect the Gel Warmer cable to the bulkhead.
6.) Replace the Bulkhead Cover.

8 - 168 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-12-6 Calibration and adjustments

Temperature is preset to its highest level: 38 degrees C (+/-2 degrees C). It is recommended to retain
default setting.

User can turn dial to adjust the temperature to its lowest level: 32 degrees C (+/-2 degrees C).

8-6-12-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
4.) Place a closed bottle of gel, applicator end first, in the gel warmer. Verify warmer is operational.

8-6-12-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-107 Gel Warmer replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-10 Basic Measurements
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 169

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-13 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement

The Storage Tray and Transvaginal Probe Holder rests inside the Options Holder base part and are
interchangeable. They can also replace the Gel Warmer. See: 8-6-12 "Gel Warmer replacement" on
page 8-166 and 8-6-14 "Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder" on page
8-172.

Follow this procedure for replacement, or replacing a tray with a Probe Holder or a Probe Holder with a
tray.

8-6-13-1 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder removal

1.) Locate the two prongs below the tray or Probe Holder.

Figure 8-51 Locate the two prongs

2.) Squeeze the two prongs together, then lift the tray or Probe Holder off the system.

Figure 8-52 Squeeze the two prongs

8 - 170 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-13-2 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder installation

1.) Seat the tray or Probe Holder tab into the options holder base and snap into place.

Figure 8-53 Seat and snap into place

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 171

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-14 Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder
Follow these instructions when removing the gel warmer and replacing it with a Storage Tray or a TV/
TR Tray.

8-6-14-1 Gel Warmer removal

Before starting this procedure, see: 8-6-12 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-166.

1.) Remove the Gel Warmer.

2.) Seat the tray tab into the options holder base and snap into place. See: Figure 8-53 "Seat and snap
into place" on page 8-171.

Figure 8-54 TV/TR Probe Holder installed

8 - 172 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-15 Probe Cable Hooks replacement

8-6-15-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-6-15-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-6-15-3 Probe Cable Hook removal

1.) Unscrew the fastening screw.
The screw may be locked with Lock-Tite, so you may need to apply a little extra force.

Figure 8-55 Screw placement, Probe Cable Hook

2.) Remove the Cable Hook.

8-6-15-4 Probe Cable Hook installation

1.) Position the Probe Cable Hook (Figure 8-55).
2.) Fix it in place by using an M5x20 screw with an M6 washer. Lock-Tite has to be used.
Torque: 50 Ncm (0.37 lbf-ft or 4.4 lbf-in) (fingertight).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 173

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-6-15-5 Probe Cable Hooks Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-108 Probe Cable Hooks replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required
4-3-7-3 Color Mode Checks checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7-6 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks
4-3-15 Peripherals Checks
4-2-4 Top Console position adjustment

8 - 174 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-7
Main Console parts replacement
8-7-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 175

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-2 Rear Filter and “handle type“ Bottom Filter replacement / cleaning

8-7-2-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-7-2-2 Tools
No tools are needed to replace the filter.

8-7-2-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Remove the Filter Cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-9 "Filter Cover replacement" on page 8-52.

Clean the air filters to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the system to overheat and reduce
system performance and reliability. It is recommended the filters be cleaned quarterly (once every three
months) or more often in locations where high levels of dust are present.

The LOGIQ E9 has two air filters which need to be cleaned. The top air filter is located on the back of
the LOGIQ E9 below the power cord and the bottom air filter is located underneath the LOGIQ E9.

Table 8-109 Removing and Cleaning Filters

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Power down the system before

removing the filters to prevent any
loose or knocked-off debris from
entering the Fan Tray.

Walk the LOGIQ E9 forward until

the caster is in position to access
the filter handle. The right side,
rear caster must be in-line and
away from the LOGIQ E9.

8 - 176 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-109 Removing and Cleaning Filters

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. Lock the Brakes.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 177

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-109 Removing and Cleaning Filters

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Filter Locations

A. Rear Filter - Remove the

Cover and then remove the filter.

B. Bottom Filter - Remove the

Filter Assembly by lowering the
handle.

NOTE: The handle for the bottom

filter is located in the same
location for both Filter
Assemblies.

4. Clean the Rear Filter after it is

removed by removing excess lint
or dust from the soiled side; or
vacuum if necessary.

8 - 178 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-109 Removing and Cleaning Filters

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Clean the Bottom Filter after it is

removed by removing excess lint
or dust from the soiled side. If
necessary, use a clean, soft
brush; or vacuum.

6. Reinstall the rear and tuck the

edges of the filter under the Rear
Bumper and Rear Cover.
Reinstall Filter Cover.

7. Reinstall Bottom Filter by

positioning the filter under the
system and placing the handle
into the stowed position. The filter
will be drawn to the filter mounting
magnets.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 179

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-2-4 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-7-2-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-110 Rear Filter Installation Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required
4-2-3 Power shut down checks and is ready for use.

8 - 180 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3 Bottom Filter installation (looped type strap)

8-7-3-1 Removal Process with Looped Strap

Figure 8-56 Bottom Filter Looped Strap (located in wheel well)

1.) Locate the looped strap on the right hand side of the LOGIQ E9, which can be viewed through the
right rear wheel well.
2.) Insert the first and second fingers of your right hand through the filter removal loop.
3.) Using the first and second fingers of the your hand, lever down on the filter removal loop and the
fingers of the right hand.

Figure 8-57 Placement of Fingers in Looped Strap

NOTE: This action will prevent your fingers from being struck by the filter when you remove it and it
pops loose.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 181

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3-1 Removal Process with Looped Strap (cont’d)

Figure 8-58 Filter removed

4.) Remove the filter from the frame.

NOTE: The filter frame will clear your fingers as you remove the filter.

Figure 8-59 Bottom View to show Removing the Filter

WARNING Tilting the system is NOT a recommended method for the removal of the filter. The
bottom view in Figure 8-59 is only for illustrative purposes.

8 - 182 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3-2 Removal Process with Non-loop Type Strap

Figure 8-60 Non-loop Type Strap

1.) Locate the strap on the right hand side of the LOGIQ E9, which can be viewed through the right rear
wheel well.

Figure 8-61 Fingers Holding Strap

2.) Grasp the filter removal strap with the thumb and index finger of your right hand.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 183

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3-2 Removal Process with Non-loop Type Strap (cont’d)

3.) Using the first and second fingers of your left hand, lever down on the filter removal strap.

Figure 8-62 Placement of Fingers Around Strap

NOTE: This action will prevent your fingers from being struck by the filter when you remove it and it
pops loose.

Figure 8-63 Removing Filter Frame

4.) Remove the filter from the frame.

NOTE: The filter frame will clear your fingers as you remove the filter.

8 - 184 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3-2 Removal Process with Non-loop Type Strap (cont’d)

Figure 8-64 Bottom View for Removing the Filter

WARNING Tilting the system is NOT a recommended method for the removal of the filter. The
bottom view in Figure 8-64 is only for illustrative purposes.

8-7-3-2-1Cleaning the bottom filter

The bottom filter is held in place with magnets. To clean the bottom air filter,

1.) You need to kneel down on the floor to access the bottom filter. Locate the piece of cloth extending
from the air filter on the bottom of the LOGIQ E9.
2.) You need two hands to remove this filter. One hand is used to pull on the piece of cloth that extends
from the filter and the other hand is used to wedge a finger just under a corner of the filter. In this
step, firmly take hold of the piece of cloth that extends from the filter.
3.) Position your other hand at a corner of the filter and wedge a finger between the filter and the bottom
of the LOGIQ E9.
4.) Pull down on the filter with the finger that is wedged between the filter and the LOGIQ E9 while
pulling on the piece of cloth that extends from the filter at the same time to remove the filter.
5.) Clean this filter with soap and water, or vacuum clean.
6.) Reposition the filter at the bottom of the LOGIQ E9.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 185

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-3-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-7-3-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-7-3-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use

Table 8-111 Filter replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

8 - 186 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-4 Removable Fan Tray Filter cleaning

Table 8-112 Removable Fan Tray Filter cleaning

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
No tools are needed to replace the filter.
15 minutes

Table 8-113 Preparations and Preparation Link

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3. Remove the Removable Fan Tray.

Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

Clean the Fan Tray filter to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the system to overheat and
reduce system performance and reliability. It is recommended the filter be cleaned quarterly (once every
three months) or more often in locations where high levels of dust are present.

Table 8-114 Removing the Fan Tray Filter

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 187

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-114 Removing the Fan Tray Filter

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. Flip the Fan Tray over on a clean, safe
surface.

Pull out the Filter latch and slide the Filter

out.

Clean the Bottom Filter after it is removed

by removing excess lint or dust from the
soiled side. If necessary, use a clean, soft
brush; or vacuum.

3. Reinstall the Filter into the Fan Tray and reinstall the Fan Tray. Make sure the Fan Tray seats
completely into the Card Cage.

8 - 188 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-4-1 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-7-4-2 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-115 Rear Filter Installation Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 189

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-4-3 Removable Fan Tray Assembly replacement / installation - R5 and later

Table 8-116 Removable Fan Tray Assembly replacement / installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9.

2. Flip the Fan Tray over and pull out the Filter
latch and slide the Filter out.

3. Reinstall the Filter into the Fan Tray Assembly and install the Tray into the Card Cage. Make sure the Fan
Tray seats completely into the Card Cage.

8 - 190 Section 8-7 - Main Console parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-7-4-4 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-7-4-5 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
4.) Verify that there is no unusual noise from the Fan Assembly.

8-7-4-6 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-117 Fan Assembly replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 191

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-8
Casters and Brakes replacement
8-8-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts for the Casters and Brakes.

8-8-2 Rear Casters replacement

8-8-2-1 Manpower
Two people, 15 minutes.

8-8-2-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

NOTE: This procedure requires an extended HEX key (UNBRAKO / ALLEN key) due to the high torque:
130 Nm {95.9 lbf-ft}.

8-8-2-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove both Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Rear Bumper.
6.) Remove the Rear Cover.
Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2-1 "Side Covers removal" on page 8-31.
• 8-5-14 "Rear Bumper replacement" on page 8-64.
• 8-5-11 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-54.

8 - 192 Section 8-8 - Casters and Brakes replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-2-4 Rear Casters removal

1.) Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forwards.
2.) Activate Direction Lock.
3.) Put the Bevel Edged Board on the floor.

WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating Operator Panel is locked in its lowest,
parking position.

WARNING Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ E9 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.

4.) Pull the system backwards up the board incline. This will lift the Rear Wheel on the opposite side of
the System from the floor.
5.) Turn the Rear Caster that stands on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown in
Figure 8-65.

Figure 8-65 Pull system backwards up the board incline

6.) Activate the brakes.

7.) The system is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster.
8.) Make the LOGIQ E9 rest on both Front Casters and lift the Rear Caster. Put the Wooden Wedge
under the chassis. This will stabilize the LOGIQ E9 with one Rear Caster free from the floor. This
Rear Caster can now be removed.
9.) Unscrew and remove the fixing bolt. Save the bolt for later use.
10.)Remove the Rear Caster.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 193

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-2-5 Rear Casters installation

1.) Loose the bolt before putting on the ramp.
2.) Align the Caster, mounting it flat and toward the back.
3.) Position the Caster so it align with the hole for the fixing bolt.
4.) Install the fixing bolt (M12 X 40 mm). Use a 10 mm HEX key, torque: 81 Nm (59.7 lbf-ft).
5.) Remove the Wooden Wedge.
6.) Roll the system off the Bevel Edged Board.
7.) To replace the other Rear Caster, repeat all the steps, starting from 8-8-2-4 "Rear Casters removal"
on page 8-193, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of
the system.
8.) Install the Rear Cover.
9.) Install the Rear Bumper.
10.)Install the Side Covers.

8-8-2-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-8-2-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it starts as it should.

8-8-2-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-118 Rear Casters replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
4-3-7-3 Color Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required
4-3-7-6 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks
checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-2-10-1 The Casters (Wheels) control
and and
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks
4-2-4 Top Console position adjustment

8 - 194 Section 8-8 - Casters and Brakes replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-3 Front Casters replacement

8-8-3-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-8-3-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-8-3-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove both Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Foot Rest Bumper.
Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-6 "Foot Rest Bumper replacement" on page 8-43.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 195

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-3-4 Front Casters removal

1.) Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forwards.
2.) Activate Direction Lock.
3.) Put the Bevel Edged Board on the floor.

WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating Operator Panel is locked in its lowest,
parking position.

WARNING Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ E9 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.

4.) Pull the system backwards up the board incline. This will lift the Rear Wheel on the opposite side of
the System from the floor.
5.) Turn the Rear Caster that stands on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown in
Figure 8-65.

Figure 8-66 Pull system backwards up the board incline

6.) The system is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster.
7.) Make the LOGIQ E9 rest on both Rear Casters and lift the Front Caster.
8.) Put the Wooden Wedge under the chassis. This will stabilize the LOGIQ E9 with one Front Caster
free from the floor.
9.) Unscrew and remove the fixing screws (T-45) for the Front Caster that is free from the floor. Save
the screw for later use.
10.)Remove the Caster.
11.)Disconnect the lock by unscrewing the hex nut that holds it to the rod.

8 - 196 Section 8-8 - Casters and Brakes replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-8-3-5 Front Casters installation

1.) Position the Caster so it align with the fastening screw.
2.) Install the three fixing screws (M8 x 20 mm), torque: 20.5 Nm (15.1 lbf-ft).
3.) Remove the Wooden Wedge.
4.) Roll the system off the Bevel Edged Board.
5.) To replace the other Front Caster, repeat all the steps from 8-8-3-4 "Front Casters removal" on page
8-196, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of the
system.
6.) Install the Foot Rest Cover.

8-8-3-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-8-3-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it starts as it should.

8-8-3-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-119 Front Casters replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
4-3-7-3 Color Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required
4-3-7-6 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks
checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-2-10-1 The Casters (Wheels) control
and and
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks
4-2-4 Top Console position adjustment

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 197

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-9
BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement
8-9-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to replace the BEP itself and the service parts inside the BEP.

8 - 198 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-2 BEP replacement - R3.x and earlier

NOTE: BEP replacement requires a software reload.

Table 8-120 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
1 hour if all options
are installed plus the
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
time it takes to load
the software,
excludes travel time

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 199

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-2 BEP replacement - R3.x and earlier (cont’d)

Table 8-121 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn OFF and unplug the system.
2. Maintain control of the system power plug.
3. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify
TAG
&
isolation. The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off button will turn OFF.
LOCKOUT

Date
4. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3 WHEN
Signed

WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and BEP may be energized even
if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Record the system’s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings.

2. Back up the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and Service
settings. You will perform a Restore after the install.
3. Raise the Top Console to the highest position.
4. Power down the system.
5. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes, and External I/O Cabling.
6. Remove the left Side Cover only, unless the Top Cover is removed to increase access to BEP top cables; then
remove the right Side Cover.
7. Remove the printer.
8. Release the two clips holding the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP.
9. Gently slide the Printer Tray back towards the center of the system to remove the Printer Tray.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-4-6 "Loading the Software" on page 8-9.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-11-6 "Digital Graphic Printer replacement" on page 8-279.
• 8-11-7 "Printer Tray replacement" on page 8-281.

8 - 200 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-2 BEP replacement - R3.x and earlier (cont’d)

8-9-2-1 BEP removal - R3.x and earlier

Table 8-122 BEP removal - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

WARNING
When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL
PATIENT DATA from the Hard Drive, given that the Hard Drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

Before you dispose of the Hard Drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the Hard
Drive, given that the Hard Drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
Hard Drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

CAUTION

When the BEP door is open, the Extended Power Shutdown circuit board is exposed. When
working inside the BEP, remove the battery cable form J3 on the Extended Power Shutdown.
Otherwise, the 24V battery will be exposed. If you drop a tool or a screw on the Extended Power
Shutdown, you could short the battery. Permanent damage will be done if this happens.

NOTE: Some cables in the BEP have a locking latch. Make sure to slide the locking latch towards you
and pull the connector to the left to release.
1. Disconnect all I/O cables and all cables at the top of the BEP.
2. Loosen the thumb screw or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
3. Disconnect: inside of BEP Cover, EPS and cables
• the battery cable from J3 on the EPS
(Extended Power Shutdown) Board.
• the cables (1) connecting the EPS to the
BEP.

Place the BEP cover aside.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 201

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-122 BEP removal - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Remove the two 5 mm HEX key screws at BEP Base HEX key screws
the inside base of the BEP.

5. Reach inside the BEP to disconnect the BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration
BEP to Backplane cable from J3 on a GFI (views inside the BEP)
Configuration.

BEP Cable to Backplane, J2 (left) of

MRX Configuration

Release the lock connector for the BEP to

Backplane cable, J2 (left) on a MRX
Configuration. Keep the cable to transfer to
the replacement BEP.

6. Slide:
• the entire BEP away from the system approximately one inch, then finish removing the Printer
Tray.
• the entire BEP out of chassis and remove the BEP from the system.

8 - 202 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-122 BEP removal - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

7. Remove the following parts from the BEP, if present (to reinstall in the replacement BEP):
• DVR Card
• Flex Jumper Cable
• SATA cable (which goes between the DVR and Motherboard)
• Patient I/O filler
• Patient I/O module
• Option Dongle
• Printer Tray

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 203

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-2-2 BEP installation - R3.x and earlier

Table 8-123 BEP installation - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Reinstall the following parts from the BEP that was replaced (all that were present):
• DVR Card
• Flex Jumper Cable
• SATA cable (which goes between the DVR and Motherboard)
• Patient I/O filler
• Patient I/O module
• Option Dongle
• Printer Tray
2. Slide the BEP into the left side of the chassis frame.
3. Install the two HEX key screws at the inside
base of the BEP (Torque: 10 Nm
{7.4 lbf-ft}).

8 - 204 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-123 BEP installation - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Reach inside the BEP and connect: BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration
• the BEP cable to the Backplane J3 on a (views inside the BEP)
GFI Configuration.
• the BEP cable to Backplane J2 (left) on a
MRX Configuration.

BEP Cable to Backplane, J2 (left) of

MRX Configuration

5. NOTE: If you DO NOT reconnect the internal BEP cable to the Backplane, the system will power
up but WILL NOT scan or WILL LAUNCH into simulator mode.
6. Insert the bottom lip of the BEP cover inside the base of the BEP.
7. Connect the Battery cable to J3 on the EPS and EPS to BEP cables to the EPS.
8. MAKE SURE all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the
BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
9. Tighten the thumb screw or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 205

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-123 BEP installation - R3.x and earlier

Steps Corresponding Graphic

10. Replace the Printer Tray at the top of the BEP.
Be sure the lip, on the underside of the bracket, hooks on the edge of the card rack, and the three
tabs insert into the slots on the top of the BEP frame. The lip “clamps” the card rack and BEP
together. This is a tight fit.
11. Lower the lower Column Cover. Make sure the Column Cover is behind the Printer Tray.

12. Position the Front Cover to engage the Column Cover stop tabs.

13. Latch the two latches that clamp the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP.

14. Slide the Black and White printer into the

Printer Tray and connect the cables to the
back of the printer.

15. Tighten the Printer Tray wing nut to secure the printer.

16. Connect all cables at the top of the BEP and all I/O cables.

17. Replace the covers.

18. Reinstall Base Load and Application software.

19. Enter the system’s TCPIP settings and Option strings.

20. Restore the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer
Presets), and Service settings.
21. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-3-3 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-9-3-4 - Verification
and 8-9-3-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-216.

8 - 206 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-3 BEP replacement - R4.x and later

NOTE: BEP replacement requires a software reload.

If the battery does not come installed in the BEP FRU, see 8-9-9 "BEP Battery Pack replacement - R4.x
and later" on page 8-239 to install / transfer the battery into the new BEP.

Table 8-124 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
1 hour if all options
are installed plus the
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
time it takes to load
the software,
excludes travel time

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 207

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-3 BEP replacement - R4.x and later (cont’d)

Table 8-125 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than
30 Volts:
1. Turn OFF and unplug the system.
TAG
2. Maintain control of the system power plug.
LOCKOUT
&
3. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points
Signed Date

to verify isolation. The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off button will turn OFF.
4. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. this should be done whenever the bep is open and the
chargeboard is exposed and changing parts.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is
turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Record the system’s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings.

2. Back up the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and Service
settings. You will perform a Restore after the install.
3. Raise the Top Console to the highest position.
4. Power down the system.
5. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes, and External I/O Cabling.
6. Remove the left Side Cover only, unless the Top Cover is removed to increase access to BEP top cables; then
remove the right Side Cover.
7. Remove the printer or the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack if Shear Wave option is installed.
8. Remove the BEP PB (PowerBoard) to remove the Wireless Card, if present.
8. Release the two clips holding the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP.
9. Gently slide the Printer Tray back towards the center of the system to remove the Printer Tray.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-4-6 "Loading the Software" on page 8-9.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-11-6 "Digital Graphic Printer replacement" on page 8-279.
• 8-11-7 "Printer Tray replacement" on page 8-281.
• 8-11-9 "Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement" on page 8-292, if present.

8 - 208 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-3-1 BEP removal

Table 8-126 BEP removal - R4.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

WARNING
When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL
PATIENT DATA from the Hard Drive, given that the Hard Drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

Before you dispose of the Hard Drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the Hard
Drive, given that the Hard Drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
Hard Drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

CAUTION

When the BEP door is open, the ChargeBoard is exposed. When working inside the BEP,
remove the battery cable from PCN1 on the ChargeBoard. Otherwise, the 24V battery will be
exposed. If you drop a tool or a screw on the Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard, you
could short the battery. Permanent damage will be done if this happens.

NOTE:
You cannot power up the unit with the cables detached. The system will power up without the battery
pack, but the cables on the cover must be attached.

Some cables in the BEP have a locking latch. Make sure to slide the locking latch towards you and pull
the connector to the left to release.
1. Disconnect all I/O cables and all cables at the top of the BEP.
2. Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws that attach
the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 209

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-126 BEP removal - R4.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. NOTE: All the connectors to the CB BEP6 CB cables
(ChargeBoard) must be “unlocked“ to
remove.

Disconnect:
• the battery cable from PCN1 on the CB
(ChargeBoard).
• the CB to the PB (PowerBoard) cable
from PCN2.

Place the BEP cover aside.

4. Remove the two 5 mm HEX key screws at BEP Base HEX key screws
the inside base of the BEP.

8 - 210 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-126 BEP removal - R4.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Release the lock connector for the BEP to BEP Cable to Backplane, J2 - BEP6
Backplane cable, J2 (left) on a MRX
Configuration.

BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration

(view inside the BEP)

Or, the Backplane cable, J3 (right) and J5

PCIe to the Card Rack on a GFI
Configuration, using a BEP6. Keep the
cable to transfer to the replacement BEP.

6. Slide:
• the entire BEP away from the system approximately one inch, then finish removing the Printer
Tray.
• the entire BEP out of chassis and remove the BEP from the system.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 211

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-126 BEP removal - R4.x and later

Steps Corresponding Graphic

7. Remove the following parts from the BEP, to reinstall in the replacement BEP:
• Option Dongle
• Printer and/or the Printer Tray or the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack if Shear Wave option is
installed.
• BackPlane to BEP cable
• Wireless Card and Antennas, if present
• Patient I/O, if present
• S Video Card, if present
• Shear Wave Capacitor Pack, if present

8 - 212 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-3-2 BEP installation

Table 8-127 BEP installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Disconnect: BEP6 CB cables
• the battery cable from PCN1.
• the CB to PB cable from PCN2.

Place the BEP cover aside.

2. Re-install the following parts into the replacement BEP:

• Option Dongle
• Printer Tray and/or the Printer or the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack if Shear Wave option was
installed.
• BackPlane to BEP cable
• Wireless Card and Antennas, if present
• Patient I/O, if present
• S Video Card, if present
• Shear Wave Capacitor Pack
3. Slide the BEP into the left side of the chassis frame.
4. Install the two HEX key screws at the inside
base of the BEP (Torque: 10 Nm
{7.4 lbf-ft}).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 213

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-127 BEP installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Reach inside the BEP and connect the BEP Cable to MRX Backplane, J2
BEP cable to the Backplane J2 (left) on a
MRX Configuration.

MAKE sure the BEP Cable to the

Backplane for BEP6 is installed as shown.
DO NOT twist.

Or, the Backplane cable, J3 (right) and J5

PCIe to the Card Rack on a GFI BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration
Configuration, using a BEP6. (view inside the BEP)

8 - 214 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-127 BEP installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

6. NOTE: If you DO NOT reconnect the internal BEP cable to the Backplane, the system will power
up but WILL NOT scan or WILL LAUNCH into simulator mode.
7. Insert the bottom lip of the BEP cover inside the base of the BEP.
8. Connect the battery cable to PCN1 and the CB to PB cable to PCN2 on the CB. Make sure the
cable connectors are “locked“ into place on the CB connections.
9. MAKE SURE all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the
BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
10. Tighten and secure the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws
that attach the cover to the BEP.
11. Replace the Printer Tray at the top of the BEP.
Be sure the lip, on the underside of the bracket, hooks on the edge of the card rack, and the three
tabs insert into the slots on the top of the BEP frame. The lip “clamps” the card rack and BEP
together. This is a tight fit.
12. Lower the lower Column Cover. Make sure the Column Cover is behind the Printer Tray.

13. Position the Front Cover to engage the Column Cover stop tabs.

14. Latch the two latches that clamp the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP.

15. Slide the Black and White printer into the Printer aligned with Printer Tray
Printer Tray and connect the cables to the
back of the printer. Or, reinstall the Shear
Wave Capacitor Pack, if present. See:
8-11-9 "Shear Wave Capacitor Pack
replacement" on page 8-292.

16. Tighten the Printer Tray wing nut to secure the printer.

17. Connect all cables at the top of the BEP and all I/O cables.

18. Replace the covers.

19. Reinstall Base Load and Application software.

20. Enter the system’s TCPIP settings and Option strings.

21. Restore the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer
Presets), and Service settings.
Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 215
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-127 BEP installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

22. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-3-3 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-9-3-4 - Verification
and 8-9-3-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-216.

8-9-3-3 Calibration and adjustments

Calibrate the Front End as described in: Section 6-6 "DC Offset Calibration" on page 6-20.

8-9-3-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-9-3-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-128 BEP replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
Mechanical Function Checks - internal required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18
and external
Perform a 4D sweep
Diagnostics

1.) Check/Set Date, Time, and Timezone, and set the Preset Region accordingly.
2.) Reconnect to the network.
3.) If the system was connected to InSite ExC, restore the service settings backed up prior to the Base
Load. Reboot and verify remote connectivity.
4.) Confirm Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration (Customer Presets),
and Service settings are restored.
5.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper CD/DVD write functionality.

8 - 216 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-4 BEP I/O Board Assembly replacement - R3.x and earlier

Table 8-129 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-130 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE
POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED
BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9
WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3 WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
EPS IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and BEP may be energized even
if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes, and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove Left Side cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 217

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-4-1 BEP I/O Board removal

Table 8-131 BEP I/O Board removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Loosen the thumb screw or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
2. Disconnect the battery cable connecting to EPS Battery connection (J3)
J3 on the EPS.

3. Disconnect the cables inside the BEP that connect to the I/O.
4. Remove the HDD. See: 8-9-6-2 "HDD installation" on page 8-229.

NOTE: DO NOT forget to remove the metal tabs holding the cables to the Hard Drive.
5. Remove all cables connected to the I/O Board and the Option Dongle.
6. Remove the plug from J35 connector on the I/O Board.
7. Remove the cable from J36. Squeeze from the base of the connector to release the cable.
8. Remove the plug from J20 by grabbing the metal connector (not the flex cable) and wiggling to
gently remove.
9. Remove J46 network cable. Remember to release the tab to disconnect.
10. Remove the five screws connecting the I/O BEP I/O Board screw placement
to the BEP.

11. Gently slide the I/O Board out. Be careful to allow room for external connectors to slip past the
back of the BEP.

NOTE: Remember there is still a connected cable at the base of the I/O Board.
12. Slide out the I/O Board approximately 2 inches.

13. Gently tip out the top of the I/O Board.

14. Carefully remove the I/O Board until you can access the connector labeled J34.

8 - 218 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-131 BEP I/O Board removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

15. Reach inside the BEP frame to pop the I/O
Board toward you.

16. Set the I/O Board aside.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 219

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-4-2 BEP I/O Board installation

Table 8-132 BEP I/O Board installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Guide the I/O Board into the BEP frame.
2. Be sure the three tabs on the end of the I/O
fit into the three slots in the back of the BEP
frame.

You will need to press in on the right side of

the I/O cover while pulling out on the left
side of the cover.

You may need to seat the lower tab first

and work up to the top

2. Loosely insert all five screws before tightening them.

3. Re-install the cables in the reverse order from when they were removed, following the markings
and re-install the Option Dongle.
4. Re-install the HDD.
5. Reconnect the I/O cabling.
6. Connect the Battery cable to J3 on the EPS.
7. Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
8. Tighten and secure the thumb screw(s) at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the
BEP.
9. Replace the side cover.
10. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-5-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-9-5-4 - Verification and 8-9-5-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-225.

8 - 220 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-5 BEP Side I/O Board Assembly replacement - R4.x and later
Table 8-133 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-134 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL CONTACT
WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE NON-
CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ESD
SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST
BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE CAPACITOR
PACK ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK CABLES.

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE POWER
CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is
turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes, and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove Left Side cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 221

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-5-1 BEP Side I/O Board removal

Table 8-135 BEP Side I/O Board removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Disconnect all I/O cables and all cables at the top of the BEP.
2. Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws that attach
the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
3. Disconnect: BEP6 CB cables
• the battery cable from PCN1.
• the CB to PB cable from PCN2.

Place the BEP cover aside.

4. Remove the Option Dongle, on the I/O Option Dongle

Board, inside the BEP.

8 - 222 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-135 BEP Side I/O Board removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Remove the four Phillips screws securing
the Side I/O Board to the BEP frame.

6. Slowly and carefully pull the I/O Board out I/O Board installation guides and slots
of the BEP, making sure to avoid hitting
components and circuit pins on both sides
of the Board. Pay attention to the
installation guide pins and the slots in the
bracket that need to be clear as I/O Board
and bracket are removed.

7. Set the I/O Board aside.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 223

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-5-2 BEP Side I/O Board installation

Table 8-136 BEP Side I/O Board installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Slowly and carefully slide in the I/O Board installation guides and slots
replacement I/O Board into the BEP,
making sure to avoid hitting components
and circuit pins on both sides of the board.

Pay attention on the guides pins (on the

BEP frame and the slots on the I/O Board),
the guide pins need to be inserted into the
slots. Guide the I/O Board into the BEP
frame.

2. Re-install the four screws and tighten securely.

3. Re-install the Option Dongle.
4. Reconnect the I/O cabling.
5. Connect the battery cable to PCN1 and the CB to PB cable to PCN2 on the CB. Make sure the
cable connectors are “locked“ into place on the CB connections.
6. Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
7. Tighten and secure the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws
that attach the cover to the BEP.
8. Replace the side cover.
9. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-5-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-9-5-4 - Verification and 8-9-5-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-225.

8 - 224 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-5-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-9-5-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-9-5-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-137 BEP I/O and Side I/O replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 225

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-6 BEP HDD (Hard Disk Drive) replacement - R3.x and earlier
Table 8-138 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
30 minutes
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
60 minutes Software
Load

Table 8-139 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9
WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3 WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
EPS IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and BEP may be energized even
if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Record the system’s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings.

2. Power down the system.
3. Back up the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and Service
settings. You will perform a Restore after the install.
4. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
5. Remove Left Side cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-4-6 "Loading the Software" on page 8-9.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8 - 226 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-6-1 HDD removal

If the HDD has patient data, leave the HDD at the site.

Table 8-140 HDD removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Loosen the thumb screw or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
2. Disconnect: inside of BEP Cover, EPS and cables
• the battery cable from J3 on the EPS
(Extended Power Shutdown) Board.
• the cables (1) connecting the EPS to the
BEP.

Set the BEP cover aside.

3. Remove the screw that secures the HDD

bracket.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 227

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-140 HDD removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Swing the HDD bracket out. HDD hinge tabs

Disconnect the cables connecting the

HDD.

Lift the bracket up, freeing the BEP / HDD

hinge tabs from the slots.

If the HDD has patient data, leave the HDD

at the site.

8 - 228 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-6-2 HDD installation

Table 8-141 HDD installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Slide the HDD bracket hinges into the BEP frame slots.
2. Connect the cables to the HDD.
3. Swing the HDD bracket into place.
4. Install the screw that secures the HDD bracket.
5. Insert the base of the BEP cover at the base of the BEP.

Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP cover rests inside the BEP.
6. Connect the Battery cable to J3 on the EPS and EPS to BEP cables to the EPS.
7. Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
8. Tighten and secure the thumb screw(s) at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws that
attach the cover to the BEP.
9. Replace the side cover.
10. Power up the system.

11. Reinstall the Base Load and Application Software.

12. Enter the TCPIP settings and Option strings for the LOGIQ E9.

13. Restore the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer
Presets), and Service settings.
14. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-7-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-9-7-4 - Verification and 8-9-7-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-234.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 229

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-7 BEP HDD replacement - R4.x and later

Table 8-142 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
30 minutes
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
60 minutes Software
Load

Table 8-143 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9
WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is
turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Record the system’s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings.

2. Power down the system.
3. Back up the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and Service
settings. You will perform a Restore after the install.
4. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
5. Remove Left Side cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-4-6 "Loading the Software" on page 8-9.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8 - 230 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-7-1 HDD removal

If the HDD has patient data, leave the HDD at the site.

Table 8-144 HDD removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws that attach
the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
2. Disconnect the battery from PCN1 on the BEP6 CB cables
the CB (ChargeBoard).

3. Disconnect HDD Power cable (1) and HDD cable connections

SATA cable (2).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 231

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-144 HDD removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Remove the two Phillips screws securing HDD mounting screws
the HDD and Bracket to the BEP frame.

5. Pull/slide the HDD out of the BEP, and HDD removal

Bracket to the BEP frame. Slight force may
need to be applied since the HDD fits tightly
into the BEP motherboard.

If the HDD has patient data, leave the HDD

at the site.

Note the HDD installation guides.

HDD installation guides

8 - 232 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-7-2 HDD installation

Table 8-145 HDD installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Slide the replacement HDD and bracket into the guides. Continue to install the HDD and bracket
into the BEP until it seats into the motherboard.
2. Re-installed the two Phillips screws to secure the HDD and bracket to the BEP frame. Hand
Tighten.
3. Connect the power and SATA cables to the HDD.
4. Connect the battery cable to PCN1 on the CB.
5. Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
6. Tighten and secure the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws
that attach the cover to the BEP.
7. Replace the side cover.
8. Power up the system.
9. Reinstall the Base Load and Application Software.
10. Enter the TCPIP settings and Option strings for the LOGIQ E9.

11. Restore the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer
Presets), and Service settings.
12. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-7-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-9-7-4 - Verification and 8-9-7-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-234.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 233

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-7-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-9-7-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-9-7-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-146 BEP HDD replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

8 - 234 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-8 BEP Battery Pack replacement - R3.x and earlier

Table 8-147 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-148 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE
POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED
BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED
SEPARATELY.
CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL COMPANY
TO DECOMMISSION YOUR EQUIPMENT.

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3 WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
EPS IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and BEP may be energized even
if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 235

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-148 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
3. Remove Left Side cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8 - 236 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-8-1 BEP Battery Pack removal

Table 8-149 BEP Battery Pack removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
2. Disconnect the battery cable connecting to EPS Battery connection (J3)
J3 on the EPS.

Position the cable connector into the

opening of the battery cavity, so the cable
and battery can be easily removed.

Close BEP door and secure closed.

3. Remove the four screws to the Battery BEP Cover, BEP Battery Pack Cover screws
Cover on the BEP cover.

Remove the Battery Pack Cover.

4. Remove the stabilizing foam strip beside the battery pack.

5. Remove the BEP Battery Pack.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 237

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-8-2 BEP Battery Pack installation

Table 8-150 BEP Battery Pack installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Route the battery cable through the cable opening into the BEP and position the BEP Battery
Pack into place.
2. Install the stabilizing foam strip beside the Battery Pack.
3. Install the Battery Pack Cover and the four screws that secure the Battery Pack Cover to the BEP
cover. Tighten screws securely.
4. Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
5. Connect the Battery cable to J3 on the EPS.
6. Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
7. Tighten and secure the thumb screw(s) at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws that
attach the cover to the BEP.
8. Replace the side cover.
9. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-9-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-9-9-4 - Verification and 8-9-9-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-243

NOTE: ALL batteries MUST BE recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws.

8 - 238 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-9 BEP Battery Pack replacement - R4.x and later

Table 8-151 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-152 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE
POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED
BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE
CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK
CABLES.
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED
SEPARATELY.
CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL COMPANY
TO DECOMMISSION YOUR EQUIPMENT.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 239

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-152 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is
turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
3. Remove Left Side cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8 - 240 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-9-1 Battery Pack replacement

Table 8-153 Battery Pack removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws that attach
the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
2. Disconnect the battery from PCN1 on the BEP6 CB cables
the CB (ChargeBoard).

Position the cable connector into the

opening of the battery cavity, so the cable
and battery can be easily removed.

Close BEP door and secure closed.

3. Remove the four screws to the Battery BEP Cover, BEP Battery Pack Cover screws
Cover on the BEP cover.

Remove the Battery Pack Cover.

4. Remove the stabilizing foam strip beside the battery pack.

5. Remove the BEP Battery Pack.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 241

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-9-2 BEP Battery Pack installation

Table 8-154 BEP Battery Pack installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Route the battery cable through the cable opening into the BEP and position the BEP Battery
Pack into place.
2. Install the battery stabilizer strips beside the Battery Pack.
3. Install the Battery Pack Cover and the four screws that secure the Battery Pack Cover to the BEP
cover. Tighten screws securely.
4. Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP.
Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP.
5. Connect the battery cable to PCN1 on the CB.
6. Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP.

NOTICE

Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover.
7. Tighten and secure the thumb screws at the top of the BEP cover, or the three screws that attach
the cover to the BEP.
8. Replace the side cover.
9. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-9-9-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-9-9-4 - Verification and 8-9-9-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-243

NOTE: ALL batteries MUST BE recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws.

8 - 242 Section 8-9 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-9-9-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-9-9-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-9-9-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-155 BEP Battery Pack replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 243

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-10
Main Power Supply parts replacement
8-10-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to replace the Main Power Supply and components and to service parts.

8-10-2 Main Power Supply replacement

NOTE: If installed, remove the 4D motor controller and install in replacement Power Supply.

Table 8-156 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
30 minutes

Table 8-157 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE
CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK
CABLES.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9
WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is
turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove both Side Covers, the Top Cover, the Rear Bumper and the Rear Cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-11 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-54.
• 8-10-4 "4D Motor Controller (4D MC) replacement" on page 8-256.

8-10-2-1 Main Power Supply removal

This procedure addresses the two types of Main Power Supplies (Cherokee/Mitra and Lambda) used
in the LOGIQ E9.

8 - 244 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-2-1 Main Power Supply removal (cont’d)

Table 8-158 Main Power Supply (PS) removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. To remove Main PS (1): Main PS and mounting

NOTE: The mounting of a Cherokee/Mitra

PS and Lambda PS are the same. The PS
connectors are in different locations.

NOTE: When the system is in standby, the

Lambda PS will be warm. This is normal for
a Lambda PS.

(Cherokee/Mitra) PS connectors

Disconnect the Mains PS Cable and all

cables (2) - AC Output to Peripherals,
Printer, Power to BEP and USB on top of
the Main PS.

Remove the three screws (3) that secure

the Main PS using a 5 mm Allen wrench.
(Lambda) PS connectors without Shear Wave option
(R4 and earlier)
Ease the Main PS away from the fang
bracket (4).

Pull/slide the entire Main PS backwards

until the connectors to the Card Cage/
Backplane are unseated.

NOTE: If the 4D MC option is installed,

proceed to Step 2. If not proceed to Step 3.

(Lambda) PS connectors with Shear Wave option

NOTE: If the Shear Wave option is (R5 and later)
installed, the cable that supplies voltage to
the Capacitor Pack is located behind the
BEP Power Cable and the Printer Cable
may not be present.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 245

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-158 Main Power Supply (PS) removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. If the 4D MC option is installed, disconnect
the USB Cable from J28 on the BEP. The
4D MC will also have to be transferred to
the replacement PS. See: Section 8-10-4
"4D Motor Controller (4D MC)
replacement" on page 8-256.

2. Ease the PS away from the fang bracket.

Pull/slide the entire PS backwards until the

connectors to the Card Cage/Backplane
are unseated.

Lift the PS away.

8 - 246 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-2-2 Main PS installation

NOTE: If the 4D MC option was installed, make sure to reinstall the option into the new replacement
PS.

Table 8-159 Main PS installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Make sure the GFI PCIe cable is routed
behind the Main PS fang. GFI
Configuration only. MRX does not use this
cable.

Slide the Main PS (1) forward to seat the

connectors (2) on the Card Cage.

Engage the tab onto the Fang, from where

it was removed.

Install the three screws (3) that secure the

Main PS using a 5 mm Allen wrench
(Torque: 10 Nm {7.4 lbf-ft}).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 247

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-159 Main PS installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Reconnect the Mains PS Cable and all (Cherokee/Mitra) PS connectors
cables -
AC Output to Peripherals, Printer, Power to
BEP and USB on top of the Main PS.

If the Shear Wave option is installed,

reconnect the cable that supplies voltage to
the Capacitor Pack.
(Lambda) PS connectors without Shear Wave option
(R4 and earlier)

(Lambda) PS connectors with Shear Wave option

(R5 and later)

PCIe Cable routed between Card Cage and Targa (right side
view). GFI Configuration only. MRX does not use this cable.

2. Install the Rear Cover, Top Cover and Side Covers.

3. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-10-2-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-10-2-4 - Verification and 8-10-2-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-249.

8 - 248 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-2-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-10-2-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-10-2-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-160 Main Power Supply replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Leakage Current
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks measured at (record the value) and meets
allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
checks and is ready for use.
10-6-4 Grounding continuity
10-6-5 Chassis leakage current test
Perform a 4D sweep

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 249

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-3 Main Power Supply Fan Assembly replacement

NOTE: This procedure only applies to Cherokee/Mitra Main Power Supplies. The fan assembly for
Lambda Power Supplies is not serviceable.

8-10-3-1 Manpower
One person, 45 minutes.

8-10-3-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-10-3-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3.) Remove both Side Covers, the Top Cover, the Rear Bumper and the Rear Cover.
4.) Remove the Main Power Supply.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-5-11 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-54.
• 8-10-2 "Main Power Supply replacement" on page 8-244.

8 - 250 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-3-4 Main Power Supply Fan Assembly removal

Table 8-161 Main Power Supply Fan Assembly Removal

Step Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the Main Power Supply. Rear view of the PS

Remove the five screws (Torx T10 screw

head) securing the Fan Assembly to the
PS. DO NOT discard the screws.

Slide the Fan Assembly away from the

PS.

Inside view of the PS

1. Disconnect the Fan Assembly connectors

(three white plastic connectors) from the
PS to remove the assembly.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 251

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-3-5 Main Power Supply Fan Assembly installation

Table 8-162 Installing the replacement Fan Assembly

Step Corresponding Graphic

1. Prepare the replacement Fan Assembly
for installation.

Identify the connector for fan 1 (a). Fan 1

connector is identified with a black
marking. Fan 1 (a) is the fan on the right
side of the Fan Assembly (as shown).

If there are no tie wraps attached, attach a

tie wrap (b) to the connector cables to
position the cables in the center of Fan 2
(c). Trim the end of the tie wrap.

NOTE: The tie wraps are necessary to

position the cables between the heatsink
and the module when the Fan Assembly is
placed into the PS.
2. Position the Fan Assembly under the PS
(as shown), to ease connecting the
connectors to the PS.

Connect the Fan Assembly connectors to

PS the fan terminals:

NOTE: Fan 1 must be connected to the

terminal labeled X14 (circled). Terminal
X14 supplies the voltage to the stand-by
fan (Fan 1) and also the regular operating
voltage to Fan 1, once the system is
turned on.

· Fan 2 or 3 to the terminals labeled X12

or X13
· Fan 1 to terminal labeled X14

8 - 252 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-162 Installing the replacement Fan Assembly

Step Corresponding Graphic

3. If a tie wrap is not attached, attach a
second tie wrap. Position the tie wrap 3 to
5 cm (1.19 to 1.96 inches) from the end of
the cable sleeves. Trim the end of the tie
wrap.

4. Position the wire tied cables between the

heatsink (a) and the module (b) before
placing the Fan Assembly into the PS.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 253

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-162 Installing the replacement Fan Assembly

Step Corresponding Graphic

5. Reinstall the five screws, removed earlier Inside view of the PS
to secure the Fan Assembly to the Power
Supply (PS).

Rear view of the PS

6. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-10-3-6 - Calibration and adjustments,

8-10-3-7 - Verification and 8-10-3-8 "Functional Checks" on page 8-255.

8 - 254 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-3-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-10-3-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-10-3-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-163 Main Power Supply Fan Assembly replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
10-6-4 Grounding continuity
10-6-5 Chassis leakage current test
Perform a 4D sweep

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 255

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-4 4D Motor Controller (4D MC) replacement

NOTE: This procedure addresses the 4D MC replacement for the two types of Main Power Supplies
(Cherokee/Mitra and Lambda) used in the LOGIQ E9

8-10-4-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-10-4-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-10-4-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Rear Cover and Identify the Main Power Supply.
6.) Remove the Main Power Supply.
7.) Disconnect the USB cable from J28 on the BEP I/O board if the 4D Motor Controller is present.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-11 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-54.
• 8-10-2 "Main Power Supply replacement" on page 8-244.

8 - 256 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-4-4 4D Motor Controller removal

8-10-4-4-1 Identifying the Main Power Supply (PS)

Table 8-164 Identifying the Main PS and connectors

Cherokee/Mitra PS Lambda PS

PS Label PS Label
(rear, bottom of PS - earlier and current production (rear, bottom of PS)
labels shown)

PS connectors without Shear Wave option

(R4 and earlier, top of PS)

PS connectors
(top of PS)

PS connectors with Shear Wave option

(R5 and later)

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 257

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-4-4-2 4D MC Replacement for Cherokee/Mitra PS

NOTE: Discard any removed components in the appropriate manner.

Table 8-165 4D MC Removal for Cherokee/Mitra PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Locate the 4D Motor Controller on the
back of the Main PS.

Remove the five screws (circled) securing

the 4D MC Cover to the Main PS.

Slide cover off to access the

4D MC.

4D MC Cover removed

2. Disconnect the USB Cable (1) and the

Flex Cable (2) from the PS. DO NOT pull
from the ribbon to remove. Only pull from
the connector.

Remove two screws (circled) and slide the

board away to remove the 4D Motor
Controller.

NOTE: The replacement 4D MC includes

a new Flex Cable, two USB Cables and a
P-clamp.

8 - 258 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-165 4D MC Removal for Cherokee/Mitra PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Disconnect the USB Cable from J28 on
the BEP.

Discard all the removed components.

Table 8-166 4D MC Reinstallation for Cherokee/Mitra PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. NOTE: Before installing the 4D MC, write
down the part number, service number
and revision. These will be used later to
update VPD.

Guide the 4D MC into its location in the

Main PS and install the two screws
(circled) supplied with the replacement.

Make sure the Flex Cable to the Controller

Card lies behind the Flex Cable from the
Main PS as shown.

Connect the Flex Cable (2) to the Main PS

and 4D MC.

NOTE: The replacement 4D MC includes

a two USB Cables, the shorter USB Cable
must be used for a Cherokee/Mitra PS.

Connect the shorter USB Cable (1) to the

4D MC.

NOTICE

Use care when connecting the Flex Cable to the connectors. The connectors are fragile and will be
damaged if not installed properly.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 259

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-166 4D MC Reinstallation for Cherokee/Mitra PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. Attach the new 4D MC Cover and route
the USB Cable as shown.

Use the P-Clamp, Screw and Washer

supplied with the 4D MC replacement to
secure the USB Cable to the PS.

3. Install the five screws (circled) to secure

the 4D MC Cover to the Main PS. Make
sure the P-Clamp for the 4D MC USB
Cable is not twisted. It should be aligned
with the Main PS.

8 - 260 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-166 4D MC Reinstallation for Cherokee/Mitra PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Check that the GFI PCIe Cable is behind
the Main PS fang (1). GFI Configuration
only. MRX does not use this cable.

Put the Main PS into position so it will be

ready to be mounted.

Feed the USB cable from the Main PS,

between the BEP and the Targa frame
and then feed the USB cable through the
gap prior to fastening the Main PS to the
Targa frame.
Side view of the PCIe Cable routed
between the Card Cage and Targa.
Check that the GFI PCIe cable between GFI Configuration only. MRX does not
the rear of the Card Cage (2) and the use this cable.
Targa frame (3).

NOTE: If applicable; only on GFI Card

Rack configuration.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 261

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-166 4D MC Reinstallation for Cherokee/Mitra PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Connect the USB Cable from the 4D MC
to J28 on the BEP.

6. Install the Main Power Supply.

Install the rear Cover.
Install the Side Covers.
Record VPD information for 4D Motor Controller. For information on updating VPD, see:
8-4-7-2 "Verify and Update Vital Product Data" on page 8-28.
7. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-10-4-5 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-10-4-6 - Verification and 8-10-4-7 "Functional Checks" on page 8-268.

8 - 262 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-4-4-3 4D MC Replacement for Lambda PS

.

Table 8-167 4D MC Removal for Lambda PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Locate the 4D MC Cover on the back of
the Main PS.

Remove the three screws from the

4D MC Cover. DO NOT discard. Gently
slide the 4D MC Cover and the 4D MC out
of the PS.

2. Remove the two screws (circled) that

secure the 4D MC to the 4D MC Cover.
Discard. Note how the 4D MC USB Cable
is routed for installation.

3. Disconnect the USB Cable from J28 on

the BEP.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 263

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-4-4-4 4D MC Reinstallation for Lambda PS

Table 8-168 4D MC Reinstallation for Lambda PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Install the two screws (circled),
supplied with the replacement 4D MC
to secure the 4D MC to the 4D MC
Cover.

NOTE: The replacement 4D MC

includes a two USB Cables, the longer
USB Cable must be used for a Lambda
PS.

Connect the long USB Cable to the 4D

MC. Route the cable as shown.

2. Insert the 4D MC and cover into the PS,

along the mounting rails (circled).

NOTE: There are four mounting rails,

two at the top (circled) and two in the
bottom. Make sure all are aligned to
ensure the 4D MC connects to the
Lambda PS. The 4D MC connects
directly to the Lambda PS.

8 - 264 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-168 4D MC Reinstallation for Lambda PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Route the USB Cable through the slot
in the PS.

Firmly, but gently push on the 4D MC

Cover until it is seated in place
(connected) to the PS.

Make sure the USB Cable is still in the

correct position.

Reinstall the three 4D MC Cover

screws.

4. Put the Main PS into position so it will

be ready to be mounted.

Route the USB cable between the

Targa frame and the BEP.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 265

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-168 4D MC Reinstallation for Lambda PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Connect the USB Cable from the
4D MC to J28 on the BEP.

8 - 266 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-168 4D MC Reinstallation for Lambda PS

Steps Corresponding Graphic

6. Check that the GFI PCIe Cable is
behind the Main PS fang (1). GFI
Configuration only. MRX does not use
this cable.

Put the Main PS into position so it will

be ready to be mounted.

Feed the USB cable from the Main PS,

between the BEP and the Targa frame
and then feed the USB cable through
the gap prior to fastening the Main PS
to the Targa frame. Side view of the PCIe Cable routed
between the Card Cage and Targa.
GFI Configuration only. MRX does not
Check that the GFI PCIe cable use this cable.
between the rear of the Card Cage (2)
and the Targa frame (3).

NOTE: If applicable; only on GFI Card

Rack configuration.

7. Install the Rear Cover and Side Covers.

Record VPD information for 4D Motor Controller. For information on updating VPD, see:
8-4-7-2 "Verify and Update Vital Product Data" on page 8-28.
8. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-10-4-5 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-10-4-6 - Verification and 8-10-4-7 "Functional Checks" on page 8-268.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 267

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-10-4-5 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-10-4-6 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-10-4-7 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-169 4D Motor Controller (Cherokee Power Supply) replacement Functional

Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Leakage Current
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks measured at (record the value) and meets
allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
checks and is ready for use.
10-6-4 Grounding continuity
10-6-5 Chassis leakage current test
Perform a 4D sweep

8 - 268 Section 8-10 - Main Power Supply parts replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-11
Peripherals replacement
8-11-1 Purpose of this section
Follow the instructions in this section to replace peripherals.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 269

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-2 Internal Peripherals overview

Refer to: Section 3-7-3 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-33.

8-11-3 DVD R/W drive replacement

8-11-3-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-11-3-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-11-3-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL CONTACT WITH
ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE NON-
CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ESD
SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST
BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE CAPACITOR PACK
ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK CABLES.

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.

8 - 270 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-3-3 Preparations (cont’d)

4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Top Cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.

8-11-3-4 DVD R/W drive removal

1.) Raise the console height to the highest level.
2.) Remove screws (1) securing the right side of the DVD Drive to the DVD / V Nav,
Bay Bird bracket (2).
3.) Tilt the Front Cover forward just until the Column Cover stop tabs clear.
4.) Raise the Column Cover (3) to access and remove any screws securing the left side of the DVD
drive to the DVD / V Nav, Bay Bird bracket.

Figure 8-67 DVD Drive Screw placement, right side DVD drive to the DVD / V Nav bracket

8-11-3-5 DVD R/W drive installation

1.) Slide the DVD drive into position.
2.) Seat the DVD Interface Board Bracket to the DVD Drive.
3.) Install the four screws to secure the DVD drive to the DVD Interface Board Bracket.
4.) Install the screws to secure the DVD drive to the DVD / V Nav, Bay Bird Bracket.
5.) Return the Column Cover to proper position.
6.) Install the Covers.
7.) Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-11-3-6 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-11-3-7 - Verification and 8-11-3-8 "Functional Checks" on page 8-272.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 271

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-3-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-11-3-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier.

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
3.) Insert and play DVD to confirm proper operation of the DVD drive.

8-11-3-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-170 DVD R/W drive replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Leakage Current
measured at (record the value) and meets
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
10-6-4 Grounding continuity checks and is ready for use.

10-6-5 Chassis leakage current test

8 - 272 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-4 DVD Storage Tray replacement

8-11-4-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-11-4-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-11-4-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Top Cover.
6.) Remove the DVD drive.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-11-3 "DVD R/W drive replacement" on page 8-270.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 273

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-4-4 DVD Storage Tray removal

Table 8-171 DVD Storage Drawer removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the four screws securing the
storage drawer to the LOGIQ E9. Discard
the screws and drawer in the appropriate
manner.

8-11-4-5 DVD Storage Tray installation

Table 8-172 Storage Drawer Installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Slide the Storage Drawer into the System.

Secure the Storage Drawer to the

LOGIQ E9 with the four supplied screws.

1. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-11-4-6 - Calibration and adjustments,

8-11-4-7 - Verification and 8-11-4-8 "Functional Checks" on page 8-275.

8 - 274 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-4-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-11-4-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-11-4-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-173 DVD Storage Tray replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 275

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-5 V Nav module replacement

Sometimes referred to as “Bay of Birds” or “3D Drive Bay” or “V Nav” or “Volume Navigation”

8-11-5-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-11-5-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-11-5-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL
FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING
CONTACT.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE
CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK
CABLES.
1.) Power down the system.
2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Top Cover.
6.) Remove the DVD drive, if necessary.
Newer DVD / V Nav bracket provides separate support rail for the DVD, so the DVD does not need
to be removed.

8 - 276 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-5-3 Preparations (cont’d)

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-11-3 "DVD R/W drive replacement" on page 8-270.

8-11-5-4 V Nav module removal

1.) Disconnect the cables to the rear of the V Nav module.
2.) Remove the four screws securing the right side of the V Nav module.

Figure 8-68 V Nav Screw placement (right side view), located below
DVD Drive or DVD Storage Tray

3.) Raise the Column Cover to access and remove the four screws securing the left side of the V Nav
module.
4.) Slide the V Nav module out the front of the system.

8-11-5-5 V Nav module installation

1.) Slide the V Nav module into position.
2.) Install the eight screws to secure the V Nav module.
3.) Connect the cables to the V Nav module.
4.) Install the DVD drive, if necessary.
5.) Return the Column Cover to proper position.
6.) Install the Covers.
7.) Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-11-5-6 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-11-5-7 - Verification and 8-11-5-8 "Functional Checks" on page 8-278.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 277

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-5-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-11-5-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
4.) Perform scans requiring V Nav module.

8-11-5-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-174 V Nav module replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Leakage Current
measured at (record the value) and meets
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks checks and is ready for use.

7-5-12-14 bayBIRD Tests

8 - 278 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-6 Digital Graphic Printer replacement

8-11-6-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-11-6-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-11-6-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes.
4.) Remove the Left Side Cover.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.

8-11-6-4 Black and White Digital Graphic Printer removal

1.) Disconnect the cables from the back of the printer.
2.) Loosen the Printer Tray wing nut that secures the printer.

Figure 8-69 Black and White Digital Graphic Printer - wing nut

3.) Slide the printer out.

8-11-6-5 Black and White Digital Graphic Printer installation

1.) Slide the printer into the Printer Tray until the face is flush with the system.
2.) Tighten the Printer Tray wing nut to secure the printer in the Printer Tray.
3.) Connect the cables to the back of the printer.
4.) Replace the Left Side Cover.
5.) Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-11-6-6 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-11-6-7 - Verification and 8-11-6-8 "Functional Checks" on page 8-280.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 279

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-6-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-11-6-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier.

2.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
3.) Test the Print Keys to confirm they function as they did before.
4.) Perform a test print.

8-11-6-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-175 Black and White Digital Graphic Printer replacement Functional
Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks 5535208-100, Rev. 2. Leakage Current
measured at (record the value) and meets
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
10-6-4 Grounding continuity checks and is ready for use.

10-6-5 Chassis leakage current test

8 - 280 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-7 Printer Tray replacement

8-11-7-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes.

8-11-7-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

8-11-7-3 Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3.) Disconnect all Probes.
4.) Remove the Side Covers.
5.) Remove the Top Cover.
6.) Remove the Black and White printer.

Follow these links if you need more information:

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.

• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
• 8-11-6 "Digital Graphic Printer replacement" on page 8-279.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 281

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-7-4 Printer Tray removal

1.) Raise the console height to the highest level.
2.) Unlatch the two latches (1) that clamp the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP (2).
3.) Tilt the Main Console Front Cover forward just until the lower Column Cover stop tabs (3) clear.
4.) Lift the Column Cover Assembly.
5.) Push the Printer Tray toward the Card Cage approximately 1/2 inch to free the three tabs (4) from
the BEP.

Figure 8-70 Printer Tray

6.) Remove the Printer Tray from the BEP.

8-11-7-5 Printer Tray installation

1.) Position the Printer Tray at the top of the BEP.
Be sure the lip, on the underside of the bracket, hooks on the edge of the card rack, and the three
tabs insert into the slots on the top of the BEP frame. The lip “clamps” the card rack and BEP
together. This is a tight fit.

2.) Lower the lower Column Cover.

3.) Position the Main Console Front Cover to engage the lower Column Cover stop tabs.
4.) Latch the two latches that clamp the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP.
5.) Slide the Black and White printer into the Printer Tray and connect the cables to the back of the
printer.
6.) Tighten the Printer Tray wing nut to secure the printer.
7.) Connect the printer cables.
8.) Replace the covers.
9.) Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-11-9-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-11-9-4 - Verification and 8-11-9-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-297.

8 - 282 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-7-6 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-11-7-7 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-11-7-8 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-176 Printer Tray replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 283

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-8 Printer Bracket replacement

Table 8-177 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-178 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is
turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Top Cover.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.

8 - 284 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-8-1 Printer Bracket removal

Table 8-179 Printer Bracket removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Disconnect the Power and USB Cables
from the Printer.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the

Bracket and Printer to the Printer Mount.

3. Remove the Top Cover.

4. Remove the four screws that secure the
Printer to the Printer Bracket.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 285

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-179 Printer Bracket removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Cut the Cable Tie Mount.

Remove the two T30 torx screws the

secure the Bracket - Printer Mount to the
Z-Mech

8 - 286 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-8-2 Printer Bracket installation

Table 8-180 Printer Bracket installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Cut the tie wrap that secures the Drive Gear Assembly power cable to the top of the Targa.
Remove the Cable Tie Mount from the top of the Targa Frame.
2. Remove the two T30 torx screws that
secure the Z-Mechanism to the Targa.

3. Route the Printer Cables as shown. Route

the Power Cable as shown and the USB
Cable on top of the Targa, along the inside
edge of the Rear Handle. Continue to route
the USB Cable inside the Targa to J26 on
the BEP.

4. Reinstall the Rear, but DO NOT install the screws.

MAKE SURE the Printer USB and Power Cables DO NOT get pinched.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 287

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-180 Printer Bracket installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Carefully position the Bracket - Printer
Mount onto the Z-Mech and begin to
reinstall one of the T30 torx screws with
one of the M6 External Toothed Lock
Washer, provided in the Kit.

6. Reinstall the second T30 torx screw and

the second M6 External Toothed Lock
Washer, provided in the Kit. Torque 4.3 Nm
(3.2 lbf-ft {38 lbf-in}).
Remove the liner from the Cable Tie Mount,
position as shown and press, firmly into
place as shown.
Secure the Drive Gear Assembly power
cable to the Cable Tie Mount. Trim the
excess Cable Tie.

7. Reinstall the Top Cover, but DO NOT install Cables positioned correctly.
the screws.
MAKE SURE the Printer USB and Power
Cables are routed properly (as shown) and
DO NOT get pinched.

8 - 288 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-180 Printer Bracket installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

8. Position the Bracket - Printer to the Printer
as shown.

Attach the Bracket to the Printer using the

four M3-0.5, X6mm long screws and four
M3 internal tooth lock washers, provided in
the kit. Torque 0.55 Nm
(0.4 lbf-ft {4.9 lbf-in}).

9. Insert the Bracket and Printer onto

Bracket - Printer Mount and secure with the
two M5-0.8, X10mm long screws and two
M5 internal tooth lock washers, provided in
the kit. Torque 3 Nm (2.2 lbf-ft {26.5 lbf-in}).

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 289

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-180 Printer Bracket installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

10. Connect the Power and USB Cables to the
Printer.

11. Any slack on the cables can be pushed in Cables positioned correctly.
at this point.
Secure the Rear and Top Cover. MAKE
SURE the Cables DO NOT get pinched.

12. Reinstall Side Covers.

8 - 290 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-8-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-11-8-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-11-8-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-181 Printer Tray replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-5 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 291

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-9 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement

Table 8-182 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
15 minutes

Table 8-183 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE
POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED
BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF BEFORE
DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK CABLES. THE CAPACITOR PACK CAN
STORE UP TO 112 VOLTS.
IF THE SYSTEM IS GOING TO BE SERVICED, KEEP THE FOLLOWING
INFORMATION AND PRECAUTIONS IN MIND:
CHARGE INDICATORS:
• THE CAPACITOR MODULE HAS LEDS TO INDICATE IF THE CAPACITORS ARE
CHARGED OR NOT.
• ONLY REMOVE THE CABLES WHEN LEDS ARE OFF.
DISCHARGE TIMES:
• 4.7 SECONDS AFTER NORMAL SHUTDOWN.
• IF CABLES ARE PULLED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS ON, IT TAKES TYPICALLY 40
SECONDS TO REACH 60 VOLTS AND 5 MINUTES TO FULLY DISCHARGE (0 VOLTS).
DO NOT PLUG OR UNPLUG CABLES WHEN THE POWER IS ON.ONLY PLUG OR
UNPLUG CABLES WHEN THE POWER IS OFF.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9
WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG

LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3 WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE
EPS IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and BEP may be energized even
if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

8 - 292 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-183 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
3. Allow the Capacitor Pack to discharge. LEDs OFF.
4. Remove the Left Side cover, the Top Cover and WLAN Antennas, if present.
5. Remove the Capacitor Pack.

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30.
• 8-5-4 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-38.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 293

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-9-1 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack removal

NOTE: The Shear Wave Capacitor Pack is removed and attaches to the BEP in the same manner as
the Printer Tray.

Table 8-184 Capacitor Pack removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Raise the console height to the highest level.
2. If the LOGIQ E9 has WLAN, remove the
Antennas on the top of the BEP.

3. Disconnect the power cable from the Main

Power Supply to the Capacitor Pack BCM1
and BCM2.

8 - 294 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-184 Capacitor Pack removal

Steps Corresponding Graphic

4. Unlatch the two latches (1) that clamp the
Capacitor Pack to the top of the BEP (2).

Tilt the Main Console Front Cover forward

just until the lower Column Cover stop tabs
(3) clear and slide the Shear Wave Console
Cover Assembly (4) out.

Lift the Column Cover Assembly.

Push the Capacitor Pack toward the Card

Cage approximately 1/2 inch to free the
Pack the BEP.

Remove the Capacitor Pack.

8-11-9-2 Capacitor Pack installation

Table 8-185 Capacitor Pack Installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Place the Capacitor Pack on top of the
BEP.
Reconnect the power cable from the Main
Power Supply to the Pack BCM1 and
BCM2. Power Cable is labeled.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 295

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-185 Capacitor Pack Installation

Steps Corresponding Graphic

2. Position the Pack at the top of the BEP.
Be sure the lip, on the underside of the
Pack, hooks on the edge of the Card Rack,
and the three tabs insert into the slots on
the top of the BEP frame. The lip “clamps”
the Card Rack and BEP (2) together. This
is a tight fit.
Lower the lower Column Cover.
Slide the Shear Wave Console Cover
Assembly (4) into the console.
Position the Main Console Front Cover to
engage the lower Column Cover stop tabs
(3).
Latch the two latches (1) that clamp the
Pack to the top of the BEP.

3. Reinstall the Antennas on the top of the

BEP, if the Attunes were removed.

4. Replace the covers.

5. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-11-9-3 - Calibration and adjustments,
8-11-9-4 - Verification and 8-11-9-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-297.

8 - 296 Section 8-11 - Peripherals replacement

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-9-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-11-9-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

8-11-9-5 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

Table 8-186 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
SWAVE (Shear Wave “Shear Elasto“) required checks and is ready for use.
Section 4-7
Functional Check
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 297

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-12
V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
The purpose of this section is to describe assembly or replacement of the Roll Stand and/or the V Nav
On-board Stand.

NOTE: These instructions can be used to service an existing LOGIQ E9 that has a V Nav Roll Stand
or an On-Board V Nav Stand, or to install these options.

NOTE: Be sure the wheels on the Roll Stand are not locked and move the Roll Stand slowly, with
caution to avoid tip over. DO NOT move with the arm extended.

NOTE: The Roll Stand basket is designed to hold the transmitter, which weighs about five pounds
(2.27 kg). DO NOT overload the basket.

Table 8-187 Manpower / Time and Tools

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
30 minutes

Table 8-188 Preparations and Preparation Links

Preparations - you must perform the following steps

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
LOCKOUT

Signed Date

1. Power down the LOGIQ E9.

2. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower position.
3. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4. Remove any Tray Assembly, Probe Holder or Gel Warmer from the right side of the console. Any of these features
MUST BE MOVED to the left side of the console before this option is installed. None of these features can be installed
on the right side of the console with this option.
5. Remove the Right Side Cover

Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-3 "Power shut down" on page 4-7
• 8-5-2 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-30

8 - 298 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-1 Parts Reference - Roll Stand

Figure 8-71 Volume Navigation Roll Stand Installation Kit - See: Table 8-189 "Volume Navigation Roll Stand
Installation Kit - Parts Reference" on page 8-300 for item description

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 299

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-1 Parts Reference - Roll Stand (cont’d)

The following parts and hardware are included with this installation kit (hardware not shown):

Table 8-189 Volume Navigation Roll Stand Installation Kit - Parts Reference

Item # Description Quantity

1 Roll Stand Post, 60 inches 1
2 Roll Stand Base with 21-lb. Counterweight 1
3 5/16-18 x 1 inch Hex Head Cap Screw (HHCS) 1
4 5/16 Flat Washer 1
5 5/16 Split Lock Washer 1
6 GE Volume Navigation Arm 1
7 Cord Loop Hook 1
8 Utility Basket 1
9 Handle 1
10 Track Cover, 12 inches 3
11 Cover Plate 1
not shown 1/4-20 x 3/8 inch Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) 4
not shown 1/2 inch Socket Wrench 1
not shown 3/16 inch Hex Wrench 1
not shown 3/32 inch Hex Wrench 1
not shown 1/8 inch Hex Wrench 1

8 - 300 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand

Use these instructions to assembled or replace the Roll Stand.

1.) Insert the post in the base. The locator pin ensures correct alignment.

Figure 8-72 Post into Base - (1) 5/16 fLAT Washer, (2) 5/16 Lock Washer,
(3) 5/16-18 x 1 inch Screw - Roll Stand only

1
2
3

2.) Using the 1/2 inch socket wrench provided, fasten the post to the base with the hardware shown.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 301

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand (cont’d)

3.) Slide the cord loop hook, basket and handle into the rear channel in the order shown.

Figure 8-73 Post Assembly

4.) Using the hex wrenches provided, tighten all of the set screws in each accessory to secure the po-
sition in the track.
a.) Tighten the top four set screws with the 3/32 inch hex wrench.
b.) Tighten the center four set screws with the 1/8 inch hex wrench.
c.) Tighten the bottom two set screws with 3/32 inch hex wrench.

8 - 302 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand (cont’d)

5.) Loosen the knob slightly, guide the arm into the channel and move it to the mounting position.

Figure 8-74 Loosening Knob

NOTE: Make sure the Transformer Support Platform (larger view) in Figure 8-74 "Loosening Knob" on
page 8-303 is installed in the UP position.

NOTE: The channel fits between the front and rear slide plates.

Figure 8-75 Channel Location

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 303

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand (cont’d)

6.) Tighten the knob to lock the arm into position.
7.) Mount the transmitter (1) on the arm and route the cable through the cable clips (2) on the top side
of the arm.

Figure 8-76 Cable Clips - Roll Stand only

8.) While supporting the arm (loaded with the transmitter), slowly loosen the knob which allows the arm
to gradually move down the channel.

NOTE: The arm must move down the channel very slowly when the knob is loosened, and it must move
easily upward when the lifting arm is in the channel. If the arm free-falls or will not move, follow
the adjustment procedure, see:
8-12-6 "Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism" on page 8-314.

8 - 304 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand (cont’d)

9.) Using the 3/16 inch hex wrench provided, fasten the cover plate to the top of the post with four (4)
1/4-20 x 3/8 inch SHCS as shown.

Figure 8-77 Cover Plate Installation

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 305

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand (cont’d)

10.)Snap the three Rear Track Covers into place in locations shown.

Figure 8-78 Rear Track Covers Installation

8 - 306 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-3 Parts Reference - On-board V Nav Stand

Use these instructions to assembled or replace the Roll Stand.
Figure 8-79 LOGIQ E9 On-Board V Nav Stand Option - Parts Reference

1
2

A B

Table 8-190 On-Board V Nav Stand Installation Kit description

Item # Description Qty

V Nav Column, Cord Hook, Channel Cover and Column Mounting

1 Hardware - for Mounting Hardware details, see: 1
Figure 8-80 "V Nav Column Mounting Hardware" on page 8-308
2 V Nav Arm - Transformer Support 1

3 Right Side Cover without GE Logo 1

4 Rear Cover Reaming Tool 1

5443897-100 LOGIQ E9 Ver R4 Option Installation Instructions - V NAV On-

5 1
Board Stand
A GE Logo - Sapphire 1

B GE Logo - Light Grey 1

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 307

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-3 Parts Reference - On-board V Nav Stand (cont’d)

The following parts and hardware are included with this installation kit:
Figure 8-80 V Nav Column Mounting Hardware

3
2

1
14

8a
7a 15
6

8b 5
7b

7c

2
3

Table 8-191 V Nav Column Mounting Hardware description (only hardware is listed)

Item # Description Qty

Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) for Cover Plate - top and bottom
3 8
NOTE: These screws require a 3/16 inch Allen wrench
4 V Nav Column to LOGIQ E9 Mounting Plate 1

5 Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) to mount V Nav Column to Mounting Plate 6

6 Screws to mount the Mounting Plate 3

V Nav Column Stand-off Fastener to Frame - long/top, medium/center and short/ 1 each
7a-7c
bottom (3 total)

8a Nylon Lock Nut (M6) - V Nav Column Stand-off Fastener to Frame - top and bottom 2

8b Nylon Lock Nut (M8) - V Nav Column Stand-off Fastener to Frame - center 1

NOTE: Item numbers match items as listed in

Table 8-192 "Reference for assembling Option to LOGIQ E9" on page 8-309. and throughout
this document.

8 - 308 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-4 On-Board V Nav Stand Option Contents, location and placement of parts
Table 8-192 Reference for assembling Option to LOGIQ E9

Option Contents Corresponding Graphic

1. V Nav Arm Stand Post Illustration shown without the rear cover
2. Cover Plate
3. Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) - (x4) for
Cover Plate
4. V Nav Arm Stand to LOGIQ E9 Mounting Plate
5. Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) - (x6) to
mount Stand Post to Mounting Plate
6. Screws - (x3) to mount the Mounting Plate
7a. V NAV Stand Post Stand-off Fastener to
Targa - long/top - (x1)
7b. V NAV Stand Post Stand-off Fastener to
Targa - medium/center - (x1)
2 3
7c. V NAV Stand Post Stand-off Fastener to
Targa - short/bottom - (x1)
8. LOGIQ E9 Targa (not part of the kit) 13
9. access hole to Item 5 (in stand post) 1
10. Cover Plate groove (in stand post) - Cover
Plate not shown
11. Tension/Sliding Mechanism (in stand) 4
5
8a
NOTE: Before Item 7b can be installed, the
Grounding Plug installed MUST BE removed.
6 9
7a
8b
12

11 7b
7c 8a

10

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 309

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-5 Assembling or replacing the On-Board V Nav Stand

For reference of assembly, parts location and parts identification, see:
Table 8-192 "Reference for assembling Option to LOGIQ E9" on page 8-309.

Table 8-193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove Grounding Plug (center) and the
Rear Cover mounting screws.

2. Install the V NAV Stand Post Stand-off

Fasteners (7a-7c) to Targa, short in the
bottom and long in the top. Tighten
securely.

NOTE: The Rear Cover mounting flange

should not get pinched by the Stand-off
Fasteners. Two of the Stand-off Fasteners
will fit in the holes in the cover and hold the
cover in place after they are installed.

8 - 310 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9

Steps Corresponding Graphic

3. Attach Mounting Plate (4) to Stand-off
Fasteners with the three screws (6).
Tighten securely.

4. NOTE: The bottom cover plate should be V Nav Arm Stand Mounting Plate channel
installed first, see Step 8.

The Stand Post Mounting Plate seats in a

cut out channel, at the base off the post.

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 311

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9

Steps Corresponding Graphic

5. Position the Arm Stand Post (1) onto the
Stand Mounting Plate (4). Install two of the
six screws (5), at the top first. DO NOT
tighten completely. Install the remaining
screws loosely.

Tighten in a sequence. Top front, bottom

rear and center. Then the remaining, in a
sequence. Torque: 9.8 Nm
(7.2 lbf-ft {86.7 lbf-in}).

6. Insert the Track Cover into the Track Cover

groove and slide it the lowest position to
cover the Stand mounting access holes.

8 - 312 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9

Steps Corresponding Graphic

7. Loosen the knob slightly, guide the arm into Loosening Knob
the channel and move it to the mounting
position.

NOTE: Make sure the Transformer Support

Platform is up, as shown. The channel fits
between the front and rear slide plates.

Tighten the knob to lock the arm into

position.

Channel Location

8. Fasten the Cover Plate (2) to the top of the

post (1) with the four SHCS (3) as shown.
Repeat step for the bottom Cover Plate, if
not previously installed.
} 3
2

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 313

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8-193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9

Steps Corresponding Graphic

9. Mount the transmitter and tighten the
transmitter mounting screws (A) on the arm
and route the cable through the cable
management channels (B), in the under-
side of the arms. The arm is showed in the
stowed position.

While supporting the arm (loaded with the

transmitter), slowly loosen the knob which
allows the arm to gradually move down the
channel.

NOTE: The arm must move down the

channel very slowly when the knob is
loosened, and it must move easily upward
when lifting. If the arm free-falls or will not
move, follow the adjustment procedure,
see: 8-12-6 "Adjusting Tension on Sliding
Mechanism" on page 8-314.

8-12-6 Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism

Table 8-194 Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism

Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Remove the plastic bolt cap from the lower Plastic Bolt Cap for tension nut and Unlocking
tension nut. Clamping Knob

The clamping knob must be unlocked while

making this adjustment. Using the 1/2 inch
socket wrench, loosen or tighten the
tension nut for the desired tension.

2. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-12-6-1 - Calibration and adjustments,

8-12-6-2 - Verification and 8-12-6-3 "Functional Checks" on page 8-315.

8 - 314 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-6-1 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.

8-12-6-2 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier

2.) Power up the LOGIQ E9 to verify that it operates as intended.

8-12-6-3 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the LOGIQ E9 is operational before returning the
LOGIQ E9 to the customer.

If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.

NOTE: Be sure to inform the customer that the On-Board V Nav Stand SHOULD NOT be used to push
the LOGIQ E9.

Table 8-195 Side Covers replacement Functional Checks

See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Service Manual, Direction
5535208-100, Rev. 2. Equipment passed all
4-3-18 Mechanical Function Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 315

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-7 Routine Maintenance

1.) Periodically inspect all fasteners associated with the mounting system. Tighten them as necessary
for optimal operation and safety.

NOTE: DO NOT overtighten any fasteners.

8-12-8 Cleaning the Mounting Assembly

1.) The mounting assembly may be cleaned with most mild, non-abrasive solutions commonly used in
the hospital environment (e.g., diluted bleach, ammonia, or alcohol solutions).
2.) The surface finish will be damaged permanently by strong chemicals and solvents such as acetone
and trichloroethylene.
3.) Do not use steel wool or other abrasive material to clean the mounting assembly.
4.) The damage caused by the use of unapproved substances or processes will not be covered by
warranty. It is recommended to testing any cleaning solution on a small area of the mounting
assembly, that is not visible, to verify compatibility.
5.) Never submerge the roll stand nor allow liquids to enter the mounting assemblies. Wipe any
cleaning agents off of the mounting assembly immediately, using a water-dampened cloth. Dry all
mounting assemblies thoroughly after cleaning.

CAUTION THE COMPANY MAKES NO CLAIMS REGARDING THE EFFICACY OF THE LISTED CHEMICALS
OR PROCESSES AS A MEANS FOR CONTROLLING INFECTION. CONSULT YOUR HOSPITAL’S
INFECTION CONTROL OFFICER OR EPIDEMIOLOGIST. TO CLEAN OR STERILIZE MOUNTED
INSTRUMENTS OR ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT, REFER TO THE SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS
DELIVERED WITH THOSE PRODUCTS.

8 - 316 Section 8-12 - V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement
GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 9
Renewal Parts

Section 9-1
Overview
9-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter gives you an overview of the available Spare Parts for LOGIQ E9. In addition, upgrade kits
and probes that may be used on LOGIQ E9, is listed

Section 9-2
Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front
Figure 9-1 illustrates what is the Left Side (1), Rear / Back (2), Right Side (3), and Front (4) of the
system.

Figure 9-1 Definition of Left, Right, Front and Back of LOGIQ E9

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-1

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-3
List of Abbreviations

Table 9-1 List of Abbreviations

ABBREVIATIONS DESCRIPTION
3D THREE DIMENSIONAL (See: RT3D and 4D)

4D FOUR DIMENSIONAL IS THE SAME AS THREE DIMENSIONAL + REALTIME

ACP AC CONTROLLER (AC POWER)

ACT AC TRANSFORMER

ASSY ASSEMBLY

BEP BACK END PROCESSOR

CTRL CONTROL

EXT. EXTERNAL

FRU Y REPLACEMENT PART

FRU N NON STOCK PART

I/O INPUT/OUTPUT

INT INTERNAL

LCD LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

OP OPERATOR PANEL

PC PERSONAL COMPUTER (Back End Processor)

PS POWER SUPPLY

PWA PRINTED WIRE ASSEMBLY

QTY QUANTITY USED PER SCANNER

RT3D REAL TIME THREE DIMENSIONAL (Same as 4D)

RX RECEIVER

SWAVE SHEAR WAVE ELASTOGRAPHY

TX TRANSMITTER

XFRMR TRANSFORMER

CW CONTINOUS DOPPLER

ECG ELECTRO CARDIO GRAPHY

9-2 Section 9-3 - List of Abbreviations

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-4
Parts list groups
Table 9-2 Parts List Groups

TABLE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NUMBER

LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility - Upgrade

Table 9-3 9-4
Options

Table 9-4 LOGIQ E9 Software 9-5

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 (not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9- 9-9
9)

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 9-35

Table 9-15 XYZ Mechanism parts 9-38

Table 9-17 Main Console parts 9-42

Table 9-18 Identifying Base Casting for proper Bottom Air Filter Assembly 9-44

Table 9-19 Subwoofer Details 9-45

Table 9-20 Casters (Wheels) parts 9-46

Table 9-21 Card Rack parts 9-48

Table 9-27 Back End Processor parts for R3.x and earlier 9-64

Table 9-28 Back End Processor parts for R4.x and later 9-68

Table 9-30 Power Supply parts 9-72

Table 9-31 Printer 9-77

Table 9-32 Digital Video Disc (DVD) parts 9-79

Table 9-36 Mains Power Cables 9-82

Table 9-37 Top Console cables 9-86

Table 9-38 XYZ Motor/Brake Control cables 9-87

Table 9-39 Main Power Supply Cables 9-89

Table 9-40 Card Rack Cables 9-91

Table 9-41 Back End Processor (BEP) Internal Cables BEP5.x (R3.x and earlier) 9-96

Table 9-42 Back End Processor (BEP) Internal Cables BEP6.x (R4.x and later) 9-97

Table 9-43 Back End Processor (BEP) External Cables 9-100

Table 9-45 Peripherals Cables 9-100

Table 9-46 Supported Probes (not including Japan Probes) 9-102

Table 9-47 Options 9-106

Table 9-49 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment 9-111

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-3

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-5
LOGIQ E9 Models and hardware/software compatibility

Table 9-3 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility -

Upgrade Options

CONSOLE
MODEL
NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION
Phase I BT2010 BT2011 BT2013 BT2014
4 Rev. 5 Rev.
1.0.3 1.0.4 1.0.5 1.0.6 2.0.3 2.0.4 2.0.5 3.1.2 3.1.3
x.x x.x
LOGIQ E9,
5205000 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
00-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-2 Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-3 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-4 N N N N Y Y Y U U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-5 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-6 N N N N N N N Y Y U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-7 N N N N N N N N N Y U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-8 N N N N N N N N N N Y
100-240 VAC

LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations Key

LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations Key

Y Original
U Upgrade available
N Not supported

Front End Processor - see: 9-12-2 "Front End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-59

Back End Processor - see: 9-13-1 "Back End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-71

9-4 Section 9-5 - LOGIQ E9 Models and hardware/software compatibility

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-6
Software
Table 9-4 LOGIQ E9 Software 1 of 2

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

1. LOGIQ E9 Application
5193239-4
Software, R1.0.3

2. LOGIQ E9 Application
5193239-5
Software, R1.0.4

3. LOGIQ E9 Application See: Table 9-5 "R1.0.x Software Matrix" on page 9-7 1 Y
5193239-6
Software, R1.0.5

4. LOGIQ E9 Application
5193239-8
Software, R1.0.6

5. LOGIQ E9 System Software 5135124-20

6. LOGIQ E9
5193239-12
Application Software, R2.0.3

7. LOGIQ E9
5193239-13
Application Software, R2.0.4
See: Table 9-6 "R2.0.xSoftware Matrix" on page 9-7 1 Y
8. LOGIQ E9
5193239-16
Application Software, R2.0.5

9. LOGIQ E9 System Software 5135124-30

10. For BEP with Extended Power Shutdown

LOGIQ E9 BIOS Blaster CD 5212471 motherboard (5145000-2) reset 1 Y
replaced by 5212471-1

11. Compatible with all configurations with

LOGIQ E9 BIOS Blaster CD 5212471-1 1 Y
BEP P/N 5145000-x

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-5

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-4 LOGIQ E9 Software 2 of 2 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

12. 5193239-18
LOGIQ E9
Obsoleted by
Application Software, R3.1.0
FMI 70209

13. 5193239-21
LOGIQ E9
Obsoleted by
Application Software, R3.1.1 See: Table 9-7 "R3.x Software Matrix" on page 9-8
FMI 70209

14. LOGIQ E9
5193239-22
Application Software, R3.1.2

15. LOGIQ E9
5390139
Base Image Load

16. LOGIQ E9
5454367
Application Software, R4, Rev. 1.0
1 Y
17. LOGIQ E9
5454367-2
Application Software, R4, Rev. 1.1

18. LOGIQ E9
5454367-3
Application Software, R4, Rev. 1.2

19. LOGIQ E9
5454367-4 See: Table 9-8 "R4.x Software Matrix" on page 9-8
Application Software, R4, Rev. 2.0

20. LOGIQ E9
5454367-5
Application Software, R4, Rev. 2.1

21. LOGIQ E9 5454367-6

Application Software, R4, Rev. 3.0 5454367-7

22. LOGIQ E9
5437603
Base Image Load, BEP6.1

23. Ichiro R4 BEP 6.1 BIOS 5439364 Compatible with BEP6 5380000-1 1 Y

24. LOGIQ E9
5536034
Application Software, R5.x
See: Table 9-9 "R5.x Software Matrix" on page 9-8 1 Y
25. LOGIQ E9
5490413
Base Image Load, BEP6.6

9-6 Section 9-6 - Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-6 Software (cont’d)

Table 9-5 R1.0.x Software Matrix

BEP 5145000-2

Application Base Load

Breakthrough Application Software Version Part Number Part Number
R 1.0.3
5193239-4
(Initial Production Release)

R 1.0.4
(Full Production release. Included in 5193239-5
FMI 70201 for Installed Base)
LOGIQ E9
R 1.0.5 5135124-20
(Phase I) 5193239-6
(Support for DVR option)

R 1.0.6
(Minor improvement for usability and
5193239-8
Cost reduction DRX 3.1 P/N 5301040-4 and
Backplane P/N GA200685 boards support)

Table 9-6 R2.0.xSoftware Matrix

BEP 5145000-2

Application Base Load

Breakthrough Application Software Version Part Number Part Number
R2.0.3
(Initial Production Release, 5193239-12
also included in FMI 70205)

R 2.0.4
(Full Production Release,
LOGIQ E9 Support the relocation of the Option Dongle and
5135124-30
(BT10) connection of the USB Cable from the BEP to the XYZ 5193239-13
Controller. Relocation of the Option Dongle and
connection of the USB Cable from the BEP to the XYZ
Controller, also included in FMI 70206 with R 2.0.4.)

R 2.0.5
5193239-16
(V Nav Needle Tracker Upgrade)

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-7

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-6 Software (cont’d)

Table 9-7 R3.x Software Matrix

BEP 5145000-2
CONSOLE APPLICATION BEP 5145000-3
MODEL APPLICATION SOFTWARE SOFTWARE BASE LOAD
NUMBER VERSION PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

5205000 (GFI) R3.1.2 5193239-22

5205000-2 (GFI)
5205000-3 (GFI) 5390139
5205000-4 (GFI) R3.1.3 5193239-23
5205000-5 (MRX)
5205000-6 (MRX)

Table 9-8 R4.x Software Matrix

CONSOLE APPLICATION R4 BEP

MODEL APPLICATION SOFTWARE SOFTWARE BASE LOAD
NUMBER VERSION PART NUMBER PART NUMBER
Version 4, Rev. 1.0* 5454367

Version R4, Rev. 1.1 5454367-2

Version R4, Rev. 1.2 5454367-3

5205000-7 Version R4, Rev. 2.0 5454367-4 5437603

Version R4, Rev. 2.1 5454367-5

5454367-6
Version R4, Rev. 3.0
5454367-7

NOTE: For R4 and later the Application Version changes nomenclature, due to new Regulatory
Requirements. For example: Software Version R4.1.0, now will read Version 4 Rev. 1.0.

Table 9-9 R5.x Software Matrix

CONSOLE APPLICATION R5 BEP

MODEL APPLICATION SOFTWARE SOFTWARE BASE LOAD
NUMBER VERSION PART NUMBER PART NUMBER

5205000-8 Version 5, Rev. 1.0 5536034 5490413

9-8 Section 9-6 - Software

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-7
Covers and Bumpers

Figure 9-2 Covers - LOGIQ E9

13a
5a
12a
6a

4a
7a
3a
8a
14a
2a
9a

11a
10a
1a

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 1 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

1a

Bumper Rear GA307008-2 1 Y

2a

Filter Cover GA307515-2 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-9

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 2 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

3a 5168069
Cover Left Assembly Replaced by 5337050 1 Y
OBSOLETE

Cover Left Assembly

5337050 1 Y
with Logo

Cover Left Assembly

5337050-2 1 Y
with Sapphire Logo

4a Top Cover

Top Cover GA307023 1 Y

5a

Handle Rear GA307029-2 1 Y

9 - 10 Section 9-7 - Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 3 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

6a

Cover, Handle Right Top 5178793 1 Y

Cover, Handle Right Lower 5178474 1 Y

7a

Cover, Handle Left Top 5178193 1 Y

Cover, Handle Left Lower 5178242 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 11

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 4 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

8a 5168550 Right Side Cover Assembly

Cover Right Assembly 1 Y
OBSOLETE Replaced by 5337049

Right Side Cover Assembly

Cover Right Assembly

5337049 1 Y
with Logo

Cover Right Assembly

with Slots On-board V Nav Stand 5436706 1 Y
(Light Grey and Sapphire GE Logo)

Cover Right Assembly

5337049-2 1 Y
with Sapphire Logo

Right Side Cover Assy

5168191-2 1 Y
Removable Fan Tray

9 - 12 Section 9-7 - Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 5 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

9a

Cover Front GA307022 1 Y

Plate Cover, Plate Connectors

GA307056 Replaced by GA307056-10 1 Y
with Guide

Replaces by GA307056

Cover Plate, Connectors GA307056-10 1 Y

This label is required when replacing Cover

Plate Connectors.
Label - Probe Connectors LOGIQ E9 5328860 1 Y

10a

Footrest Bumper 5311121 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 13

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 6 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

11a Back Cover does not include the Back

Cover Label. Contact the Online Center to
request specific label.

Rear Cover Assembly GA200232 1 Y

12a

Cable Hook GA307047 2 Y

13a

Bumper Boss Z Outer GA307188 1 Y

14a

Door, I/O Panel GA307046 1 Y

9 - 14 Section 9-7 - Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 7 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

Items
not
labeled Fan Tray Cover 5480408 1 Y

Shear Wave Console Cover

5497692 1 Y
Assembly - Option

Column Cover Assembly GA200359 1 Y

Cover, Main Cable GA307192 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 15

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-10 Covers - LOGIQ E9 8 of 8 (not all covers or items listed are
identified in Figure 9-2 on page 9-9)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

Items
not
labeled

Bulkhead Cover GA307061 1 Y

Black and White Printer Filler Storage 5309088 1 Y

Drive Bay Storage Drawer 5267580-2 Replaced by 5267580-3 1 Y

Drive Bay Storage Drawer 5267580-3 1 Y

15. 1. Bracket - Printer Mount

2. Bracket - Printer
3. Adhesive Mount - Cable Tie
(plus mounting hardware, not shown)

LOGIQ E9 Printer Bracket Kit 5537450 1 2 1 Y

9 - 16 Section 9-7 - Covers and Bumpers

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-8
Top Console parts
NOTE: Sub-FRUs for the Operator Panel have been created to provide additional sub-assemblies in
the event the entire Operator Panel does not require to be replaced. Refer to the Operator Panel
FRUS and for sub-FRU servicing options, see: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible
Configurations" on page 9-36.

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 1 of 18

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

1.

19” LCD Monitor

5167953 1 Y
5205000-6 and earlier consoles

2.

LCD Arm with Cable

5183750 1 Y
5205000-6 and earlier consoles

3.

19” LCD Monitor V2

5205000-7 and later consoles 5392293-21 1 Y
LOGIQ E9 R4 or Upgraded

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 17

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 2 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

4.

LCD Arm with Cable

5415182-20 1 Y
LOGIQ E9 R4 and later consoles

5. Used on 5415182-20 Arm

1. LCD Arm Adapter - LOGIQ E9,
2. LCD Arm Neck Base Plate
3. Ground Lead - LOGIQ E9 LCD Arm Adapter
Hex Socket Head Cap Screw, M5-0.8, X50mm Long
External Toothed Lock Washer
Pan Head Machine Screw M4-0.7 X6mm Long
(hardware not shown)

LOGIQ E9 LCD Arm

5455428 1 Y
Adapter Spare Kit

9 - 18 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 3 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

6. Contains:
1. knob for lock (x1), 2. second Arm Cap (x4).
3. third Arm Cap (x1), 4. first Arm Cover (x1)
5. second Arm Cover (x1), 6. second Axis Cover (x1)
7. third Arm Cover (x1)

1 3
2

6
LCD Arm Plastic Covers
5408089 1 Y
5205000-7 consoles 4

7.

Ultrasound Global LCD Arm -

LOGIQ E9 which has Adapter 5957000-110 5423549....
1 Y
5205000-8 and later consoles

8. Contains:
1. Pan Arm Down Cover, 2. Lift Arm Cover - Right,
3. Lift Arm Cover - Left, 4. Joint Cover
5. Extension Arm Cover, 6. Rotation Limit Screw

3 4
LCD Arm Plastic Covers
5957000-1
1 1 Y
5205000-8 and later consoles

2
6
5

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 19

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 4 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

9.

LCD Mount Lock Assembly GA200302 1 Y

10. Replaced by 5207000-33

GA200439
Frame with LCD and TouchScreen See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible 1 Y
OBSOLETE
Configurations" on page 9-36

11. Replaces GA200439.

See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible
Configurations" on page 9-36

Frame with LCD and TouchScreen 5207000-39 1 y

12. Front Rear

5207000-65
See: Table 9-13
Frame with LED Backlight LCD and "Operator Panel
1 y
Touchscreen - Spare Part Compatible
Configurations" on
page 9-36

13. Front Rear

5497858-20
See: Table 9-13
R5 LOGIQ E9 Upper Operator Panel "Operator Panel
1 Y
Frame and LCD Assembly Compatible
Configurations" on
page 9-36

14. 5207000-3
Operator Panel Assembly, Upper Replaced by 5207000-33 1 Y
OBSOLETE

9 - 20 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 5 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

15. Replaced by 5207000-33

5207000-13
Operator Panel Assembly, Upper Included GA200717 Aux. USB Connector board and 1 Y
OBSOLETE
GA200718 Main Controller board.

16. Replaced by 5207000-33

5207000-23 replaced 5207000-3, 5207000-12 and
5207000-23 5207000-17.
Operator Panel Assembly, Upper 1 Y
OBSOLETE Included GA200717 Aux. USB Connector board and
GA200718 Main Controller board. Capacitors
changed to address false USB overcurrent trip.

17. Replaced by 5207000-43

Operator Panel Assembly, Upper 5207000-33 See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible 1 Y
Configurations" on page 9-36.

18. Replaced by 5207000-53

Operator Panel Assembly, Upper 5207000-43 See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible 1 Y
Configurations" on page 9-36.

19. Replaces GA200442 on 5207000-33 Op Panel -

Upper or later
See: Table 9-14 "Upper Op Panel FRUs Compatible
Configurations" on page 9-37
High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable
5207000-6 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel)

20. Replaces 5207000-43

See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible
Configurations" on page 9-36.

LOGIQ E9 OP Panel Upper - SMC

5207000-53 1 Y
HUB and ERG Inverter

21. See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible

Configurations" on page 9-36.

LOGIQ E9 R5 Upper Operator Panel 5209000-1 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 21

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 6 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

22. See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible

Ichiro OP Panel Upper - LED Backlight 5207000-63 1 Y
Configurations" on page 9-36.

23. Replaced by 5207000-6

See: Table 9-14 "Upper Op Panel FRUs Compatible
Configurations" on page 9-37

HV Inverter with Cable - ERG version

GA200442 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel)

24.
5207000-64
See: Table 9-14
LED Backlight Driver with Cables - "Upper Op Panel
1 Y
Spare Part FRUs Compatible
Configurations" on
page 9-37

25.

Upper Bezel 5207000-15 1 Y

26.

USB Cover - Operator Panel 5207000-54 1 Y

27.

TGC Slide Pots Dust Gasket 5207000-55 1 Y

28. USB Connector Board To become obsolete. If unavailable,

GA200441 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel) order GA200717

9 - 22 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 7 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

29. See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible

Configurations" on page 9-36.

USB Connector Board

5207000-41 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel)

30. Use with GA200717 for connection improvement.

GA200717 can be used with GA200448,
but will not improve connection.

USB Connector Board

with longer pins GA200717 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel)

31.

Main Ctrl. Board w. USB

Video Bd. and Cable GA200448 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel)

32.

R5 LE9 Upper Operator Panel

5497858-30 1 Y
Customer USB Port Cable Assembly

33. Main Ctrl. Board w. USB Use only with USB Connector Board GA200717.
Video Bd. and Cable GA200718 (GA200441 will not work) 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel) Replaced by 5207000-30

34. Main Ctrl. Board w. USB

5207000-30 Has USB over current fix.
Video Bd. and Cable 1 Y
OBSOLETE (Replaces GA200718)
(Upper Operator Panel)

35. Main Ctrl. Board with USB

Video
5207000-40 1 Y
Board and Cable Replaces 5207000-30
(Upper Operator Panel)
See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible
36. Main Ctrl. Board with USB Configurations" on page 9-36.
Video Board and Cable 5207000-50 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel)

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 23

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 8 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

37. Replaces 5207000-50

Main Ctrl. Board with USB Also includes 5207000-41 USB Auxiliary Board
Video Board and Cable 5207000-40 Replaced by 5207000-60 1 Y
(Upper Operator Panel) See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible
Configurations" on page 9-36.

38. Replaces 5207000-50

Main Board with SMC HUB - Video

Board with zero ohm R - Video Cable - 5207000-60 1 Y
USB Aux Board

39. R5 LE9 Upper Operator Panel

Main Control Board
5497858-10 1 Y
(include USB Cables
to user USB Ports)

40.

Frame UI Upper Assembly GA200392 1 Y

41. 5207000-2
Operator Panel Assembly, Lower Replaced by 5207000-12 1 Y
OBSOLETE

42. Operator Panel Assembly, Lower with 5207000-12

Replaced by 5207000-32 1 Y
Improved Trackball OBSOLETE

43. Remove existing trackball from removed lower panel

Operator Panel Assembly, Lower 5207000-32 and install into the new assembly.
1 Y
Without Trackball OBSOLETE (Second opinion required.) To become obsolete. If
unavailable, order 5207000-42

44. Operator Panel Assembly, Lower

5207000-42 Obsolete replaced by 5207000-52 1 Y
Without Trackball

45. Similar to 5207000-42 except includes

VALOX Bezel
Operator Panel Assembly, Lower
5207000-52 Replaced by 5207000-62 1 Y
Without Trackball
See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible
Configurations" on page 9-36.

46. Operator Panel Assembly, Lower See: Table 9-13 "Operator Panel Compatible
5207000-62 1 Y
Without Trackball Configurations" on page 9-36.

9 - 24 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 9 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

47. Same as -62 Plus B-Flow Key Top

LOGIQ

5207000-72
1

See: Table 9-13 2

Operator Panel Assembly, Lower "Operator Panel 34

1 Y
Without Trackball Compatible
Configurations" on
Y

PW
X Z
CW
PDI
M CF

page 9-36. Εlasto V Nav LOGIQView Contrast

CHI
Steer Width
Measure

Zoom Depth
B

Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R

P4
Clear
Freeze
P2 P3

48. R5 LE9 Lower Op Panel - Removable

5207000-82 1 Y
Trackball compatible

49. Lower Op Panel Assembly 5208000-1 1 Y

50.

Operator Panel Frame Assembly,

5195937 1 Y
Lower

51. GA200444
Inductive Trackball Replaced by 5207000-5 1 Y
OBSOLETE

52. To become obsolete. If unavailable, order 5341631

Improved Inductive Trackball 5207000-5 1 Y

53. Replaced 5207000-5

Optical Trackball 5341631 1 Y

54. Trackball - Removable 5393439-10

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 25

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 10 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

55.

Removable Trackball Interface

5207000-84
Cable and Straps

56.

B C

LOGIQ E9 Trackball Keys

A - Trackball Key, Bottom
B - Trackball Key, Left D
5207000-80
C - Trackball Key, Top
D - Trackball Key, Right
E - Trackball Key, Pivot Points

A E

57. 2404652-19
Concentric Encoder Replaced by 5207000-85 4 Y
OBSOLETE

58. for Operator Panel

Encoder, Concentric Shaft with 0-ring 5207000-85 4 Y

59. 5207000-17
Joystick Encoder for Operator Panel 8 Y
OBSOLETE

60. Replaces 5207000-17

Joystick Encoder 5207000-29 8 Y

61. Lower Operator Panel Main-board 5207000-18 Obsolete replaced by 5207000-28 1 Y

9 - 26 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 11 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

62. Includes 1 - Left Elastomer,

2 - 5207000-55 - TGC Slide Pots Dust Gasket,
3 - Right Elastomer, and
4 - Switch PCB (version with reduced LED number)
Replaced by 520700-38

1 2

Lower Operator Panel Main-board

5207000-28 1 Y
(improved)

63. Includes 1. Left Elastomer,

2. Right Elastomer, 3. Slide Pot Gasket,
4. Switch, PCB and
5. BOURNS compatible Slide Pot knobs (x8)

1 2 3

5
5207000-38
See: Table 9-13
LE9 Lower Circuit Board for
"Operator Panel
OP Panel - Bourns Slide Pots - spare 1 Y
Compatible
part only
Configurations" on
page 9-36.

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 27

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 12 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

64.

LE9 R5 Lower Operator

Panel Main Board
5497858-50 1 Y
Compatible with Lower OP Panel
Assembly 5208000-1

65. Lower Bezel 5207000-11 Obsolete replaced by 5207000-14 1 Y

66.

5207000-14
See: Table 9-13

VALOX
Lower Bezel "Operator Panel
1 Y
VALOX Compatible
Configurations" on
page 9-36. Body Pattern
Measure

Zoom
Steer

Depth
Width

Ellipse

Comment 3D/4D
Auto

Stop Stop
Clear
Freeze

67. Lower Bezel LE9 spare part

5207000-81 1 Y
Removable Trackball compatible

68. 5207000-10
Key Cap Kit for Operator Panel Replaced by 5207000-24 1 Y
OBSOLETE

69. 5207000-16 Replaced by 5207000-24

Button Cap Kit 1 Y
OBSOLETE Includes keycaps for options in R2.x.x or later

70.
L

P1 R

Elasto P2 CHI 3D/4D

Button Cap Kit includes B-Flow Key 5207000-24 V Nav P3 1 Y

PDI TVI

LOGIQView P4
B
CW Flow

Contrast

71. Obsolete kit was split in two kits 5207000-8 and -9

Knob Kit, Slide Pot Knob Kit, Mode
5207000-7 See: Table 9-12 "New Lower Op Panel FRUs 1 Y
Select Knob Kit
Compatible Configurations" on page 9-35.

9 - 28 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 13 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

72. Includes:
1. Joystick knobs (near trackball) (x2),
2. Joystick knobs (for other locations
on Op Panel) (x4)
3. Mode Select knobs: Outer knobs (x4),
Mode specific insert (x4)

5207000-8
See: Table 9-12
"New Lower Op
LE9 Rotary Knob Kit - spare part only Panel FRUs 1 Y
Compatible 1 2
Configurations" on
page 9-35.

73. Details of illustration:

P/N 5207000-9 "A"
1. Friction Fit
2. ALPHA Slide Pot
P/N 5207000-9 "B"
3. Snap Fit
4. BOURNS Slide Pot
5207000-9
“A” VS. “B”
“A” “B”
5207000-9
See: Table 9-12 5207000-9 5207000-9
LE9 TGC Slide Pot Knob Kit - “A” “B”
"New Lower Op
Spare Part only Knobs for
Panel FRUs 1 Y
ALPHA and for
Compatible
BOURNS version slide pots
Configurations" on
page 9-35.

1 3

6 mm 3 10 mm

2 4
74.

Button Frame UI Assembly

GA200270-2 1 Y
(XYZ Button Replacement)

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 29

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 14 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

75.

Probeholder Soft Insert Large (x4) 5189615 1 Y

76.

Probeholder Soft Insert Small (x2) 5189156 4 Y

77.

Probe Cable Hook Twin GA307069 1 Y

78. Probeholder Insert for small probes like

S4210 and L8-18I

H4911P
Probeholder Insert LOGIQ
only available as a 1 N
(for small probes)
catalog

79.

4D Probeholder 5307472 1 Y

80. To become obsolete. If unavailable,

TVTR Probe Holder Assembly 5306880 1 Y
order 5306880-2

9 - 30 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 15 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

81.

TVTR Probe Holder Assembly 5306880-2 1 Y

82. 5245350
Gel Warmer Unit Replaced by 5245350-2 1 Y
OBSOLETE

83. Gel Warmer Unit 5245350-2 Replaced by 5245350-10 1 Y

84.

Gel Warmer Unit 5245350-10 1 Y

85.

Gel Warmer Knob Replacement Kit 5322780 1 Y

86. Options Holder

Right Support Assembly 5307243 1 Y

87. Options Holder

Left Support Assembly 5307245 1 Y

88. 5307236
Tray Unit Assembly Replaced by 5307236-2 1 Y
OBSOLETE

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 31

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 16 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

89.

Tray Unit Assembly 5307236-2 1 Y

90.

Cover, Palm Rest 5178069 1 Y

91. Speaker Assembly 5265030 Replaced by GA200743 2 Y

92. Replaces 5265030

Speaker Assembly GA200743 2 Y

93.

Cable - Audio High Pass 5460780 2 Y

94. GA200446
Operator Panel Cable Kit Replaced by 5207000-40 1 Y
5207000-46

95. Replaces GA200446

Compatible with Operator panels 5207000-x
Operator Panel Cable Kit
Kit includes:
A - Trackball USB Cable
B1 and B2 - Trackball Switch Cables 5207000-46 1 Y
C1 and C2 USB Video Board Flex Cables
D - HV Inverter Cable
E - A/N Keyboard USB Cable

9 - 32 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 17 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

96. Compatible with Operator Panel Assembly

5208000-1

LE9 R5 Upper Op Panel Cable Kit

Kit contains:
1. Video Controller Power
2. Video Controller USB
3. Backlight
5497858-40 1 Y
4. Video
5. Customer USB Ports
6. Trackball
7. Power Upper to Lower
8. USB Upper to Lower

97. Alphanumeric Keyboard

A/N Keyboard (English) 5207000-4 1 Y

98.

A/N Keyboard (French Canada) 5207000-19 1 Y

99.

A/N Keyboard (Russian) 5207000-20 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 33

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-11 Top Console parts 18 of 18 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

100.

A/N Keyboard (Greek) 5207000-21 1 Y

101.

A/N Keyboard (Swedish) 5207000-22 1 Y

102.

A/N Keyboard (Norwegian) 5207000-26 1 Y

9 - 34 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-8 Top Console parts (cont’d)

Table 9-12 New Lower Op Panel FRUs Compatible Configurations

Description / New Part Replaces

Part Name Compatibility
Comments Number Part Number(s)
Lower Op Panel with BOURNS Slide Pots
LE9 Lower Op Panel
5207000-62 5207000-52** Backward
w BOURNS slide pots Part includes:
• Lower Bezel - Valox 5207000-72* 5207000-42 compatible
- no trackball
• BOURNS TGC Slide Pots and knobs
Lower Bezel Backward
Lower Bezel – Valox 5207000-14 5207000-11
LE9 - Valox compatible
Lower Circuit Board for OP Panel
(including the BOURNS Slide Pots)

Part includes: Backward

LE9 Lower Circuit • 1 Left Elastomer compatible
Board for OP • 1 Right Elastomer 5207000-38 5207000-28 Includes the new
Panel - Bourns Slide • 1 Slide Pot Gasket knobs for the new
Pots - spare part only • 1 Switch, PCB TGC Slide Pots.
• 8 BOURNS knobs compatible with
BOURNS Slide Pots
See: FRU image for contents.
Rotary Knob Kit - Spare Part only

LE9 Rotary Kit includes:

Backward
Knob Kit - spare part • 2 Joystick knobs (near trackball) 5207000-8 5207000-7***
• 6 Joystick knobs (for other locations on Op Panel) compatible
only
• 4 Mode Select knobs
See: FRU image for contents.
TGC Slide Pot Knob Kit -
LE9 TGC Slide Pot Spare Part only
Knob Kit - Spare Part Includes:
Backward
only Knobs for ALPHA • Knobs for ALPHA (old style) Slide Pot 5207000-9 5207000-7***
compatible
and for BOURNS • Knobs for BOURNS (new style) Slide Pot
version slide pots. • Instruction Sheet
See: FRU image for contents.

*5207000-72 will be ready with R4.x production.

**5207000-52 is similar to 5207000-42 but includes the new Valox Bezel.

***5207000-7 was separated into two kits, one kit for the TGC Slide Pots and another kit for
the Rotary knobs.

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 35

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-8 Top Console parts (cont’d)

Table 9-13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations

Operator Panel Compatible Configurations

Currently Installed
Op Panel - Upper
Op Panel - Upper Op Panel - Upper 5207000-43,
5207000-23 5207000-33 5207000-53 or
5207000-63
If replacing
Op Panel - Upper Option 1 Option 2 Option 1 Option 1
FRU:
Order 5207000-15 Order 5207000-15 Order 5207000-15
Upper Bezel N/A
Upper Bezel Upper Bezel Upper Bezel
Main Ctrl. Board Order 5207000-30 Order 5207000-40 or -50 Order 5207000-40 or -50 Order 5207000-50
with USB Video Main Control Board Main Ctrl. Board with USB Main Ctrl. Board with Main Ctrl. Board
Board and with USB Video Video Board and Cable, USB Video with USB Video
Cable Board and Cable install with old video cable Board and Cable Board and Cable
Order GA200439
LCD and Frame Frame with LCD and Order 5207000-53 Order 5207000-39 Order 5207000-39
TouchScreen
Order 5207000-40 or -50
Main Ctrl. Board with USB
Aux USB Board Order GA200441 Order 5207000-41 Order 5207000-41
Video Board and Cable,
install with old video cable
OP Cable Kit Order GA200446 Order 5207000-46 Order 5207000-46 Order 5207000-46
High Voltage
Inverter Board Order GA200442 N/A Order 5207000-6 Order 5207000-6
with Cable
Dust Gasket for
TGC pots - Order 5207000-55 N/A Order 5207000-55 Order 5207000-55
Lower OP

9 - 36 Section 9-8 - Top Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-8 Top Console parts (cont’d)

Table 9-14 Upper Op Panel FRUs Compatible Configurations

Op Panel - High Voltage

Upper LCD Inverter Type High Voltage Inverter
Assembly Type Used Part Number Comments
5207000-13 NEC NEC GA200442 ERG HV Inverter is not compatible
5207000-23 NEC NEC GA200442 Continue using NEC HV Inverter.

NEC or GA200442
5207000-33 CMO NEC HV Inverter can be used, but may show
ERG 5207000-6 (recommended)
intermittent issues turning on the back light at
NEC or GA200442 boot up.
5207000-43 CMO
ERG 5207000-6 (recommended)

Forward production all contain ERG

5207000-53 CMO ERG 5207000-6
HV Inverters.

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 37

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-9
XYZ Mechanism parts
For XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor FRUs Compatibility, see:
Table 9-16 "XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor FRUs Compatibility Chart" on page 9-41.

Table 9-15 XYZ Mechanism parts

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

1. GA200041
XYZ Control ASM Replaced by GA200644 1 Y
OBSOLETE

2. XYZ Control ASM GA200644 Replaced by 5429346 1 Y

3. See: Table 9-16 "XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor

XYZ Control ASM 5429346 1 Y
FRUs Compatibility Chart" on page 9-41.

4. LOGIQ E9 R4 XYZ Motor Controller 5440179 Replaced by 5440179-3 1 Y

5. Supports new LCD Monitor introduced with

R4.x consoles.
See: Table 9-16 "XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor
FRUs Compatibility Chart" on page 9-41.

LOGIQ E9 R5 XYZ Motor Controller 5440179-3 1 Y

6. XY Mechanism GA200036 Replaced by GA200946 1 Y

7. Replaces GA200036
XY Mechanism GA200946 See: Table 9-16 "XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor 1 Y
FRUs Compatibility Chart" on page 9-41.

8. Replaces GA200036
See: Table 9-16 "XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor
FRUs Compatibility Chart" on page 9-41.

XY Mechanism - USA MFG 5954000

9 - 38 Section 9-9 - XYZ Mechanism parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-15 XYZ Mechanism parts

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

9.

Park Lock Assembly - USA MFG 5393642

10.

XY Brake Motor Assembly - USA MFG 5393698

11. XY Brake Assembly GA200952 Replaces GA200535 2 Y

12. Z-Mechanism GA200039 Use 5958000 1 Y

13.

Z-Mechanism Assembly 5958000 1 Y

14. Drive Gear Assy GA200177 Use 5396884 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 39

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-15 XYZ Mechanism parts

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

15. See: Table 9-16 "XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor
FRUs Compatibility Chart" on page 9-41.

Drive Gear Assy 5396884 1 Y

16.
Cable, XYZ Switch Board 5198990 1 Y

17. Compatible with R2.0.4 or later.

Cable - USB, BEP to XYZ Motor (620 mm)

5194492-6 1 Y
Controller
XYZ MOTOR CONTROL 5194492-6 BEP J25

18.

Park Lock GA200161 1 Y

19. Substitute for GA200161.

Park Lock
5393642 1 Y
(USA Mfg.)

9 - 40 Section 9-9 - XYZ Mechanism parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-16 XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor FRUs Compatibility Chart

New P/N Description Replaces Compatibility Solution / Comments

If replacing this part, it is recommended for

XY Backward better performance to check the installed XYZ
GA200946 GA200036
Mechanism compatible Motor Controller and update it to 5429346 if
5429346 is not installed yet.

Substitute for GA200946. If replacing this

XY part, it is recommended for better
Backward
5954000 Mechanism GA200946 performance to check the installed XYZ Motor
compatible
(USA Mfg.) Controller and update it to 5429346 if
5429346 is not installed yet.

No.
LOGIQ E9 XYZ Only compatible
Motor Controller GA200644 with P/N GA200946 -
5429346 N/A
with O-ring GA200795 XY Arm Assembly,
Detection and P/N GA200952 -
XY brake Motor
Assembly

LOGIQ E9 XYZ Supports new LCD Use this FRU if the LCD Arm and Monitor are
Motor Controller Monitor introduced the new version for R4.x and later, due to the
5440179 5429346
with O-ring with R4.x and later changes in weight of the new LCD Arm and
Detection consoles Monitor.

LOGIQ E9 XYZ
Motor Controller Supports new LCD
5440179-3 5440179 Monitor introduced N/A
with O-ring
Detection with R4.x consoles

If replacing this part, it is recommended for

better performance to check the installed XYZ
Backward Motor Controller and update it to 5429346 if
GA200952 GA200535 5429346 is not installed yet.
compatible
NOTE: 5429346 is ONLY compatible with
P/N GA200946 XY Mech.

If replacing this part, it is recommended for

XY Brake better performance to check the installed XYZ
Mechanism Backward Motor Controller and update it to 5429346 if
5393698 GA200952 5429346 is not installed yet.
Assembly compatible
(USA Mfg.)
NOTE: 5429346 is ONLY compatible with
P/N GA200946 and 5954000 XY Mech.

NOTE: LOGIQ E9 console models 5205000-4 and earlier:

It is recommended to have the system running R2.0.4 or later Application Software and the XY USB
Cable installed to allow the system to release the XY Brakes at shutdown if the console is not locked.

If replacing the new FRUs on a system that is not running R2.0.4 or later, order the Late Request Plan
for FMI 70206 - R2.0.4 Software Upgrade and XYZ USB Cable Update in SN70443A - Closed FMIs on
LOGIQ™ E9, LOGIQ™ 9 and LOGIQ™ 700 Consoles.

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 41

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-10
Main Console parts

Table 9-17 Main Console parts 1 of 3

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

1. Back End Processor Parts See: Section 9-13 "Back End Processor (BEP) parts" on page 9-64.

2. Front End Processor Parts See: Section 9-12 "Card Rack parts" on page 9-48.

3. Casters See: Section 9-11 "Casters (Wheels) parts" on page 9-46.

4. Covers See: Section 9-7 "Covers and Bumpers" on page 9-9.

5.

P8
2 L9 2

P2 P2 P1
1 P6 1 1
1 P5

2
P7
L4 L6
8 8 L8 1
L3
Bulkhead Board Assembly GA200290 L5
L2 L1
L7
1 Y
MODULE NAME S/N :

1
6
P/N: NNxxxxxx-xx Consession :

P4
BAR-CODE

9
5
6. Bulkhead Board Assembly
5482676 1 Y
RoHs compliant

7. Fan Tray Assembly - Card Rack 5141940 Replaced by 5141940. 1 Y

8. Replaced 5141940

Fan Tray Assembly - Card Rack 5394406 1 Y

9.

Fan Tray and Filter Assembly

5394406-2 1 Y
Removable Fan Tray

9 - 42 Section 9-10 - Main Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-17 Main Console parts 2 of 3 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

10.

Air Filter Assembly

5391493-2 1 Y
Removable Fan Tray

11. Filter Dust Rear

Filter (Rear) GA307351 1 Y

12. See: Table 9-19 "Subwoofer Details" on page 9-45.

Subwoofer 5261127 1 Y

13. R4 later production

(not backward compatible)
See: Table 9-19 "Subwoofer Details" on page 9-45.

Subwoofer 5261127-2 1 Y

14. Refer to Table 9-18 "Identifying Base Casting for

proper Bottom Air Filter Assembly" on page 9-44 to
identify the correct FRU.

Air Filter Assembly (Bottom) 5316340-2 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 43

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-17 Main Console parts 3 of 3 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

15. Refer to Table 9-18 "Identifying Base Casting for

proper Bottom Air Filter Assembly" on page 9-44
to identify the correct FRU.

Air Filter Assembly (Bottom) 5391493 1 Y

16.

Shearwave Capacitor Bank Assembly 5486895 1 Y

Table 9-18 Identifying Base Casting for proper Bottom Air Filter Assembly

Base Casting Identification

Smooth on inside surface Base casting identified with smooth surface

requires 5316340-2 Filter Assembly.

Cross-hatching on inside surface Base casting identified with cross-hatching

requires 5391493 Filter Assembly.

9 - 44 Section 9-10 - Main Console parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-19 Subwoofer Details

Subwoofer P/N 5261127 Subwoofer P/N 5261127-2

Replace like for like. Not backward compatible.

6 Pan Head M4x12 6 Pan Head M4x12

fasteners, fasteners,
torque 1.3 N-m torque 1.3 N-m

Subwoofer P/N 5261127-2 attaches to the Base

Casting using six pan head, M3x12 fasteners and are
The old Subwoofer P/N 5261127 WILL NOT fit if a torqued to 0.6 N-m.
new Subwoofer was installed. The Base Casting has six holes, equally spaced on a
135.2 mm diameter to accommodate
Subwoofer P/N 5261127-2.

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 45

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-11
Casters (Wheels) parts
Table 9-20 Casters (Wheels) parts 1 of 2

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

1. Front Casters (Front Wheels), front w/brake and lock

Front Casters GA200245 2 Y

2. Rear Casters (Rear Wheels), rear swivel only

Rear Casters GA200246 2 Y

3.

Wheel Change Kit

FC200829
Rear Caster Replacement Tool

4.

Pedal Mechanism 5311911 1 Y

5.

Cam, Pedal POM (Polyoxymethylene),

5311753 1 Y
Ichiro

9 - 46 Section 9-11 - Casters (Wheels) parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-20 Casters (Wheels) parts 2 of 2 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

6.

Cover Brake Pedal GA307052 1 Y

7.

Cover Pedal Release GA307053 1 Y

8.

Cover Pedal Direction Lock GA307054 1 Y

9.

Caster Brake-Lock Release Assembly 5312180 1 Y

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 47

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-12
Card Rack parts
For Card Rack compatible configurations, see:
9-12-1 "DRX Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-58.

For Front End Boards compatible configurations, see:

9-12-2 "Front End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-59.

For GTX Boards compatible configurations, see:

9-12-3 "GTX Boards Compatible Configuration" on page 9-63.

Table 9-21 Card Rack parts 1 of 11

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

1.

Card Cage Front Cover Assembly 5245458 1 Y

2.

Card Cage Front Cover

5245458-2 1 Y
Assembly - MRX

3. With plate cover on GRLY side for future

applications

Card Cage Front Cover

5245458-3 1 Y
Assembly MRX R4 consoles

9 - 48 Section 9-12 - Card Rack parts

GE
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

Table 9-21 Card Rack parts 2 of 11 (Continued)

ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU

4.

Card Rack Cover Assembly - R4 5245458-4 1 Y

5.

GFI Rack Cover Assembly

5245458-5 1 Y
V-Nav Inside Option

6. GRLY GA200630 Replaced by GA200714-3. 1 Y

7. GRLY GA200714 Replaced by GA200714-3. 1 Y

8. Replaced GA200630 and GA200714

LOGIQ E9 only.
J16

CC
AA
BB
W
M
G

P
C
D

U
A
B

X
Y
F

Z
L
J
F2

R180

R14
U21
R179

FL18 FL19 R13 R10 R9 R183 R182 R181

C29

C64
C28
FL20

F1
FL2
FL3
FL7
FL5

FL6

R20

0
R11

C84

C83

FL1

C101
R15

C98

U24

U23

U20

9
FL21

R22
R16

R12

U22
D3

D2

K17
8

K16

TP9
C99

R95

R100
D10

TP10
F3

R101

C66 U26 U25 R178

U12

U27
R3

TP8
6

R18
D8

R98
R102

C158

C31 R17
U6
FL9

R103

C57 R99
C32

D9

C25

C58
K18
K15
C159

C72
C160
D7

C55
TP11

3 2 1
2 3
U11

R184
R185
R186
CR2
C49

U29

U19
TP5

1
CR14
U13

U30

HS1 C161
C113
C38

R109
R30

C39

U8

U10
R64
K14

K13

U17
C162
C163

U28
R110

W
M
G
C
D

U
A
B

X
Y
F

CC

TP13
L
J

AA
BB
CR15

VR1 R71 U37

R188
R189

R187

U14
R202
C165
VR2

C166
C115

C103
C73

U35
S2

Q11 K2_J15 K5_J15

R46

R48

Y1

R201

R51 R53 C117

R54

R55

R21
R50

R120
R56

U18
C109

PS1
C164

K3_J15
C34
R115

FL14 76 R197 R199

TP7
CR1

100 U33
R195
U32
R57

U31
Q2
C88

R47

C74

75
R52

U15

R192

R196 R198 R200

R111

HS2
R191 R190
R74 R91
C90

C112

C110
Q1

Q7
U16

CR16
C45

U9
C94

TP6

C37
D1
Q5

25 51
C48
Q3

Q6
Q4

TP2
C92

K260
K273

K265

34
C108
R119
R114

R67

50
C46
FL16

26
R49

U7

CR5 R40 TP1

R63

U34

Q10
C107
U5

K266
K274
K1_J15
K228

K217

K7_J15

20
K244

K233
R41
C26
R8

K255
K261

CR7
R60

CR6 10
U3

K267
K275
K245

J1_J15
C20

K290

R42
K234

K223

K218

K284

K279

R2
K239

K229

K289 K262 K256

R35
U2

GRLY GA200714-2 1 Y
K287

K246
C19

CR4 R36
L K J H G F E D C B A
M
C151

K219 K280 K288

C150

K240 K235 K230 K224 K286

K2_J14
U1

K3_J14

S4
C147
C111

C149 C148
K20

CR3 K5_J14
R37
T3

S1

C145 K253 C144 C146 K22 K21 K19

U4

K153

K65

34
C18

K6_J14
K212

C143
K76

K58
K187

K82
K201

K180

K169
K195

K164
C139

J1_J14
K7_J14

K154

K66

2
20
K61

K71
K198

R151 R149
K170
K190

K175

K85
K207

K202

K159

K1_J14
K290_J14

10
K80

K56

37 38
R152 R150
K77

K72

K252
K176
J2

K193

K166
K185

K160
K208

K181
K213

K289_J14
C142

C138

K155

K67
K287_J14

K78 K59
K214 K196 K203 K182 K188 K171 K86 K83 K288_J14 M L K J H G F E D C B A
C135

K2

C127

C122
C137

C141

K3
C134
J3

K7
S6

C123 C126
C131 K250 C130
R147 R145
J13

K33
K89

34
K5

K44

R148 R146
K26
K50

K251 K148 K131 K137 K116 K123 K105 K100

K34
K90
C140

C136

K134

K6

20
K39
K29
K95
K143

K106
K138

K111

K53

K126 K1

10
K24
K48
K11
K149
C133

C129

K40
K45
K96
K144

K129

K112

K121
K117

K102

K10
K35
K91

R137
K8

R140
K46 K27
K150 K132 K139 K118 K124 K107 K54 K51 K9
D
GA200714-2 A
M L K J H G F E C B A
R138
R139 K249 S3
R216 R217
C120 C121
GRLY GRLY
C132

P/N: GA200714-2 A
C128

K247
R214
R215
R73

R104 R105 R106 R107 R108 R23

C124

C125
DS1

DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7

R213

R211

BAR CODE
K103

K101

K12

R212
DS9
DS12
DS11

DS8

DS10

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 49

 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL

FRU

Y
QTY

1
K265 K266 K267 K65 K6 6 K56 K67 K33 K34 K24 K3 5 K265 K266 K267 K65 K6 6 K56 K67 K33 K34 K24 K3 5 K165 K164 K163 K159 K158 K157 K156 K155 K154 K153
C150 C122 C150 C122 K167 K166 K162 K161 K160
P/N: GA200714-3 A

P/N: GA200714-3 A
C148

C148
C126

C126
K59

K59

K176
K178
GRLY

GRLY
K256

K256

K175

K168
K27

K27

K181
K260 K255 K58 K71 K72 K26 K39 K40 K260 K255 K58 K71 K72 K26 K39 K40 K192 K173 K172 K169
K180 K179 K177 K174 K171 K170
CODE

CODE

K16 K18 K13 K16 K18 K13

K78

K78
K262

K262

K182
K46

K46

K190

K189
S1 S1
C123

C123
C149

C149

K261 K76 K61 K77 K44 K29 K45 K261 K76 K61 K77 K44 K29 K45 K187 K186 TP3
K194 K191 K188 K185 K184 K183
K196 K195 K193
BAR

BAR

GND
K274 C151 K153 K154 K80 K155 C127 K274 C151 K153 K154 K80 K155 C127 K208 K207 K206 K205 K204 K203 K202 K201 K200 K199 K198 K197
K273 K275 K89 K90 K48 K91 K273 K275 K89 K90 K48 K91
K17 K15 K14 K17 K15 K14
K209
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A

A
A

A
A
B

B
B

CC CC

B
B
CC CC
B

B
BB BB BB BB
AA AA AA AA
C

C
C

Z Z

C
C
Z Z
Y Y K210
Y Y
X X
D

X X

D
D

D
W W W W
V V V V
U U U U
E

E
E

E
E

K211

E
T T T T
S S S S
F

F
F

F
F

R R

F
F
R R
P P P P
R201 C74 R201 C74 K212
DESCRIPTION

R198 R200

R198 R200

R202 R202
R197 R199

R197 R199

R143
R146

R144
R145
J16 J16
U37

U37

N N N N
R196

R196

M M M M

U2
R195 R195

G
G

G
G

L L

G
L L
G

G
C73 C73
K K K K
J
H

J
H

J J
H

H
H

H
H H H H

R150

R149
R148
G G

R147
G G
F F K3_J15 K3_J14 K3 F F K3_J15 K3_J14 K3 K214 K213
J

J
J

J
J

J
J

J
E E E E
D D

K215
D D
K

K
K

K
K

K
K

K
C C C C
C125 C125
B B B B
A K12 A K12
K7

K7

A A

L
L
L

L
L

L
L

L
K5_J14

K5_J14
K5_J15

K5_J15

K217

K216
K218
M

M
M

M
M

M
M

M
C121

C121

M
K101 K101
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
K2_J15

K2_J15

U21 U21
R178

R178

U19 U19
K247

K247
10

10

CR14 CR15 CR14 CR15

R180 R180
K2_J14 K2 K2_J14 K2 K221 K220 K219
C161

C161

C158 C164 C158 C164 K226

J15 J1
20

20

J14 8
34

34

K103 K103 J13 K231

20

20

J16

34

20

34
J1_J15
34

J1_J15
34

10

34

10
10

20

10

10

20

10

20
34

34

10

20

10
20

34
J1_J14 J13 J1_J14 J13
R179 U20 R184 U28 U31 R179 U20 R184 U28 U31
C120

C120
R190

R190
U25

U25

K7_J15 K287 K7_J14 K290_J14 K287_J14 K6 K11 K8 K7_J15 K287 K7_J14 K290_J14 K287_J14 K6 K11 K8
R181

R181

R187 K290 T3 R187 K290 T3

U22 C159 C162 CR16 U22 C159 C162 CR16
U29 C165 U32 U29 C165 U32
K230 K229 K228 K227 K224 K223 K222 K233
R191

R191

K225

R158
R157
R156
R155

R154
R153

R152
U26

U26

R1
R182

R182

51
R185 R188 R185 R188

R161
TP4

A16
U23 C163 U23 C163 R159
U33

U33

R160 T16

R162
U27 C160 C166 C124 U27 C160 C166 C124
R192 K20 K6_J14 K5 R192 K20 K6_J14 K5 1V2 DEBUG2
TP6

R168

REV2B
R163

8530
R164
DEBUG1
R183

R183

543
K288_J14

K288_J14

C127
K289_J14

K289_J14
K1_J14

K1_J14
K289

K289

R165
R189 R189
R186 R186 TP5 K232
K10

K10
K9

K9
U24 U24
K288

K288

U3
K1

K1
U30 U30 R167
C25 C25

C126
R166
U14

U14

CR2 CR2
C28 C48 C28 C48

U4
K236 K235 K234

U5
FL1 FL1 K242 K240 K239 K238 K237
D2 U9
C134 D2 U9
C134
K241 T1 TP7

C129
K1_J15 K1_J15
HS2

HS2

CR2
K83

K83
D3 U6 D3 U6
C130 C128 GND
K280

K280
K51

K51

A1

T1
K19

K19

F1 U11 R109 F1 U11 R109

R169
D8

C131
FL9
C34 K279 K82 K159 K160 K50 K96 C34 K279 K82 K159 K160 K50 K96 K250 K246
R110 K95 R110 K95 K251
C103

C103

C45 C45

U6
R67 R67

C132
C133
C83 F2
K86

C83

K86
D9
U34 U34
K100

K100
Q11

Q11
R64

R64

K253
K54

K54
K286

K286

U7

K266
K21

K21

17
K247

24
C113 C113

25

Section 9-12 - Card Rack parts

16
C130

C130
R98 K217 K85 R98 K217 K85 GND
K284 K164 K166 K53 K102 K284 K164 K166 K53 K102 K245 K244 K243
TP8 K248
R99

R99

U8
K252 K249
U35

U35
TP8

TP8

Q7 C37 R63 Q7 C37 R63

U9
R71

R71
K105

K105
75

75

R21 R21 C135

K250

K250
K171

K171
K219

K219

K259
K107

K107

9
51

51
K22

K22
U12 U12

K263

K258
8
R173 32
R171
K255
76

76
50

50

C84 Y1 C84 Y1 R172

HS1

HS1

K169 K170 K185 K169 K170 K185 R170

Q1
K218 K106 K121 K218 K106 K121 FL11

R174
K265 K264 K257 K256
PS1

PS1

K261

C134
Y1 K260
C131

C131
FL10 K254 K262
K224

K224
C146

C146

C136
U7 U7

R176
R100

R100

U10

PS1
K123

K123
F2 F2
K188

K188
R175 U11

K275
K124

K124

K270
K271 K267

C137
TP9

TP9
26

26

R101 R101
100

100

Q2
25

25

K228 K223 K187 K175 K176 K228 K223 K187 K175 K176
U18

U18

K111 K111

R177
TP6 K112 TP6 K112 K276

C138
R111 C46 R111 C46 K273 K269 K268
C144

C144
K274 K272
K230

K230
K277
TP7

TP7

U13 U13
R3 R3

R178
R20 R22 R20 R22

U12
R181
C139

3V3
TP9
K116

K116
K126

K126
K182

K182
K118

K118

K286
C98 C98

R180
R179
CR1 CR1

K281
R182 K282
TP13

TP13
C117

C117

FL13 K278
FL12 U13 R183

TP10
C141
TP10

TP10

K229 K180 K190 K181 K229 K180 K190 K181

TESTIN4
C135 K117 C135 K117 U15 C140

C142
CR3 K288 K287 K285 K284 K283 K280 K279
R103 R103
R11 R102 C55 R115 U15 R11 R102 C55 R115 U15
U17

U17
R9

R9

C143
C110 C110
K253

K137

K253

K137
K235

K235
K139

K139
Q10

Q10

R114 R114
K203

K203

K292
Q3

K297
U10

U10

U14
R120

R120

R95 R95

K300
R119 R119
R10

R10

C115 C115 R186 K293

R187

R184
C108 C108 C145
R12 C109 K234 K201 K202 K193 K138 K129 R12 C109 K234 K201 K202 K193 K138 K129
U8 U8 C146

C144
K299 K291 K290 K289
C58

K233 S6
C58

K233 S6 K298 K296 K295 K294

K240

K240
C57

C57
R14

R14

R193 R188
R18

R18

R189

R191
U16 U16

C148
R185
FL14

TP11
R192

VCC
K131

K131
R16 C112 R16 C112
K196

K196
K132

K132

C151

K309
C38 C38

K304
C149

C157
C153 R194
Card Rack parts 3 of 11 (Continued)

R13

R13

C147
C150
K305 K301
R17

R17

U16
C107 C107

R190
C49 C49

C152
D10 D9 D10 D9 U20
C145

C145
R15 R55 J3 R15 R55 J3 R195

C159 C154
FL2 K244 K239 K195 K207 K208 K143 K144 FL2 K244 K239 K195 K207 K208 K143 K144 U17
TP1

TP1
FL15 C158 K312 K311 K310 K308 K307 K306 K303 K302
R54 R54 R197
S3

S3
C156

U19

R196
FL3 FL3
K148

K148
Q6 Q6 R198 C155
K150

K150
K214

K214
R50 R50

K321
R52 R52 R202

K316
U18 K317

R200
R201 PMX
TP14

16
R204
FL7 FL7

15
R199 TP12 D10 VPP R203 DS1
Q3 Q3 D11 GND C160 U21 R205 TP13 DLP_AUX
12V
R217

R217
K213
R215

K213

R215
C147 C147 Q4 K318 R206 DS2 LVDC_4

FL16
K212 K134 K149 K212 K134 K149 K314 K313

C161
Q2 K245 K198 Q2 K245 K198 K324 K323 K322 K320 K319 K315
R23

R23
R207 DS3 12P_4
K246

K246
DS8 DS8
DS7

DS7
R49 R49 DS4 HV1N_4
R48 C139 C136 C129 R48 C139 C136 C129
R146

R138

R146

R138
C138 C141 C138 C141
R137

C128

R137
C128
R149

R149
C162
R145

R145
R150

R150

U22
FL6 R41 R211 FL6 R41 R211

FL17
R108

R108

K333
D8 Q1 D1 R60 D8 Q1 D1 R60 R211 R210 R209 DS5 HV1P_4
S4

S4

K328
D7 D7 K329
DS6

DS6
DS10

DS10
C39 C39 R214 R213 R212
C64

C64

DS6 HV2P_4
C66

C66

R208
R40

R40
R42

R37

R42

R37
R35

R36

R35

R36
R46 R46
C72

C72

R213 R213 DS7 HV2N_4

FL18
Q4 Q4
R107

R107

C163

R215
R47 R47 K325 R217
DS4 DS5

DS4 DS5
R56 R56 K334 K330 K327 K326 DS8 AUX_1
C99 DS9 C99 DS9 K336 K335 K332 K331
FL5 FL9 FL5 FL9 R216 R218 DS9 3V3
CR5

CR5
K251

K251
K249

K249
R212

R212
K252

K252
DS12 DS12
R106

R106

FL19
CR7

CR4

CR3

CR7

CR4

CR3
R53

R53
CR6

CR6
R219
R2

R2
DS10 LVDC 1
R220 Q6
C143

C143

2
Q5

TP15 J17 1
C166
GND R222 DS11 VCC
C170 D12

R221
FL19

FL19

D13

Q7
DS11 DS11 GND
R51

R51
R223
DS3

DS3
S2 S2 DS12 12V
VR1

VR1
R105

R105

D14
PMX R226 DS13 AVEE

R224
R57 R57
TP2

TP2
Q5 Q5 FL20
R151

R151
VNN R227

C172
C169 TP16 DS14 STATUS
R91

R91
K348
R152

R152
DS2

DS2
K347 K346 K345 K344 K343 K342 K341 K340 K339 K338 K337
R139

R139
R104

R104
TP17 C175 R228
R140

R140
R147

R147
R148

R148

Q8
TP11 C19 TP11 C19 F3 FL21 R225 DS15 FAULT
FL18

FL18

VR1 R233 R232 R231 DS16 TSV2N

38

38
C142 C137 C140 C133 C132 C142 C137 C140 C133 C132 R229
2

2
C101

C101

C174
DS1 DS1 TSV2P
R73 R73 DS17
R74

R74
C29 C92 C18 C29 C92 C18 TSV1P

R230
DS18

C176
C26 C20 C111 C26 C20 C111
C31

U5

C31
U3 U2 U1 U5 U3 U2 U1 TSV1N
R214

R214
R216

R216
FL14

FL14
FL16 U4 FL16 U4 R236 R235 R234 DS19
FL23 R242
F3 F3 R238 R237 DONE DS20
FL20 FL21 VR2 C88 FL20 FL21 VR2 C88 Q9
37

37
C90 C94 J2 C90 C94 J2

R239
R8 R8 TP19 TP18

R240
TP5 R30
TP5 R30 FL22 C177 AVEE
C32 C32 R241 DLP AUX
C179 C178
VR2
PART NUMBER

GA200714-3

GA200714-4

5441000
with new DLP Connectors

with new DLP Connectors

DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2

RoHS compliant
PART NAME

GRLY R4.x
GRLY

GRLY
Table 9-21

ITEM

10.

11.

9 - 50
9.
GE
 GE

14.
13.
12.
ITEM
Table 9-21

GRLY
R5.x or later
PART NAME
DIRECTION 5535208-100, REV. 2

GRX64 without CW

GRX 128ch without CW

(also V Nav Inside Option)

GA200295
GA200300
5441000-2
PART NUMBER

VR2 C178 C179

DLP AUX R241
AVEE C177 FL22
R240

TP18 TP19
R239

Q9
DS20 DONE R237 R238
R242 FL23
DS19 R234 R235 R236
TSV1N
Q65 Q65
C176

DS18
R230

TSV1P
R1870 C1762 R1879 R1524 L1124 L1000 L1126 L1002 R1528 L1128 L1004 R1530 L1130 L1006 R1870 C1762 R1879 R1524 L1124 L1000 L1126 L1002 R1528 L1128 L1004 R1530 L1130 L1006
R1526 R1526
DS17
L517 L518 L517 L518 TSV2P

R1878
R1878
C174

C1400 C1402 C1404 C1406 C1400 C1402 C1404 C1406

L1032
L1034
L1036
L1038
L1032
L1034
L1036
L1038
R1516 L1116 L1118 R1520 L1120 R1522 L1122 R1516 L1116 L1118 R1520 L1120 R1522 L1122

R1636
C1472
R1638
C1474
R1640
C1476
R1642
C1478
R1636
C1472
R1638
C1474
R1640
C1476
R1642
C1478

C200
C202
C204
C206
C200
C202
C204
C206
C1761 R1871 R1518 C1761 R1871 R1518 DS16 TSV2N VR1 R229
R348 C1272 C1336 C1274 C1276 C1340 C1278 C1342 R348 C1272 C1336 C1274 C1276 C1340 C1278 C1342
R231 R232 R233
C1208 C1210 C1212 C1214 C1208 C1210 C1212 C1214
C1338 C1338 R225 FL21 F3
Q8

R378 R378 K337 K338 K339 K340 K341 K342 K343 K344 K345 K346 K347 C175 TP17

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
K348

16
C830
16
C832
16
C834
16
C836
16
C830
16
C832
16
C834
16
C836
DS14 STATUS
TP16 C169
4 4 4 4
R227

C1195
MODULENAME S/N :

C1195
MODULENAME S/N :
C172

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
VNN

R1856
R1857
R1856
R1857
FL20
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

C1752
C1758
C1753
C1760
C1752
C1758
C1753
C1760
R224

U400 U402 U404 U406 U400 U402 U404 U406 R29 PMX
U221 U222 U221 U222
AVEE

U432
U434
U436
U438
U432
U434
U436
U438
R226

R411
R410
R405
R406
R411
R410
R405
R406

C1686
C1504
C1641
C1506
C1683
C1508
C1644
C1510
C1686
C1504
C1641
C1506
C1683
C1508
C1644
C1510

1
P/N: NNxxxxxx-xx Dev waver :

1
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 P/N: NNxxxxxx-xx Dev waver :

24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
R445
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
R445

C172
C172
D14

R446
R446
8 8 8 8
12V R38 R33

C1757
C1759
C1687
C1633
C1691
C1645
C1757
C1759
C1687
C1633
C1691
C1645
R1868 R1869 R1868 R1869
GND
Q7
D13

C1264 C1328 C1266 C1330 C1268 C1332 C1270 C1334 C1264 C1328 C1266 C1330 C1268 C1332 C1270 C1334
R221

TP6
TP7
TP6
TP7
C1200 C1202 C1204 C1206 C1200 C1202 C1204 C1206

L519
L519
C1070 C1070 C170 D12
VCC R42 GND

U93
U93
R222
C166

TP15 J17 1

Q5
2

C546 C1764 C537 C546 C1764 C537

R1500 L1100 R1502 L1102 R1504 L1104 R1506 L1106 R1500 L1100 R1502 L1102 R1504 L1104 R1506 L1106
R220 Q6

16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
LVDC 1 R44 R219
FL19

R1876
R1876

R1877
R1877
4 4 4 4

R1628
R1630
R1632
R1634
R1628
R1630
R1632
R1634

C1432
C1434
C1436
C1438
C1432
C1434
C1436
C1438
C1763
R323 C2101 R330 R1508 L1108 R1510 L1110 R1512 L1112 R1514 L1114 BAR-CODE C1763
R323 C2101 R330 R1508 L1108 R1510 L1110 R1512 L1112 R1514 L1114 BAR-CODE 3V3 R46 R218 R216

U465
U467
U469
U471
U465
U467
U469
U471

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
U224 U225 C2164 C2154 U224 U225 C2164 C2154 K331 K332 K335 K336
D396 D396
K326 K327 K330 K334

5 R444
5 R444
AUX_1 R30 R217 K325
8 8 8 8

C61
C61
R215

L1008 L1010 L1012 L1014 L1008 L1010 L1012 L1014

C163
FL18

R1556 L1156 R1558 L1158 R1560 L1160 R1562 L1162 C184 R1556 L1156 R1558 L1158 R1560 L1160 R1562 L1162 C184 HV2N_4 DS7

C2103
C2103
Q102 Q103 Q102 Q103

C545
C536
C545
C536
C1408 C1410 C1412 C1414 C1408 C1410 C1412 C1414

L1040
L1042
L1044
L1046
L1040
L1042
L1044
L1046
R1548 L1148 R1550 L1150 R1552 L1152 R1554 L1154 R1548 L1148 R1550 L1150 R1552 L1152 R1554 L1154

R1652
C1480
R1654
C1482
R1656
C1484
R1658
C1486
R1652
C1480
R1654
C1482
R1656
C1484
R1658
C1486
R1872 R1872

R461
R462
R463
R459
R461
R462
R463
R459
R1873 R1873
HV2P_4 DS6 R208

C227
C228
C229
C223
C227
C228
C229
C223
R213 R212 R214
C1288 C1352 C1290 C1354 C1292 C1356 C1294 C1358 C1288 C1352 C1290 C1354 C1292 C1356 C1294 C1358
C1224 C1226 C1228 C1230 C1224 C1226 C1228 C1230
K329
K328

R322 R329 R328 R322 R329 R328 HV1P_4 DS5 R210 R209 R211
K333

C2102 C2102
R321 R321

C1100
C2100

C1100
C2100
FL17

U22

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

16
C838
16
C840
16
C842
16
C844
16
C838
16
C840
16
C842
16
C844
C162
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

L520
L520
HV1N_4 DS4
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

C209
C209
R324 D385 R325 D386 R324 D385 R325 D386
U408 U410 U412 U414 U408 U410 U412 U414

U440
U442
U444
U446
U440
U442
U444
U446
12P_4 DS3

C1631
C1512
C1680
C1514
C1667
C1516
C1653
C1518
C1631
C1512
C1680
C1514
C1667
C1516
C1653
C1518
Q101 Q101 R207
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
Q100 Q100 K320 K322 K323 K324

24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
K315 K319
C161

K313 K314
FL16

K318 Q4

C1654
C1656
C1635
C1652
C1654
C1656
C1635
C1652
LVDC_4 DS2 R206

G7
G7

R320 R327 R320 R327

12V
C1280 C1344 C1282 C1346 C1284 C1348 C1286 C1350 C1280 C1344 C1282 C1346 C1284 C1348 C1286 C1350
C1216 C1218 C1220 C1222 C1216 C1218 C1220 C1222
R205 TP13 U21
R456 R456 DLP_AUX D11
R270 R270
DS1 GND C160

8
8
R203 VPP D10 TP12 R199
15

R1532 L1132 R1534 L1134 R1536 L1136 R1538 L1138 R1532 L1132 R1534 L1134 R1536 L1136 R1538 L1138
D387 D387

C71
C71
R204

16

TP14

16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
D392 D392
C12 C12
PMX R201
R319 R319
R200

R1644
R1646
R1648
R1650
R1644
R1646
R1648
R1650

C2160
C1440
C1442
C1444
C2150
C1446
C2160
C1440
C1442
C1444
C2150
C1446
R326 R326 K317
R1540 L1140 R1542 L1142 R1544 L1144 R1546 L1146 R1540 L1140 R1542 L1142 R1544 L1144 R1546 L1146
U18
K316

U473
U475
U477
U479
U473
U475
U477
U479
R202
K321

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
C155 R198

U226
D399

U226
D399
R196

C215 C215
R1874 R1874
U19

R1875 R1875
R1588 L1188 L1016 R1590 L1190 L1018 R1592 L1192 L1020 R1594 L1194 L1022 R1588 L1188 L1016 R1590 L1190 L1018 R1592 L1192 L1020 R1594 L1194 L1022 R197 C156
R1880 R1880 FL15

16
16
K306 K308 K311 C158

U96
U96
K302 K307
C1416 C1418 C1420 C1422 C1416 C1418 C1420 C1422
K303 K310 K312

L1048
L1050
L1052
L1054
L1048
L1050
L1052
L1054
R1881 R1580 L1180 R1582 L1182 R1584 L1184 R1586 L1186 R1881 R1580 L1180 R1582 L1182 R1584 L1184 R1586 L1186

C1075
R1668
C1488
R1670
C1490
R1672
C1492
R1674
C1494
C1075
R1668
C1488
R1670
C1490
R1672
C1492
R1674
C1494
U17

8
8
C538 C538
C159 C154

C1304 C1368 C1306 C1370 C1308 C1372 C1310 C1374 C1304 C1368 C1306 C1370 C1308 C1372 C1310 C1374
R1885 C1240 C1242 C1244 C1246 R1885 C1240 C1242 C1244 C1246 R195 U20
C1768 C1768
R1884 R1884

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

16
C846
16
C848
16
C850
16
C852
16
C846
16
C848
16
C850
16
C852
C152

C534 5 5 5 5 C534 5 5 5 5
R190

U16
Card Rack parts 4 of 11 (Continued)

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
K301 K305
C150

C147
C153 R194

U416 U418 U420 U422 U416 U418 U420 U422

U112
U112
C149
C157

D501 D501
K304

U448
U450
U452
U454
U448
U450
U452
U454
K309

C1639
C1520
C1688
C1522
C1658
C1524
C1661
C1526
C1639
C1520
C1688
C1522
C1658
C1524
C1661
C1526
C151

C1766
C1766
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15

24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
4 4 4 4
VCC

R192
TP11
FL14

16
C1638
C1648
C1650
C1660
16
C1638
C1648
C1650
C1660
R185

C148
R191
R189

U223 U227 C1296 C1360

C1232
C1298 C1362
C1234
C1300 C1364
C1236
C1302 C1366
C1238 U223 U227 C1296 C1360
C1232
C1298 C1362
C1234
C1300 C1364
C1236
C1302 C1366
C1238
R188 R193

R1882
R1882
C1074 C1074 K296
C1765 C1765
K289 K290 K291 K294 K295 K298 K299
C144

C1767
C1767
8 8 8 8
R432 R432
C146
R1883 R1564 L1164 R1566 L1166 R1568 L1168 R1570 L1170 R1883 R1564 L1164 R1566 L1166 R1568 L1168 R1570 L1170

16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16

C1077
C1077

U105 C137 U105 C137

R1660
R1662
R1664
R1666
R1660
R1662
R1664
R1666

C1448
C1450
C1452
C1454
C1448
C1450
C1452
C1454
C145
R184

R1572 L1172 R1574 L1174 R1576 L1176 R1578 L1178 R1572 L1172 R1574 L1174 R1576 L1176 R1578 L1178

D500
D500
R187

C130 R431 C127 C130 R431 C127 R186

U481
U483
U485
U487
U481
U483
U485
U487
C539 C535 R369 C539 C535 R369
K293

8
8
8
8
C117

8
8
8
C2165 C2155 R447 C2165 C2155
8 R447 C117

8
8

TP4
TP4
K300

8 8
U14

R374 R374
R1886 R1887 L1024 L1026 L1028 L1030 4 R1886 R1887 L1024 L1026 L1028 L1030 4
K297
Q3

R449 L523 R449 L523

R1620 L1220 R1622 L1222 R1624 L1224 R1626 L1226 R1620 L1220 R1622 L1222 R1624 L1224 R1626 L1226
K292

R430 R430

C119
C119

1 5 1 5

L525
L525

C136
C136

L526
L526

U125 U125

R419
C123
R421
R422
C122
R419
C123
R421
R422
C122

R1889 C1424 C1426 C1428 C1430 U127 C1424 C1426 C1428 C1430 U127

L1056
L1058
L1060
L1062
R1889

L1056
L1058
L1060
L1062

R1612 L1212

R1684
C1496
R1614 L1214

R1686
C1498
R1616 L1216

R1688
C1500
R1618 L1218

R1690
C1502
R1612 L1212

R1684
C1496
R1614 L1214

R1686
C1498
R1616 L1216

R1688
C1500
R1618 L1218
R1690
C1502
C143

R1890 C138 R1890 C138

C129
R429
C129
R429

C126 C126

R428
R428

C212
C212

D397 D397

U98
U98
4 4

R358
R358
R1891 C1320 C1384
C1256
C1322 C1386
C1258
C1324 C1388
C1260
C1326 C1390
C1262
8 L528 C141
R1891 C1320 C1384
C1256
C1322 C1386
C1258
C1324 C1388
C1260
C1326 C1390
C1262
8 L528 C141
R1888 R1888 K280 K283 K284 K285 K287 CR3
28 28 K279 K288

R360
R360
C142

C1135
C1135

32
24
32
24

C216 C216 U15

5 5

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

C13 C13

C146
C146

16
C131 C128 C131 C128

16
16
16
16

C854
C856
16
C858
C860
16
C854
16
C856
16
C858
16
C860

C140
TESTIN4

5 5 5 5 20 5 5 5 5 20
C141

TP10

C76 C76
C77 C77
R183 FL12
20 20 20 20
U123
20 20 20 20
U123
U126 U126
U13

U129
U129

R409
R409

U424 U426 U428 U430 R272 C134

U424 U426 U428 U430 R272 C134

L571
L571
10 15 10 15
FL13

U456
U458
U460
U462
D740 D741
U456
U458
U460
U462
D740 D741

8
8

16
16
K278

C1670
C1528
C1681
C1530
C1682
C1532
C1677
C1534
C1670
C1528
C1681
C1530
C1682
C1532
C1677
C1534

C60
16
C60
16

C148 C148
R362 R368 14 R362 R368 14
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15

C142
C142

24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32

L529 C143 L529 C143

C1198
C1198
R182

C1663
C1632
C1634
C1676
C1663
C1632
C1634
C1676

8 8 K282
K281

4 4
R179
R180

C133 C133
R363 R365 C1312 C1376
C1248
C1314 C1378
C1250
C1316 C1380
C1252
C1318 C1382
C1254 C140 R363 R365 C1312 C1376
C1248
C1314 C1378
C1250
C1316 C1380
C1252
C1318 C1382
C1254 C140
K286

R434
R434

D388
D388
U128 U128

R433
R433

C132
C132

C181
U124

C181
U124

U101
U101
TP9

R359
R359
3V3

C139
R181

C121
C121
U12

8 8
R178

R361 R367 R361 R367

R420
R423
R424
R420
R423
R424

C124
C124

R1596 L1196 R1598 L1198 R1600 L1200 R1602 L1202 R427 R1596 L1196 R1598 L1198 R1600 L1200 R1602 L1202 R427

L527
L527

16
16
16
16
L524

16
16
16
16

C135
C135

L524

C120
C120

4 4
8 8

R1676
R1678
R1680
R1682
R1676
R1678
R1680
R1682

C2161
C1456
C1458
C1460
C2151
C1462
C2161
C1456
C1458
C1460
C2151
C1462

C1072 C1072

TP3
TP3

K277

8
R1604 L1204 R1606 L1206 R1608 L1208 R1610 L1210

8
R1604 L1204 R1606 L1206 R1608 L1208 R1610 L1210
K1 K1 K272 K273 K274
R364 R366 R364 R366
K269

U489
U491
U493
U495
U489
U491
U493
U495

K268
R448 R448
C138

C147
C147

K276

8
8
8
8
C118

8
8
8
8

C118
R177

C125 4 C125 4
R426 R426

8
8
C78 C139 C78 C139
Q2

L1001 L1003 L1005 1007 R425 L1001 L1003 L1005 1007 R425
R1525 L1125 R1527 L1127 R1529 L1129 R1531 L1131 R1525 L1125 R1527 L1127 R1529 L1129 R1531 L1131

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts

C1076 C1076

U100
U100
C1401 C1403 C1405 C1407 C1401 C1403 C1405 C1407

L1033
L1035
L1037
L1039L
L1033
L1035
L1037
L1039L

R1517 L1117 R1519 L1119 R1521 L1121 R1523 L1123 R1517 L1117 R1519 L1119 R1521 L1121 R1523 L1123
C137

R1637
C1473
R1639
C1475
R1641
C1477
R1643
C1479
R1637
C1473
R1639
C1475
R1641
C1477
R1643
C1479

4
4
C79 C79
K267 K271

TP17
TP17
R275 R275
K270

C1273 C1337 C1275 C1339 C1277 C1341 C1279 C1343 C1273 C1337 C1275 C1339 C1277 C1341 C1279 C1343
K275

C1209 C1211 C1213 C1215 C1209 C1211 C1213 C1215

U11 R175
4 4

Q1
Q1

C1073
C1073

R465 R465
PS1

R342
R342

TP16
C257
TP16
C257

D402
D402

C14 C14

R334
R334
U10

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
R176

C58 C58

16
C831
16
C833
16
C835
16
C837
16
C831
16
C833
16
C835
16
C837

U145 U145
C213 C213
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
C136

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
K260 K262 K254 Y1 FL10
R274 R470 R274 R470
U401 U403 U405 U407 U401 U403 U405 U407
C134

K261
C59 8 C59 8
K256 K257 K264 K265

U433
U435
U437
U439
R467
U433
U435
U437
U439
R467
R174

C1630
C1505
C1689
C1507
C1659
C1509
C1669
C1511
C1630
C1505
C1689
C1507
C1659
C1509
C1669
C1511

R466
R466

L521
L521
FL11
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
Q1

24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32

R170

C1679
C1657
C1690
C1668
C1679
C1657
C1690
C1668

R373 C1 R373 C1
C1265 C1329 C1267 C1331 C1269 C1333 C1271 C1335 C1265 C1329 C1267 C1331 C1269 C1333 C1271 C1335 R172
C1201 C1203 C1205 C1207 C1201 C1203 C1205 C1207

R468
R469
R468
R469

K255
R171

R173 32

R1501 L1101 R1503 L1103 R1505 L1105 R1507 L1107 R1501 L1101 R1503 L1103 R1505 L1105 R1507 L1107
8

16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
K258

R370 R370
K263

R1629
R1631
R1633
R1635
R1629
R1631
R1633
R1635

C1433
C1435
C1437
C1439
C1433
C1435
C1437
C1439
9

K259

C62
R1509 L1109 R1511 L1111 R1513 L1113 R1515 L1115

C62
R1509 L1109 R1511 L1111 R1513 L1113 R1515 L1115 C135

U466
U468
U470
U472
U466
U468
U470
U472

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

L522
L522
C2166 C2156 C2166 C2156
U9

L1009 L1011 L1013 L1015 L1009 L1011 L1013 L1015

K248 K253
C54 R1557 L1157 R1559 L1159 R1561 L1161 R1563 L1163 C54 R1557 L1157 R1559 L1159 R1561 L1161 R1563 L1163
K249 K252
U8

K243 K244 K245 TP8

C1409 C1411 C1413 C1415 C1409 C1411 C1413 C1415

L1041
L1043
L1045
L1047
L1041
L1043
L1045
L1047

R1549 L1149

R1653
C1481
R1551 L1151

R1655
C1483
R1553 L1153

R1657
C1485
R1555 L1155

R1659
C1487
R1549 L1149

R1653
C1481
R1551 L1151

R1655
C1483
R1553 L1153
R1657
C1485

R1555 L1155
R1659
C1487

GND R10
C53 C53 K355

C1199
C1199
R9
C1289 C1353 C1291 C1355 C1293 C1357 C1295 C1359 C1289 C1353 C1291 C1355 C1293 C1357 C1295 C1359
16

C211
C211

C1225 C1227 C1229 C1231 C1225 C1227 C1229 C1231

C72
C72
25

C52 C52
24

K247

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
17

16
C839
16
C841
16
C843
16
C845
16
C839
16
C841
16
C843
16
C845

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
K266

U7
C18 C19 20 U409 20 U411 20 U413 20 U415 C18 C19 20 U409 20 U411 20 U413 20 U415

R303
R303

U441
U443
U445
U447
U441
U443
U445
U447
R28

C1646
C1513
C1649
C1515
C1651
C1517
C1685
C1519
C1646
C1513
C1649
C1515
C1651
C1517
C1685
C1519

D9

8
8
8
8
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
F2

24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
C133

L570
L570

C1678
C1673
C1643
C1693
C1678
C1673
C1643
C1693
U6

R305
R305

R300
R300

U91
U92
U91
U92
C1281 C1345 C1283 C1347 C1285 C1349 C1287 C1351 C1281 C1345 C1283 C1347 C1285 C1349 C1287 C1351
C132 R8
C1217 C1219 C1221 C1223 C1217 C1219 C1221 C1223
K251

R302
R302

4
4
4
4
K246 K250
R1533 L1133 R1535 L1135 R1537 L1137 R1539 L1139 R1533 L1133 R1535 L1135 R1537 L1137 R1539 L1139

16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
FL9

K349 Q10 R7

R1645
R1647
R1649
R1651
R1645
R1647
R1649
R1651

1 5

C2162
C1441
C1443
C1445
C2152
C1447
1 5

C2162
C1441
C1443
C1445
C2152
C1447

U82 R1541 L1141 R1543 L1143 R1545 L1145 R1547 L1147 U82 R1541 L1141 R1543 L1143 R1545 L1145 R1547 L1147

R295
R294
R293
R292
R295
R294
R293
R292

C236
C235
C236
C235

R298
R301
R304
R298
R301
R304
C131

U474
U476
U478
U480
U474
U476
U478
U480

D8
R169

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
T1
A1

GND C128 C130

R1589 L1189 L1017 R1591 L1191 L1019 R1593 L1193 L1021 R1595 L1195 L1023 R1589 L1189 L1017 R1591 L1191 L1019 R1593 L1193 L1021 R1595 L1195 L1023

R442
R442

C1132
C1132

R443
C167
R443
C167

R299
R296
R297
R299
R296
R297
CR2

L515
L516
L513
L514
L515
L516
L513
L514
C1417 C1419 C1421 C1423 C1417 C1419 C1421 C1423

L1049
L1051
L1053
L1055
L1049
L1051
L1053
L1055

R1581 L1181 R1583 L1183 R1585 L1185 R1587 L1187 R1581 L1181 R1583 L1183 R1585 L1185 R1587 L1187

R1669
C1489
R1671
C1491
R1673
C1493
R1675
C1495
R1669
C1489
R1671
C1491
R1673
C1493
R1675
C1495
C129

C1305 C1369 C1307 C1371 C1309 C1373 C1311 C1375 C1305 C1369 C1307 C1371 C1309 C1373 C1311 C1375
C24 R307 C21 R306 C1241 C1243 C1245 C1247 C24 R307 C21 R306 C1241 C1243 C1245 C1247 T1
TP7 K240 K242
C22 C22
K237 K238 K241
C75 C75
U5

K235 K236 K239

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

K234

R372
R372

16
C847
16
C849
16
C851
16
C853
16
C847
16
C849
16
C851
16
C853
U4

C23 C42 C20 5 5 5 5 C23 C42 C20 5 5 5 5

K356
20 U417 20 U419 20 U421 20 U423 20 U417 20 U419 20 U421 20 U423

U449
U451
U453
U455
U449
U451
U453
U455

C1647
C1521
C1664
C1523
C1642
C1525
C1692
C1527
C1647
C1521
C1664
C1523
C1642
C1525
C1692
C1527

R166
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
C126

24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32

U99 C28 U99 C28 R167

C1671
C1640
C1674
C1684
C1671
C1640
C1674
C1684
U3

C1297 C1361 C1299 C1363 C1301 C1365 C1303 C1367 C1297 C1361 C1299 C1363 C1301 C1365 C1303 C1367
K232 TP5

C214
C214
C1233 C1235 C1237 C1239 C1233 C1235 C1237 C1239

C34
C47
C46
C35
C31
C45
C34
C47
C46
C35
C31
C45
R165

R311 R311
C127

C73 R1565 L1165 R1567 L1167 R1569 L1169 R1571 L1171